Bob Vilahttps://www.bobvila.comen-USThu, 20 Feb 2025 04:15:52 -0500WordPress 6.7.2hourly1<![CDATA[Yes, Your Home Needs a Radon Test Kit — And These Are the Best]]>Safeguard and ensure the health of your family by testing for radon gas. Use our guide to find the best radon test kit on the market today.

The post Yes, Your Home Needs a Radon Test Kit — And These Are the Best appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-radon-test-kit/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=112492Wed, 19 Feb 2025 18:21:50 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Radon test kits detect the presence of radon gas, a byproduct of uranium decay in rock and soil. Radon can enter homes by seeping through cracks in the foundation, slowly accumulating until it reaches dangerous levels. Prolonged exposure to this harmful gas can cause health issues like headaches or even cancer. 

Radon is tasteless, odorless, and colorless, making it undetectable without specialized radon testing equipment. These home technology tools can measure radon levels over a few days or months or provide continuous monitoring. Since no level of radon exposure is considered safe, knowing which radon sensor you can rely on is essential. 

After tapping a home safety expert for insights and testing a few popular options, we chose the Airthings Corentium Home Radon Detector as the best radon test kit. It’s portable, has an easy-to-read screen, and takes multiple measurements to capture trends. Below, we detail what we like and don’t like about this product and the rest of our picks so you can choose one of the best radon test kits to keep your family safe.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Airthings Corentium Home Radon Detector
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: First Alert RD1 Radon Test Kit
    Jump to Review
  3. UPGRADE PICK: Airthings Wave Plus Smart Radon Detector
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST SMART: Airthings View Plus Smart Air Quality & Radon Monitor
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST SHORT-TERM: AccuStar Short-Term Charcoal Canister Radon Test Kit
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST LONG-TERM: Ecosense RadonEye Radon Sensor & Detector
    Jump to Review
The Best Radon Test Kit Option
Photo: amazon.com

Radon Test Kits Comparison Chart

Product NameTypeResultsPortability
Airthings Corentium Home Radon DetectorBattery-operated deviceInstant on device Portable
First Alert RD1 Radon Test Kit1-time test kitMust be mailed to lab; results emailed  3 to 5 days after lab receipt Portable
Airthings Wave Plus Smart Radon Detector Battery-operated smart deviceInstant in app and on device Portable; mounts to wall or ceiling 
Airthings View Plus Smart Air Quality & Radon MonitorBattery- or USB-powered smart deviceInstant in app and on device Portable; mounts to wall 
AccuStar Short-Term Charcoal Canister Radon Test Kit1-time test canisterMust be mailed to lab; results available next business dayPortable 
Ecosense RadonEye Radon Sensor & DetectorPlug-in deviceInstant in app and on device Portable but requires outlet 

Our Top Picks

After researching dozens of radon test kits and testing a few as part of our guide on the best air quality monitors, we recommend the following six options for their ease of use, accuracy, and value. 

Best Overall

Airthings Corentium Home Radon Detector

 Airthings Corentium Home Portable Radon Detector on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • First results shown on screen within 24 hours
  • Lightweight and portable
  • Displays both long- and short-term readings

What We Don’t Like

  • Some users’ units stopped working after a few years

Specs

  • Type Battery-operated device
  • Results Instant on device
  • Portability Portable

The Corentium Home radon detector kit by Airthings is one of the first continuous radon test kits to use batteries, allowing you to take it into any space that needs testing. The clear digital display provides both long- and short-term radon levels, revealing daily fluctuations as well as overall averages. Once you’ve tested your home for at least 30 days, Airthings also makes it easy to generate a free self-inspection report through its website. 

Though this portable radon detector does start delivering readings within 24 hours, the manufacturer recommends waiting at least 20 days before taking action if levels appear high. This ensures plenty of time for results to stabilize, so you know your readings are reliable. To test another area after your first test is complete, simply reset the unit and move it to a new location.  

Get the Airthings Corentium Home radon test kit at Amazon, Ace Hardware, Walmart, or Airthings.

Best Bang for the Buck

First Alert RD1 Radon Test Kit

 First Alert radon test kit on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Listed under the EPA’s Radon Gas Measurement Proficiency Program
  • Low price includes lab fees in most states
  • Results emailed 3 to 5 business days after receipt

What We Don’t Like

  • Can only be used once
  • User pays shipping costs

Specs

  • Type 1-time test kit
  • Results Must be mailed to lab; results emailed 3 to 5 days after lab receipt
  • Portability Portable

The First Alert RD1 home radon test kit is a simple and effective way to detect dangerous radon gas in your home. It essentially functions as a disposable radon detector that you allow to sit for a few days and then send away for results. To use, simply open the sealed activated charcoal packet, place it in the lowest livable area of your home, and leave it. After 2 to 4 days, seal it up and send it to the lab. Within 3 to 5 days of lab receipt, you’ll receive the results by email.

Unlike most mail-in radon test kits, this simple charcoal option includes the laboratory fee for most states (excluding New Jersey), though you will need to pay for shipping. Still, its price and reliability are difficult to beat for those looking for a one-time, short-term test.

Get the First Alert radon test kit at Amazon, Lowe’s, or First Alert.

Upgrade Pick

Airthings Wave Plus Smart Radon Detector

 Airthings Wave Plus Radon and Air Quality Monitor on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Provides continuous results via Bluetooth
  • Monitors radon, CO2, VOCs, humidity, temperature, and air pressure
  • Visual indicator shows current air quality

What We Don’t Like

  • Detailed results only available within Bluetooth range

Specs

  • Type Battery-operated smart device
  • Results Instant in app and on device
  • Portability Portable; mounts to wall or ceiling

While the Airthings Wave Plus radon and air quality monitor is more expensive than our top two picks, it also tests a lot more than just radon. Once set up, this unit provides continuous readings for radon gas buildup, carbon dioxide (CO2), volatile organic compounds (VOCs), humidity, temperature, and air pressure.

The Wave Plus radon gas monitor runs on batteries and is easy to mount on a wall or ceiling. Its on-unit color-coded display indicates whether air quality is good (green), fair (yellow), or bad (red). For more detailed information, pair the unit with the Airthings app via Bluetooth for real-time reading and tips on how to improve indoor air quality. You can also see current and past readings on Airthings’ web dashboard. 

What our tester says: “This Airthings monitor is quite an overachiever! As part of a larger test, we exposed it to a dish of oil-based stain for 2 hours. When we checked back in, the light was red (indicating hazardous air quality), and the app showed the volatile organic compound levels had spiked.”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the Airthings Wave Plus radon test kit at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Smart

Airthings View Plus Smart Air Quality & Radon Monitor

 Airthings 2960 View Plus Radon & Air Quality Monitor on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Wi-Fi and Bluetooth connectivity; compatible with IFTTT, Homey, Google Assistant, and Amazon Alexa
  • Detects a wide range of pollutants and irritants
  • Data available on unit, app, and Airthings website

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires 6 AA batteries

Specs

  • Type Battery- or USB-powered smart device
  • Results Instant in app and on device
  • Portability Portable; mounts to wall

This smart monitor from Airthings makes it easy to check levels of radon, PM2.5 (particulate matter), CO2, temperature, VOCs, air pressure, and humidity. It also provides pollen forecasts so those with allergies can stay informed about outdoor conditions. As a continuous radon monitor, this unit has its own display showing current levels, and users can also check the app or Airthings website for long-term readings. It also features a visual indicator with green, yellow, and red status lights for at-a-glance monitoring. 

The View Plus is compatible with IFTTT, Homey, Google Assistant, and Amazon Alexa and runs via batteries or the included USB-C cable. You can place it virtually anywhere indoors to test levels in multiple locations or mount it to the wall to ensure continually safe radon levels in a basement​.  

Get the Airthings View Plus radon test kit at Amazon or Airthings.

Best Short-Term

AccuStar Short-Term Charcoal Canister Radon Test Kit

 AccuStar radon test kit on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Same-day results available if received by noon
  • Easy to use; requires zero technological know-how
  • Durable canister design keeps results safe

What We Don’t Like

  • Doesn’t measure radon; only reports whether levels are under 4 pCi/L (picocuries per liter)

Specs

  • Type 1-time test canister
  • Results Must be mailed to lab; results available by next business day
  • Portability Portable

This short-term test kit by AccuStar uses activated charcoal to absorb radon and its byproducts over a 48- to 96-hour period. Its easy-to-use design simply requires you to leave the unit undisturbed for a few days, mail it in, and wait for the results, which can arrive same-day if the canister is received by noon. 

Though the cost of the AccuStar radon detection kit includes laboratory fees, you will need to pay to ship the unit in. The durable canister protects the test unit while in transit, ensuring your results remain accurate and safe from interference. This low-tech pick is perfect for those nervous about determining radon safe levels on their own and real estate agents testing radon in homes for clients.

Get the AccuStar radon test kit at Amazon, The Home Depot (2-pack), or AccuStar Labs.

Best Long-Term

Ecosense RadonEye Radon Sensor & Detector

 Ecosense RadonEye Home Radon Detector on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • First reading is 90 percent accurate and available in 10 minutes
  • Results shown in app and on device
  • Tracks short- and long-term readings and trends

What We Don’t Like

  • Some reports of Bluetooth connectivity issues

Specs

  • Type Plug-in device
  • Results Instant in app and on device
  • Portability Portable but requires outlet

The Ecosense RadonEye home radon detector takes 30 independent counts of pCi/L levels every hour, delivering the very first reading just 10 minutes after setup. To get started, simply plug in the electronic radon detector and leave it on a flat surface to allow it to begin collecting data. 

Short-term results from this radon gas detector are displayed on the unit’s OLED screen and updated every 10 minutes. Additional hourly, monthly, and yearly data is available via Bluetooth connectivity on the RadonEye app. This pick’s continuous monitoring system not only provides an average reading over time, it also sounds an alarm if radon levels exceed 4 pCi/L. 

Get the Ecosense radon test kit at Amazon, Walmart, or Ecosense.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Radon Test Kits

The Best Radon Test Kit
Photo: amazon.com

When gathering our list of recommendations, we primarily considered the most important aspects of radon home kits—accuracy and ease of use. We selected a variety of units that make it simple to test for radon, choosing a few one-time kits that need to be sent to a laboratory as well as several that offer instant access to results via the unit itself or an app.  

Most picks on our list are battery-operated units, though some can also be powered using a standard plug or a USB cable. We also included one low-tech option that does not require power at all and simply needs to sit and absorb radon for a few days before being mailed in for reading. Finally, since the prices of radon detectors can vary greatly, we were careful to include picks at a range of costs since everyone needs to be able to afford to test for cancer-causing radon gas

What to Consider When Choosing a Radon Test Kit

To select one of the best radon kits for your needs, it’s important to consider test type, accuracy, and ease of use and installation. 

Types of Radon Test Kits

A radon test kit will use one of several methods to test the air in your home for elevated radon levels. Regardless of which type of radon monitor you choose, these helpful devices are the only way to determine your family members’ exposure to this harmful gas other than a professional radon inspection

Short-Term Radon Test Kits

Radon kits for short-term use collect readings from your home over a 2- to 90-day period and must then be sent to a laboratory for the results to be read. The lab fees necessary for proper testing are likely included with your purchase, though shipping generally costs extra. 

Because short-term radon test kits are the fastest and least expensive test option, real estate agents often use them to check for safe radon levels before selling a home. However, since radon levels fluctuate, short-term test kits are not the most accurate testing method. For definitive results, long-term testing is necessary.

Long-Term Radon Test Kits

As their name indicates, long-term radon test kits are designed to test levels of radon gas over a longer period, such as weeks, months, or years. Like short-term tests, some are single-use devices that must be sent to a laboratory to be read, though others have screens or Bluetooth connectivity that allows you to monitor levels yourself. 

Since a long-term radon test kit collects a greater volume of data, periodic spikes that naturally occur are less likely to raise unnecessary alarms, which may happen with more limited readings. The downside of this type of detector is that it will typically be more expensive than a one-time use or short-term kit and may not be necessary if radon levels are consistently lower than 4 pCi/L.

Alpha-Track Radon Test Kits

The alpha-track radon test kit is a long-term test that measures levels of radon using polycarbonate plastic sheets placed in the lowest livable level of the home. If radon gas is present, it will emit alpha particles that create tracks on these sheets, with higher levels of gas producing greater numbers of tracks. Once the test kit has collected data for the suggested amount of time, it is sent in to be read. Generally speaking, alpha-track tests are more accurate than short-term test kits but don’t provide the ongoing measurements offered by long-term detectors.

Charcoal Radon Test Kits

Charcoal radon test kits are short-term options that work similarly to alpha-track units, though they use charcoal rather than polycarbonate plastic to measure levels. Generally speaking, they’re also cheaper and faster since they only monitor radon gas for between 2 and 90 days. For this reason, they are less accurate since they are susceptible to radon spikes and possible interference during shipping.

Digital Radon Test Kits

Digital radon test kits are also known as radon detectors, and they are the most expensive type of radon tester for home use. Most digital units can be mounted to the wall or ceiling or simply placed in the lowest level of the house. 

However, installation requirements typically extend well beyond mounting, as most of these kits use Bluetooth connectivity to deliver detailed readings to an app. Some digital kits also offer recent readings directly on the test unit, though their screens aren’t often large enough to display the long-term data that makes digital tests so valuable. Further adding to their worth, many digital kits also test home air quality levels of humidity, carbon dioxide, volatile organic compounds, and more. 

Accuracy

Accuracy is one of the most important factors to consider when choosing a radon test. Generally speaking, the longer a radon test kit collects data, the more accurate the results will be. This is because increased testing time allows you to determine average pCi/L levels without the influence of random positive or negative spikes.

Since short-term radon tests are susceptible to spikes in radon levels that can skew the average, they are considered the least accurate test option. Because they collect more data, long-term and continuous tests are the most accurate radon test kits available.

Ease of Use and Installation 

Radon test kits are designed to be easy to use, both for the consumer’s benefit and to ensure accurate results. Passive radon test kits, like charcoal and alpha-track test kits, are easy to set up but must be sent to a lab for results. 

On the other hand, active radon test kits, like digital radon detectors, are a bit more involved in setup but relatively easy to use after that. More advanced smart home-compatible detectors require additional technical know-how for ongoing use. It’s a good idea to consider your radon testing needs and comfort using technology before selecting a test kit.

FAQs

The following frequently asked questions section can help answer questions like “What is radon testing?” or “How much does a radon mitigation system cost?”. 

Q. How does a radon test work?

Radon tests work by measuring the amount of radon in the air. Charcoal devices absorb radon, enabling lab techs to count radioactive particles to estimate levels. Alpha-track kits must also be read in labs, but they use a plastic film that produces marks when radon gas strikes it. Digital detectors have sensors that detect and count alpha particles before displaying them on the device or in an app.

Q. How do you use a radon test kit?

Radon test kits are generally used by opening a sealed package and leaving the test kit exposed to the air for a certain amount of time. Some must be sent in to be read, while others provide measurements you can access yourself.

Q. Where should a radon test be placed?

Radon levels should be placed on the lowest occupied level of the home. Most manufacturers recommend setting them on a surface a few feet off the floor or mounting them to a wall so they won’t be accidentally disturbed or knocked over by kids or pets. 

Q. What do you do if you test positive for radon?

If your home tests positive for high levels of radon, contact a qualified radon mitigation contractor. They can provide an estimate for installing a radon mitigation system that will continually remove excess radon from your home.

Q. What buildings are most likely to be affected by radon contamination?

While buildings and homes on hillsides may be more likely to be affected by radon, any structure can be subject to radon contamination. Kevin Feak, Senior Fire Protection Engineer for the architecture and planning firm LaBella, says, “Radon is heavier than room air and will move to the lowest area. Areas below ground level, such as basements or crawl spaces, are at the highest risk.” 

Q. How often should I test for radon levels?

The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) guide to radon recommends testing for radon at least every 2 years. The EPA also suggests testing if you renovate your home or are considering selling it, as you will need to provide test results to the buyer.

Q. How can I minimize my chances of being affected by radon?

According to licensed Professional Engineer Kevin Feak, “The first step in determining your radon risk is to use the EPA’s Radon Zone Map. The second step is testing for radon with either a home test or calling a professional. Lastly, a mitigation system can be used to remove radon from your home or business.”

Q. How reliable are home radon test kits?

Different types of home radon test kits have different levels of reliability, with long-term tests being the most reliable and short-term tests being less reliable. Still, since short-term tests are typically less expensive, using them to perform more frequent tests over time can be an economical way to measure radon levels.

The post Yes, Your Home Needs a Radon Test Kit — And These Are the Best appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-19T18:21:50-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Double-Sided Tapes]]>If you need a strong adhesive for your project, try the best double-sided tape. This guide reviews the best tapes for repairs, crafts, and more.

The post The Best Double-Sided Tapes appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-double-sided-tape/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=135317Wed, 19 Feb 2025 11:06:56 -0500ReviewsDIYEasy DIY ProjectsToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Move over, duct tape, there’s another tape that has nearly as many uses. Double-sided tape can be used to adhere any two surfaces a user wants to stick together tightly—without the need for glue or nails—in crafting, household, industrial, or manufacturing applications.

With so many products to choose from, it can be hard to select the best double-sided tape for a project. We’ve done the legwork with this comprehensive review, aiming to help shoppers make the right purchase. Our favorite is the Tough & Clear from Gorilla, offering a versatile and strong bond suitable both indoors and outdoors.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Gorilla Tough & Clear Double-Sided Mounting Tape
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Phinus Clear Waterproof Double-Sided Mounting Tape
  3. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Hitlights Heavy-Duty Double-Sided Foam Mounting Tape
  4. BEST REMOVABLE: Scotch Removable Double-Sided Tape Dispensered Roll
  5. BEST FOR CARPET: XFasten Double-Sided Tape 
  6. BEST FOR PAINTED WALLS: Scotch-Mount Indoor Double-Sided Mounting Tape
  7. BEST FOR CRAFTS: AJ Sign World 164-Foot Premium Double-Sided Adhesive
The Best Double-Sided Tape Option
Photo: amazon.com

Product Comparison

LengthColorFeatures
Gorilla Tough & Clear Double-Sided Mounting Tape60 or 150 inches long by 1 inch wide; 48 inches long by 2 inches wideClearWeatherproof, 12- to 37.5-pound hold (depending on tape length)
Phinus Clear Waterproof Double-Sided Mounting Tape10 feet long by 0.75 inches wideClearNonresidue, weatherproof
Hitlights Heavy-Duty Double-Sided Foam Mounting Tape32 feet or 100 feet long by 0.39 inches wideBlackFoam core
Scotch Removable Double-Sided Tape Dispensered RollVarious, from 200 to 450 inches longClearRemovable, dispenser included
XFasten Double-Sided Tape Various, from 15 to 30 yards longWhiteUV-, heat-, and moisture-resistant
Scotch-Mount Indoor Double-Sided Mounting TapeVarious, from 55 to 350 inches longWhiteIndustrial-strength adhesive holds up to 15 pounds
AJ Sign World 164-Foot Premium Double-Sided Adhesive164 feet long by 0.5 or 1 inch wideClearUltrathin, tearable by hand

Our Top Picks

Double-sided tape can work in a variety of scenarios if the right option is used. The ones listed here were selected for their quality and price to help shoppers find the best one for their projects.

Best Overall

Gorilla Tough & Clear Double-Sided Mounting Tape

 The Best Double-Sided Tapes Option: Gorilla Tough & Clear Double-Sided Mounting Tape
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for use both indoors and outdoors
  • Easily bonds to a wide variety of materials
  • Ideal for use on glass without creating tape marks

What We Don’t Like

  • Removing the backing can be quite tricky

Products Specs

  • Length: 60 or 150 inches long by 1 inch wide; 48 inches long by 2 inches wide
  • Color: Clear
  • Features: Weatherproof, 12- to 37.5-pound hold (depending on tape length)

Gorilla’s double-sided tape is great for projects where traditional fasteners won’t work. The tape works on a variety of surfaces, including stone, concrete, glass, metal, bricks, tile, plastic, and wood. However, because it’s a permanent tape and features a strong adhesive, it’s not recommended for delicate surfaces such as painted drywall.

This mounting tape holds 1 pound per 4 inches of tape. It’s good for both indoor and outdoor applications and it won’t yellow over time. The tape is moisture- and heat-resistant up to 194 degrees Fahrenheit.

Gorilla tape offers a wide range of mounting, repairing, and bonding applications. For those who need a permanent tape that mounts in an instant with a long-lasting, weatherproof bond, Gorilla’s product is a solid choice.

Get the Gorilla double-sided tape at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Bang for the Buck

Phinus Clear Waterproof Double-Sided Mounting Tape

 The Best Double-Sided Tapes Option: Phinus Clear Waterproof Double-Sided Mounting Tape
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for a variety of surfaces
  • Waterproof, weatherproof, and multipurpose
  • Nonresidue adhesive formula

What We Don’t Like

  • Isn’t suitable for use on delicate surfaces

Products Specs

  • Length: 10 feet long by 0.75 inches wide
  • Color: Clear
  • Features: Nonresidue, weatherproof

A budget-friendly option, this double-sided tape by Phinus works best on smooth surfaces, such as glass, metal, plastic, ceramic tile, and marble. Because it has a strong acrylic adhesive base, it’s not suitable for delicate surfaces such as wallpaper, painted surfaces, or broken walls.

The tape is flexible and leaves no residue when removed from proper surfaces. It has a cold/heat resistance of -4 to 160 degrees Fahrenheit and is resistant to moisture and solvents, making it useful outdoors as well as inside the home.

Get the Phinus double-sided tape at Amazon (2-pack).

Best Heavy Duty

HitLights Double Sided Tape

 The Best Double-Sided Tapes Option: HitLights Double Sided Tape
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Provides flexibility on more difficult surfaces
  • Ideal for installing LED strips on multiple surfaces
  • Provides an excellent permanent bond

What We Don’t Like

  • Tape is difficult to remove once applied

Products Specs

  • Length: 32 feet or 100 feet long by 0.39 inches wide
  • Color: Black
  • Features: Foam core

This industrial-strength, high-bond acrylic foam tape is suitable for most applications, including outdoor use. It works on a variety of materials, including aluminum, steel, glass, and plastics.

HitLights is a heavy-duty double-sided tape that grabs a firm hold immediately. The bond created by this permanent tape actually strengthens over time, and the product truly shines in cases where waterproof adhesion is required.

Get the Hitlights double-sided tape at Amazon or Hitlights.

Best Removable

Scotch Removable Double-Sided Tape Dispensered Roll

 The Best Double-Sided Tape Option: Scotch Removable Double-Sided Tape Dispensered Roll
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Ideal for small projects like scrapbooking
  • Tape comes in the included dispenser
  • Gentle enough to not damage delicate surfaces

What We Don’t Like

  • Removability sacrifices adhesive strength

Products Specs

  • Length: Various, including 200 inches long by 0.75 inches wide, 250 inches long by 1 inch wide, 300 inches long by 3 inches wide, and 450 inches long by 1 inch wide
  • Color: Clear
  • Features: Removable, dispenser included

This removable tape features a unique adhesive that holds paper securely but is easy to reposition or remove if needed or desired. This ability makes Scotch’s tape a terrific option to use in small projects, such as photo albums and scrapbooks. (The tape is acid-free and archival, so it will not yellow or damage either photographs or papers.)

For light-duty mounting needs, this double-sided tape is a fine option, not least because it comes in an easy-to-use tape dispenser that allows the tape to glide off the roll smoothly.

Get the Scotch removable double-sided tape at Amazon, Target (3-pack), Staples, or Office Depot.

Best for Carpet

XFasten Double Sided Carpet Tape

 The Best Double-Sided Tapes Option: XFasten Double Sided Carpet Tape
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Can easily stick to most surfaces
  • Sticky enough to hold most rugs in place
  • Resistance to heat, moisture, and UV light

What We Don’t Like

  • Unless installed carefully, rugs may still curl up in the corners

Products Specs

  • Length: Various, including 15 yards long by 3 inches wide, 20 yards long by 2 inches wide, 20 yards long by 4 inches wide, and 30 yards long by 2 inches wide
  • Color: White
  • Features: UV-, heat-, and moisture-resistant

XFasten’s durable carpet tape is a top solution for keeping area rugs and runners firmly in place. If the rug may need to be moved later, no worries—the tape can be removed easily by hand without leaving a sticky residue behind.

Surfaces must be dry and free of debris before application, but the tape is safe for use on hardwood, vinyl, and tile, as well as on carpeting of all types.

Get the XFasten double-sided tape at Amazon or XFasten.

Best for Painted Walls

Scotch-Mount Indoor Double-Sided Mounting Tape

 The Best Double-Sided Tape Option: Scotch-Mount Indoor Double-Sided Mounting Tape
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for most common uses around the home
  • Comfortably tackles most DIY projects
  • Thick and pliable tape

What We Don’t Like

  • Mounting heavier objects may start to fail over time
  • Removing the tape may inadvertently peel some paint off the wall

Products Specs

  • Length: Various, including 55 inches long by 1 inch wide, 125 inches long by 1 inch wide, and 350 inches long by 0.75 inches wide
  • Color: White
  • Features: Industrial-strength adhesive holds up to 15 pounds

Not all double-sided tapes like to adhere to painted surfaces, but Scotch’s foam mounting tape delivers a strong, permanent bond in 30 seconds flat and is able to hold 1 pound per 5.5 inches of tape up to a maximum of 15 pounds when using 80 inches of tape.

This product is ideal for mounting pictures and decorations, not least because it can be used on most types of walls, including ceramic tile and wood surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. However, this tape is not recommended for use on wallpaper or delicate surfaces. For the best results, apply when the temperature is between 50 and 100 degrees Fahrenheit.

Get the Scotch-Mount double-sided tape at Amazon (125 inches), Ace Hardware (350 inches), The Home Depot (55 inches), or Lowe’s (350 inches). 

Best for Crafts

AJ Sign World 164-Foot Premium Double-Sided Adhesive

 The Best Double-Sided Tape Option: AJ Sign World 164-Foot Premium Double-Sided Adhesive
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Relatively affordable price point
  • Tape is very thin and easy to tear
  • Backing is easy to remove

What We Don’t Like

  • Adhesive is quite strong and doesn’t remove easily

Products Specs

  • Length: 164 feet long by 0.5 or 1 inch wide
  • Color: Clear
  • Features: Ultrathin, tearable by hand

AJ Sign World’s acid-free tissue tape excels in all types of arts and crafts applications. It’s easy to tear by hand—no scissors required—and it’s transparent, which makes the tape more versatile. This 1-inch wide tape is only suited for use on smooth surfaces. Note also that this is a permanent tape. Once it’s on, it’s on for good.

Those who are looking for a thinner version of this AJ Sign World tape may want to consider the 0.5-inch-wide version.

Get the AJ Sign World double-sided tape at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Double-Sided Tapes

To build our top picks list, we researched all the top double-sided tape brands available across several categories. Our recommendations cover a range of specific uses for the best double-sided tapes, each offering unique qualities to suit a household task or project.

Our top picks are available in a variety of colors and lengths. We made sure to include a varied selection of adhesive strengths, from options that can be easily removed and repositioned to others capable of holding up to 15 pounds of weight. Our list also includes a range of both thick and thin tapes, which are better suited to different tasks.

What to Look for When Choosing Double-Sided Tape 

Double-sided tape is a versatile, economical alternative to glue. It has pressure-sensitive adhesive exposed on both sides of the tape which allows two items to be bonded together. The adhesive lies on top of a carrier material, which can range from film as thin as a fraction of a millimeter up to a thick foam several millimeters thick.

Unlike single-side tape, double-sided tape creates an invisible bond between two objects. Moreover, there’s little time required for the bond to form—simply peel and stick. The tape is often used to hang signs or temporary displays, attach foam to wall panels or flooring underlayment to floors, secure and hold carpets in place for major events or trade shows, and much more. The type of double-sided tape required depends on the application.

When shopping for double-sided tape, consider the tape type, adhesive level, thickness, width, application setting, and other factors. Below are some common characteristics to take into account when picking the right double-sided tape for a particular project.

Type

There are several types of double-sided tape with various carrier materials, each serving a specific purpose. Double-sided tape types fall into one of the below categories:

  • Tissue tape is the most common type used for light bonding tasks. It’s mostly used for stationery, art, crafting projects, office, and general applications. Double-sided tissue tape is easy to tear, and is thin enough that it can adhere to irregular surfaces. It’s also inexpensive and a good alternative to glue.
  • Acrylic tape is primarily used in industrial environments. It’s stronger than tissue tape and is weather-resistant, making it ideal for both indoor and outdoor use. Acrylic double-sided tape should only be used when permanent bonding is needed.
  • Polyethylene tape, also known as foam double-sided tape, provides thick cushioning and insulation. Double-sided polyethylene tape is well-suited for uneven surfaces.
  • Floor tape is used on floor surfaces, like carpet, to hold items like area rugs or runners in place. They have medium adhesion, which allows for removal without residue.
  • Double-sided tape has either acrylic or rubber adhesives. Acrylic adhesives are stronger but more expensive and rubber adhesives are generally cheaper but less suited for long-term applications. Acrylic adhesive is also more heat- and light-resistant than rubber.

Thickness and Width 

Double-sided tape has either thick or thin bonding systems. Tapes with thick bonding systems adhere well to unusual, non-uniform, or highly patterned and textured surfaces. This type of tape usually has a foam carrier layer. Thin bonding systems are significantly thinner. Sometimes the carrier layer is so thin that they are pretty much an adhesive on top of a silicone liner. These tapes are best suited for light adhesion applications.

Width varies quite a bit with double-sided tape. Rolls are available in widths less than 1/4-inch to several inches wide. Each type of tape will have several width options to suit specific projects.

Bonding Surfaces 

The right double-sided tape for a project depends on the surface of the two objects that the user wants to stick together. Surface energy is the degree of attraction or repulsion force a material exerts on another material. Double-sided tape works best on surfaces with a high surface energy, like glass, glazed tile, and bare metals. The surface energy of plastic can vary quite a bit, but in general, it’s best to use a stronger tape. Then there’s silicone, which has such low surface energy that conventional adhesives won’t stick to it. Silicone needs a very tacky adhesive, or one specially formulated to adhere to it.

For flat and smooth surfaces like glass, aluminum, and PVC, thinner tape works well. For rougher surfaces like wood, cement, brick, and stucco, thicker tapes work best. Painted or coated surfaces need thicker, stronger tape as well.

Environment

The environment plays an important role in the adhesion of double-sided tape. Is the tape for indoor or outdoor use? Some tapes are not designed to hold up in outdoor environments.

For outdoor tapes, the weather impacts adhesion quality. The cooler the temperatures, the weaker the resulting bond will be. But high heat isn’t good for adhesion either—it can cause the adhesive to melt and loosen the bond.

Dust, grease, or moisture can also compromise the bond between two surfaces. Cleaning the surface with rubbing alcohol and making sure it’s completely dry before application will guarantee a stronger bond.

Object Weight

Double-sided tapes are rated by the maximum load they can hold. In general, thicker tapes hold more weight. Additionally, tapes with acrylic-based glue will hold more weight. However, the strength of the bond depends on the surface and weight of the object.

The load capacity is determined by the tape’s adhesive viscosity. Adhesive viscosity is similar to liquid viscosity— if it flows easily, it has low viscosity; if it does not, it has high viscosity. However, the viscosity rating for double-sided tape basically determines how well it binds to uneven surfaces. For rough surfaces, a viscous tape is preferable because it will spread into all the nooks and crannies of the uneven surface. Smooth surfaces do not need tape that is as viscous.

In some tapes, viscosity increases as the tape cures on the surface, strengthening the bond.

Pick a tape that best matches the surface energy of the items and consider the maximum load rate.

Longevity

Double-sided tape is either removable or permanent. The removable variety is meant for temporary use and is easily removed. Permanent tapes are used mostly in industrial manufacturing, but strong tapes are also available for home use. These tapes are typically used in lieu of glue or nails to permanently hold two objects together.

The longevity of the bond depends on how strong the adhesive is, as well as the environment. In climate-controlled environments, most double-sided tapes will hold a bond until the user removes it. In outdoor environments, the bond is subjected to heat, cold, and moisture, which will eventually cause the bond to deteriorate.

Removal

There may come a time when it’s necessary to remove double-sided tape. Thankfully, for most of them, a little heat will cause the adhesive to melt and break the bond. A blow dryer or a heat gun can be used to warm the surface and slightly melt the adhesive. Sometimes the tape will release from one side but hold fast to the other. In that case, it may be necessary to apply more heat to break the bond.

If heat does not remove the adhesive, try commercial residue cleaners. These products work by dissolving the sticky adhesive on the tape, making it easier to remove. Pour some of it on the tape and let it soak in for a few minutes, then scrape it off.

FAQs

Now that you have read through the characteristics of double-sided tape, you may still have a few questions. Read on to see some of the commonly asked questions about double-sided tape.

Q. How do you prepare a surface for tape application?

The surface must be free from dust, dirt, and oil, and be completely dry before application. Use rubbing alcohol to wash away any residue and dry with a tack cloth before applying the tape.

Q. What is the ideal temperature for applying double-sided tape?

The ideal temperature for both the surface and the tape is 65 degrees Fahrenheit, or 18 degrees Celsius.

Q. What is the strongest double-sided tape?

VHB tape, such as the Hitlights double-sided tape, is the strongest double-sided tape available for consumers.

Q. Can double-sided tape be removed?

Yes. Typically applying heat to the surface will cause the adhesive to melt and release the bond.

The post The Best Double-Sided Tapes appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-19T11:06:56-05:00
<![CDATA[The 7 Wood Chippers That Cut Best in Our Tests]]>Tackle yard work with the best wood chipper for your mulching needs and budget. We tested and reviewed top models and found seven that made the cut.

The post The 7 Wood Chippers That Cut Best in Our Tests appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-wood-chipper/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-wood-chipper/Tue, 18 Feb 2025 10:09:36 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More › https://c.aps.amazon-adsystem.com/apstag.js window.apstag = window.apstag || { queue: [], init: function() { apstag.queue.push(['i', arguments, (new Date).getTime()]) }, fetchBids: function() { apstag.queue.push(['f', arguments, (new Date).getTime()]) }, setDisplayBids: function() {}, targetingKeys: function() { return []; } } window.apstag.init({ pubID: "49cdee1c-072d-4765-8313-7c45826cbedc", // APS provided value adServer: 'googletag', videoServer: 'DFP', signals: { ortb2: { site: { page: "https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-wood-chipper/", publisher: { id: "49cdee1c-072d-4765-8313-7c45826cbedc" // APS Provided - publisher UUID } } } } }); apstag.queue.push(function () { window.apstag.nativeContent().enable(); });

A wood chipper cuts twigs, limbs, branches, and other solid yard material into small pieces. These chips may provide mulch for a garden, kindling for a fire pit, or even the raw material for pressed wood to make furniture or complete other carpentry projects.

The best wood chipper for home usemust accommodate the twigs and branches you feed into it and suit your power requirements. While thebest electric wood chipperis quieter and runs on a home power supply, gas and power take-off (PTO) models are much more powerful, cutting through more material at a faster pace.

We interviewed a landscaping expert to get his insight on what specifically to look for. Then we shopped around to identify electric and gas-powered wood chippers that our readers could count on for their outdoor cleanup projects. Then we spent more than 8 hours assembling and testing the following picks in a huge brush pile in order to compare wood chippers.

Through this testing, we selected the Earthquake K33 Chipper Shredder as our best overall wood chipper for its ability to shred and chip branches of 3 inches in diameter, 301 cubic centimeter (cc) 4-cycle gas engine, low shredder hopper, and dock-and-lock bagging system.

Continue reading for insight on our shopping considerations and check out ourwood chipper reviews to see how each of these models performed in our tests—and why one of them may be the best wood chipper for your project.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Earthquake K33 Chipper Shredder
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Sun Joe CJ601E Electric Wood Chipper
  3. UPGRADE PICK: DK2 OPC503 3-Inch Disk Chipper Shredder
  4. BEST FOR COMPOSTING: Earthwise Electric 15-Amp Corded Chipper Shredder
  5. BEST WITH LEAF VACUUM: Troy-Bilt CSV060B Chipper Shredder Vacuum
  6. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Champion Power Equipment 3-Inch Chipper Shredder
  7. ALSO CONSIDER: Predator 6.5 HP 212cc Chipper Shredder
A person feeding a tree branch into the best wood chipper while standing in a yard next to a pile of mulched wood.
Photo: Debbie Wolfe for Bob Vila

Product Comparison

EngineBranch CapacityWeight
Earthquake K33 Chipper Shredder301cc gas engine3 inches140 pounds
Sun Joe CJ601E Electric Wood Chipper14 amp (A) corded electric1.5 inches25.4 pounds
DK2 OPC503 3-Inch Disk Chipper Shredder7 horsepower (hp) 208cc Kohler Command Pro gas engine3 inches187 pounds
Earthwise Electric 15-Amp Corded Chipper Shredder15A corded electric motor1.75 inches30 pounds
Troy-Bilt CSV060B Chipper Shredder Vacuum163cc gasoline engine1.5 inches125 pounds
Champion Power Equipment 3-Inch Chipper Shredder224cc Champion gasoline engine3 inches135.6 pounds
Predator 6.5 HP 212cc Chipper Shredder212cc gas engine3 inches120 pounds

Our Top Picks

We tested some of the top-rated wood chippersin our test facility brush pile. Read on to learn how each of these machines performed in our tests and why we consider them to be among the best wood chippers for home use.

Best Overall

Earthquake K33 Chipper Shredder

 The Earthquake K33 Chipper Shredder on a white backgound.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Starts easily and handles tough material without stalling
  • Chips branches up to 3 inches in diameter
  • Easy loading of leaves and small debris
  • Includes a dock-and-lock bagging system
  • Large 11-inch airless wheels

What We Don’t Like

  • Pricey compared to other options
  • The included bottle of oil isn’t enough

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 301cc gas engine
  • Branch capacity: 3 inches
  • Weight: 140 pounds

The best all-around wood chipper we tested was durably built, easy to operate, and tackled the toughest branches without bogging down. It also featured a compact design that made it easy to transport and store. A 301cc gas engine and dual-knife chipper disc allow the Earthquake K33 chipper shredder to tackle branches up to 3 inches in diameter. Four hammer assemblies (two J-hammers and two tri-hammers) on the shredder make quick work of leaves, pine cones, smaller sticks, and other yard waste.

The big, powerful engine is the key to this chipper’s success. It started on the first pull and produced more than 13 foot-pounds of torque, while the other gas models in the test group averaged just over 11 foot-pounds. With that kind of power, the Earthquake K33 did an outstanding job chipping the thickest branches that bogged down or stalled out the other chippers.

When it came to shredding, we liked that the hopper opening was just 35 inches high, whereas some of the others were over 40 inches high. The lower height made it easier to load, especially when we were dumping large quantities of debris from a container. To offset the low height and still allow for leverage to make transport easy, the handlebar attaches at an angle so that it is higher than the rim of the hopper.

The debris bag worked great, too. Rather than relying on a drawstring as most models did, this one uses a locking bracket with its own handle. A support rod holds the bag open so that it fills all the way, with no need to reposition or shake down the material. When it’s full, the handle rotates off the mounting bracket for transport, and a heavy-duty zipper on the opposite end facilitates fast disposal.

We felt that the performance and build quality warranted the premium price for this wood chipper. Although it’s not the cheapest model available, the Earthquake K33 would make a smart pick for heavier use on larger properties.

Get the Earthquake wood chipper at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Mowers at Jacks.

Best Bang for the Buck

Sun Joe CJ601E Electric Wood Chipper

 The Sun Joe CJ601E Electric Wood Chipper on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Shreds branches up to 1.5 inches thick
  • Strong 14A electric motor
  • Upright configuration saves space in storage

What We Don’t Like

  • Not made for shredding leaves or soft, pliable stems
  • Operates more slowly than other electric chippers

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 14 amp (A) corded electric
  • Branch capacity: 1.5 inches
  • Weight: 25.4 pounds

For those who want to save money when cleaning up a small yard, Sun Joe’s 14A electric wood chipper could be considered thebest budget wood chipperaround. This affordable small wood chipper uses an electric motor that runs at speeds up to 4,300 revolutions per minute (rpm). As a light-duty chipper, it won’t clear fallen trees or do heavy landscaping work, but it cuts sticks and limbs up to 1.5 inches thick and produces usable mulch for the garden or yard. When the job is done, its compact, upright design won’t take up a lot of room.

This electric chipper has the lowest average price of all the models we tested, making it a smart choice for budget shoppers with limited storage space. Setup and start-up took about 15 minutes, and all tools were included in the box. We also noticed right away that this chipper was even lighter than the other electric models, weighing in at just over 25 pounds. The stated reduction ratio is 16:1 (to reduce a volume equal to 16 bags of debris down to one).

After a half hour of grinding branches, we noted that this Sun Joe model operates somewhat slower than other electric chippers and produces larger particles. In 30 minutes of chipping a mix of green and woody branches, it produced approximately 15 gallons (three 5-gallon buckets full) of chips. The motor strained a few times but never jammed, so we didn’t get to try out the jam-clearing function in a real-world scenario. The compact, upright build; strong performance; and maintenance-free design make this an easy choice for everyday use.

Get the Sun Joe wood chipper at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Upgrade Pick

DK2 OPC503 3-Inch Disk Chipper Shredder

 The DK2 OPC503 3-Inch Disk Chipper Shredder on a white background.
Photo: lowes.com

What We Like

  • Professional-grade Kohler gasoline engine for durability
  • Large hopper capacity and lower height for easier loading
  • Air-filled off-road tires and removable ATV towing hitch
  • Drop stand and locking wheels

What We Don’t Like

  • Horizontal configuration takes up more storage space
  • Top discharge configuration can become clogged with fine debris

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 7 horsepower (hp) 208cc Kohler Command Pro gas engine
  • Branch capacity: 3 inches
  • Weight: 187 pounds

The towable DK2 chipper shredder features a 7 hp 208cc Kohler Command Pro engine and dual high-strength steel-carbide cutting blades for reliable performance in tough conditions. Pneumatic off-road tires, a removable ATV towing hitch, and a drop stand make it easy to access worksites on difficult terrain. The wheels lock in place for added safety while chipping. An extra-large hopper and branch auto-feed chute placed at a comfortable height make it easier to load composting materials, yard waste, brush, and branches up to 3 inches in diameter.

After about a half hour of easy assembly, we fueled up the DK2 chipper shredder and moved it in place for testing. The large air-filled tires and hand-truck configuration made it the easiest gas-powered model to move manually; the added convenience of the removable tow bar was icing on the cake. Locking the wheels in place for operation required removal of the wheel pins from the end of the axle, sliding the wheels outward on the axle, and reinstalling the pins through the wheels and axle. In practice, this was only slightly awkward and less complicated than it may sound. The machine started on the first pull and ran smoothly throughout the test.

We operated the chipper for a half hour, feeding it a combination of green and dried hardwood branches, sunflower stalks, cornstalks, brush, and dried leaves. We really liked the wide mouth and comfortable height of the chute at just 36 inches high. It made it super easy to load leaves and other fine-textured materials. Even the largest, driest branches presented no problem. However, we did note that some of the fine material fed through the hopper accumulated at the base of the discharge chute. It did not clog the flow, but we recommend occasionally checking for excessive buildup during the course of a workday. Overall, this was the most pleasurable chipper shredder we tested. It was very easy to maneuver, powerful, and relatively quiet compared to competitors.

Get the DK2 wood chipper at Tractor Supply Co. or The Home Depot

Best for Composting

Earthwise Electric 15-Amp Corded Chipper Shredder

 The Earthwise Electric 15-Amp Corded Chipper Shredder on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Powerful exhaust-free operation
  • Includes a 1.2-bushel collection bin
  • Processes large branches
  • Lightweight yet durable construction

What We Don’t Like

  • Limited working range without extension cord
  • Shallow plastic hopper is somewhat flimsy

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 15A corded electric motor
  • Branch capacity: 1.75 inches
  • Weight: 30 pounds

When processing organic waste for composting, a clean, quiet electric chipper makes sense. The Earthwise 15A electric chipper grinds sticks and branches up to 1.75 inches in diameter and other yard and garden waste into smaller, more uniform particles for fast, efficient composting. It requires no gas or oil and virtually no maintenance. The included 1.2-bushel plastic collection bin makes it easy to capture chips, and the slim design with rear wheels makes for easy transport.

The Earthwise electric chipper was the easiest to assemble of all the models we tested, taking only about 10 minutes. However, we didn’t love the lightweight plastic snap-in-place hopper since the tabs lined up with difficulty and the assembled hopper was too easy to knock off while working. On the other hand, we really liked the plastic collection bin that simply slides into place and backs out like a drawer.

Feeding a wide range of such materials as plant stalks and woody branches was a breeze, and the included tamper tool helped us safely feed smaller items. The motor operated quietly, unfazed by even the largest, driest woody material, and the finished chips were quite uniform in appearance. We filled the collection bin within the half-hour testing time frame. The strong electric motor, compact build, and generously sized collection bin make this an easy choice for composting enthusiasts.

Get the Earthwise wood chipper at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Walmart.

Best with Leaf Vacuum

Troy-Bilt CSV060B Chipper Shredder Vacuum

 The Troy-Bilt CSV060B Chipper Shredder Vacuum on a white background.
Photo: homedepot.com

What We Like

  • Excellent versatility; chips, vacuums, shreds, and bags
  • Gas engine reduces user fatigue
  • 24-inch vacuum width
  • Onboard vacuum hose reaches into tight spots
  • Accepts branches up to 1.5 inches in diameter

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires more storage space than other chipper shredders
  • Does not work well in natural areas or tall grass

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 163cc gasoline engine
  • Branch capacity: 1.5 inches
  • Weight: 125 pounds

Anyone looking to win “Tidiest Yard in the Neighborhood” will want to look into Troy-Bilt’s chipper-shredder-vacuum combo. With its 24-inch vacuum opening, leaf removal is as simple as walking across the lawn. Need to collect a few leaves blown beneath the shrubs or a pile near the front-door vortex? Just detach the 8-foot-long 7-inch-diameter vacuum hose and it will reach them. If a few sticks fell from the shade tree, simply insert them into the 1.5-inch chipper feed chute.

This machine operates somewhat like a push lawn mower. The deck height is adjustable for optimal leaf pickup. It rolls smoothly on 11-inch rear wheels and 8-inch front wheels. The cast-aluminum impeller is powered by an easy-starting California Air Resources Board (CARB)–compliant 163cc engine. It turns eight bags worth of yard waste into a single bag of chips and collects them in the onboard 2-bushel felt bagger.

This Troy-Bilt model arrived mostly assembled, with the exception of the handle, bagger, and hose. Installing those took about 15 minutes. Then we added oil and gas, adjusted the deck height, and started testing.

We found that the Troy-Bilt exhibited good suction, easily picking up dry or damp leaves, small pine cones, and twigs from the lawn, and the hose feature sucked up matted debris from beneath shrubs. The 1.5-inch chipper feature operated smoothly and efficiently for the most part. We tested it with both green wood and dried hardwood branches, though strongly curved and crooked branches did need to be broken into short pieces or tossed aside in a few cases.

The weight of the engine and deck countered the weight of the debris bagger quite well until the bag was mostly full. Emptying the bagger onto the ground was easy enough, but transferring the chips to a disposal bag was awkward. This machine could really help those who live where summer storms regularly leave debris in the yard or where autumn leaves fall over an extended period of time. It could also boost productivity during spring cleanup.

Get the Troy-Bilt wood chipper at The Home Depot, The BuildClub, or Troy-Bilt.

Best Heavy-Duty

Champion Power Equipment 3-Inch Chipper Shredder

 The Champion Power Equipment 3-Inch Chipper Shredder on a white background.
Photo: homedepot.com

What We Like

  • Powerful 224cc engine and dual-blade chipper
  • Extra-large shredder hopper handles debris up to 0.5 inches thick
  • Branch feed chute accepts straight limbs up to 3 inches thick
  • Hand-truck style makes it easy to maneuver over uneven terrain

What We Don’t Like

  • Tall stance makes loading more difficult
  • Handle built into the hopper rim with no padding or finger molding

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 224cc Champion gasoline engine
  • Branch capacity: 3 inches
  • Weight: 135.6 pounds

The ruggedly built Champion Power Equipment 3-inch portable chipper shredder proved to be the best heavy-duty wood chipper in our tests. A clean CARB-compliant 224cc Champion gas engine drives the chipper’s steel blades. This chipper grinds the equivalent of 20 bags of yard debris to fit into one bag. The large hopper is suitable for shredding fine debris like twigs, leaves, and other material smaller than 0.5 inches thick, while the branch feed chute accepts limbs up to 3 inches in diameter. The discharge chute features an adjustable angle top and comes with an easy-to-use 2-bushel drawstring collection bag for fast, easy cleanup.

As with the other models we tested, we set aside 30 minutes and a large pile of branches, brush, and leaves to test the Champion chipper shredder. After 45 minutes of easy assembly, we added gas and oil before going to work. The tall height of the hopper rim, which is where the transport handle is located, was a help and a hindrance. Because the wheels are on the same side of the machine as the handle, it easily maneuvers like a hand truck over all kinds of terrain, and the tall height provides welcome leverage. Later on, however, we realized that the 50-inch-tall hopper was less comfortable for loading debris compared to models with lower hoppers.

The engine started on the first pull of the recoil cord. We were impressed by the smooth operation and grinding power provided by the big gas engine. This was the largest gas engine in our test lineup. The automatic feed branch chute fed really fast, even with dry, large-diameter hardwood. The hopper, as noted earlier, was a bit too high for comfort but was wide enough to hold lots of material. The machine never clogged or showed signs of struggle with the workload. We also noted the machine’s small footprint, which makes it ideal for saving space in storage. This is a great choice for making fast work of occasional tough cleanup jobs.

Get the Champion Power Equipment wood chipper at The Home Depot.

Also Consider

Predator 6.5 HP 212cc Chipper Shredder

 The Predator 6.5 HP 212cc Chipper Shredder on a white background.
Photo: harborfreight.com

What We Like

  • Affordable and effective for medium-duty cleanup
  • Easy to load with leaves and small debris
  • 2-bladed chipper flywheel makes quick work of larger branches
  • Includes discharge collection bag

What We Don’t Like

  • Less powerful engine
  • Can get bogged down with tougher branches

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 212cc gas engine
  • Branch capacity: 3 inches
  • Weight: 120 pounds

No need to overspend on a seldom-used specialty tool. The Predator chipper shredder is value priced and delivers more chipping capability than electric models, along with the freedom of movement that only comes with gas-powered equipment. In terms of its overall build, it mimics our top pick but comes with a smaller 212cc engine and a drawstring debris bagger.

We assembled the Predator wood chipper in about 45 minutes, and other than having difficulty trying to read the tiny lettering used in the instructions, assembly went smoothly. This chipper does not come with engine oil, so be prepared with 2 quarts of 10W-30. Immediately after fueling up the first time, it started on the third pull, but going forward the engine started on either the first or second pull every time.

This chipper comes equipped with air-filled tires. For us, that was a good thing, as they rolled easily across all types of terrain, including wet ground. However, users will need to be cautious to prevent punctures. Another unique feature was the wheel brakes that could be locked for safety while chipping.

This chipper was a bit underpowered for branches thicker than about 2 inches. When we fed it larger material, the engine consistently bogged down, and in three cases stalled out. It was not a great performer compared to the other gas models we tested, but it was several hundred dollars cheaper on average. As a step up from electric chippers, the Predator wood chipper was a lot faster, more powerful, and generally more convenient for working anywhere on the property. Budget-conscious shoppers in need of a light- to medium-duty wood chipper will find good value here.

Get the Predator wood chipper at Harbor Freight.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Wood Chippers

Our testing observations and comparison started with unpacking and assembling the chippers. All of the electric wood chippers came together in about 15 minutes as they were all comparatively lightweight and compact. While basic, disposable tools were included in the packaging; however, using personally owned tools ought to make the job go faster and easier. All of the electric chippers require a heavy-duty 12-gauge extension cord to avoid tripping the circuit breaker during operation.

Assembling each of the gas-powered chippers took 45 minutes to 1 hour and required installation of the hopper, branch chute, safety guards, discharge chute, wheels, and standing brace. These machines all weigh more than 100 pounds, so it’s a good idea to have a helper. Again, the included tools will get the job done, but using ones from a personal tool kit makes the process more comfortable. The packages included engine oil and gasoline that must be added before operation.

After assembly, we transported each of the chippers across the lawn to the worksite. In so doing, we noted that the small plastic wheels on the electric chippers provided the most stability on solid, flat ground. The larger hard wheels on the gas machines worked fine on average lawns but caused some struggles on sloped, uneven surfaces. The towable DK2 chipper, which includes a handle for moving by hand, was the easiest to move on rough ground.

In general, chippers with wheels on the same side of the machine as the handle—what we called a “hand-truck” configuration—were easier to maneuver than those with wheels and handles on opposite sides of the machine, like a wheelbarrow. The wheelbarrow configuration requires the user to lift the handle and bear more of the machine’s weight versus the hand-truck configuration, which transfers more weight to the wheels.

Finally, we set up and operated each chipper for 30 minutes. During operational testing, we fed each model a combination of large and small branches, including green wood and dried wood, and dry leaves (when applicable) to observe the full range of functionality. In addition to the machine’s ability to chip, we observed chip consistency, working stability, operator comfort, and noise level from a purely subjective standpoint to help determine our preferences and recommendations.

We also spoke to Kaustubh Deo, president of Blooma Tree Experts, a tree care company based in Seattle, Washington, featuring International Society of Arboriculture (ISA)–certified arborists with over 17 years of experience. He says that once you’ve purchased a chipper, “Don’t forget to follow the maintenance instructions in the guides. Make sure you keep the chipper knives sharp and rotate them.” He also adds this expert tip: “Rental shops that rent out chippers should be able to sharpen chipper knives for you.”

What to Consider When Choosing a Wood Chipper

Before buyers choose a wood chipper for their yard cleanup needs, they’ll want to take a few minutes to educate themselves on the most important shopping considerations for these tools.

Types of Wood Chippers

Wood chippers fall into three main types based on their power source: electric, gas, and PTO.

Electric

Electric wood chippers often look a lot like golf bags. These compact machines run quieter than either gas or PTO chippers, but they often lack the power and capacity needed to deal with material larger than 2 inches in diameter.

For small branches and yard trimmings, an electric wood chipper does the trick. They’re reasonably priced, lightweight, and easy to use. Plug them into a standard outlet, and they’re good to go.

Gas 

The most common residential models, gas wood chippers are larger, louder, and produce gasoline exhaust. Gas-powered wood chippers generally employ 4-cycle engines from 150cc to 250cc and produce 7 to 10 hp. To find the models with the lowest exhaust emissions, look for the CARB-compliant label. CARB adheres to the highest emission standards in the United States.

More powerful than electric options, gas chippers need not sit near an outlet and won’t tether the user to an extension cord. Situated in the middle of the price range for chippers, gas-powered options cost more than electric ones but are not quite as much as PTOs. Gas chippers can typically handle material of more than 3 inches in diameter.

PTO

PTO refers to the drive shaft on the wood chipper, through which it attaches to a splined output shaft on a tractor, mower, or truck. Through this connection, the PTO wood chipper draws energy from the engine of the vehicle. This method of energy supply makes PTO wood chippers more effective than their gas or electric counterparts. They can cut through more material at a faster rate.

The best PTO wood chippersmake an excellent choice for anyone who lives on a large plot of land. They cost more than either electric or gas chippers, and they require a compatible vehicle to work. These machines are much larger and less convenient for average home landscapes. Although professionals will want to findthe best commercial wood chipper, we did not test PTO-driven models.

Bag Capacity

Not all wood chippers use bags or bins to gather the chipper refuse. Those who are looking for one that comes with a bag or bin will want to consider the storage container’s capacity. Larger bags make a great choice if users plan to use the wood chipper for a big cleanup project.

Keep in mind that the larger the bin, the heavier and more cumbersome it will be to empty. If weight is a concern, a model with a smaller bag or bin will require more frequent but easier emptying—a smart choice to avoid the risk of injury that comes with lifting a heavy bag.

Cutting Blades

Wood chippers use one or both of two cutting-blade types to grind up yard waste: fixed blades, also called knives; or hinged blades, sometimes called hammers. The most commonly used material for both blade types is hardened chromium-alloy steel. Steel tends to bend rather than chip and may be resharpened numerous times before it needs to be replaced.

A wood chipper’s ability to cut through material fed into the machine is a key factor. Shoppers will want to think about how they’ll use their wood chipper. An electric wood chipper will be fine for small branches and clippings. These devices usually shred branches up to 2 inches in diameter across the widest point. Those dealing with larger material will want to consider a gas or PTO chipper, which may be able to shred materials up to 4 inches in diameter. Some commercial wood chipper models cut through branches up to 7 inches in diameter, though these cost significantly more than the average residential wood chipper.

Torque

A wood chipper uses a powerful motor to turn a series of cutting and grinding blades with enough force (torque) to cut through solid wood quickly. Torque describes the rotational force, typically measured in foot-pounds, that a motor imparts on an object. In wood chippers, torque forces the blades to cut through any appropriate material pushed into the hopper. Most residential wood chippers get a torque rating between 7 and 15 foot-pounds.

Shredding Chute

Many chippers include two different chutes for feeding material into the machine: a long, narrow branch chute for thick branches; and a wide shredding chute, also known as a hopper. Shaped like a broad funnel, the shredding chute compresses bundles of thin pliable twigs and branches so that they can contact the blades more efficiently. This separate chute shreds less rigid material, such as weeds, leaves, grass, and other soft plant waste, so it can come in handy for common yard work.

While a leaf shredder would tackle this job, a wood chipper with a built-in shredding chute gets the same results in a more cost-effective and space-saving way. However, a wood chipper/leaf shredder combo will cost more than a model without the shredder. But this combo may be considered the ​​best residential wood chipper option.

Reduction Ratio

The reduction ratio of a wood chipper indicates how small the material will be after it has passed through the wood chipper. For example, if a wood chipper has a reduction ratio of 8:1, it will reduce the material down to an eighth of its original size. Another way to think of it is that it can reduce eight bags of yard waste to fit into one bag. The reduction ratio of most wood chippers typically ranges from 8:1 to 20:1.

Chippers need more power and energy to cut materials into smaller pieces. As the engine size increases, so does the price of the chipper. If users don’t need to cut material into tiny pieces, they can save money by choosing a chipper with a lower reduction ratio.

Weight and Mobility

Weight and mobility rank as key considerations in the purchase of a wood chipper, but many shoppers overlook these factors. Thebest small wood chipper for the extent of yard work is typically the ideal purchase. A wood chipper that’s too big or doesn’t have decent wheels can be very difficult to move around the yard, which reduces overall yard cleanup efficiency.

Look for wood chippers that come with sturdy stands and large wheels capable of moving over grass, paving stones, deck boards, sticks, and any other obstacles on the ground. Keep in mind that the heavier a wood chipper, the more difficult it will be to move across uneven ground or up steep inclines. For larger properties with fewer trees, a lightweight wood chipper may be ideal because users can move it around the yard quickly and effectively without significant fatigue.

How to Use a Wood Chipper Safely

There’s a reason wood chippers make frequent appearances in horror films. This incredibly dangerous yard tool should only be operated by an experienced user who is sure to take the following safety precautions:

  • Read the manufacturer’s instructions thoroughly before using a wood chipper.
  • Use hearing protection, eye protection, hand protection, and a hard hat.
  • When users are feeding branches into the wood chipper, they shouldn’t force stubborn branches into the blades. Users will want to let the chipper pull branches in while they stand to the side to avoid flying debris.
  • Keep hands and any other body part away from the wood chipper when it is connected to a power source. A simple accident could result in severe injury or death.
  • Users will want to disconnect the power and the spark plug before performing maintenance to ensure that the wood chipper does not start up while they’re vulnerable to the blades.

The Advantages of Owning a Wood Chipper

Yard-waste disposal is the greatest benefit of owning a wood chipper. Bushes require regular trimming, trees may need pruning, and old trees shed dead branches frequently, which can create a substantial pile of wood and yard material to remove. A wood chipper makes it easy to use or dispose of that debris.

Wood chippers are also a useful tool to reduce the potentially harmful emissions produced by burning chemically treated wood. Instead of releasing these toxic fumes and unpleasant odors into the air, wood can be mulched and used to protect plants.

Besides mulch, users may also create pressed wood for carpentry projects or biofuel for certain cars or other machinery.

To recap, a wood chipper:

  • Quickly process yard waste into small, easily managed chips;
  • Provides an environmentally friendly means of disposing of yard waste; and
  • Produces useful materials like mulch, pressed wood, and biofuel.

FAQs

Q. How big a wood chipper do I need?

Electric wood chippers are made for processing small and midsize twigs and branches. For this purpose, most users only require a wood chipper with a 1.5-inch cutting diameter. But if you have older trees on your property, or wish to grind up leaves and other finely textured material, you may want to have a larger gas-powered chipper. These models feature a hopper for processing fine materials and a larger branch chute to chip branches up to 3 inches in diameter.

Q. How do you use a wood chipper?

Choose a level location for the machine to sit. Once it is in position, set the parking brake on any equipment used to haul it and then adjust the chip deflector and chip chute to direct chips to your desired location.

Check the chipper for any debris before starting. If it is clear, start it up. If it isn’t, you’ll want to disconnect the spark plug and clean it out before turning it on. Never perform maintenance of any kind without disconnecting the power.

With the engine started, feed material into the wood chipper, blunt end first. The machine will begin chipping away, allowing you to back off and move to the side of the chipper so you don’t get hit by pieces that may shoot out. Once you have finished chipping, clean up the wood chips with a leaf blower or leaf vacuum and either dispose of them or put them to good use.

Q. How do you feed a wood chipper?

To feed material into the wood chipper, begin with the blunt end and carefully guide it into the chipper. You may also want to include a mixture of dry and green limbs so that the moisture from the green branches can help to cool and lubricate the wood chipper’s knives.

Q. How loud is a wood chipper?

A wood chipper’s noise output generally falls between 85 and 110 decibels, which is more than enough to warrant hearing protection.

Q. How much does a wood chipper cost?

Wood chippers range in price from about $150 to well over $2,000, depending on the type, size, torque, and overall power. Typically, residential wood chippers cost about $200 to $800, though heavy-duty models can greatly exceed this amount.

Q. Can wood chippers shred leaves?

Some wood chippers can also shred leaves, but if you don’t need to chip any wood, it may be better to invest in a dedicated leaf shredder instead. These tools tend to take up less space and they are more affordable.

Q. Is it better to chip wood when it is dry or wet?

Dry wood is harder and causes more wear and tear on the chipper’s blades, so it’s best to do wood chipping when the wood is cool and moist.

Q. What shouldn’t I put in a wood chipper?

Keep yourself safe and protect your equipment by only chipping branches within the size range your machine is built to process. Never place branches that may have nails or screws, lumber, excessively sappy wood, long vines, palm fronds, or other fibrous materials into the chipper.

Q. How do you clean a wood chipper?

Start any maintenance process by stopping the engine (ensuring all moving parts have stopped before proceeding) and disconnecting the spark plug wire or power cord to prevent accidental start-up.

To clean the wood chipper, begin by removing the flail screen and any larger debris. Clean the flail screen separately, and then clean the chute and around the muffler with water and a brush or dry cloth. Avoid using a high-pressure spray of water because it can contaminate the fuel system.

Meet the Tester

Mark Wolfe is a writer and product tester with a background in the nursery and landscaping industries. For more than 20 years he mowed, edged, planted, pruned, cultivated, irrigated, and renovated beautiful landscapes. Now he tests and writes reviews about the latest outdoor power equipment, hand tools, lawn care products, and other outdoor-living goods.

Additional research provided by Timothy Dale and Tom Scalisi.

The post The 7 Wood Chippers That Cut Best in Our Tests appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-18T10:09:36-05:00
<![CDATA[I Never Thought I Needed a Suction Lifter—But Once I Tried It—I Had to Have Another One]]>The post I Never Thought I Needed a Suction Lifter—But Once I Tried It—I Had to Have Another One appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/dewalt-grabo-tool-review/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427600Fri, 14 Feb 2025 11:38:59 -0500ReviewsDIYHand ToolsToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

I’ve never been able to carry a full sheet of drywall alone—until now. Even with a helper, it was always awkward. And plate glass? Let’s just say my wallet took a hit after a costly mishap. 

Rating: 4.5/5

Dewalt Grabo

DeWalt Grabo Lifter

The first time I saw a DeWalt Grabo, I was intrigued—but skeptical. I’d used glass suction cups before, and they only worked on perfectly smooth, impermeable surfaces.There was no way the Grabo could grip drywall or plywood, or so I thought. I was wrong. 

After loading a DeWalt PowerStack battery into the Grabo, I set it on my kitchen counter and pressed the suction button. Instantly, the rubber seal compressed, gripping the countertop like a vise. Within seconds, it was locked tight—and no matter how hard I yanked, it wouldn’t budge. That was impressive, but how would it fare on other flat surfaces? I headed outside to test. 

Over the next few weeks, I used the Grabo on virtually every hard flat surface I could find, including drywall panels, plywood, steel plates, and more. I discovered that the Grabo worked even on slightly porous surfaces like concrete pavers. It dawned on me that I’d been lifting things the hard way for years. 

That’s when I decided I needed another one—for large, two-person tasks, like carrying heavy marble or travertine slabs. I bought a second DeWalt Grabo Suction Lifter

So, how does it work? Pressing the suction button activates an internal vacuum that removes the air between the tool and the surface. A dense foam ring around the base compresses, forming a rock-solid seal. I could actually see the Grabo sink down as the suction kicked in. When the (negative) pressure between the tool and the surface reached about -12.1 PSI, the vacuum shut off, but the suction remained. 

On semi-porous materials, such as concrete pavers, the suction began to drop slowly after the vacuum shut off, but I could still lift and carry the items. When the suction dropped to around -8.4 PSI, the vacuum automatically kicked back on to increase the suction again. The time it takes for the suction to drop depends on the material being carried. When I tested the Grabo on a clean mirror, the suction barely dropped at all—not enough for the tool to kick back on. 

  • Dewalt Grabo Review hand placing on storage base
  • Dewalt Grabo Review inserting battery
  • Dewalt Grabo Review on large format tile
  • Dewalt Grabo Review sunshade screen cover
  • Dewalt Grabo Review woman holding two dewalt grabos
  • Dewalt Grabo Review using dewalt grabo on mirror
  • The Best New Power Tools Option DeWalt 20V MAX Grabo Lifter
  • Dewalt Grabo Review hand holding
  • Dewalt Grabo Review

One of my favorite features on the Grabo is its safety button, which prevents accidental activation. DeWalt added a tiny release lever next to the suction start button, which I had to push before I could fully press the start button to activate suction. It only took a few tries before I could do it by feel, but that extra step adds a simple and critical layer of safety.

Like any power tool, the Grabo Suction Lifter may need occasional maintenance. It comes with extra vacuum filters for the small intake holes on the base, and the dense foam seal is also replaceable. Most retailers sell this as a “tool only,” which means you’ll need to buy a separate battery if you don’t have other DeWalt 20V tools. But at $249.00, it’s well worth it for anyone who regularly lifts and hauls panels, glass, or other unwieldy items with smooth surfaces. 

Now, I can’t imagine lifting without it. 

Where to Buy the Dewalt Grabo:

Meet the Tester

Glenda Taylor is a contractor, product tester, and writer focusing primarily on construction, DIY tools, and home appliances.

The post I Never Thought I Needed a Suction Lifter—But Once I Tried It—I Had to Have Another One appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-14T11:38:59-05:00
<![CDATA[This Is Why You Need a Belt Sander in Your Home Workshop]]>The post This Is Why You Need a Belt Sander in Your Home Workshop appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/diy/belt-sander-uses/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427492Thu, 13 Feb 2025 18:09:38 -0500DIYSkills & TechniquesToolsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

There are a wide range of sanders and each is designed for specific uses, such as a detail sander for fine furniture or a benchtop drum sander for sanding large pieces of wood or metal. Belt sanders are another great addition to a lineup of sanding tools, as they offer a variety of uses that make them essential for a woodworker’s or metalworker’s tool kit. 

Belt sanders are typically handheld power tools that can be either corded or battery-powered. These sanders are highly versatile, though they are commonly equipped with coarse-grit sanding belts that can remove substantial amounts of material in a hurry. Use this guide to learn about a range of belt sander uses and projects these tools can handle around the home. 

Our Recommendation: Makita 9903 3″ x 21″ Belt Sander at The Home Depot for $339 
This Makita belt sander features auto-tracking belt alignment to help keep the abrasive belt centered on the track even after several sanding passes, and a built-in dust collection bag that reduces the amount of airborne dust by about 65 percent.

Smooth wooden playground equipment.

Wooden swings, sandboxes, and see-saws can develop rough surfaces that make the playground equipment hazardous for your kids. Without proper maintenance, one wrong move could result in cuts, scrapes, or splinters, which is why it’s a good idea to use a belt sander for smoothing and sanding wood surfaces in order to improve the look and safety of the equipment. 

While you are working, if there are any uneven areas on the wooden playground equipment, you can take the opportunity to use the belt sander for leveling out these spots to reduce the areas where water may otherwise pool. After sanding smooth, seal the wood to prevent weathering.

A DIYer sanding a hardwood floor with a belt sander.
Photo: Steve Heap/Alloy via Getty Images

Prepare a hardwood floor for refinishing.

Refinishing a hardwood floor can reinvigorate the appearance and texture of the floor, giving the room an aesthetic upgrade without the expense of new flooring. Belt sanders are one of the best sanders for hardwood floors because they can be used to quickly and efficiently remove old floor finishes. 

After removing the old finish on the hardwood floor, you can also use a belt sander to prepare the exposed wood for a new finish. Just make sure to work slowly and carefully to avoid removing too much material from the existing hardwood. 

Restore a wood gate, fence, or deck.

When you are still learning how to use a belt sander, it’s a good idea to take on a project where there is room for mistakes, like restoring an old deck. Since decking tends to be made of thick pieces of wood, there’s wiggle room if you oversand a bit. You can usually go back and even out the surface with little issue. 

Deck boards become rough and cracked over time due to exposure to rain, UV radiation, snow, and ice. By using a belt sander to remove old paint or stain, sand away the top layer of material, and level out any uneven spots, you can expose the smooth layers of the wood below. Similarly, a belt sander can be used for the same purpose on a wooden gate or fence boards. Just be sure to sink all of the fasteners below the wood decking before beginning. 

Strip old paint, stain, or varnish.

Many types of sanders can be used to strip old paint, stain, or varnish from a wooden or metal surface, but belt sanders are a top choice due to their ability to quickly and efficiently remove thick layers of material with little effort. However, when you are using a belt sander to strip paint, stain, or varnish, you need to be careful to avoid removing too much material. 

Additionally, if you apply too much pressure to the sander, there is a risk of damaging wood, metal, or even plastic materials, making the job significantly more difficult, so make sure to work slowly and diligently if you plan to tackle this type of project. 

Pro tip: Always practice on a scrap surface in order to develop a level of comfort with a sander.

A DIYer using a belt sander to remove stain from an old desk.
Photo: Crispin la valiente/Moment via Getty Images

Sharpen knives and chisels.

A surprising use for belt sanders is sharpening knives, chisels, and other metal tools. However, it’s important to mention that this process takes some time and effort to learn properly, so you should practice with an old knife or chisel the first couple of times in case you make a mistake. 

You can switch between different grit belts to grind, sharpen, hone, and polish the tools to get the ideal result. If you feel it’s too difficult to start with a belt sander, you can also tackle this project with a fixed-base bench sander, allowing you to focus on the tools as you work. 

Shape metal contours.

Using a belt sander on metal may seem counterintuitive at first glance, but the power behind these essential tools allows metalworkers to smooth and shape complex contours into softer metals. You can get the desired shape for the metal by using the continuous movement of the sanding belt to follow the curve of the metal surfaces, while applying light pressure to shape the intended contours. 

However, if you want to create tight curves or cylindrical shapes, you would be better off using a specialized tube belt sander, which is typically designed to wrap the sanding belt around the contours of the metal. 

A DIYer using a belt sander to smooth a wood board.
Photo: ProfessionalStudioImages/E+ via Getty Images

Level uneven wood, metal, or plastic.

One of the most well-known uses for a belt sander is to level an uneven surface. These tools can be used on wood, metal, or even plastic to quickly and efficiently grind away material, allowing you to smooth and level surfaces. 

The best belt sanders can quickly switch out sanding belts so you can choose the correct grit depending on the amount of material that needs to be removed and the target material you are working with. Carefully move the belt sander across the material to gradually level uneven areas and achieve a flat, even plane.

The post This Is Why You Need a Belt Sander in Your Home Workshop appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-13T18:09:38-05:00
<![CDATA[How to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers]]>Sharpening hedge trimmers regularly will keep your plants tidy and healthy. Follow these easy steps to save the expense of a pro sharpening.

The post How to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-sharpen-hedge-trimmers/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=66331Thu, 13 Feb 2025 16:27:56 -0500DIYLandscapingLawn & GardenRepair & MaintenanceToolsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

If they’re properly sharpened, power hedge trimmers are a great time saver over manual trimmers for maintaining neat hedges and other landscaping. If your power trimmers are continually getting jammed and are chewing instead of slicing through branches, however, it’s probably time to sharpen the blades.

As is the case with lawn mower blades, knives, and other sharp implements, you can bring trimmers in for professional sharpening, but you can save money by handling this job yourself. Follow the simple steps below on how to sharpen hedge trimmers.

Why It’s Important to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers

Sharpening your hedge trimmers allows you to make quick work of that pruning job, plus it contributes to the health of your plants. “Letting your trimmers go dull is like trying to cut steak with a butter knife,” says Bryan Clayton, a longtime landscaper and CEO of GreenPal, a company that matches homeowners with landscaping services. He says with dull blades, “You’ll end up tearing your hedges rather than cutting them cleanly, which can lead to unhealthy plants prone to disease.”

RELATED: AUDIO: Bob Vila Explains How to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers

Best Power Hedge Trimmer

Black+Decker hedge trimmer
Photo: Lowe’s

Black+Decker 20V Max Cordless Hedge Trimmer, $64.98 at Lowe’s. This Black+Decker tool can cut through branches 3/4 inch in diameter. It has a padded front handle and enough battery power to trim up to 3,000 square feet. 

To discover other top-performing tools in this category, read our tested guide to the best hedge trimmers,

How often should you sharpen your hedge trimmers?

While you don’t need to sharpen your hedge trimmers often, you’ll need to give them a little TLC every now and then. “A good rule of thumb is to sharpen them at the start of the season, then check them every 50 hours of use,” Clayton says. It’s worth the time, he says, since “dull blades make your job harder.”

There are telltale signs that your hedge trimmer has dull blades:

  • Frequent jams: If branches and foliage are getting jammed in between the hedge trimmer’s teeth, it’s likely because the blades aren’t sharp enough to cut through the material.
  • Ragged cuts: Your hedge trimmer should cut cleanly through twigs and branches. If they’re chewing through them and leaving ragged cuts, then the blades are dull

Hedge trimmers and materials needed to sharpen blades.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Types of Hedge Trimmers

Power hedge trimmers come in several types, including gas, corded, and cordless electric models. Whether you own gas hedge trimmers, electric hedge trimmers, or battery-operated hedge trimmers, you’ll use the same process to sharpen the blades.

Tools & Materials

Bobvila.com may earn a commission from purchases made through these links.

Project Overview

Working Time: 1 hour
Total Time: 1 hour
Skill Level: Intermediate
Estimated Cost: $10 to $15

Before You Begin

Unplugging the battery from an orange hedge trimmer with work gloves on.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Sharpening a hedge trimmer involves working around blades and filing, which can send metal shavings airborne. Take the required safety precautions before getting started. “Wear gloves and eye protection,” says Clayton. “Always unplug electric trimmers before you start, and for both types, make sure the trimmer is securely clamped down or held in a vise.” If you are maintaining battery-powered hedge trimmers, remove the battery.

How to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers the Right Way

Step 1: Clean the trimmer blades.

Cleaning the trimmer blades on hedge trimmer with solvent.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Hedge trimmer blades often end up clogged with sap and pieces of branches and leaves. Start by removing any debris that’s caught in the trimmer’s teeth. Spray the blade with a little WD-40 to break down any sap that’s stuck to the blade. Give it a few minutes for the solvent to work its magic, then use a cloth to wipe the blades clean.

Step 2: Misalign the trimmer blades.

If the blades are aligned over top of each other, you’ll need to misalign them to expose all the edges so you can access each one with the file. Use a flathead screwdriver to reposition the blades so that each one is accessible.

Step 3: Sharpen with a flat file.

Sharpening hedge trimmer blades with flat file while wearing gloves.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Using your flat file, sharpen each blade individually.

  • File in the direction of the cutting edge only. Don’t use a back-and-forth sawing motion, since a flat file is designed to remove material in one direction only.
  • Filing using the correct angle is crucial to getting a sharp edge. Check your trimmer’s manual for the proper angle for the specific hedge trimmer.
  • File with care. Removing too much metal from the blades can weaken them, making the trimmer unusable.
  • Be consistent with the number of strokes you make on each blade to ensure they’re a consistent length when done. “Just focus on sharpening the top edge of each blade, maintaining the original angle, and whatever you do, don’t touch the flat bottom side,” Clayton says. “That’s your guide for keeping the cut accurate.” After sharpening one tooth, move onto the next until you’ve sharpened each one.

Step 4: Use a whetstone to remove burrs.

Removing burrs from hedge trimmers with whetstone.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Run a whetstone over the sharpened blades to remove any burrs that formed during sharpening. Remember, the blades cut by sliding against each other like a pair of scissors, so removing burrs that can interfere with this action is crucial.

Step 5: Spray with resin solvent.

Sharpening your hedge trimmers also removes any corrosion protection that was on the blades. Before you put the hedge trimmers back into service, you’ll need to restore that protection by applying a resin solvent to the blades. Spray the solvent onto the blades and wipe off any excess resin.

Final Thoughts

While learning how to sharpen hedge trimmer blades isn’t difficult, there is some risk to doing it yourself. Over-sharpening the blades can weaken them, making your hedge trimmer unusable. “Sharpening hedge trimmers isn’t rocket science, but it does require a steady hand and a bit of know-how,” Clayton says. “If in doubt, taking them to a professional isn’t just playing it safe; it’s ensuring your tools last longer and perform better.”

The post How to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-13T16:27:56-05:00
<![CDATA[In Just 2 Months, This Tool Has Transformed My Workshop]]>The post In Just 2 Months, This Tool Has Transformed My Workshop appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/dewalt-planer-review/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=426556Thu, 13 Feb 2025 13:20:54 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

A couple of months ago I got the Dewalt 735 Planer to help expedite board prep for woodworking projects. I wanted the flexibility to use wood from a variety of sources, but flattening boards and matching thicknesses has never been my favorite part of a project. Sanded “project” lumber is prohibitively expensive and limited in scope. Hand planing is slow, and router planing requires a clunky jig. After years of workarounds, I finally splurged on the right tool for the job.

As a brand, DeWalt enjoys broad-based customer satisfaction across its array of power tool offerings, and I’ve had positive experiences with the DeWalt jobsite table saw and router I’ve been using the past few years. After initially testing it in combination with a Rikon 8-inch jointer, I’ve been using the 13-inch planer to clean up edge-glued panels, and for dimensioning a couple of log-to-lumber milling projects in my workshop. In this DeWalt planer review, I’ll share my observations after two months using the DeWalt DW735, including the pros and cons that I’ve experienced, and why I’m confident that I made the right choice.

Rating: 4.7/5

Best Benchtop Planer Option: DEWALT DW735 13-Inch Thickness Planer with Stand

DeWalt Planer DW735

DeWalt Planer DW735 Specs
Motor15-amp
CutterheadThree-knife, 10,000 RPM
Maximum width13 inches
Maximum thickness6 inches
Feed rateTwo-speed 196 CPI or 79 CPI

Testing the DeWalt Planer DW735 

DeWalt Planer action
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Store-bought lumber is milled within a fairly wide error-tolerance range that can leave woodworking projects looking rough unless you take the time to match the pieces. The usual way to match boards is by using a jointer to remove cupping and warping, which creates one flat face, then planing the other face down to a set thickness. Alternatively, both of these functions can be completed using only a planer with the help of a shop-built planing sled—an effective option for boards that are too wide for the jointer. The planer smooths the surface, but more importantly, it evens out the board thickness while also making it possible to match thicknesses from one board to the next. I’ve tested this planer both ways.

Over the past couple of months I’ve used the DeWalt 735 Planer with and without the jointer as project circumstances have dictated. I used it while preparing boards for glue-ups, and for final surfacing after gluing. When I wanted to make lumber from an oak log, I used a sled with the planer to flatten the surfaces, then matched thicknesses of the rough-cut boards. I’ve logged about 12 hours on the planer so far, which has been enough time to know that this is exactly the tool I was looking for and that I’m glad I fought the urge to buy a cheaper model. The heavy build and powerful motor give it ample stability and steady cutting power. The thickness selector makes it easy to avoid over-planing while precisely matching boards, and the finished pieces come out with very little snipe or chip-out.

What We LikeWhat We Don’t Like
Automatic carriage lockLarger than other bench planers, very heavy
Fan-assisted dust port with impellerRequires dust collection add-ons
Material removal gauge for quick set up
Heavy-duty height adjustment system

Helpful Features Boost Productivity and Minimize Mistakes

DeWalt Planer action 3
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

This model has been around long enough to become “exhibit A” when woodworkers need a point of reference with regard to thickness planers. It accepts workpieces up to 13 inches wide and 6 inches thick, and is capable of removing up to ⅛ inch layers per pass. Powered by a 15 amp motor, the cutter rotates at 10,000 revolutions per minute (RPM), while the two-speed rollers feed at either 14 or 26 feet per minute. The three-knife cutterhead extends production time between blade replacements up to 30 percent compared to 2-knife models. The two-speed gearbox allows the operator to choose either faster planing at 79 cuts per inch (CPI) or a smoother finish at 196 CPI. 

A few key features set DW735 apart from other planers on the market. First off, it weighs a hefty 92 pounds, which is up to 40 pounds heavier than other popular models. The extra weight hints at better-than-average durability, and more importantly the weight boosts working stability. Another unique feature that I haven’t seen anywhere else is the fan-assisted dust port. Unlike other planers that require an external dust collection vacuum to pull the chips away, this machine is equipped with an impeller and fan that grinds up the shavings and blows them out—all the way across the shop, if not attached to a collection bag.

One of the handiest features is the material removal gauge. It helps when setting up the first pass on a face-jointed rough board. I can place the board beneath the spring-loaded gauge and crank the carriage down until the gauge needle indicates the amount of material I want to remove, then turn on the motor and plane as normal. The planer also has several automatic thickness settings that, when selected, will prevent accidentally making the board too thin.

Hard to Lift, Easy to Operate

DeWalt Planer chip chute
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

I had minimal experience with thickness planers before I got the DeWalt DW735. I had borrowed one a couple of times, but was not proficient. I spent the evening after it arrived setting it up and reading the owner’s manual to make sure I wouldn’t break anything or get injured. Turns out, the biggest risk was that I might throw my back out trying to move it. I recommend getting a helper any time you need to pick this machine up. For shop use, a dedicated planer stand would be a smart addition.

It only took about 15 minutes to set up the planer and assemble the infeed and outfeed tables. I actually purchased the DW735X kit, which is the same machine as the DW735 but includes the infeed/outfeed tables, dust port adapter, and an extra set of knives. The unit is pretty much plug-and-play, but opting for the tool-only unit will require just a bit more setup.  

After adjusting the carriage height for my plank, I flipped the switch and sent the piece through. I decided to test the planer outdoors since I don’t have a dust collection system, and I’m glad I did. When I ran the first test piece through I was amazed to see the wood shavings blown up to 20 feet away. The noise level was much louder than I anticipated, so I put on a set of over-ear hearing protectors and kept working. I experimented with different removal thicknesses, tried out the material removal gauge, the thickness selector, and the different feed speeds on a pile of pine and hardwood scrap. Everything worked as expected and there was basically zero learning curve. 

Plenty of Cutting Power, Silky Smooth Finish, Consistently Accurate

DeWalt Planer automatic thickness control
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

So far I have used the DeWalt Planer DW735 on store-bought poplar and yellow pine lumber, blanks split from an oak log, and various cutoffs and reclaimed boards. I mostly work with pieces that are less than 4 feet long. It has delivered excellent results on everything I have fed it. Neither the feed rate nor the cutting speed seems to be affected by the hardness of the wood. Hardwood, softwood, fresh and sappy or old and dried boards, the finished faces always come out clean and smooth. Thickness accuracy has been pretty much perfect too, although it does produce a bit of snipe. 

Snipe is a ubiquitous issue with benchtop planers. The snipe section averages about 15 thousandths of an inch, measured with a digital caliper, and runs about 3 inches back from the board end. Raising the infeed-outfeed tables a bit has helped, but the best solution I found was to either run longer boards and cut off the snipe, or send a sacrificial board through just ahead of the good board.

The DW735 has a maximum planing depth of ⅛ inch. I usually plane no more than 1/16 inch at a time, often as little as 1/32 inch. The owner’s manual cautions against planing the maximum depth on 13-inch wide boards due to the strain it would place on the motor. In order to provide a full review, I did test the maximum depth on 8-inch-wide lumber. On the nearly flat surface, the full-depth cut seemed (audibly) to strain the motor some, but it did not affect the feed rate or the appearance of the finished surface.

Why I Think the DeWalt DW735 Planer Is Worth Every Penny

DeWalt Planer height crank
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

I am a firm believer in “buy it once, use it forever,” and the DeWalt DW735 feels like that kind of tool. Based on 2 months of fairly intensive hobby-level use, it has done everything I’ve needed exceedingly well. The blades have remained sharp, the cutter and carriage structure is perfectly sturdy and still exactly square with the feed table. The adjustment mechanisms are dead-on reliable. Just as importantly, it comes from a highly-regarded, time-tested brand that also has an excellent track record for product support. When I eventually need replacement blades, I don’t have to worry whether or not I’ll be able to get them. I think that the price is fair for that level of performance and peace of mind. 

Buy the DeWalt 735 Planer on:

Product Comparisons

DeWalt Planer DW735Grizzly Planer G0940Hercules Portable PlanerCraftsman Benchtop PlanerOliver Machinery 10045 Planer
Motor15-amp15-amp15-amp15-amp15-amp
CutterheadThree-knife, 10,000 RPM30-insert helical, 8,500 RPMThree-knife, 9,700 RPMTwo-knife, 8,000 RPM36-insert helical, 10,000 RPM
Maximum width13 inches13 inches12.5 inches12.25 inches13 inches
Maximum thickness6 inches6 inches6 inches6 inches6 inches
Feed rateTwo-speed 14 FPM or 26 FPM25 FPM25.3 FPM26.2 FPMTwo-speed 17 FPM or 26 FPM
Price$599.00$870.00$399.99$349.00$999.99

So, is the DeWalt Planer DW735 right for you?

DeWalt Planer infeed
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

A power planer can be a big help in the wood shop. Flattening and choosing custom-thickness for rough-cut boards is far less expensive than buying sanded-four-sides (S4S) project lumber at a retail store. Your shop-planed boards will be more consistent than those at the store, and it gives the option to use wood from other sources, like local sawmills or your own logs. A planer also allows for flattening multiple-board panels after gluing them together.

Not every workshop needs a thickness planer. Other workarounds can suffice until buying one is necessary or fits into the budget. If it’s time to buy a benchtop planer, the DeWalt 735 is one of the best options available. The DW735 is not the cheapest or most expensive option, but it offers outstanding performance for the price, and is backed by a support network that offers replacement knives and other parts and accessories to keep it in top condition. You’ll get the best value from the DW735X kit, which includes the infeed/outfeed tables, or for the smoothest possible finish and extra-long cutter life, it is available with the Byrd Tools Shelix upgrade cutterhead pre-installed.

Meet the Tester

Mark Wolfe is a writer, product tester and serial DIYer who lives in an older home. When he isn’t writing, he spends his time upgrading, repairing, and replacing anything and everything in his home, yard, and garden. He tests and writes reviews about hand and power tools, lawn care and home repair products, and outdoor living goods.

The post In Just 2 Months, This Tool Has Transformed My Workshop appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-13T13:20:54-05:00
<![CDATA[How to String a Weed Eater the Right Way]]>The post How to String a Weed Eater the Right Way appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/diy/how-to-string-a-weed-eater-the-right-way/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427101Wed, 12 Feb 2025 17:21:34 -0500DIYSkills & TechniquesToolsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Next to the lawn mower, a weed eater is perhaps the most essential tool for managing a lawn, allowing you to trim grass that’s up against your house, along fencing, and in other places the blade of your lawn mower can’t reach. A handy tool, but its trimmer line doesn’t last forever. You’ll need to replace the trimmer line from time to time to keep your weed eater doing its job. 

While threading a weed eater with fresh line doesn’t take long, it can be an exercise in frustration if you’ve never done it before. Ahead, we take you step by step through the process of changing out the trimmer line while sharing a few tricks of the trade from a few lawn care pros to help make learning how to restring a weed eater easier. 

Safety Precautions

String trimmer line replacement is a job you should only do with the string trimmer completely powered down. That means cutting off the engine if it’s a gas string trimmer, removing the battery if it’s a cordless electric string trimmer, or pulling the plug if it’s a corded string trimmer. 

Tools & Materials

Bobvila.com may earn a commission from purchases made through these links.

How to Restring a String Trimmer

Changing weed eater string requires very few tools and doesn’t take long if you follow the steps below. 

Step 1: Purchase the right line.

Make sure you’re using trimmer line that’s the same thickness as the line you’re replacing or a line thickness that’s compatible with your string trimmer. String trimmer line comes in different thicknesses ranging from light-duty 0.065 inch line up to heavy-duty 0.11 inch line. If you’re not sure what sizes are compatible with your weed eater, check the tool’s manual. 

Pro Tip: Michael Clarke, founder of home and garden site Yardwork, advises selecting a line gauge that suits the job. “For thicker weeds, consider using a heavier gauge line or a twisted line, which are more durable and can handle tougher conditions without wearing out as quickly,” he says. 

Step 2: Remove the cap.

A man hold a weed eater machine upside down to remove the top.
Photo: Milan Marknvic via Getty Images.

Position the string trimmer on the ground upside down so that the trimmer head is facing upwards, giving you access to the cutting head. Remove the cap that covers the cutting head by pinching the cap on its two tabs or by unscrewing it. Just under the cap you’ll find a spool that holds the trimmer line. Remove the spool and discard any leftover line.

Pro Tip: Jeremy Yamaguchi, owner of Lawn Love, suggests using the old line as a guide. “A mistake a lot of people make is taking out the spool and then taking out the last bit of string without looking at it, and then when they go to attach the new string, they realize they aren’t exactly sure where things go,” Yamaguchi says. “If you just take a few moments to assess how/where the old string is attached—or better yet, take a picture on your phone—that will make installing the new string way easier.”

Step 3: Measure the line. 

The best way to measure the amount of fresh line you need for your string trimmer is to use your arm span, says Mark Clement, home and garden tool reviewer and licensed contractor with MyFixitUpLife. Clement suggests making three pulls of string, extending your arm to its full length with each pull. While the amount you pull will vary depending on your arm length, this method should give you about what you need to fill the spool. 

Step 4. Replace the line. 

A close up of the spool on a weed eater.
Photo: Thomas Winz via Getty Images

Locate the small hole that’s on the spool and insert the trim line into the hole. If your string trimmer has two cutting lines, there will be two channels on the spool (one for each line) and two holes, one for each line. 

Look for an arrow that indicates the direction you should wrap the line and begin wrapping the line around the spool. Be mindful when wrapping the line, Clarke says. “When winding the trimmer line in the spool, keep it tight but not too tight, since a loose line can cause it to get caught or stuck when in use and a tight line can force the line to stick together,” he says. Clarke also warns against overfilling the line, which can cause it to jam. 

After wrapping the line, you’ll need to hold it in place while you reload the spool. “Without letting the sprung line spring out of the channel it’s in, feed each one through the corresponding eyelet of the spool housing, then push the spool back into the housing and twist/lock it into place,” Clement says. 

Note: If you find the process of re-wrapping trimmer line to be more of a hassle than you’re willing to deal with, you can skip the wrapping process by buying replacement spools of trimmer line. These spools are already wrapped with a trimmer line. Rather than re-wrapping the line you simply replace the entire spool. You’ll spend a little more for this convenience, but these pre-loaded spools make the process quicker. If you go this route, be sure to purchase replacement string heads that are compatible with the make and model of your string trimmer. 

Step 5: Install the spool.

The next step is installing the spool, and the method depends on the type of trimmer you own. 

Standard String Trimmer

Place the spool back into the string trimmer, making sure to thread the line into the hole or holes in the spindle as you do. Some string trimmers have grooves that you can drop the line into as you’re installing it. Once the spindle is in place and the lines are extending through the holes, pop the spindle cap back into place. 

Speed Feed String Trimmer

If you have a weed eater with a speed feed head, you don’t need to remove the cutting head. Align the hashmarks on the head, then thread the line into one of the eyelets on the head and push it through and out the other eyelet. 

Pro Tip: Given that line comes wrapped in a coil and you need to push it through a straight channel, threading it through both eyelets can be a challenge. To make the process easier, Clement suggests straightening some of the line first. “Flex the curve out of the first foot of line by straightening it,” he says. 

Clement adds that the hashmark guides typically wear away after a few months of use. If that’s the case with your speed feed trimmers, you’ll need to rotate the spindle by pressing down on the head repeatedly until you can look through one eyelet and see out the eyelet on the other side. 

Once the line is through, make sure there is an even amount of line on each side of the head, then turn the base of the head to wind the string into the trimmer. 

A person using a string trimmer on the lawn.
Photo: AdShooter/E+ via Getty Images

Step 6: Set the line length.

Set the line length by pressing the head of the string trimmer, then use your fingers to pull out the line. You should be able to pull out a few inches of line with each press. If the line doesn’t come out, then you’ve made a mistake loading it, and you’ll need to start over. Repeat the process until the line is to the desired length. Don’t pull the line out far enough that it can come into contact with the shield that is around the head. 

Final Thoughts

Having to pause to replace string trimmer line in your weed eater should only cause a minor delay in your summertime yard work ritual. But if you don’t know how to install trimmer line, what could be a quick and easy job can quickly spiral into a time-wasting struggle. By following the above instructions and tips, you can make quick work of this job and get back to beautifying your lawn. 

FAQ About Stringing a Weed Eater

If you have lingering concerns about how to string a weed eater, here are some helpful answers to popular questions.

Q. Should I soak my trimmer line in water?

A. While it isn’t an absolute necessity, it’s not a bad idea to soak your trimmer line in water for about a day before loading into your trimmer. Trimmer line is made from nylon, which absorbs moisture. Soaking weed eater string in water makes it more malleable and less likely to break, so it will last longer. 

Q. Should I use a thick or thin weed eater string?

A. First, make sure you choose a weed eater string that is compatible with your string trimmer. Check the manual if you’re not sure. If you’re trimming grass and light weeds, a thinner string will give you a precise, clean cut. If you’re taking down thicker vegetation, choose a thicker string line that’s compatible with your trimmer. 

Q. How much string should be out on a trimmer?

A. Extend the line between 4 and 6 inches from the cutting head. This allows for enough length to cut weeds and grass without being so long that the line comes into contact with the shield. 

Q. How do I know if I need to replace the string in a weed eater?

A. There are several signs that it’s time to change the string line in your weed eater. The most obvious is your weed eater is no longer trimming vegetation because there is no string extending from the head. It may also be time to change the string if the line repeatedly becomes tangled in weeds or grass or if it breaks easily, indicating it has become dry and brittle. 

The post How to String a Weed Eater the Right Way appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-12T17:21:34-05:00
<![CDATA[We Tested 2025’s Best Single-Stage Snow Blowers and Found 9 Top Models You Can Rely On]]>The best single-stage snow blower is made for clearing lighter snow or flat surfaces. We put the top picks to the test; see our results here.

The post We Tested 2025’s Best Single-Stage Snow Blowers and Found 9 Top Models You Can Rely On appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-single-stage-snow-blower/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=155705Mon, 10 Feb 2025 18:37:23 -0500ReviewsDIYDriveways & WalkwaysExteriorToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Single-stage snow blowers are compact and lightweight, offering an affordable and highly maneuverable alternative to full-size machines while still eliminating the back-breaking work of shoveling. But when gas, cordless, and corded options can cost between $100 and $1000, it’s hard to know how much you need to spend to get a model you can rely on. That’s why we researched dozens of popular options before testing nine you can trust to clear your driveways and walkways.

After using these tools in a variety of snowy conditions and reaching out to an expert for their opinions, we selected the Snow Joe 24V-X2-SB18 48V Ionmax Snow Blower as our best overall electric model and the Troy-Bilt Squall 208E 21″ Snow Blower as the top gas option. Both machines offer consistent performance and impressive clearing abilities. By reading through the pros and cons of the snow blowers on our list and familiarizing yourself with the features of these machines that matter most, you will be well positioned to choose one of the best single-stage snow blowers for your property.

  1. BEST OVERALL ELECTRIC: Snow Joe 24V-X2-SB18 48V Ionmax Snow Blower
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. BEST OVERALL GAS: Troy-Bilt Squall 208E 21″ Snow Blower
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Greenworks 13-Amp 20″ Corded Snow Thrower
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. UPGRADE PICK: Ego Power+ Peak Power 21″ Snow Blower
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST LIGHT-DUTY: Wen 5664 Snow Blaster 18″ Electric Snow Thrower
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST MEDIUM-DUTY: DeWalt 21″ 60V MAX Single-Stage Snow Blower Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Ryobi 40V HP Brushless 21″ Whisper Snow Blower
    ↓ Jump to Review
  8. BEST SELF-PROPELLED: Toro Power Clear 721 E 21″ Gas Snow Blower
    ↓ Jump to Review
  9. BEST BATTERY LIFE: Greenworks 60V 22″ Single-Stage Snow Blower
    ↓ Jump to Review
A close-up photo of single stage snow blower after use with snow on it
Photo: Zach Lazzari for Bob Vila

Before You Buy a Single-Stage Snow Blower

Compared to traditional two-stage machines, single-stage snow blowers are lighter, more mobile, and better suited to light- to moderate-duty jobs. For folks who regularly get severe storms with several feet of heavy snow at a time, these machines might be underpowered. 

However, if you’re looking for a good snow blower that can clear smaller amounts of snow on average-size driveways and walkways, a single-stage model will be a relatively cheap snow blower that still offers plenty of convenience power. 

Single-Stage Snow Blowers Comparison Chart

Product NameTypeWeightClearing Width
Snow Joe 24V-X2-SB18 48V Ionmax Snow BlowerCordless electric37.5 pounds18 inches
Troy-Bilt Squall 208E 21″ Snow BlowerGas100 pounds21 inches
Greenworks 13-Amp 20″ Corded Snow ThrowerCordless electric50.6 pounds21 inches
Ego Power+ Peak Power 21″ Snow BlowerCorded electric32 pounds18 inches
Wen 5664 Snow Blaster 18″ Electric Snow ThrowerCordless electric59 pounds21 inches
DeWalt 21″ 60V MAX Single-Stage Snow Blower KitCordless electric52 pounds21 inches
Ryobi 40V HP Brushless 21″ Whisper Snow BlowerGas84 pounds21 inches
Toro Power Clear 721 E 21″ Gas Snow BlowerCordless electric65.5 pounds22 inches
Greenworks 60V 22″ Single-Stage Snow BlowerCorded electric32 pounds20 inches

Our Top Picks

Just ahead are some of the best single-stage snow blowers in a variety of categories, all tested in tough conditions. Each of these snow blowers are capable of clearing driveways and sidewalks after moderate snow events.

Best Overall Electric

Snow Joe 24V-X2-SB18 48V Ionmax Snow Blower

 The Best Single Stage Snow Thrower Option: Snow Joe 24V-X2-SB18 48V Ionmax Snow Blower
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Two 24-volt batteries; 40 minutes of runtime each
  • Quadruple-bladed steel auger cuts 10 inches deep
  • Moves up to 10 tons of snow per charge
  • 180-degree adjustable snow chute

What We Don’t Like

  • Plastic blade can chip on hard gravel or debris

Specs

  • Type Cordless electric
  • Weight 37.5 pounds
  • Clearing width 18 inches

This Bob Vila Approved product carries our brand’s highest level of recommendation.

Bob Vila Approved badge

Bob Vila Approved recognizes the household and DIY products that impressed us most in our real-world testing and that exemplify core values of the Bob Vila brand, including craftsmanship, innovation, and value for the dollar. Winners of this designation come recommended by our professional review team and are personally approved by Bob Vila.

This battery-powered snow blower from Snow Joe is made to rival the power of a standard two-stage snow blower. Equipped with two rechargeable 24-volt (V) batteries, it offers up to 80 minutes of runtime and can throw up to 10 tons of snow per charge. Its 18-inch auger is rubber tipped, can cut a 10-inch-deep path, and works noticeably faster than other models. In some instances, it also threw snow farther than the 20-foot mark claimed by the manufacturer.

We chose this Snow Joe cordless snow blower as the best electric snow blower because it’s very functional, moderately priced, and a solid, consistent performer in a variety of conditions. At a relatively light weight of 37.5 pounds, it’s plenty easy to push around and manage. It also has a nice set of LED headlights to increase visibility in dark conditions. 

Shoppers seeking an economical single-stage snow blower with plenty of power, simple operational features, and great performance won’t be disappointed.

What our tester says: “We were so impressed by how quickly the batteries on this Snow Joe charged. But they also lasted long enough for us to make it through full snow-clearing sessions during testing, which is a big part of why this model was a clear favorite.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer

Read our full review: Snow Joe 24V-X2-SB18 48V Ionmax Snow Blower

Get the Snow Joe single-stage snow blower at Amazon (with cover and scraper), Walmart, Best Buy, or Blain’s Farm & Fleet.

Best Overall Gas

Troy-Bilt Squall 208E 21" Snow Blower

 The Best Single-Stage Snow Blower Option: Troy-Bilt Squall 208E 21-Inch Snow Blower
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Easy to start, runs efficiently, and is impressively quiet
  • Auger throws snow with remarkable force
  • Fairly affordable for a high-quality gas-powered snow blower

What We Don’t Like

  • Wheels may be too small for deep snow

Specs

  • Type Gas
  • Weight 100 pounds
  • Clearing width 21 inches

The Squall is a smooth-running unit with an efficient 208 cubic centimeter (cc) 4-stroke engine, meaning it doesn’t require users to mix oil and gas as with a 2-stroke machine. Its user-friendly design features an easily accessible gas-fill neck and an oil fill that doesn’t require any manipulation of the machine or leveling. The unit’s electric start performed flawlessly, repeatedly firing up on the first push.

During testing, we really appreciated how quiet the engine ran and how easy it was to push this snow blower around, especially considering how loud and heavy gas models can be. We were impressed with the auger’s ability to virtually vacuum up snow before projecting it through the chute at high speeds. While its standard-size half-gallon fuel tank may seem small, the machine’s efficiency allowed us to clear multiple properties without needing to refill. The 100-pound machine pushed along easily, even though its wheels are smaller than is ideal for deep snow. Overall, however, this gas snow blower is perfect for moderate storms and snow loads under 12 inches. 

What our tester says: “We tested several gas models that performed exceptionally well, so assigning this award wasn’t easy. Ultimately, the Troy-Bilt Squall took the top prize, but we think shoppers will also want to take a hard look at the Toro self-propelled model. Both snow blower brands excel in the gas snow blower design with reliable engines and smooth functionality.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Troy-Bilt single-stage snow blower at The Home Depot, Walmart, or Northern Tool + Equipment

Best Bang For The Buck

Greenworks 13-Amp 20" Corded Snow Thrower

 The Best Single-Stage Snow Blower Option: Greenworks 13-Amp 20-Inch Corded Snow Thrower
Photo: Walmart

What We Like

  • Clears a 20-inch swath of snow with each pass
  • Discharge chute throws snow up to 20 feet
  • Rubber auger blades don’t damage pavement
  • Attractive and affordable price point

What We Don’t Like

  • Corded operation can be inconvenient
  • Requires an extension cord, which is not included

Specs

  • Type Corded electric
  • Weight 32 pounds
  • Clearing width 20 inches

At just 32 pounds, this corded electric Greenworks 20-inch snow thrower is almost a mini snow blower, yet our tests proved it’s powerful enough for clearing snow up to 12 inches deep on small driveways, walkways, and decks. Though the manufacturer doesn’t advise operating it in heavy snow, we did try to tackle some deeper snow and found the ramping-up technique quite effective. The unit put out consistent power without requiring us to stop and recharge a battery. Of course, that meant we always had to be within access to an outlet, which generally involved using an outdoor-rated extension cord we had on hand.

While this model does have a clip that helps secure its cord to prevent it from accidentally unplugging, it was sometimes still challenging to wrangle the long cord in areas with multiple obstacles. Still, there’s a lot to like about using this unit to remove snow: its push-button start is convenient, and controlling the chute is simple via a lever located just below the handle. Although our model did not include LED lights, Greenworks makes a version with the option, which would make nighttime snow removal much easier.

Get the Greenworks 20-inch single-stage snow blower at Walmart.

Upgrade Pick

Ego Power+ Peak Power 21" Snow Blower

 The Best Single-Stage Snow Blowers Option: Ego Power+ SNT2112 Peak Power Snow Blower
Photo: Amazon

What We Don’t Like

  • Large wheels make it easy to push
  • Throws snow up to 40 feet for clearing large driveways
  • Handles can fold for easy storage
  • Extended battery life provides plenty of working time

What We Like

  • Can be challenging to push up hills

Specs

  • Type Cordless electric
  • Weight 50.6 pounds
  • Clearing width 21 inches

For those looking to invest in a machine with some unique features, the Ego Power+ cordless snow blower could be just the ticket. This model can throw snow up to 40 feet, far exceeding many single-stage units. That impressive distance, along with the adjustable discharge chute and steel auger, makes plowing large snow piles easy—even in icy conditions.

This Ego snow blower features a 21-inch capacity, which is a bit larger than most comparable models. It comes with two 56-volt 5.0 amp hour (Ah) batteries that can power the brushless motor long enough to clear snow off a 12-car driveway. The adjustable throttle also allows the user to regulate the power and battery as needed. This unit even has a folding handle with quick-release levers that make it easy to store. The only downside to this Ego is that it is on the heavier side, but the extended battery life is definitely a plus that cannot be ignored. 

What our tester says: “During testing, this model performed exceedingly well. It was easy to operate and push, even over less-than-smooth terrain. We also enjoyed the folding handle with quick-release levers, as it made storing this model a breeze.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Read our full review: Ego Power+ Peak Power 21″ Snow Blower

Get the Ego Power+ single-stage snow blower at AmazonLowe’s, Ace Hardware, or Walmart.

Best Light-Duty

Wen 5664 Snow Blaster 18" Electric Snow Thrower

 The Best Single Stage Snow Thrower Option: Wen 5664 Snow Blaster 18 Electric Snow Thrower
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Lightweight, portable snow blower
  • 13.5-amp motor clears snow up to 7.8 inches deep
  • Can move up to 490 pounds of snow per minute

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires some assembly and an extension cord
  • Not designed for deep snow removal

Specs

  • Type Corded electric
  • Weight 32 pounds
  • Clearing width 18 inches

This 13.5-amp electric blower by Wen is a lightweight, 32-pound machine designed for use in small areas. It can clear an 18-inch swath of light to medium snow accumulation up to 7.8 inches deep and features a 180-degree rotating chute that’s easy to adjust with minimal effort. Despite its compact and simple design, we found it to be a powerful and effective tool for removing light snowfall as well as wet snow (if we gave it a little extra push). 

This Wen requires a cord to function, so it’s best in areas with convenient access to electricity—we found it most useful on our front steps and deck. The plastic auger worked surprisingly fast, and the throwing distance was more than ample for those spaces. We also liked that this unit has a folding handle that makes it easy to transport and store. 

Get the Wen single-stage snow blower at Amazon or Wen.

Best Medium-Duty

DeWalt 21" 60V MAX Single-Stage Snow Blower Kit

 The Best Single-Stage Snow Blower Option: DeWalt 21-Inch 60V MAX Single-Stage Snow Blower Kit
Photo: Ace Hardware

What We Like

  • Impressive 21-inch clearing path
  • Steel auger is tough enough for hard, icy snow
  • Electric controls enable quick throwing-direction changes

What We Don’t Like

  • Auger angle control requires manual adjustment

Specs

  • Type Cordless electric
  • Weight 59 pounds
  • Clearing width 21 inches

With this medium-duty model, DeWalt introduces some great features into the electric snow blower market. It’s one of the few single-stage options available that has a steel auger, making it great for chopping through ice and wet snow. It also offers an impressive 21-inch width so users can process more snow in less time, and its batteries provide about 40 minutes of continuous runtime. 

During testing, the DeWalt worked through light snow with no resistance, and once conditions iced up, it continued to do really well. We had to use a bit more effort as the snow got heavier, but the auger was more than capable and still threw snow reasonably far. We were also impressed by how easy it was to change throwing directions via this machine’s electric tab-style buttons. If you need a snow blower that’s a bit more powerful than a light-duty model but not as heavy-duty as a two-stage machine, the DeWalt is a great choice.

Get the DeWalt single-stage snow blower at Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware or The Home Depot.

Best Heavy-Duty

Ryobi 40V HP Brushless 21" Whisper Snow Blower

 The Best Single-Stage Snow Blower Option: Ryobi 40V HP Brushless 21-Inch Whisper Snow Blower
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • 21-inch clearing width and 13-inch clearing depth
  • Variable-speed auger throws snow more than 35 feet
  • Whisper-quiet operation and LED light bar
  • Handle-mount controls are comfortable and easy to use

What We Don’t Like

  • Not a self-propelled option
  • Plastic tires aren’t as durable as rubber ones

Specs

  • Type Cordless electric
  • Weight 52 pounds
  • Clearing width 21 inches

With its multiple batteries and 40 minutes of runtime, this Ryobi snow blower boasts plenty of long-lasting power and excellent snow-blowing capabilities. The 40V brushless single-stage unit comes with a push-button start, a variable-speed rubber-metal auger (the center shaft of the auger is metal while the blades are rubber), and handle-mount control for an overall ergonomic design. 

This Ryobi has a 21-inch clearing width, a 13-inch clearing depth, and a 1.4-watt LED light bar. It comes with dual 7.5Ah batteries as well as a charger. Want more? It also has whisper-quiet operation (purportedly 84 percent quieter than other snow blowers) and launches snow over 35 feet. 

During testing in a huge storm event in the Sierra Nevada mountains, this model really stood out. The batteries charged quickly, and it was capable of churning through heavy snow with minimal force. The charging port does only accept one battery at a time, but for most users, this is still a high-performance machine that will get the job done.

Get the Ryobi single-stage snow blower at The Home Depot

Best Self-Propelled

Toro Power Clear 721 E 21" Gas Snow Blower

 The Best Single-Stage Snow Blower Option: Toro Power Clear 721 E 21-Inch Gas Snow Blower
Photo: Tractor Supply

What We Like

  • Self-propelled 212cc 4-cycle overhead valve engine
  • Throws snow up to 35 feet
  • 210-degree chute features a locking deflector
  • Folds for compact storage

What We Don’t Like

  • For use on paved surfaces only
  • Heavy compared to similar models

Specs

  • Type Gas
  • Weight 84 pounds
  • Clearing width 21 inches

Those wanting to quickly remove snow without having to push a heavy snow-removal tool can rely on the Toro Power Clear 721 E. This self-propelled snow blower has an electric start and comes with Curve Technology that easily shreds through snow. Its auger is durable and strong, making this unit a candidate for pushing the limits of single-stage capabilities. The locking deflector on the 210-degree chute allows users to direct where the snow goes after it has been picked up. 

This Toro nearly snagged the best overall gas model, and it’s certainly one of the best and most powerful single-stage snow blowers we tested. The gas motor is powerful, efficient, and even relatively quiet. Though it’s not on par with electric models for reduced noise, the trade-off is that users won’t even need to wait for this machine to recharge. The fact that the Toro is self-propelled is a major bonus, as this will save users the effort of pushing through difficult snow. The only downside is that changing chute angles and throwing directions is done manually. It’s a quick process, but there are no controls within reach of the handle area. 

Get the Toro 721 E single-stage snow blower at Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, or The Home Depot.

Best Battery Life

Greenworks 60V 22" Single-Stage Snow Blower

 The Best Single-Stage Snow Blower Option: Greenworks 60V 22-Inch Single-Stage Snow Blower
Photo: Tractor Supply Co.

What We Like

  • 2 powerful 5.0Ah batteries and a dual port charger
  • Runs for up to 60 minutes; recharges in about 45
  • Folding handle enables easy transport and storage
  • LED headlights enhance visibility during heavy storms

What We Don’t Like

  • Not self-propelled

Specs

  • Type Cordless electric
  • Weight 65.5 pounds
  • Clearing width 22 inches

While battery-powered tools offer the convenience of cordless operation and minimal maintenance requirements, the compromise in power and runtime can make them impractical. Not so with this snow blower from Greenworks. The 60-volt, 22-inch model doesn’t look especially beefy, but its two 5.0Ah batteries really pack a punch. They deliver exceptional power and longer runtimes so users can work up to an hour to get big jobs done.

It’s hard to overstate the benefits of more battery power. We found the battery life to be a huge bonus during bigger storms and when the neighbors needed a hand with snow removal. The dual charging port also offers simultaneous or alternate charging for near-continuous use. 

Outside of the batteries, this unit also performed as well as any of those tested. It has great auger speed and throwing distance as it zipped right along, clearing a wide 22-inch path. It’s not self-propelled, but otherwise, we had zero complaints about the quality of this machine.

Get the Greenworks 22-inch single-stage snow blower at Tractor Supply Co. or Walmart

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Single-Stage Snow Blowers

We tested a range of electric and gas single-stage snow blowers in a series of Montana and Sierra Nevada storms. We evaluated each unit’s ease of assembly and functionality on concrete as well as light gravel, if applicable. We looked at overall performance, auger quality and speed, snow-throwing distance, battery life, and build quality. 

Since the storms during our tests delivered everything from a few inches of powder to a foot of heavy snow alongside temperatures as low as -10 degrees Fahrenheit, we got a great idea of how well these machines’ batteries and gas motors could hold up in difficult conditions. After rating each unit based on the above factors, we assigned awards to worthy models. 

What to Consider When Choosing a Single-Stage Snow Blower

According to Wes Bollingmo, Channel & Product Support Manager at Toro, one of the most important things to consider when choosing a snow blower is its type, and that doesn’t mean gas or electric. Wes says, “While fuel types do matter in the buying process, it’s much more important to ensure you have the proper type of snow blower: single-stage, in-line two-stage, or two-stage.” After that, you can look into things like power source, clearing width and depth, ease of use, and additional features.

Type/Power Source

The best snow blowers come in corded electric, battery-powered, and gas-powered varieties. 

  • Electric snow blowers are typically designed to clear light snow up to about 8 inches deep. They must be plugged into an outlet with an extension cord, limiting their performance slightly and making them best for minimal snowfall levels and relatively short sidewalks and driveways. Since they’re lightweight enough to lift and move, they’re also handy for clearing snow from decks and steps.
  • Cordless snow blowers are convenient battery-powered machines ideal for light to medium snowfall and spaces that can be cleared in 30 to 40 minutes. To extend this runtime, some models come with a spare battery that users can swap in if needed. Generally speaking, single-stage cordless models are lighter and more compact than gas units. 
  • Gas-powered snow blowers boast more power than electric and battery blowers and don’t restrict their operators to the length of an extension cord. They can clear away deep and heavy snow all along the driveway and then continue down the sidewalk and clear the neighbor’s drive as well. They’re generally more expensive and louder tools and also require more snow blower maintenance to stay operational across seasons.

Toro’s Wes Bollingmo does point out, however, that the power difference between gas and electric machines is becoming less substantial over time. “Thanks to recent technological advances, today’s battery-powered snow blowers offer performance comparable to gas models, making fuel type less of a deciding factor than in years past,” he says. Still, since power source can impact ease of use, it remains a relevant consideration.  

Weight

Weight plays a significant role in how easy it is to push or turn a snow blower. Though a large snow blower can clear a driveway in fewer passes than a small snow blower, bigger machines are harder to maneuver.

Most single-stage gas snow blowers weigh at least 80 to 100 pounds, while corded and cordless blowers weigh closer to 30 to 60 pounds. Those needing something lighter may want to consider a handheld snow blower, snow thrower, or electric shovel snow blower

Clearing Width and Depth

Before choosing the best single-stage snow blower, it’s important to consider the width and depth of snow the machine can clear with each pass. Most single-stage machines can clear paths between 15 and 22 inches wide—and the wider the path, the faster you’re finished. 

Intake height determines the depth of snow each tool can remove with each pass, and most single-stage snow blowers have an intake depth between 7 and 12 inches. A good rule of thumb is to choose a snow blower with an intake depth 2 inches higher than your area’s average snowfall. 

Wheels, Tracks, and Terrain Type

Wheeled snow blowers feature two large rear wheels that drive the machine forward, while tracked models have tracks similar to those found on a military tank. 

  • Tracked snow blowers provide significantly better traction in the snow, making them better able to climb steep slopes without slipping backward. Most tracked models are two- or three-stage snow blowers, as single-stage models typically don’t produce enough power to drive the tracks. They also operate more closely to the surface, leaving a thinner layer of snow and ice on a driveway or sidewalk than wheeled models. 
  • Wheeled snow blowers are easier to turn since tracked models don’t pivot. Wheel sizes for single-stage snow blowers range from 6 to 8 inches. Larger wheels perform better in deeper snow, while smaller wheels are easier to maneuver. While wheeled blowers are generally faster than tracked models, some higher-end tracked blowers offer faster speed and turn-on-a-dime technology that makes them comparable in speed and maneuverability. 

Terrain type will influence which of these design options is best for a specific user. Paved surfaces, such as driveways and sidewalks, are best suited for wheeled snow blowers. Tracked snow blowers are better suited for unpaved surfaces. Grade also has a significant impact; steep driveways require a snow blower with good traction and enough power to pull it up a snow-covered slope.

Speed Control

Speed control in a snow blower can refer to both the speed at which you can move the machine as well as the speed of the auger. Gas snow blowers can be quite heavy, so many shoppers prefer self-propelled models to make pushing them faster and easier. Battery-powered blowers are generally lighter and feature digital drive systems that help optimize output without unnecessary effort.

Blowers with variable-speed augers can be useful for adapting to different types of snow. If the snowfall is nice and light, increasing the speed at which the snow is scooped and thrown through the chute will make it easier to move the machine. For heavy, packed snow, you will need to slow the blower to give the machine time to discharge it without clogging. 

Chute Control

The chute, a curved, hollow tube that extends from the back of the intake on a snow blower, provides a route for the snow to be thrown from the machine. On most blowers, a manual crank or lever lets users change the angle and direction of the snow being displaced. 

Premium snow blowers, however, have auto-rotating chutes that users turn by pushing a button near the handle, which doesn’t require the machine to be stopped. The angle on some chutes also can be changed to allow the snow blower to throw snow even further.

Additional Features

Single-stage snow blowers often boast some extra features to improve ease of use. 

  • Electric start is a useful feature for gas snow blowers. This typically involves a push-button ignition that replaces the standard pull start and choke.
  • Heated handles may seem luxurious, but personal safety is an important part of working outdoors in freezing temperatures. The heat generated by the handles helps keep the user’s fingers warm in the cold air and makes it easier to hold and control the snow blower.
  • Drift cutters help clear deep drifts of snow. The cutter’s metal housing collects and pushes snow down into the auger for removal.
  • Headlights make it easier and safer to clear snow at night or in dim lighting.
  • Automatic safety shutoffs turn off the snow blower when the user releases the handle.

We asked Corey Welch, founder and CEO of Mow & Snow, an on-demand snow removal and lawn care company in Canada, which of these features he appreciates most on a snow blower. He said, “Headlights are a game-changer for early mornings or late evenings, and heated handles are a luxury that keeps your hands from freezing during long jobs.” Anyone looking to increase comfort and ease of use will want to look for a model with these features.

FAQs 

If you still have questions about single-stage snow blowers, we suggest you refer to the answers to common FAQs below before putting on your work boots and heading outside. 

Q. What’s the difference between single-stage and two-stage snow blowers?

The biggest difference between a single-stage vs. a two-stage snow blower is power. Most single-stage snow blowers can handle a maximum of 7 to 12 inches of snow, whereas two-stage snow blowers can tackle up to 2 feet. The “stage” term refers to how each blower removes snow. 

A single-stage snow blower has an auger that both gathers and blows away the snow. A two-stage snow blower, in comparison, has an auger that sucks up the snow and an impeller that launches it into the air. In addition to being able to remove deeper snow, two-stage snow blowers also have larger intakes that range in width from 20 to 36 inches. 

Q. What size cord is suitable for a single-stage electric snow blower?

The length of the extension cord depends on the gauge of the power cable. A 12-gauge cord will work up to 100 feet, while a slimmer 14-gauge cord only extends about 50 feet.

Q. How do I start a single-stage snow blower in the cold season?

Getting a snow blower started depends on its power source. Keep these tips in mind for electric and gas-powered machines: 
Corded electric: Plug the unit into an outlet and press the start button. These models take their power from an AC power source, so there are no issues with low-temperature start-ups. 
Cordless electric: Some electric snow blowers will not start if the battery is too cold. It’s a good idea to store lithium-ion batteries at room temperature to prevent this issue. 
Gas-powered: Gas snow blowers with a pull-start motor may be challenging to start in low temperatures. Make sure to use lightweight motor oil, such as 5W-30, which is designed to operate at low temperatures. 

Q. How do I change the fuel filter on a single-stage snow blower?

Periodically changing the fuel filter ensures contaminants won’t find their way inside the engine and negatively impact performance. The fuel filter is usually located between the fuel pump and fuel tank. 
Change the filter by removing the two hoses that connect to it, making sure to keep the hoses pointing upward to prevent fuel from leaking out of the tank. Install the new filter by attaching the hoses to the line leading from the fuel tank and the line leading to the engine.

Q. What fuel does a single-stage snow blower use?

A single-stage snow blower might use gas, corded electricity, or a battery as its fuel.

Q. Are single-stage snow blowers any good?

Yes, single-stage snow blowers are good, though they aren’t right for everyone. If you live in an area with light to medium amounts of snowfall and don’t have an especially large property, a single-stage snow blower can provide effective performance and affordability.

Q. Can you use a single-stage snow blower on grass?

The augers on single-stage snow blowers are designed to clear snow down to the ground, so using them on grass is not recommended. They may damage your lawn or even pick up debris that can damage your machine.

Meet the Testers

Zach Lazzari is a freelance writer splitting time between the great outdoors, travel, and DIY projects ranging from camper builds to home renovations and maintenance. His home base in Montana is the perfect testing grounds for winter products and snow equipment. With over a decade of professional writing experience, he also covers a variety of other projects and maintenance topics for Bobvila.com.

Tom Scalisi is a full-time DIY and construction writer for many of the largest websites in the industry, including BobVila.com, This Old House, Family Handyman, and Forbes. He also owns and operates a pest control blog called RiddaBugs.com.

Additional research provided by Tony Carrick.

The post We Tested 2025’s Best Single-Stage Snow Blowers and Found 9 Top Models You Can Rely On appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-10T18:37:23-05:00
<![CDATA[Keep Your Snow Blower Running Efficiently With These High-Quality Oil Options]]>Keep your snow blower in good working order and ready to go when needed. Read on to find recommendations on the best oil for snow blower upkeep.

The post Keep Your Snow Blower Running Efficiently With These High-Quality Oil Options appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-oil-for-snowblower/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=154594Fri, 07 Feb 2025 04:00:41 -0500ReviewsDIYDriveways & WalkwaysExteriorToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

High-quality oil for snow blowers helps keep your gas snow blower in peak condition, making starting and running it easier and smoother so you can clear wet winter weather quickly. However, knowing which oil type is best for your machine can be a challenge, so we researched dozens of popular snow blower lubricant options and reached out to an expert for their insights on choosing the right one. 

Based on our efforts, we learned that the best-performing oil should flow easily through a snow blower engine, even in the coldest temperatures, without leaving deposits and grime. That’s why we chose the Pennzoil Platinum Full Synthetic 5W-30 Motor Oil as our top pick: This synthetic engine oil offers excellent performance in extreme cold and washes away dirt as it flows through, helping extend the life of snow-blowing tools season after season. 

Read on to learn more about the features that make a motor or car oil appropriate for a snow blower, and see the rest of the best oils for snow blowers on the market today. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: Pennzoil Platinum Full Synthetic 5W-30 Motor Oil
    Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Briggs & Stratton 5W-30 Synthetic Engine Oil
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Valvoline Advanced Full Synthetic SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST FOR SMALL ENGINES: Briggs & Stratton 5W-30 Low-Temp Small Engine Oil
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR 2-CYCLE ENGINES: Klotz TechniPlate 2-Stroke Snowmobile Oil
    Jump to Review 
  6. MOST VERSATILE: Castrol GTX High-Mileage 5W-30 Motor Oil
    Jump to Review
A person using a snow blower lubricated with the best oil for snow blower option
Photo: depositphoto.com

Best Oils for Snow Blowers Comparison Chart 

Our Top Picks

Our top picks feature oils specially formulated for cold weather, and many also have additives that help keep snow blower engines free of harmful dirt and deposits. Any of the following recommended products will help keep your snow blower running smoothly.

Best Overall

Pennzoil Platinum Full Synthetic 5W-30 Motor Oil

 The Best Oil for Snow Blowers Option Pennzoil Platinum Full Synthetic 5W-30 Motor Oil
Photo: Lowe’s

What We Like

  • Suitable for snow blowers and car engines
  • 5-quart size has 2 handles for controlled pouring 
  • Protects for long periods of time

What We Don’t Like

  • Oil losses can occur with intense friction

Specs

  • Volume: 1 quart (other sizes available)
  • Configuration: 5W-30
  • Type: Synthetic

Seasonal machines, such as snow blowers, often sit idle for months before they are needed, which allows time for impurities and gunk to build up. However, Pennzoil’s Platinum motor oil washes dirt and deposits out of the engine as it passes through, helping to extend the life of the machine while ensuring it starts when the next snowfall arrives. As a fully synthetic clear 5W-30 oil made from natural gas, this pick can keep your snow blower engine up to 45 percent cleaner than standard oils. 

Pennzoil Platinum comes in 1-quart, 5-quart, and 55-gallon bottles, and buying a larger volume might be smart since it also works in car engines. Another thing we really like about this product is the 5-quart bottle has handles on both the top and the side, making it much easier to pour without making a mess.

Get the Pennzoil oil for snow blowers at Lowe’s, Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Blain’s Farm & Fleet.

Runner-up

Briggs & Stratton Synthetic Small Engine Motor Oil

 The Best Oil for Snow Blowers Option Briggs & Stratton 5W-30 Synthetic Engine Oil
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Helps maintain a clean engine
  • Suitable for use in other garden equipment
  • Enables a smoother snow blower start

What We Don’t Like

  • More expensive than similar options

Specs

  • Volume: 1 quart
  • Configuration: 5W-30
  • Type: Synthetic

This Briggs & Stratton 5W-30 small engine oil is well suited to snow blowers—its use makes starting engines in cold temperatures easier while also minimizing oil consumption. As a synthetic oil, it lasts longer (up to 5,000 hours in a snow blower) and stays thinner at lower temperatures than conventional oils. 

With a high-temperature viscosity rating of 30, this oil is also a good option for other 4-cycle small engines that operate in hot temperatures, including lawn mowers. The 1-quart bottle has convenient measurements on the side that allow the user to see exactly how much snow blower oil is left. 

Get the Briggs & Stratton synthetic oil for snow blowers at Amazon (2-pack), Walmart, or Briggs & Stratton.

Best Bang for the Buck

Valvoline Advanced Full Synthetic SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil

 The Best Oils for Snow Blower Option: Valvoline Advanced Full Synthetic SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Provides excellent wear protection
  • Slightly more budget-friendly than competitors
  • Configured specifically for cold conditions

What We Don’t Like

  • Bottle may leak if stored incorrectly

Specs

  • Volume: 1 quart
  • Configuration: 5W-30
  • Type: Synthetic

Valvoline 5W-30 weight motor oil is a synthetic formula with additives that provide 50 percent more wear protection than standard motor oils. The included detergents flush sludge and harmful deposits from the engine, which is significant for small 4-cycle engines that are used only when it snows. 

This snow blower oil’s low cold operating viscosity is ideal for winter-use tools, while its 30-weight high-temperature viscosity rating also makes it suitable for warm-weather machines like lawn mowers. This Valvoline product comes in a 1-quart bottle, but a 5-quart bottle with a pour spout is also available. 

Get the Valvoline oil for snow blowers at Amazon (6-pack), Lowe’s, Walmart, or Tractor Supply Co.

Best for Small Engines

Briggs & Stratton 5W-30 Low-Temp Small Engine Oil

 The Best Oil For Snowblower Option: Briggs & Stratton SAE 5W-30 Snow Thrower Oil
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Ideal for use in cold temperatures
  • From a brand known for high-quality products
  • Specially suited for small engines

What We Don’t Like

  • Quite pricey compared to similar products

Specs

  • Volume: 1 quart
  • Configuration: 5W-30
  • Type: Synthetic

Made by one of the best-known names in small engines, this Briggs & Stratton 4-cycle oil is specially formulated for use in small engines. The synthetic formula comes in a 1-quart container with a handy gauge on the side that allows users to see how much oil is left in the bottle. 

With its 5W rating, this snow blower engine oil works well in machines operating at temperatures below 50 degrees Fahrenheit. It also has a high-temperature viscosity of 30, making it suitable for use in warmer-weather motors like power washers or lawn mowers. 

Get the Briggs & Stratton 4-cycle oil for snow blowers at Amazon or Briggs & Stratton.

Best for 2-Cycle Engines

Klotz TechniPlate 2-Stroke Snowmobile Oil

 The Best Oil for Snow Blowers Option Klotz TechniPlate 2-Stroke Snowmobile Oil
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Made for temperatures as low as -48 degrees Fahrenheit
  • ISO-EGD compliant for engine protection 
  • Formula helps extend engine life 

What We Don’t Like

  • Reports of leaky packaging

Specs

  • Volume: 4 quarts
  • Configuration: TC-W3
  • Type: Synthetic

Made for cold temperatures as low as -48 degrees Fahrenheit, the Klotz TechniPlate Snowmobile oil is designed for with 2-cycle engines like those in ATVs, motorcycles, race cars, and, of course, snow blowers. It works with stock engines or modified ones made by all leading manufacturers, including Ski-Doo, Arctic Cat, Polaris, and Yamaha as well as C-TEC and E-TEC engines. 

This clean-burning synthetic formula is TC-W3 certified and ISO-EGD compliant for reliability and efficiency. It’s made to improve throttle response and prevent plug fouling and can be used as an injection oil by pouring it directly into the tank or as a pre-mix product by blending it with gasoline. 

Get the Klotz oil for snow blowers at Amazon or Klotz.

Most Versatile

Castrol GTX High Mileage 5W-30 Motor Oil

 The Best Oil for Snow Blowers Option Castrol GTX High-Mileage 5W-30 Motor Oil
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Provides immediate engine protection on startup
  • Lasts for extended periods and still look clean
  • Suitable for both cold and hot weather

What We Don’t Like

  • Bottle shape is awkward for filling a snow blower

Specs

  • Volume: 5 quarts
  • Configuration: 5W-30
  • Type: Synthetic

With technology designed to protect engines and improve performance, this 5W-30 Castrol GTX motor oil features Castrol’s sludge and wear protection additive. It prevents buildup, extending the life of engines both large and small.

Castrol GTX also makes it easier to get a pull-start engine running, and once you start your snow blower’s engine, the oil quickly coats it to provide immediate protection. Additionally, this option features the optimal 5W oil rating for winter use and a 30 high-temperature viscosity rating for hot weather. 

Get the Castrol oil for snow blowers at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co. (1 quart), The Home Depot (1 quart), or Walmart (1 quart).

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Oils for Snow Blowers

To provide shoppers with a list of top picks for snow thrower and snow blower oils, we primarily considered oil type and viscosity. 

Oil type: Synthetic oil is the best choice for snow blower motors because it can handle lower temperatures and resist breakdown better than conventional oil. 

Viscosity: Our recommendations are all variations of 5W-30, which is the ideal oil viscosity for snow blowers. The products we selected include budget-friendly versions for occasional use and heavier-duty options that come at a slightly higher price point. Most of the picks on our list are also versatile enough for other home and garden equipment and suitable for both cold and hot weather conditions.

What to Consider When Choosing Oil for a Snow Blower

The right oil can make the difference between a snow blower not starting because it has a gummed-up engine and one that kicks on without issue. Ahead, learn how viscosity, snow blower oil type, and other factors affect engine performance in a snow blower. 

Type

Gas-powered snow blowers use 4-cycle engine oil, a type of oil for snow blower engines that uses separate tanks for gas and oil, much like car engines. The gas fuels the engine, while the oil lubricates it. 

Smaller engines, such as those on chainsaws, have 2-cycle engines. This type of small engine uses an oil and gas mixture that goes into one tank. Don’t use 2-cycle engine oil in a snow blower, as it will not properly lubricate the engine and will damage it. The motors on electric snow blowers don’t require engine oil.

Identifying the right type of engine oil is easy. The oil container has “4-cycle” or “2-cycle” clearly printed on the label. Although some 4-cycle engine oils are labeled for “small engines,” they are actually the same oil commonly used in cars and trucks. 

Viscosity

Viscosity refers to the thickness of the oil. Higher viscosity oil is better at protecting and lubricating engines at high temperatures and peak load (high RPMs). Oil with a low viscosity remains thinner at lower temperatures, promoting better flow through the engine, making it easier to start and more efficient to run. 

Viscosity is based on a scale created by SAE International, formerly known as the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE). Motor oil has two viscosity ratings: 

  • The first rating—the “W” (for “winter”) after the number—represents the cold temperature viscosity. For example, an oil rated 5W flows better at lower temperatures than a 10W oil. 
  • The second number indicates the high-temperature viscosity. For example, an oil with a high-temperature viscosity of 30 stays thicker at higher temperatures. 

Since snow blowers operate exclusively in cold weather, they typically use SAE 5W-30 weight oil, which ensures the engine will start at low temperatures. Make sure to check the maintenance section of your operating manual for the proper snow blower oil weight for your machine.

Synthetic vs. Standard

Not all 5W-30 engine oils are the same. Some engine oils are synthetic, which means they use higher-quality base oils than conventional oils. Synthetic lubricants can generally withstand higher temperatures and resist breakdown better. This means synthetic oil in a snow blower will last at least 50 percent longer than conventional oil, so you’ll probably need to perform less frequent snow blower maintenance

Many synthetic oils also contain additives to help improve engine performance and extend engine life. Additives include detergents that flush grime and buildup and chemicals that coat engine parts to enhance lubrication.

For these reasons, synthetic oils are generally more expensive, often costing several times more than conventional oils. Still, proper maintenance of a quality snow blower will likely run you less than the cost of snow removal if you live in an area with relatively frequent snowfalls. 

Versatility

The 4-cycle engine oil that snow blowers use is the same oil used in any 4-cycle engine, which means it’s also an appropriate oil for lawn mowers, power washers, and even cars and trucks. 5W-30 oil provides adequate protection during both cold and warm weather. 

Engine oil generally comes in 1-quart bottles, which is ideal for snow blowers since they hold about that much. It also comes in 5-quart containers and large, multi-gallon drums, but since its shelf life is generally around 5 years, it’s important not to buy more than you need. To store 5W-30 oil, keep it tightly sealed in a cool, dry environment. 

FAQs 

Even though you now know a fair bit about oil for snow blowers, you may still have additional questions. For details on deciding which type of oil in a snow blower is best to use and how often to replace it, read answers to some frequently asked questions below. 

Q. Can I use synthetic oil in my snow blower?

Yes, synthetic options are likely the best oils for snow blowers. Synthetic oils are refined to run cleaner, leaving fewer deposits in the engine. Many also include additives that clean grime and sludge from the engine to improve performance. 

Q. Can I use car oil in my snow blower?

Yes. Snow blowers, like cars, are 4-cycle engines, so they use the same type of motor oil. Use a motor oil weight with a low-temperature viscosity rating, such as 5W-30, since snow blowers must run during cold weather. 

Q. How do I know which oil is the right one for my snow blower?

Snow blowers operate in frigid temperatures, so the most important factor to consider is viscosity. Use motor oil with a low-temperature viscosity rating, such as 5W-30, to ensure the snow blower starts easily and runs smoothly. 

Q. What happens if I put too much oil in my snow blower?

Adding too much oil to a snow blower, or any 4-cycle engine, will cause the oil to rise and come in contact with other moving parts around the engine, aerating the oil and creating a huge mess.

Q. How often should I change my snow blower oil?

According to Christ Urato, owner-operator of Urato Landscaping, LLC, you should perform a snow blower oil change “after the first 5 hours of use for new snow blowers, then every 20 to 50 hours of operation or once per season, depending on usage.”

Q. What is the life expectancy of a snow blower?

A well-maintained snow blower should last around 10 to 15 years, but actual lifespan will depend on build quality and frequency of use. Performing regular maintenance tasks and avoiding common snow blower mistakes will help your machine last as long as possible. 

Q. Should I run my snow blower out of gas at the end of the season?

“Yes, running it dry prevents stale fuel from gumming up the carburetor and causing maintenance issues,” says Chris Urato, a landscaper and snow-removal provider from Goshen, New York. 

Q. How long should you let a snow blower warm up?

If you have a gas snow blower, you can give it 2 to 5 minutes before use so oil has time to run through the engine and lubricate it. If you have a battery-powered blower, there’s no need to let it warm up. 

The post Keep Your Snow Blower Running Efficiently With These High-Quality Oil Options appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-07T04:00:41-05:00
<![CDATA[This Tool is a Must-Have for DIY Renovation Projects]]>The post This Tool is a Must-Have for DIY Renovation Projects appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/best-drywall-saws/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=419590Wed, 05 Feb 2025 12:25:53 -0500ReviewsDIYHand ToolsToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Drywall is light, affordable, and relatively easy to cut, hang, and repair when you have the necessary tools and supplies, such as drywall tape, drywall screws, and drywall saws. A handheld drywall saw or jab saw has a long, narrow blade with large teeth and a sharp tip specifically designed for cutting into drywall. These tools are affordable and easy to use, making them a great option for any DIYer’s tool box. 

Trying to take on a drywall installation or repair project completely unprepared can lead to a difficult, time-consuming mess. Like all tools, you will want to find a drywall saw that is durable, accurate, and effective so that you can accomplish any drywall cutting tasks with relative ease. Take a look at this list of the best drywall saws to find a product that is suitable for your next home renovation or drywall repair project.

Best Overall

DeWalt DWHT20540 Jab Saw

 The Best Drywall Saws Option: DeWalt DWHT20540 Jab Saw
Photo: Amazon

Pros

  • Comfortable contoured handle improves ease of use
  • Aggressive tooth pattern increases cutting efficiency
  • Useful for cutting drywall, plastic, and other soft building materials
  • Durable, induction-hardened teeth stay sharp for longer

Cons

  • Not suited for large, clean cuts
  • Teeth may tear soft-sided tool bags

Specs

  • Blade material Carbon steel
  • Number of teeth 8 TPI
  • Blade length 6 inches

One of the top considerations for every DIYer selecting a quality drywall saw is the design of the handle. This DeWalt drywall saw features a comfortable, padded grip with a contoured handle that minimizes hand fatigue so you can work for longer periods without worrying about your hand cramping up. Additionally, the aggressive tooth pattern makes it easier for the blade to slice through the drywall, reducing the amount of power it takes to control the tool.

At 6 inches in length, the blade of this DeWalt drywall saw is long enough to pierce through several sheets of drywall and make accurate cutouts for ceiling lights, electrical outlets, pipes, cables, or any other objects that might protrude. It can also be used for cutting plastic and other soft building materials thanks to the highly durable, induction-hardened teeth. Just make sure to store the drywall saw in a solid plastic or metal toolbox that can withstand wear and tear from the sharp teeth.

What our tester says: “The tip of the saw penetrates drywall easily, and the long triple-ground saw teeth cut into drywall cleanly without tearing the paper at the edges of the cut. I also found the cushioned handle comfortable, which made it easy for me to control the blade for straight or curved cutting.” -Mark Wolfe, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the DeWalt Drywall Saw at Amazon, Home Depot, or Ace Hardware.

More Drywall Saws Worth Your Money

A man working with one of the Best Drywalls Saws Option
Photo: Amazon

Whether for making cutouts in the ceiling for new lights or cutting out damaged patches of drywall for minor repairs, these quality drywall saws come highly recommended. Choose the tooth pattern and blade design that suits your next project, or opt for one of the folding drywall saws to make tool storage easier.

How We Chose the Best Drywall Saws

a man working with one of the Best Drywalls Saws Options
Photo: Amazon

In order to select the best drywall saws for this list, we researched and reviewed a wide range of products from the top tool manufacturing brands. From a pool of over 30 potential options we narrowed our choices based on durability, blade design, blade material, size, weight, and any additional features, such as a folding blade that would make it easier to store the drywall saw.

We aimed to choose a variety of blade styles and drywall saw designs to provide a diverse selection of top tools for this list. The price of each saw also influenced our assessment, though the most important factor we considered was the overall quality of each drywall saw. With this in mind, we eliminated products with weak blades, uncomfortable handles, and low durability until only the best drywall saws remained. 

FAQs

Before starting the search for the best hand saw to cut drywall, it’s worth finding out as much as possible about drywall saws and the right methods for cutting drywall. Otherwise, you may invest in a drywall or wallboard cutting tool that isn’t suitable for the project or that can only be used for certain aspects of the job, like an adjustable drywall hole saw. Check out this list of frequently asked questions about drywall and drywall saws to round out your understanding.

Q. Do you need a special blade to cut drywall?

Whether you need a special blade or not depends on the type of saw. When selecting a tool for cutting drywall it’s important to make sure the drywall cutting tool is equipped with a drywall blade for the best results. A utility knife is a common tool to cut drywall that can be used with the standard blade to make long, straight cuts. Similarly, drywall saws already have a specially designed blade for small, accurate cuts, though when paired with a drywall cutting blade, some of the best oscillating tools can also be used to make clean square cuts for those who prefer an electric drywall saw.

Q. Can I use a rotary tool to cut drywall?

Rotary tools equipped with drywall cutting bits can be some of the best tools to cut drywall. Jesse Andrews, owner of New England Home Pros, says “an electric rotary tool like the Dremel, paired with a drywall bit, offers superior speed and control for large-scale projects or intricate patterns.” You can also choose between a jigsaw vs reciprocating saw if you are looking for an alternative power drywall cutter.

Q. What’s the difference between Sheetrock and drywall?

Jesse Andrews, owner of New England Home Pros, explains that “drywall and Sheetrock are terms often used interchangeably, though Sheetrock is a brand.” This means that while all Sheetrock is drywall, only some drywall should be considered Sheetrock. Other drywall products may be made using a different chemical composition and can range from low to high quality, but when you are cutting Sheetrock you know that this material is made with a specific formula and is widely considered to be a high-quality product.

Q. Which side of drywall do you cut?

Part of learning how to cut drywall is understanding which side of the material to cut. Typically, drywall will have a light finished side and a dark paper side. Jesse Andrews, owner of New England Home Pros, says “when cutting, start on the finished side for cleaner, more professional-looking results.”

The post This Tool is a Must-Have for DIY Renovation Projects appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-05T12:25:53-05:00
<![CDATA[7 Brilliant Uses for a Thermal Camera Around the Home and Garden]]>The post 7 Brilliant Uses for a Thermal Camera Around the Home and Garden appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/diy/thermal-camera-uses/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=426444Tue, 04 Feb 2025 11:04:36 -0500DIYRepair & MaintenanceToolsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

When it’s a challenge to capture a suspicious home issue with a conventional camera that relies on visible light, consider reaching for a thermal camera that can create an image using infrared radiation. These cameras work by detecting heat that’s emitted by objects and organisms. The heat reading is then converted into an electronic signal so it can create a thermal image that is displayed on a video monitor.

Thermal cameras can be used to identify differences in temperature across the detection field, which is one of the main reasons why thermal cameras are commonly used by home inspectors to help find hidden issues within the structure of a building. Find out more about thermal camera uses both around the home and in the garden with this informative guide. 

Our Recommendation: TopDon TC005 Thermal Camera at Amazon for $469.99
The TopDon thermal camera has the ability to detect a wide temperature range—from -4 to 1,022 degrees Fahrenheit—with an accuracy of +/- 2 percent, making it possible to identify exactly where heat loss is occurring and where excess heat may be building up, allowing homeowners to pinpoint hidden problems within a home. 

Locate leaks.

Leaking pipes and plumbing fixtures can cause a serious amount of damage to a home if they are left for an extended period of time, but in many cases, leaks can go unnoticed when they occur behind walls. They can even be difficult to spot with a borescope. However, if you use a thermal camera, you should be able to find the location of water leaks by detecting a difference in temperature around the pipes. This method can also be used to monitor the drying progress of an area where water damage or leakage has occurred. It’s essential for the health of a home’s structure to make sure building materials can fully dry. 

A thermal image of a house with heat loss coming from under a large window.
Photo: Aitor Diago/Moment via Getty Images

Detect heat loss.

One of the top uses for a thermal camera around the home is to detect areas where a home may be leaking heat, which leads to inefficient heating/cooling and increased energy bills. Home inspectors commonly use thermal cameras for home energy audits. They scan walls, floors, ceilings, windows, and doors to locate where the home may be losing heat, so that you can improve the energy efficiency of a home by patching holes and cracks, adding insulation, and sealing small gaps.

Identify plant stress.

The top thermal cameras can be put to use both inside the home and out in the yard to help determine the health of the plants in your garden. Thermal cameras can be used to detect plant stress or disease, making it easier to identify potential problems before they can spread to the rest of the garden. Having this information helps gardeners determine the cause of the issue and take the necessary steps to correct the problem, leading to improved plant growth and better yields. 

Video: Schroptschop/Vetta via Getty Images

Find unwanted pests.

Another use for thermal cameras at home that often gets overlooked is helping track down pests both inside and outside the home. Using a thermal camera, you can detect areas of termite and ant activity, locate exactly where possums, rats, mice, and other animals may be in the roof, walls, or ceilings of the home, as well as find hidden burrows or nests in the yard. By locating these pests, you can then take action to remove any invaders before they can cause further damage to the property. 

Pinpoint electrical faults.

When there are electrical faults in the home electrical system, it can lead to fires and other potentially hazardous situations. By using a thermal camera, you can detect hotspots in the electrical system. These hotspots are typically due to overloaded circuits, faulty wiring, or other issues with the electrical components, so it’s important to take action as soon as possible to repair these problems to help reduce the risk of fires. Even if homeowners are unsure about the reading from the thermal camera, but suspect there is a problem, it’s a good idea to have a professional electrician inspect and repair the area. 

A person using a thermal camera to find air leaks around bathroom exhaust fan.
Photo: BanksPhotos/E+ via Getty Images

Inspect building structures and HVAC systems.

Homeowners and building inspectors can use a thermal camera when they are trying to determine why the electric bill is so high. The readings can identify any hidden issues within the home, like pinpointing where insulation may be inadequate or missing entirely. The thermal camera can also be used on the HVAC system and ducts to detect clogged filters, duct leaks, or components that are malfunctioning, making it easier for homeowners to take prompt action and prevent costly repairs. Additionally, thermal cameras can detect gas leaks that are otherwise invisible to the naked eye.

Assess outdoor heating and irrigation. 

Outdoor heating systems, like patio heaters, can be great for enjoying the outdoors late into the evening and during the colder months of the year. With a thermal camera, you can analyze the heat distribution to ensure your outdoor heating sources are evenly placed. Additionally, thermal cameras can be put to use on the lawn and garden to track where water tends to flow, allowing you to optimize your yard and garden irrigation for the best growth potential.

The post 7 Brilliant Uses for a Thermal Camera Around the Home and Garden appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-04T11:04:36-05:00
<![CDATA[The One Tool Every Homeowner Needs During a Big Reno]]>The post The One Tool Every Homeowner Needs During a Big Reno appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/diy/renovation-photos/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=425861Fri, 31 Jan 2025 15:32:08 -0500DIYSkills & TechniquesToolsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Renovating a home—whether you’re DIYing, hiring contractors, or a combination of both—can be a long, stressful process with many bumps in the road. To ensure it goes as smoothly as possible, you’ll want to capture the details by taking renovation photos. 

If you haven’t guessed by now, the one tool every homeowner needs during a home renovation project is a reliable camera. In this digital age, with so many camera options available (including on your phone), images speak volumes. Taking photos captures memories as you transform your home, plus those photos can be an indispensable resource for the entire renovation process from start to finish.

This article explains several reasons why it’s important to take a lot of photos before, during, and after a home renovation, especially the projects you’re DIYing. 

A DIYer taking photos of a renovation project in-progress.
Photo: Fertnig/E+ via Getty Images

Keep track of progress throughout the renovation project.

Probably the most obvious reason to bring out a camera during a renovation is to capture each step along the way. Progress pictures can help demonstrate what is happening and how quickly it is getting done. Seeing such accomplishments can help assure you that the project is moving along as planned or whether you need to step in and find out why the contractor’s progress is slow.  

“I always tell people to snap pictures every single time they visit the job site—yes, even when the lighting is terrible,” says Alice T. Chan, an interior renovation and design specialist, professional home stager, and home-selling strategist with the Southeast home renovation company Freemodel, who was also the co-host and designer for HGTV’s reality real estate show, Power Broker. “It feels like nothing is happening, or it doesn’t seem worth it. Trust me, those photos can save you so much stress (and money) down the road,” she says.

Progress pictures can also help track who is completing which parts of the project, especially when the work involves multiple contractors. They can help you tell whether the plumber, electrician, general contractor, or a subcontractor worked on a specific part of your house so you’ll know who is responsible for any mistakes. 

Finally, collecting photos can help you more effectively communicate with everyone involved in the project. You can provide clear feedback and avoid misunderstandings by sharing images with contractors. 

Have a record of what lies beneath the surface.

Renovation photos also can help you record what’s in places you typically can’t see, such as wires and plumbing behind walls and flooring hidden under carpet. “Taking photos will help you keep track of where the nuts and bolts of the home lie as you peel away each layer,” says Natalie Warady, who styles, stages, designs, and renovates homes in Colorado. 

“At each step of the process, you might need to reroute wiring or you might discover some hidden but important length of plumbing,” says Warady. When she found out that the only access to her bath plumbing was directly behind the kitchen cabinets, she had to reconfigure the kitchen design to accommodate access, and it helped to have pictures. “By keeping the images, you can track where you’ve been and also flag previously concealed areas that are important to know going forward in the process and if you need to gain access.”

Renovation with open walls to see plumbing pipes and electrical wires.
Photo: Ceneri/E+ via Getty Images

Recall product details.

A very practical reason to take photos is to have a record of basic information like brand names, model numbers, and paint colors that you choose throughout the renovation. You might think it’s easy to remember, but if you take a slow approach to renovating, lots can happen in that time. Having pictures of what products look like and their item or model numbers might save you time and hassle down the road if you need to replace or repaint anything, especially if disaster strikes. It is helpful to date each picture and include notes such as in which room the item is, as well as when and where you purchased it. 

Have visuals to show a contractor you may hire in the future.

Having photos of your home throughout one renovation can help if you ever decide to hire another contractor in the future. The photos create a visual record of the “before” and “after” that can help the next contractor fully understand what’s involved in the work they need to do. When you take pictures of pipes behind a wall, for example, this can inform a contractor whether work involves getting behind that wall. Not only will these images help the contractor better plan their work, but it can prevent an expensive mistake from occurring. 

Help celebrate your home’s transformation.

Completing a renovation is extremely satisfying, and documenting the entire process can make it all the more meaningful. “Taking a variety of photos throughout each stage of a renovation gives you something tangible to look back on and remember just how much your home has grown and changed with you,” says Amber Brandt, an interior decorator at The Coziness Consultant. Friends and family may also appreciate reviewing the photos as they admire your newly refurbished home or if you have a renovation reveal open house. 

Happy couple sitting on couch at home enjoying pictures on an iPad.
Photo: Hispanolistic/E+ via Getty Images.

Use the images if you decide to sell your home.

If you decide to put your house on the market, you’ll be grateful you have “before” and “after” photos to include in the listing. Showcasing the improvements you invested in might impress potential buyers and help you sell your home for a higher price and recoup a large percentage of the money you spent during the renovation. It also helps present the potential of the space in case the new owners want to make additional changes once they buy the house. Finally, the pictures can prove that you already addressed problems in the house, making it much easier for the buyers once they move in. 

Share photos with permitting agencies and insurance companies. 

In the event of damage or accidents during the renovation, it’s crucial to have pictures to send to the insurance company. Photos are also beneficial if you need to prove that you have taken steps to remedy a structural or building code issue that might affect permits or property insurance. Finally, images are also useful to submit along with a home warranty.  

The post The One Tool Every Homeowner Needs During a Big Reno appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-31T15:32:08-05:00
<![CDATA[9 Household Repairs You Can Make With All-Purpose Putty]]>The post 9 Household Repairs You Can Make With All-Purpose Putty appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/diy/all-purpose-putty-uses/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=426220Fri, 31 Jan 2025 14:42:01 -0500DIYRepair & MaintenanceToolsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Most of us associate all-purpose putty, sometimes referred to by the popular brand name Bondo, with auto body repairs. But this two-part compound that consists of a resin and a hardener isn’t just for cars. You can use it for a broad range of quick repairs on masonry, drywall, wood, and fiberglass. It’s a great alternative to wood filler for making furniture repairs, fixing chipped trim, or even patching damaged hardwood floors. You can also use it for less common applications, such as replicating broken-off furniture trim or patching a dented front door. Ahead are nine common and uncommon uses for all-purpose putty. 

1. Scratched Furniture

A DIYer sanding scratched furniture that she repaired with Bondo all-purpose putty.
Photo: Alistair Berg/DigitalVision via Getty Images

Wood filler is what most people reach for when it comes to repairing chips and scratches on furniture. But all-purpose putty has several advantages over wood filler. It offers more structural stability, so you can use it for large gouges and deep scratches. Since it’s stronger than wood filler, it better endures daily wear and tear. And unlike wood filler, all-purpose putties like Bondo don’t have sawdust mixed in, so it’s easier to get a smooth finish. 

2. Small Automotive Dents

A small dent in a car.
Photo: Jena Ardell/Moment via Getty Images

Probably the most common application for all-purpose putty is using it to repair small dents in your vehicle. It adheres well to metal (but not paint, so you’ll need to sand away the paint before applying it; then paint over it after). This repair involves filling the dent with putty, allowing it to dry, then sanding it smooth, so it’s even with the surrounding metal. Given that repairing even minor dents can cost hundreds of dollars, all-purpose putty offers an affordable option for repairing your car. 

3. Damaged Trim

A person painting over window trim repaired with all-purpose putty like Bondo.
Photo: valentyn semenov/500Px Plus via Getty Images

The corner pieces of trim and baseboards can take a beating from furniture and feet. They also often pull apart as the house settles and wood trim expands and contracts. Often these gaps are too large or deep to repair effectively with wood filler. Plus, wood filler can also take a full day to dry. All-purpose putty is a better option. After mixing it with the hardener, apply it to chipped corners, dents, and any other damage. Give it about 15 minutes to dry, sand it so it’s uniform with the surrounding trim, then paint it to blend in. 

4. Chipped Hardwood Floors

Scratches and gouges in a hardwood floor.
Photo: Adam Gault/Photographer’s Choice RF via Getty Images

All-purpose putty is also a quick and effective way to fill cracks and chips in a hardwood floor. Simply tape around the damage with a painter’s tape. Fill the gap using a putty knife, then remove the painters tape. Give the putty about 15 minutes to dry, then carefully scrape away any excess using a razor blade. Follow up with a wood floor repair marker kit to blend in the color of the putty with the surrounding wood. 

5. Cracked Concrete

A homeowner filling a crack in a basement floor with all-purpose putty.
Photo: Alex Potemkin/E+ via Getty Images

While you’ll want to stick with concrete repair products for fixing large cracks and damage to concrete, all-purpose putty is a quick and easy way to repair hairline cracks that aren’t structural. The repair is simple. Use a putty knife to fill the crack, and then give it about 15 or 20 minutes to dry. Once dry, use an angle grinder to smooth the repair out so it’s even with the surrounding concrete. 

6. Dented Front Door

A homeowner painting over a front door repair made with all-purpose putty.
Photo: LOUISE BEAUMONT/E+ via Getty Images

Metal front doors aren’t cheap, costing around $300 for a basic model and far more for elaborate front doors with glass panes, so repairing a dent in one with an all-purpose putty is a much better option than replacing it. “It has a pretty firm hold and works surprisingly well for patching or repairing any dents or cracks in metal surfaces,” says Carr Lanphier, CEO of improovy, a Chicago-based house painting company. The process is very similar to repairing a dent in a car. Rough up the area around the dent with sandpaper to give the putty something to stick to. Fill the dent with all-purpose putty, then smooth it out with a putty knife so it’s level with the rest of the door. Allow it to dry for about 20 minutes, then sand it until it’s flush with the door. 

7. Drywall Damage

A person filling a hole in a wall with all-purpose putty.
Photo: aabejon/E+ via Getty Images

Lanphier says he often uses all-purpose putty to repair drywall. It dries much more quickly than spackle, and you don’t need to prime it before painting it. “It works great, especially on painted surfaces like drywall just because you can paint over it and can even sand it down to get a more exact patch and flat surface for painting,” he says. 

8. Broken Furniture

A person fixing a damaged wood chair with all-purpose putty.
Photo: golero/E+ via Getty Images

You can make more advanced furniture repairs by using all-purpose putty to recreate trim and corners that have broken off. Press a piece of modeling clay or silicone caulk over a matching corner or trim piece that you want to reproduce. Allow the clay or caulk to harden, then fill with all-purpose putty. Once the putty has hardened, glue the piece onto the damaged area. Allow the glue to dry, then sand and paint for a seamless repair. 

9. Stripped-Out Screw Holes

A person screwing a screw into a hole repaired with all-purpose putty.
Photo: dreamtimestudio/E+ via Getty Images

Stripped screw holes can cause a real problem, especially on a door strike plate or hinges, or in other places where moving the hole isn’t an option. An easy fix is to fill that stripped-out screw hole with all-purpose putty, which dries hard enough to hold screws in non-structural applications. After applying, allow the putty to dry fully, then drill a small pilot hole into it to reestablish that stripped out screw hole.

The post 9 Household Repairs You Can Make With All-Purpose Putty appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-31T14:42:01-05:00
<![CDATA[We Asked 5 Renovation Addicts How They Would Spend a $100 Home Depot Gift Card and This Is What They Said]]>The post We Asked 5 Renovation Addicts How They Would Spend a $100 Home Depot Gift Card and This Is What They Said appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/diy/cheap-home-upgrades/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=425848Thu, 30 Jan 2025 11:03:00 -0500DIYEasy DIY ProjectsToolsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Imagine if you were given the chance for a $100 home update. What would you spend that money on? At first, this might seem overwhelming, but also an exciting opportunity that you wouldn’t want to pass up. We asked five serial renovators what they would grab at Home Depot with that $100. Here are their answers, which will hopefully inspire you the next time you are roaming the aisles at a home improvement store looking for the best items to enhance your home without breaking the bank. 

Older man hanging a ceiling light fixture.
Photo: Nazar Rybak/E+ via Getty Images.

New Light Fixture

Amber Brandt is an interior decorator at The Coziness Consultant. She believes that you can have both fashion and function in one home upgrade. That’s why she would spend the gift card on a new overhead light fixture or a pair of wall sconces. “Lighting sets the proper tone for tasks and ambiance, and naturally serves as a design feature or focal point for your room,” says Brandt. “Plus, a lighting upgrade is a simple and cost-effective way to transform a dated space into one that reads more modern and aesthetic.”

You can find her on Instagram @thecozinessconsultant

Paint and Painting Tools

It’s no surprise that a painter would choose to spend a Home Depot gift card on paint supplies. Bart Caldwell of Caldwell Painting in Cordova, Tennessee, thinks the best way to transform your entire home is a fresh coat of paint. “I would start with the Wooster 3-pack of brushes, which will be perfect for your trim painting,“ he says. “Next, I would invest in a good roller, roller cover, and rolling pole. You will also want to grab yourself a roller tray and a pack of liners. The last thing you need is a drop cloth.” Now you are all set to paint your house once you pick your favorite paint colors.   

You can find him on Instagram at @caldwell.painting and YouTube @caldwellpainting

Close-up image of paint brushes, roller, paint can, and paint samples
Photo: VisualField/E+ via Getty Images.

Knobs and Pulls

Lisa Mabey is a designer and founder of Lisee Ree Designs in Salt Lake City, Utah. Her years of design expertise have been honed and guided through both formal education and hands-on experience. After moving 10 times in a single decade, Mabey became adept at quickly and efficiently creating the feeling of home regardless of the dwelling’s condition or the length of time she lived there. She and her husband have completely renovated multiple homes to maximize the potential of each house to fit their family’s style and needs, and have overseen the design of multiple partial remodels.

When given a gift card, she would focus on the kitchen and bathrooms. “I’d update the knobs and pulls in a bathroom or kitchen,” she says. “Even if you don’t have a large budget, updating the hardware in your existing spaces can give you a huge visual return for very little effort no matter how old the cabinetry is. It’s a simple way to make your space shine.”

You can find her on Instagram at @liseereedesigns

Decorative Address Numbers and Front Door Paint

Natalie Warady styles, stages, designs, and renovates homes in Colorado. She is in the process of renovating her 1974 mid-century modern home, which has needed everything updated. She would like to use the gift card to help feel more satisfied with how the exterior of the home looks. 

“I think two purchases would help the exterior look less chaotic and more elevated,” she says. “First off, the address numbers on the home look like they were purchased at a craft store and hand-painted. I’d replace these with Everbuilt Modern Matte finish address numbers.” With the remainder, she would buy paint to freshen up the front door. “It is currently an odd shade of plum burgundy that doesn’t speak to the angular entry lines of the home.” 

You can find her on Instagram @natalie_warady.

Man powerwashing the outside of a house.
Photo: JasonDoiy/E+ via Getty Images. Jason Doiy

Power Washer and Front Door Paint

Alice T. Chan is a renovation specialist with the home renovation company Freemodel. She has spent nearly two decades working with real estate and homeowner clients as an interior renovation and design specialist, professional home stager, and home selling strategist throughout the San Francisco Bay Area. She was also the co-host and designer for HGTV’s reality real estate show, Power Broker.

“If you’re ready to kick off your home renovation and build some momentum, start with your home’s exterior,” she advises. “A quick refresh outside will inspire you to continue the transformation inside.”

Her Home Depot gift card wish includes a power washer and paint for the front door. “First, rent a power washer. A 4-hour rental costs $55. Use it to blast away dirt and grime from your house, porch, walkways, driveway, and other hardscapes. Trust me, this is one of the most satisfying home maintenance projects you’ll ever do.” Mind the clock, though, because your $100 home update budget covers only a 4-hour rental. “With $45 left in your budget, grab a gallon of semi-gloss black paint and give your front door a fresh look. It’s a minor update that instantly boosts curb appeal.” 

Bonus tip: If you can borrow a power washer from a friend, then Chan recommends using that $55 to upgrade your porch light fixture. “A modern fixture can transform your entryway,” she says.

You can find her on Instagram @alicetchan/

The post We Asked 5 Renovation Addicts How They Would Spend a $100 Home Depot Gift Card and This Is What They Said appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-30T11:03:00-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Ratchets Based on Our Hands-on Tests]]>Any builder or mechanic will tell you there’s a difference between high-end low-quality ratchets. See which models rank among the best ratchet options.

The post The Best Ratchets Based on Our Hands-on Tests appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-ratchet/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-ratchet/Wed, 29 Jan 2025 09:37:02 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsWorkshopWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Whether you’re tackling auto repairs or tightening fasteners on DIY projects, a good ratchet can save time. A ratchet is a socket wrench designed to tighten or loosen fasteners quickly while bypassing the need to manually reposition the tool after each turn. After researching over 30 best-selling ratchets on the market, we selected nine for our lineup. Of those nine, we tested the top five on vehicle bolts and other fasteners in our workshop to see if they lived up to their manufacturer’s claims.

While all the ratchets performed well, we found a clear favorite—the DeWalt ⅜-Inch Quick-Release Ratchet. We especially appreciated its 5-degree arc swing, a quick-release button for easy socket changes, and an anti-slip handle for control. 

Basic as these hand tools are, they’re not one-size-fits-all, so it’s important to find a ratchet that best suits the task at hand. There’s a big difference between a high-end ratchet and a low-quality one. In this guide, we’ll explain what to look for in a ratchet and share how the following models earned a spot on this lineup of the best ratchets.

  1. BEST OVERALL: DeWalt ⅜-Inch Quick-Release Ratchet
     Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Ares ¼-inch Reversible Ratchet
     Jump to Review
  3. BEST ERGONOMIC: Tekton ¼-Inch Composite Quick-Release Ratchet
     Jump to Review
  4. BEST FLEX HEAD: Gearwrench ½-inch Flex Head Locking Ratchet
     Jump to Review
  5. BEST ELECTRIC: Makita 18V LXT Lithium-Ion Cordless Ratchet Kit
     Jump to Review
  6. BEST HANDLE: Neiko ⅜-Inch Drive Extendable Ratchet
     Jump to Review
  7. BEST RECHARGEABLE: ACDelco Power 12V ⅜-Inch Cordless Ratchet
     Jump to Review
  8. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Ares ½-Inch Drive Ratchet
     Jump to Review
All Ratchets
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

Ratchets Comparison Chart

Drive SizeTooth CountMaterial Price
DeWalt Quick Release⅜-inch 72Chrome vanadium$29.99
Ares Reversible¼-inch120Chrome vanadium$14.92
Tekton Quick Release¼-inch72Alloy steel$15.00
Gearwrench Flex Head1/2-inch90Alloy steel$61.00
Makita Cordless⅜-, ¼-inchNAMulti-material$266.65
Neiko Reversible⅜-inch72Chrome vanadium$19.97
ACDelco Power⅜-inchNAAlloy steel, rubber$63.99
Ares Ratchet Set¼-, ⅜-, ½-inch90Chrome vanadium$48.12

Our Top Picks

Whether you’re looking to save a few bucks, invest in a premium tool, or need just a little more torque, there’s a ratchet for you. Find out how our tested ratchets fared below and, if one of those is not what you’re looking for, check out the untested ones we selected based on their ratings and reputation.

Best Overall

DeWalt ⅜-Inch Quick-Release Ratchet

 The Best Ratchet Option: DEWALT 3/8-Inch Quick-Release Ratchet
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • High-quality chrome vanadium steel
  • 5-degree swing is ideal for tight spaces
  • Quick-release button for socket changes
  • Smooth ratcheting action

What We Don’t Like

  • Only compatible with ⅜-inch sockets

Specs

  • Drive size ⅜ inch
  • Total count 72
  • Material Chrome vanadium

Our Ratings: Performance 4.75/5; Comfort 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.75/5

DeWalt is best known for its battery-powered tools, but the company also makes quality hand tools—and this ⅜-inch ratchet excelled in our hands-on tests. It features a quality chrome vanadium steel body that is sturdy and contoured, making it easy to grasp. 72-tooth-count gearing allows this ratchet to progress after only 5 degrees of swing. And, to help keep knuckle-busting to a minimum, we appreciated its smooth quick-release button on the rear of the head to simplify socket swaps. 

We found the directional lever easy to switch with just enough resistance to keep it in place. We fitted the ratchet with a variety of ⅜-inch sockets and used it to tighten and loosen dozens of fasteners. The ratcheting mechanism was smooth and efficient, allowing us to handle the fasteners quickly without having to reposition the tool. 
What our tester says: “This is an excellent all-purpose quick-release ratchet that easily handled every fastening task I threw at it, and it earned a permanent spot in my home tool kit.”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the DeWalt ratchet on Amazon or Blain’s Farm & Fleet.

Best Bang for the Buck

Ares ¼-inch Reversible Ratchet

 The Best Ratchets Option: Ares ¼-inch Reversible Ratchet
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • High quality at a budget-friendly price
  • Made from strong chrome vanadium steel
  • High (120) tooth count and 3-degree arc
  • Easy pull/push socket changes

What We Don’t Like

  • Thinner ratchet limited to light-duty use

Specs

  • Drive size ⅜ inch
  • Tooth count 120
  • Material Chrome vanadium

Our Ratings: Performance 4.5/5; Comfort 4.5/5; Durability 4.25/5; Value 4.75/5

You can enjoy the benefits of a ratchet without spending a lot, and we found a great deal on a high-quality Ares model. The Ares 42068 features a 1/4-inch drive and a 3-degree swing arc, so we were able to tighten and loosen fasteners in spots with very limited space. 

It’s designed with chrome vanadium steel to be strong, durable, and easy to clean, but it doesn’t have a quick-release button. Still, we had no problem removing sockets and putting new ones on. Just a firm pull on the socket was all we needed to remove it from the drive. 

Aside from its affordable price tag, the real benefit of this ratchet is its gearing. This model has 120 teeth, requiring just 3 degrees of swing. That helped us with fasteners in even the tightest situations.

The Ares ratchet best suits small fasteners found in electronics, appliances, and bicycle maintenance. In fact, we added it to our take-along bike bag, since there’s no telling when we’ll need to make adjustments or tighten bolts on the road. 

Get the Ares ¼-inch ratchet on Amazon or Ares Tool.

Best Ergonomic

Tekton ¼-Inch Composite Quick-Release Ratchet

 Tekton ¼-Inch Composite Offset Ratchet
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Comfortable non-slip grip
  • Ideal for light-duty projects
  • Slightly offset handle for maneuverability
  • Quick-release socket button

What We Don’t Like

  • Shorter handle limits torque

Specs

  • Drive size ¼ inch
  • Tooth count 72
  • Material Composite shell and chrome vanadium core

Our Ratings: Performance 4.5/5; Comfort 5/5; Durability 4.5/5; Value 4.75/5

Those looking for a ratchet that’s easy and comfortable to grip should consider Tekton’s ¼-inch ratchet. It has an ergonomic, non-slip grip that was easier on our hands than the bare steel models. We found it especially handy for tinkering with small, light-duty projects like audio/video, computer, and small engine work.

This Tekton ratchet features 72 teeth and a compact head that fits in tight spots and requires just 5 degrees to progress. It also has a slightly offset handle that curves and provides more room for hands and fingers, which was a real knuckle saver in tight spots during our testing. 

The body consists of a composite shell with a chrome vanadium core, making it fairly strong yet lightweight. We appreciated the quick-release button, which made swapping tiny, tough-to-grab sockets easier. However, due to the shorter-length handle, we weren’t able to apply a lot of torque, so this shouldn’t be the only ratchet in a tool kit.

Get the Tekton ratchet on Amazon or at The Home Depot.

Best Flex Head

Gearwrench ½-inch Flex Head Locking Ratchet

 The Best Ratchet Option: Gearwrench ½-inch Flex Head Locking Ratchet
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • 4-degree arc swing for tight spots
  • Locking flex head
  • Long, 17-inch handle for high torque

What We Don’t Like

  • Not for small fastener tasks

Specs

  • Drive Size ½ inch
  • Tooth Count 90
  • Material Alloy steel

Our Ratings: Performance 4.75/5; Comfort 4.75/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.5/5

Accessing hard-to-reach bolts just got simpler with Gearwrench’s flexible head ratchet. We tested the ½-inch drive model that has a 17-inch handle. This larger ratchet is a good pick for tightening and loosening lug nuts on wheels, and we appreciated being able to tilt the locking flex head to reach in tight spots that would otherwise have been challenging to access.

At 2.53 pounds, this flexible ratchet is substantial enough to allow us to apply high torque to remove stuck-on bolts. The ratcheting action is smooth, and the tool offers a 4-degree arc, which makes it worthwhile in spots where movement is restricted. 

The handle is semi-ergonomic, but one downside is the ribbing on its surface, which was uncomfortable when we really grasped it tightly. It could have been a little smoother to prevent it from digging into our palms. Still, this is a powerful tool, and with a pair of work gloves, you’ll never feel the ribbing. 

Get the Gearwrench ratchet at The Home Depot or Fastenal.

Best Electric

Makita 18V LXT Lithium-Ion Cordless Ratchet Kit

 The Best Ratchet Option: Makita 18V LXT Lithium-Ion Cordless Ratchet Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Interchangeable ¼- and ⅜-inch anvils
  • Electric brake for safety
  • Kit includes tool, battery, and charger

What We Don’t Like

  • Awkward directional switch design

Specs

  • Drive size ⅜ and ¼ inch
  • Tooth count Not specified
  • Material Not specified

We compared the Milwaukee cordless ratchet in a different hands-on test against other power ratchets and it took top honors in that lineup, so we wanted to include it here as well. It comes with two anvils (⅜ inch and ¼ inch bases) that pop in and out of the ratchet head to hold different sizes of sockets, so we could swap between the two sizes when testing various drive sockets. Along with the anvils, it comes with the ratchet tool, the charger, and a 2Ah battery. This electric ratchet also features a brake and an onboard LED light for illuminating engine bays and other dark spaces.

We liked that it had a lower-profile head than some of the other large ratchets, so it could sneak into spots the others couldn’t. However, we thought the directional switch was a little wonky. It’s a tiny lever that could potentially catch on wires or hoses.

What our tester says: “This Makita battery ratchet proved to be my favorite tool during testing. It was more or less on par with the others in terms of power, but its speed really set it apart.” —Tom Scalisi, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Makita cordless ratchet at Amazon or The Home Depot.

More Great Options

We didn’t test the following ratchets, but they made our shortlist based on quality, reported performance, and consumer reviews. If you haven’t found a ratchet that fits your individual needs yet, check these out.

Best Handle

Neiko ⅜-Inch Drive Extendable Ratchet

 Neiko ⅜-Inch Drive Extendable Ratchet
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Telescoping handles adjusts for length
  • Rubber grip provides a secure grasp
  • 5-degree arc swing

What We Don’t Like

  • Heavier than other models

Specs

  • Drive size ⅜ inch
  • Tooth count 72
  • Material Chrome vanadium and rubber

Home mechanics who want a bit more comfort and flexibility from their ratchet should consider this ⅜-inch extendable ratchet from Neiko. We like that it’s made from high-quality chrome vanadium and features a sure-grip rubber handle that telescopes for different fastening projects. Simply pull back on the handle’s collar and extend it to the desired length; when released, the locking collar will maintain the length of the handle. It adjusts from 8½ to 12⅜ inches. 

The handle’s rubber grip promotes comfort and offers a good grasp in wet or greasy conditions. Also, this model’s 72-tooth gear requires smaller ratchet increments (just 5 degrees)—something that can be important with the handle extended to reduce unnecessary movement. However, we think the weight of this ratchet might lead to hand fatigue with repeated use. While this Neiko is capable in nearly any scenario, DIYers might want to own a lighter model for long ratcheting jobs as well.

Get the Neiko ratchet on Amazon.

Best Rechargeable

ACDelco Power 12V ⅜-Inch Cordless Ratchet

 ACDelco Power 12V ⅜-Inch Cordless Ratchet
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • 12-volt battery operated ratchet
  • Provides up to 100 pounds of torque
  • Low-profile design for tight spots

What We Don’t Like

  • Not suited to heavy-duty work

Specs

  • Drive size ⅜ inch
  • Tooth count Not specified
  • Material Alloy steel, rubber

For DIYers who don’t mind spending a little extra cash for added convenience, we suggest the ACDelco Power 12V ⅜-inch cordless ratchet. This tool all but eliminates scraped knuckles and unnecessary movements. It uses a 12-volt battery to power the ratcheting function, allowing users to work faster and more efficiently.

This cordless ratchet is handy for tightening bolts in narrow locations. We really like its low-profile design, which isn’t much larger than a typical ratchet. It’s also useful for dealing with multiple fasteners over the course of a project, and it comes with seven sockets and a ¼-inch drive adapter.

Alone, the ACDelco provides 45 pounds of torque, which is more than enough to snug a bolt initially. Users can then apply up to 100 pounds of torque by hand to tighten the bolt all the way. But since 100 pounds is its maximum torque output—which is plenty for lawn mowers, bikes, and regular shop use—it won’t cut the mustard for heavy-duty work on trucks, trailers, or professional applications.

Get the ACDelco ratchet on Amazon or at Walmart.

Best Heavy-Duty

Ares ½-Inch Drive Ratchet

 Ares ½-Inch Drive Ratchet
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Heavy-duty construction
  • Quick-release button
  • Available in a 3-piece ratcheting wrenches set​

What We Don’t Like

  • Smooth handle doesn’t offer much grip

Specs

  • Drive Size ½ inch
  • Tooth count 90
  • Material Chrome vanadium

When it comes to stubborn bolts and heavy-duty work, we think the Ares ½-inch drive ratchet could be the go-to tool for getting the job done. This ratchet accepts ½-inch sockets and is built to withstand plenty of torque. 

The Ares ratchet features a chrome vanadium body and long handle, making it strong and helpful for applying torque. Yet, this model also retains some of the convenience of smaller models, thanks to features like its 90-tooth count that requires only 4 degrees of rotation and a quick-release button that makes it easier to remove heavy-duty sockets. The smooth grip, however, may become an issue if users exert a lot of pressure: the absence of texture could cause a hand to slip, so we suggest wearing non-slip gloves when using this ratchet in high-torque situations.

Get the Ares ½-inch ratchet on Amazon or Ares Tool.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose and Tested the Best Ratchets

Tekton Ratchet Wrench
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

In compiling this guide, we performed extensive product research to collect some of the best ratchets on the market for comparison. We compared their prices, features, and fabrication materials to ensure they had what it took to make the list. 

While we considered over 30 highly-rated ratchets, we eventually narrowed our choices down to what we felt were the best eight, and then we selected the top five for hands-on testing. We set up a testing area in our workshop where we inserted various-sized nuts through holes we drilled in boards and fitted them with corresponding bolts. We secured the bolts as tightly as possible with the ratchets and then loosened them, noting how easy and effective each model performed. 

We also tested the ratchets in real-world situations by loosening and tightening fasteners on our cars and motorcycles. We sought out bolts in tight spots and even found some frozen bolts to see if we could break them loose using the correct sockets. We awarded points based on a rubric—the better a ratchet performed on a test or assessment, the higher the points. After testing, we averaged the points to find the best overall ratchet and to categorize the others according to their ideal uses.

Products tested 5
Time spent testing 3 days
Tests performed4
Price range$15 to $300
PerformanceComfortDurabilityValue
DeWalt Quick Release4.75554.75
Ares Reversible4.54.54.254.75
Tekton Quick Release4.554.54.75
Gearwrench Flex Head4.754.7554.5

What to Consider When Choosing the Best Ratchet

Ares Rachet on Husqvarna weed whacker
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

While most ratchets follow a very similar exterior design, things do differ internally between them. If shoppers consider features such as size, material, and convenience, they’ll soon see that not all ratchets are built to the same standards.

A ratchet has a rotating gear inside its gear head and two levers (known as pawls) that catch the gear’s teeth. One pawl, when engaged, tightens the nut or bolt, while the other pawl is used to loosen a fastener as the user turns the handle. A ratcheting wrench is not the same as a torque wrench, although torque wrenches often have a ratcheting movement. 

Drive Size vs. Socket Size

Shoppers need to understand two measurements when it comes to ratchets: drive size and socket size. Drive size refers to the size of the sockets that fit on the ratchet’s drive square (the square head that sockets snap onto). Socket size simply refers to the size of the nut or bolt that a particular socket was intended for, describing the open end of the socket. 

The three common drive sizes that most DIYers will become familiar with over time are ¼ inch, ⅜ inch, and ½ inch (those larger than ½ inch are more common for boilermakers and pipefitters than DIYers). The smaller the drive size, the lighter the duty that the ratchet was intended for. 

If a shopper is going to buy just one of these tools, they should consider a ⅜-inch drive ratchet with compatible sockets. These ratchets are small enough to fit in tight places, like alongside an engine block or the underside of a dishwasher, but robust enough to withstand quite a bit of force. 

Tooth Count

Tooth count refers to the number of notches in the ratcheting gear inside the ratchet’s head—a number that makes a big difference depending on use. A ratchet with a high tooth count (72 teeth and up) means that less handle movement is required for progress, while a lower tooth count (as few as 32 teeth) requires a lot more room to manipulate the ratchet handle and turn the fastener. This is often expressed in degrees, indicating how far a handle must rotate in order for the pawl to pick up the next tooth and continue making progress:

  • 90 teeth: 4 degrees
  • 72 teeth: 5 degrees
  • 60 teeth: 6 degrees
  • 32 teeth: 11+ degrees

Users will appreciate a high tooth count in tight scenarios where their range of motion is limited, like inside a car’s wheel well during a brake job. The ratchet can be twisted in smaller increments to make progress on the fastener, whether tightening or loosening.

Socket Release

Most ratchets on the market today include a quick-release button on the backside of the ratchet head. This button releases the socket from the face of the tool, making for a convenient way to swap sockets for differently-sized fasteners without pulling the socket off by hand.

Without this feature, a user will have to pull the socket off with their free hand—and in tight quarters, like while working under a car, they run the risk of smashing a hand into something when the socket pops loose. What’s more, greasy hands simply make socket removal for snap on ratchets frustrating. Even sockets with nonslip textures can be challenging to remove with just a little oil on their surface.

Quick-release ratchets are safer and easier to use. It’s a good idea to oil them regularly to keep them working smoothly.

Length and Weight

The longer the ratchet handle, the easier it will be to apply torque to a fastener. While a longer handle will require less effort to release a bolt, it also makes overtightening the fastener possible, potentially stripping or tearing the head off. Most ratchet handles are designed for optimum torque application—meaning they’re long enough to apply leverage and loosen a bolt but not so long that the fastener is destroyed with marginal effort

Another consideration related to length is whether the user will be able to manipulate the ratchet in a given position. A long-handled ratchet can be near useless under the hood of a car, while a thinner ratchet with a short handle can fit almost anywhere.

In terms of weight, heavier ratchets will obviously fatigue the user faster. Keep in mind that when working overhead, such as when driving lag screws through a deck’s ledger board, even a lightweight ratchet can feel heavy and cumbersome. It’s generally best to purchase a high quality, lightweight model that can get the job done without tiring the user out. 

Material

Almost all ratchets on the market today are built from chrome vanadium steel, but quality varies. Chrome vanadium is an alloy—a combination of metals designed to deliver particular attributes, such as shock resistance, strength, weight, and other characteristics, as well as cost savings.

As these alloys are essentially the result of a metallurgic recipe, they vary in quality depending on the amounts of materials combined. This is why users are far more likely to get the best combination of strength, durability, and weight if they purchase a high-quality ratchet from a trusted brand. 

FAQs

You’ve learned about the different types and styles of ratchets, as well as some excellent choices, but you might still have some questions on usage and size. Most of these questions apply to all models, but you can also contact the manufacturer with any questions that aren’t covered here.of these heavy-duty models can exert, it may be necessary to choose a set of impact-ready sockets.

Q. How does a ratchet work?

Ratchets have a rotating gear inside their heads and two levers (known as pawls) that catch the gear’s teeth. One pawl engages, determining which direction the gear can spin freely.

Q. What size ratchet should I buy?

Your best bet is to pick up a ⅜-drive model. They’re small enough for tight clearances but robust enough to handle some torque and pressure.

Q. How many teeth does a good ratchet have?

Quality ratchets generally have 72 teeth or more. However, ratchets designed for truly heavy-duty hardware, such as those on heavy construction equipment, may have fewer teeth in order to make each individual tooth more robust. In fact, some double-pawl ratchets are able to click 80 or more times despite having just 40 or so teeth. To apply the amount of torque some of these heavy-duty models can exert, it may be necessary to choose a set of impact-ready sockets.

Q. Do ratchets wear out?

Yes, they can wear down over time, especially with heavy or frequent use. The higher the quality, the longer they last.

Q. Should I lube my ratchet?

It’s a good idea to lubricate the ratcheting mechanism periodically with light machine oil or lithium grease to keep it moving smoothly.

Q. Do all ratchets fit all sockets?

No. Ratchets are typically sized to fit one of the three most common socket sizes (¼, ⅜, and ½ inch), although you can find ratchet sets with all three sizes and a few ratchets come with removable anvils to suit two or more socket sizes.

Meet the Testers

Glenda Taylor is a contractor, product tester, and writer focusing primarily on construction, DIY tools, and home appliances.

Tom Scalisi is a full-time DIY and construction writer for many of the largest websites in the industry, including BobVila.com, This Old House, Family Handyman, and Forbes.

The post The Best Ratchets Based on Our Hands-on Tests appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-29T09:37:02-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Dowel Jigs for Your Workshop, Tested and Reviewed]]>The best dowel jigs quickly create strong, accurate joints. We put our top picks to the test to see which performed to our standards.

The post The Best Dowel Jigs for Your Workshop, Tested and Reviewed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-dowel-jig/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=162755Thu, 23 Jan 2025 14:25:33 -0500DIYToolsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

When it comes to wood joinery, creating dowel joints is one of the easiest, most accessible options for DIYers to start with and an essential skill in a woodshop—but the right dowel jig can make this task even easier. That’s why we researched more than a dozen dowel jigs and tested six that should suit just about any level of woodworker, from a novice DIYer to a furniture maker.

While joinery has come a long way, with the popularity of pocket hole screws and glues that are stronger than ever, there is still a place in your garage or workshop for an easy-to-use dowel jig.

“There are tons of things around the house a homeowner can use dowel jigs to fix,” says John Mazzuca of Gambrick Construction, a Point Pleasant, New Jersey–based custom home builder with 25 years of experience. “Over time wood chairs can become wobbly … and a dowel jig can [help you] drill new holes into the chair’s legs and back supports for dowels that will reinforce the joints and make the chair sturdy again.” Mazzuca says he also uses dowels to fix the shelving on bookcases or when the case itself starts to pull apart.

These woodworking tools can not only help you fix broken items, but they can also assist your foray into woodworking projects as they smartly align boards for things like cabinets, boxes, and tabletops. Here are the best dowel jigs, based on our hands-on experience, for a variety of projects.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Milescraft JointMaster
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Milescraft JointMate
  3. UPGRADE PICK: JessEm Dowelling Jig Master Kit
  4. BEST SELF-CENTERING: Task Tools Wide Capacity Economy Jig
  5. BEST DECORATIVE: Rockler Corner Key Doweling Jig
The Best Dowel Jig Options
Photo: Sal Vaglica for Bob Vila

Product Comparison

Bushing sizesMaterialsDowels includedDrill bits and stop collars included
Milescraft JointMaster¼, 5/16, ⅜ inchAluminum and steelNoNo
Milescraft JointMate¼, 5/16, ⅜ inchABS plastic and steelNoNo
JessEm Dowelling Jig Master Kit¼ inch, ⅜ inch, ½ inchAluminum and steelNoYes
Task Tools Wide Capacity Economy Jig¼, 5/16, ⅜ inch, 7/16, and ½ inchAnodized aluminum and steelNoNo
Rockler Corner Key Doweling Jig⅛, ¼, and ⅜ inchPlastic and steelNoNo

Our Top Picks

These top picks represent highly focused choices to make it easy for woodworkers to find the right combination of performance and value.

Best Overall

Milescraft JointMaster

 The Best Dowel Jig Option: Milescraft JointMaster
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Handles the 3 most common dowel sizes
  • Clamp grips work tightly
  • Includes edge stops
  • Spacers quickly center the dowels on common stock

What We Don’t Like

  • Using a screwdriver to adjust the jig is tedious
  • Does not come with dowels, drill bits, or stop collars

Our Ratings: Ease of use 4.5/5; Stability 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs

  • Bushing sizes: ¼, 5/16, ⅜ inch
  • Materials: Aluminum and steel
  • Dowels included: No
  • Drill bits and stop collars included: No

While there are jigs that offer a greater range of dowel size options, the JointMaster is hard to beat when it comes to utility. The boxed kit includes three sleeves to drill ¼-inch, 5/16-inch, and ⅜-inch dowels, which can cover most bases for DIYers. Plus, its smart design makes this jig our favorite. The aluminum body is stiff and won’t bend even when users crank down on the included clamp.

Like a lot of jigs, the JointMaster has indexing fingers to help transfer the location of dowels to make any standard joint. We appreciated the clear cast markings to help center the dowels in stock from ½ inch to 3 inches thick. Users won’t have to worry about those rubbing off with heavy use.

Milescraft included a detail a lot of other jigs leave out: a pair of positive stops that hook onto the end of a board to help with consistent alignment. During testing we flipped either end down to hold the work, enabling this relatively inexpressive jig to deliver accurate results. The jig is assembled in a 90-degree corner, but with a screwdriver, users can take it apart for instances where they need to drill a hole without the fence—say when clamping the jig onto a stair baluster or chair spindle. Users can attach the removable clamp to either half of the jig.

We found the clamp worked on most of our testing, but the Milescraft has a bunch of flat surfaces on its 90-degree body, so if extra clamping is needed, it wouldn’t be difficult to get a secure bite. The kit includes a series of spacers that help center the holes for common board thicknesses like ½ inch, ⅝ inch, ¾ inch, or 1½ inches.

Aside from the bits and stop collars buyers have to provide, the screws are a pain point. Users will need to loosen and tighten two Philips-head screws to swap out bushing guides, adjust the fence position, or break apart the jig. Over time, torquing down on the screws might strip the heads. Still, that’s a small bit of concern to pay for a well-designed and well-built jig that can handle a wide range of doweling projects.

Get the Milescraft JointMaster dowel jig at Amazon or Woodcraft.

Best Bang for the Buck

Milescraft JointMate

 The Best Dowel Jig Option: Milescraft JointMate
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Entry-level price
  • Drills holes for commonly sized dowels
  • Built-in handle makes clamping unnecessary
  • Lightweight and easy to store
  • Pegs help users find the center of boards

What We Don’t Like

  • Can be tedious to manually space holes evenly
  • Shape of the jig leaves little space for clamps
  • Does not include drill bits or stop collars

Our Ratings: Ease of use 3.5/5; Stability 3/5; Durability 3/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs

  • Bushing sizes: ¼, 5/16, ⅜ inch
  • Material: ABS plastic and steel
  • Dowels included: No
  • Drill bits and stop collars included: No

Milescraft’s entry-level dowel jig is about as basic as a dowel jig gets. The tough ABS plastic body has hardened steel bushings for ¼-inch, 5/16-inch, and ⅜-inch drilling holes in material from ½ inch to 1½ inches thick. Clear groves in the body of the tool indicate the center line of the dowels.

The overall design is very user-friendly. Out of the box, we used the four posts sticking up from the face to help center the dowel holes on the edge or end of a board—any time measuring isn’t required is a good thing. We were able to hold the JointMate in one hand and drill a centered hole for the dowel with the other. It would probably be easier if the work was held in a vice, but for quick work, the setup is very fast. The adjustable fence, in conjunction with fingers molded in the front of the tool, allowed us to index the Milescraft on a dowel pin and then transfer the hole’s location to a mating board, so while this is an inexpensive tool, if users take their time with it, they can get accurate results.

During testing, the lightweight plastic felt durable and comfortable in hand. While it helps drill three common dowel diameters, it can take a bit of fussy measuring to evenly space those holes across the width of very long boards, like a tabletop. But for smaller work, where users might only need four or five dowels to line up, this is a great entry-level solution.

The JointMate is a good buy at around $10, but it doesn’t include additional building pieces, such as clamps, drill bits, and stop collars. Milescraft offers a kit version of this tool, which includes drill bits and stop collars, starter dowels, glue, and dowel center pins. That might be a better value for those who need to start building immediately.

Get the Milescraft JointMate dowel jig at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Upgrade Pick

JessEm Dowelling Jig Master Kit

 Best Dowel Jig Option: Jessem Model 08350 Dowelling Jig Master Kit
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Solid aluminum construction is virtually unbreakable
  • Provides the ability to drill 3 different-size dowels
  • Laser-engraved measurement markings
  • Indexing pins make it intuitive to position dowels

What We Don’t Like

  • Switching out the bushing sizes requires the hex key
  • Cannot clamp material

Our Ratings: Ease of use 4.5/5; Stability 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs

  • Bushing sizes: ¼ inch, ⅜ inch, ½ inch
  • Material: Aluminum and steel
  • Dowels included: No
  • Drill bits and stop collars included: Yes

The JessEm dowel jig is aimed at professionals, not because the jig is particularly complex—inexperienced woodworkers can handle it—but because of the variety and accuracy of holes it creates. With steel bushings and screws, this capable anodized aluminum jig works on a wide range of projects. Though it’s on the pricey side, the JessEm was the only one in our testing that came with drill bits and stop collars.

Joining end grain is always difficult, and most dowel jigs are not well suited for the task. However, with the ability to space dowels a mere ⅛ inch apart and a stainless steel indexing pin, the JessEm jig easily tackles the job. Users drop into the first hole, so any subsequent holes are accurately spaced no matter the size of the board. Proper clamping also helps achieve that kind of accurate repeatability, and we found that the flat surfaces of this jig provide ample clamping room.

We also liked the JessEm’s three quick-change sleeves; we didn’t have to change individual bushings to switch between dowel sizes. Seven ¼-inch bushings occupy one; five ⅜-inch bushings are on another; and three ½-inch bushings fill the last. The dowels can be set anywhere from ¼ inch to 3½ inches from the board edge, which is a unique attribute that provides fast, consistent spacing. The oddly shaped but useful U-shaped slot in the front of the jig can, with the indexing pin or a dowel, transfer a hole’s location from one board to another to ensure accurate alignment across edge-to-edge joints, 90-degree corners, or T joints.

The only downsides to this product that we noticed were having to supply our own clamp and keeping track of the ⅛-inch hex key required to switch between bushing sizes. Overall, however, we found that this well-designed product was a joy to use.

Get the JessEm dowel jig at Acme Tools, Lee Valley, or Infinity Tools.

Best Self-Centering

Task Tools Wide Capacity Economy Jig

 The Best Dowel Jig Option: Task Tools Wide Capacity Economy Jig
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Big but easy to use, especially on larger stock
  • Self-centering feature
  • The heavy build is accurate and should last a lifetime
  • Includes the rarer 7/16-inch and ½-inch dowels

What We Don’t Like

  • Can be cumbersome to work with
  • Does not help with transposing the dowel location
  • Doesn’t help users evenly space a series of dowels

Our Ratings: Ease of use 5/5; Stability 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value: 4/5

Product Specs

  • Bushing sizes: ¼, 5/16, ⅜ inch, 7/16, and ½ inch
  • Material: Anodized aluminum and steel
  • Dowels included: No
  • Drill bits and stop collars included: No

The Task Tools jig is a two-in-one for what can be tough doweling. Not only can it handle timbers and posts up to 6 inches wide, but it also centers the dowel holes automatically, enabling users to find the middle of round stock, too. The chunky screw-style vise makes this just about the easiest jig to use because it securely hugs any stock that fits within its jaws. The Task also has five fixed bushings, so it can handle a wide range of wood stock.

If your goal is to put holes in the center of stock, this is the jig for you because it does exactly what it says and with few moving parts. While using the jig, we noticed the hefty feel of anodized aluminum construction, which should last for years thanks to the rust-resistant coating. We also found it easy to attach the Task to wood pieces as thin as ⅜ inch thick, and the precise bushings were accurate through the range of sizes.

On the downside, this jig is not designed to help users transfer dowel locations from one board to the next. That means it falls on the user to make more accurate layout marks and a bit more patience to nail the location of mating holes. Plus, at well over 2 pounds, the jig can overwhelm smaller pieces of wood, which users might want to clamp into a vice to keep secure. During testing, we had to clamp a 2×4 to the work surface while drilling through the narrow end of the stock, which helped increase stability.

Get the Task Tools dowel jig at Amazon or Rockler.

Best Decorative

Rockler Corner Key Doweling Jig

 The Best Dowel Jig Option: Rockler Corner Key Doweling Jig
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Easy to put a decorative dowel through a corner joint
  • Wide body of the jig provides plenty of clamping surface
  • User-friendly markings; easy fence adjustments

What We Don’t Like

  • Limited use as a specialty jig
  • Does not include dowels, drill bits, stop collars, or clamps

Our Ratings: Ease of use 5/5; Stability 4/5; Durability 3/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs

  • Bushing sizes: ⅛, ¼, and ⅜ inch
  • Material: Plastic and steel
  • Dowels included: No
  • Drill bits and stop collars included: No

This specialty plastic jig comes in two pieces and is designed to put a dowel through a 90-degree corner, resulting in a decorative finish and strong connection on boxes and cabinets. Woodworkers often use a wood dowel that contrasts with the box material so the connection pops and adds a decorative touch. Other materials, like metal rods or leather laces (to tie the joints together), can also be used.

The jig is simple to set up out of the box with easy-to-read markings for adjusting the fence based on the thickness of the stock. During testing, the plastic and metal bushings were easy to swap in and out without a tool. Although the kit does not come with drill bits or a clamp, we liked the clear center line on the jig’s alignment window, which makes it easy to put the dowel right where users want it. This is a nice jig to have for more experienced DIYers who dabble in case work.

Get the Rockler dowel jig at Amazon or Rockler.

ALSO TESTED

Dowelmax Classic ⅜ Joining System

While we were impressed with the heft, quality, and precision milling of the Dowelmax, it’s a bit too complex for a DIYer. Setting the Dowelmax up takes a bit of time, more than any other tools in the test. While most dowel jigs might need a read or two of the manual, before shoving it into a drawer, a user will likely need to keep the booklet that comes with the Dowelmax (along with an instructional DVD) on hand.

It also takes way more attention to align the parts of the jig up to correlating parts of the wood, based on a check embossed on the aluminum. And also for the higher price, it can only drill ⅜-inch dowels. Other dowel guides are sold a la carte. For an experienced woodworker looking for a viable option to a biscuit jointer or floating tenon power tool, this might be a viable option, but for most DIYers, the Dowelmax would be overkill.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Dowel Jigs

In deciding which dowel jigs to test, we carefully evaluated the market and looked for reliable products with the most sought-after features. To suit beginner DIYers, we looked at price-friendly options that are capable of the three most common doweling sizes (¼ inch, 5/16 inch, and ⅜ inch). With pros in mind, we researched high-end models that include features such as laser engraving for durability and ease of use as well as precision-engineered joining systems that can help more experienced users produce better results.

After considering several products, we picked six to test and found five worth recommending to cover the needs of a wide range of users, from entry-level budget-minded buyers to experienced woodworkers.

We tested the tools for 3 hours over the course of a few days by drilling holes in commonly sized stock, making edge-to-edge joints that simulate a tabletop, 90-degree corners, T joints, and corner joints all in softwood using commercially available dowels. We evaluated ease of use, accuracy, and utility when judging which dowel jigs to recommend.

What to Consider When Choosing a Dowel Jig

Dowel jigs vary widely in shape, design, and complexity. The plethora of options can make choosing the right one difficult. The following section looks at several important considerations when shopping for the best dowel jig for a range of workshop tasks.

Intended Use

Dowels are used to secure several types of joints: T joints, 90-degree corner joints, mitered corner joints, edge-to-edge joints, and lapped joints.

While most dowel jigs offer a degree of versatility, they may not be suitable for all joint types. Learn the full range of functions provided by a particular model before purchasing one. Buying a basic dowel jig can save money initially, but experienced woodworkers may want to invest in a more versatile model.

Dowel jigs are sometimes described as basic, intermediate, and advanced, but this terminology can be misleading. An inexperienced woodworker shouldn’t necessarily opt for a simpler device. While the dowel jig may look easier to use initially, it might actually be more difficult to set up and lack the precision of a more advanced model.

Bushing Size and Material

The purpose of a dowel jig is to drill accurate holes in a piece of wood. Users then fit dowels into these holes and glue the project together. While exceptions exist, the hole for the dowel should be between one third and one half the thickness of the workpiece—any larger and the hole can weaken the joint. It’s also good practice, when drilling dowel holes, to leave some extra room in the pocket to accept any glue that will pool. Plan to leave about ⅛ inch of extra space on each end of the wood peg by drilling a hole that’s about ¼ inch deeper than the dowel is long.

To provide the necessary versatility, manufacturers typically offer a number of different bushes (or the drill guide) with the purchase. Basic dowel jigs usually include one or two bushes; more advanced models may provide up to six. Common bush sizes (3/16 inch, ¼ inch, 5/16 inch, ⅜ inch, 7/16 inch, and ½ inch) match the widely available dowels that come in economical packs of 100 or more.

On low-cost dowel jigs, the bushes may be made of low-cost, easy-to-produce aluminum; however, the hard steel of a drill bit will wear it out eventually. For those who use a dowel jig only occasionally, this isn’t a problem, but regular users will get more value from a jig with longer-lasting hardened steel bushes.

Clamping Performance and Accuracy

Handheld dowel jigs may be easy to position, but the possibility of movement always exists when drilling, which can cause inaccuracies and ruin the job. Many dowel jigs can be clamped securely in place to prevent movement from occurring. The clamping method, along with capacity, varies among different types of jigs.

Entry-level dowel jigs might require clamping, but the clamps often aren’t included. Some of the better dowel jigs clamp to both sides of the workpiece. Not only are these jigs easy to operate, but their drill bush frequently will center itself, which improves accuracy and also can improve efficiency.

Ease of Use

In principle, creating dowel joints is straightforward. Once users have clamped the jig or held it onto the workpiece, they’ll drill the dowel hole into the wood. Ease of use becomes simply about how quickly the jig can be set up and ready for drilling. The detail that makes a dowel jig more accurate, and therefore easier to use, is the method in which it helps transfer the holes from one board to the other. Most jigs do this without users having to get out a tape measure. A series of fingers nestle around an existing hole fitted with its dowel and then help users align its corresponding hole. This ensures accuracy so there are no surprises when gluing.

Every so often there might be a situation where the alignment fingers won’t work, and in that case, a few dowel center transfer markers can help. Offered in common dowel diameters, these pins fit into the holes in one half of the project. Then press the board into the mating one, and the pins on the markers identify the center of the correlating dowel holes.

Features like self-centering are a bonus for some woodworkers, as is a choice of six different bushes. However, those who usually work with similar-size lumber may not need to change bushes or accommodate different widths, so they don’t need a high-end model. While precise clamping is vital for some tasks, a low-cost handheld dowel jig is the right tool for others. The right jig for you is the right jig for your tasks.

FAQs

Q. How do I choose a dowel size?

When creating edge and corner joints, ideally, the dowel should be one third the thickness of the board you’re joining. While up to half the thickness of the board is permissible, don’t go any further. For large overlapping joints, size is rarely important.

Q. How far apart should dowels be placed?

It depends on the job. On end-grain material, dowels can be as close as practical to provide maximum support. On 1- to 2-foot boards, place a dowel approximately 1 inch from each end and 4 to 6 inches apart in between. On long boards, position dowels up to 10 inches apart.

Q. Do dowels need glue?

Yes. Dowel joints are intended to be permanent, so apply a small amount of glue. If you think you will want to disassemble your project at some point, consider using a pocket hole jig, which uses removable screws rather than dowels.

Q. How much weight can a dowel hold?

While many variables impact the amount, some experts in the field note that a 1-inch dowel can hold 3,000 to 4,000 pounds.

Q. Why are dowels often used in making an edge joint?

Dowels make it easy to align surfaces and prevent them from slipping while the glue dries, which can dramatically reduce the need for corrective work later.

Meet the Tester

Sal Vaglica has covered tools and DIY projects since 2006 for such sites as Better Homes & Gardens, Wired, This Old House, and Fine Homebuilding. A former hardwood flooring contractor, he prefers to test tools hands-on whenever possible by replicating the scenario readers might face at their own homes.

Additional research provided by Bob Beacham.

The post The Best Dowel Jigs for Your Workshop, Tested and Reviewed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-23T14:25:33-05:00
<![CDATA[This Tool Is a Must-Have for Every Homeowner]]>The best tape measure provides accurate results for your measurement needs. We put our top picks to the test. Read on to see which tape measures performed well and our shopping tips.

The post This Tool Is a Must-Have for Every Homeowner appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-tape-measures/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=100552Thu, 23 Jan 2025 14:02:52 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

The adage “measure twice, cut once” is key in all kinds of craft and construction projects—and following it is much easier with a tape measure. However, since tape measures are readily available in various types and at a wide range of prices, it’s hard to know which ones are accurate and reliable. To help you choose a measuring tape you can trust, we put 10 top options to the test and reached out to an expert for their insights on the matter.  

Based on our tests and our expert’s advice, we chose the Stanley 25-Foot PowerLock Tape Measure for its accuracy, durable construction, and reasonable price. We also found several other options that offer quality, precision, and the ability to withstand repetitive use. Read on for a breakdown of the best tape measures, their pros and cons, and things to consider when selecting the right tool for your needs.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Stanley 25-Foot PowerLock Tape Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Komelon Self-Lock 25-Foot Power Tape
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST POCKET-SIZE: Lexivon 16Ft/5m DuaLock Tape Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Craftsman 25-Foot Self-Lock Tape Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR LAYOUTS: DeWalt 100-Foot Closed-Case Long Tape
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. EASIEST TO READ: Milwaukee 25-Foot Compact Auto-Lock Tape Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST LASER MEASURE: DTape DT50 165-Foot Laser Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  8. BEST FOR DISTANCES: Komelon 300-Foot Fiberglass Open-Reel Tape Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  9. BEST METRIC: Zabiki 25-Foot Dual-Side Tape Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
A person using one of the Best Tape Measures Options
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

Tape Measure Comparison Chart

Product NameTypeLengthMarkings
Stanley 25-Foot PowerLock Tape MeasureCased25 feetImperial only 
Komelon Self-Lock 25-Foot Power TapeCased25 feetImperial only 
Lexivon 16Ft/5m DuaLock Tape MeasureCased 16 feetImperial and metric
Craftsman 25-Foot Self-Lock Tape MeasureCased25 feetImperial only 
DeWalt 100-Foot Closed-Case Long TapeReel100 feetImperial only 
Milwaukee 25-Foot Compact Auto-Lock Tape MeasureCased25 feetImperial only
DTape DT50 165-Foot Laser Measure Laser165 feetDigital, imperial and metric 
Komelon 300-Foot Fiberglass Open-Reel Tape MeasureReel300 feetImperial only 
Zabiki 25-Foot Dual-Side Tape MeasureCased25 feetImperial and metric

Our Top Picks

To qualify for a spot in our lineup of the best tape measures, the following products had to meet our high testing standards. While any of them are worthy of a place in your home tool kit, we suggest you review each one to determine which is best for your needs.

Best Overall

Stanley 25-Foot PowerLock Tape Measure

Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Metal blade stays stiff during use
  • Smooth retraction mechanism doesn’t catch
  • High-quality construction at a great price

What We Don’t Like

  • No metric measurements

Specs

  • Type Cased
  • Length 25 feet
  • Markings Imperial only

From a name well known in the building industry comes the Stanley 25-foot PowerLock tape measure—a dependable and accurate choice for anyone needing to make precision cuts. It features a stainless steel case with a strong blade lock that holds firmly without slipping. In our tests, the durable metal extended to nearly 10 feet before bending, which is quite an accomplishment compared to thinner blades that bend at 5 feet or less. 

The PowerLock has a 3-rivet-reinforced tang for accurate measuring and features imperial-only measurements in ⅙-inch increments. This labeled tape measure also has red premarked 16-inch notations for easy stud locating and black diamonds every 19.2 inches, which is another spacing interval often used in framing. After the first 12 inches, the Stanley tape shows both feet and inches as well as cumulative inch measurements (e.g., both 30 inches and 2 feet, 6 inches), which is useful when determining longer distances. 

What our tester says: “This tape is highly accurate and durable, and since it has a clip for easy carrying on a pocket or belt, it’s a tape measure we find ourselves relying on time and time again.”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Stanley tape measure at Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, or The Home Depot.

Best Bang for the Buck

Komelon Self-Lock 25-Foot Power Tape

 The Best Tape Measures Option: Komelon Self Lock 25-Foot Power Tape
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Self-locking feature automatically secures blade
  • Push-button blade retrieval eliminates fumbling
  • Stainless steel clip grips tool belts tightly

What We Don’t Like

  • Auto-lock function less effective at longer lengths
  • No metric measurements

Specs

  • Type Cased
  • Length 25 feet
  • Markings Imperial only

DIYers don’t need to overspend to get an accurate tape measure, and the Komelon self-lock power tape is a great budget-friendly option. The easy-read tape measure not only has precise markings, but they’re also on both edges, allowing for easy, accurate readings from either side. The Komelon also features graphic notations every 16 inches and 19.2 inches, making it well suited for standard framing measurement. It demonstrated rigid blade standout to just over 7 feet, making it a very decent tape measure for the price point. 

Another standout feature of this Komelon is its self-lock mechanism, which automatically holds the blade in place when engaged, eliminating the need to manually engage a stiff blade lock. It has a bright green button that, when pressed, retracts the blade smoothly and doubles as a manual lock. While we loved using it to trigger a smooth retraction of the blade, we found we did have to use it to manually lock the blade at longer lengths. The auto lock worked when at distances of a few feet, but by the time we extended the blade to 20 feet, it started to slip. Still, the measurements are highly accurate, and we appreciate being able to use the green button to lock the blade manually. 

Get the Komelon self-lock tape measure at Amazon, Lowe’s, Ace Hardware, or Walmart.

Best Pocket-Size

Lexivon 16-Foot/5-Meter DuaLock Tape Measure

 The Best Tape Measures Option: LEXIVON 16Ft 5m DuaLock Tape Measure
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact; great for shorter-length measurements
  • Rubberized grip doesn’t slip
  • Dual blade-locking system with pressure-sensitive button

What We Don’t Like

  • Too short for larger jobs

Specs

  • Type Cased
  • Length 16 feet
  • Markings Imperial and metric

TThose looking for a quality compact tape measure need look no further than the Lexivon 16-foot tape measure, which comes with both imperial and metric measurements and graphic markings denoting standard 16-inch and 19.2-inch framing measurements. It features a smooth rubberized overmold, a steel belt/pocket clip, and hook-under tang forks that allow the user to snag the upper or underside of the item being measured. 

In our tests, we were able to extend it nearly 6 feet (standout) before it bent, we found the numbers easy to read, and we were impressed by the dual blade-locking system. In addition to a standard blade lock, it also has a pressure-sensitive button on the bottom of the case. Pressing the button stops the blade from moving, and letting up on it a bit allows it to retract slowly. Anyone undertaking a small job who’s been cut by a metal tape blade that retracted too quickly will appreciate the pocket-sized Lexivon. 

Get the Lexivon tape measure at Amazon or Walmart.

Best Heavy-Duty

Craftsman 25-Foot Self-Lock Tape Measure

 The Best Tape Measures Option: CRAFTSMAN Tape Measure, Self-Lock, 25-Foot
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • High-quality construction for heavy use
  • Smaller fractions labeled for precise measurements
  • Self-locking with smooth blade movement

What We Don’t Like

  • No metric measurements

Specs

  • Type Cased
  • Length 25 feet
  • Markings Imperial only

Everything about the Craftsman heavy-duty tape measure points toward it being a quality tool made to withstand high use. The case is made from heavy molded polyethylene and features a partial rubberized grip along the top and bottom edges. The belt clip is polished solid steel, and the metal blade is nylon coated for durability and rust resistance. The movement on the blade is smooth, and the retraction is controlled and even. 

Although it only has imperial measurements (with standard graphic notations every 16 and 19.2 inches), it improves over some tapes in that incremental fractions are printed along the bottom edge of the blade. We checked the measurements on the Craftsman tape against our steel measure, and they were spot-on. This Craftmas also features a 3-rivet tang and a labeled lock button that doesn’t leave the user guessing which direction is locked and which is unlocked. The tape is self-locking as well, making it well suited to anyone who doesn’t want to take the extra time to set the lock manually. 

Get the Craftsman tape measure at Amazon, Ace Hardware, or Walmart.

Best for Layouts

DeWalt 100-Foot Closed-Case Long Tape

 The Best Tape Measures Option: DEWALT Tape Measure, Closed Case, 100-Foot
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Fast-winding crank retracts with minimal turning
  • Coated for rust resistance
  • Constructed to withstand tough jobsites

What We Don’t Like

  • ⅜-inch wide tape slightly on the thin side

Specs

  • Type Reel
  • Length 100 feet
  • Markings Imperial only

The DeWalt 100-foot tape measure is perfect for tasks like staking out an area for excavating or determining the dimensions of a lot. With imperial measurements at ⅛-inch increments, it’s not suited to making precise carpentry cuts, but it wasn’t designed for that. Instead, the 100-foot reel tape measure is made to obtain longer measurements, and it’s typically used outdoors when laying out foundations or determining the length of a proposed fence line. 

The tang comes with a fold-out spike that is useful for fitting over a nail or screw head, and the molded plastic case is strong and durable with a partially rubberized grip. The flexible fiberglass blade has a rust-resistant coating that gives it stability, even in tough jobsite conditions like wind and rain. The stainless steel crank arm is snug without any play, and it features a 5-to-1 gear ratio, which allowed us to wind up the entire tape with just a dozen or so turns. The tape comes with an attached stainless steel carabiner clip that’s perfect for hanging on a hook. 

What our tester says: “We’re familiar with reel tape measures and DeWalt products, so we had high hopes for this specific tool—and we weren’t disappointed. We were especially impressed when we hooked the tang on a nail, stretched the tape to its maximum length, and it didn’t flip this way and that in the wind like some reel tapes do.”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the DeWalt tape measure at Amazon, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, or The Home Depot.

Easiest to Read

Milwaukee 25-Foot Compact Auto-Lock Tape Measure

 The Best Tape Measures Option: Milwaukee 25 ft. Compact Auto Lock Tape Measure
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Easy-read measuring tape with large numbers
  • Self-locking mechanism and hook-under forks
  • Partial rubberized case and belt/pocket clip

What We Don’t Like

  • No metric measurements

Specs

  • Type Cased
  • Length 25 feet
  • Markings Imperial only

Milwaukee is nationally known for high-quality construction tools and accessories, and the Milwaukee 25-foot self-lock tape measure is no exception. As with all the tapes we tested, the Milwaukee’s measurements were spot-on. The tape’s bold black whole-inch numbers are large and easy to read against the muted yellow background. In addition, the smaller fractions are clearly labeled along the bottom edge of the tape, with the ¼-inch fractions appearing in bold and the ⅛-inch fractions in regular type, making both easy to see at a glance. 

The Milwaukee tape measure features a 3-rivet tang with hook-under forks that allow the user to snag the topside or the underside of the item being measured. The tape had the longest standout of all, just under 9 feet before it bent, and the tool comes with a self-lock that kept the blade from retracting until we depressed the retraction button. 

Get the Milwaukee tape measure at The Home Depot, Northern Tool + Equipment, or Walmart.

Best Laser Measure

DTape DT50 165-Foot Laser Measure

 The Best Tape Measures Option: DTAPE Laser Measure 165ft, DT50Laser Portable Digital
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Instantly measures from one point to another
  • Well suited to measuring room dimensions
  • Backlit LED screen makes numbers easy to see

What We Don’t Like

  • Only accurate between ¼ and ½ inch
  • Slightly complex calculator functions

Specs

  • Type Laser
  • Length 165 feet
  • Markings Digital, imperial and metric

With the DTape laser measure, there’s no hooking a tang over a nail head, recruiting a helper to hold the end of the tape, or locking a blade in place while wondering if it will retract too quickly and snap your hand. Instead, this digital tape measure lets you determine distances easily by pushing a button, positioning a bright red laser dot on the spot you want to measure, and checking the reading on the LED screen. It’s fast and easy to use, runs on two AAA batteries, and comes with calculator functions.

While we like a lot about the DTape laser measure, it’s much quicker to figure estimates on a standard construction calculator, and its measurements are only accurate between ¼ to ½ of an inch. While that’s not precise enough for construction or woodworking projects, it’s plenty close for calculating the width, length, volume, and area of rooms for appraisal purposes or to estimate paint, carpeting, or wallpaper. 

If you need a laser measure that offers more accuracy (albeit at several times the price), check out our review of the best digital tape measure, the DeWalt digital tape measure

Get the DTape laser tape measure at Amazon. 

Best for Distances

Komelon 300-Foot Fiberglass Open-Reel Tape Measure

 The Best Tape Measures Option: Komelon 6633 Open Reel Fiberglass Tape Measure
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Lime-green tape is highly visible
  • Fiberglass coating keeps roll tape measure from twisting
  • Sturdy enough for regular use

What We Don’t Like

  • Subject to the elements if left outside

Specs

  • Type Reel
  • Length 300 feet
  • Markings Imperial only

Lengthy measurements, such as across an entire lot or from a curb to the back of the house, require a long reel of tape, and that’s just what the Komelon open-reel measurer provides. All 300 feet of lime-green fiberglass tape are neatly wound around a center spool and held in place by strong molded polyethylene arm supports that keep it snug and evenly wound. Both sides of the double-sided tape measure feature imperial measurements in ⅛-inch increments, which is standard for a reel tape. The reel tape is sturdy and durable, and we found it to be one of the most accurate measuring tape models we’d ever tested. 

The tang features a fold-down spike that can be fitted over a nail or screw head, and the Komelon comes with a separate bright orange spike for pushing into the ground to determine the origination point. We’ve used reel tapes before that became twisted on the spool when rewinding them up, but the fiberglass tape on the Komelon has just enough stiffness to help keep it straight. 

Get the Komelon open reel tape measure at Amazon or Blain’s Farm & Fleet. 

Best Metric

Zabiki 25-Foot Dual-Side Tape Measure

 The Best Tape Measures Option: Zabiki Tape Measure, 25 Ft Dual Side Easy to Read
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Easy-to-read markings for all measurements
  • Partial rubberized grip is comfortable
  • Magnetic tang holds firm during use

What We Don’t Like

  • Blade lock slightly stiff
  • No recurring markers at 16-inch or 19.2-inch increments

Specs

  • Type Cased
  • Length 25 feet
  • Markings Imperial and metric

Most tape measures sold in the U.S. come with imperial measurements only, and those that include metric measurements often have small and difficult-to-see numbers. Not so with the Zabiki 25-foot tape measure: Both inches and centimeters are clearly marked and equally easy to read. It also has a 3-rivet tang for durability and features a sturdy case with a partial rubberized grip. 

One thing this measuring tape had that none of the others did was a strong magnetic tang,  opening up the option to measure metal objects without needing a helper. Our tests showed the tang is strong enough to hold firm against metal even when the tape is fully extended. We really liked this and most of the rest of the Zabiki, with the only exceptions being the lack of markers at 16 and 19.2 inches and the fact that the blade lock tended to stick. Still, it extended to almost 6 feet in our standout test and will be excellent overall for anyone needing imperial and metric measurements. 

Get the Zabiki tape measure at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Tape Measures

To earn a spot in our lineup, each of the tape measures had to be accurate and precise, so we compared each one’s measurements against a steel measuring tool for accuracy. We then extended them to their maximum lengths, noting how easy it was to pull the blade out and how smoothly it retracted back into the housing. We also looked at quality, blade standout, blade lock, and the overall design of the tape. 

Though even the best measuring tape is a relatively simple tool, we inspected each option closely to see how well its tang was attached and whether its markings were clear and easy to read. We evaluated case and tape durability and whether a tape included both imperial and metric measurements. Still, we didn’t dock a tape for not having metrics since many U.S. DIYers and pros use only imperial measurements. We awarded points for each test we performed, depending on how well the tape measured up. 

What to Consider When Choosing a Tape Measure 

Getting precise measurements is essential for many projects, even ones as simple as hanging art or estimating how much wallpaper will be necessary for a specific room. This means you need to know about the types of tape measures, the meaning of the lines on a tape measure, and whether any additional features would make your project easier. 

Type 

Don’t choose a tape measure at random; take some time to learn the basics. First off, know that there are four basic varieties to choose from: 

  • Cased tape measures: The most popular and versatile design, these tape measures house the blade—the metal or fiberglass measuring strip—in a rubber or metal holder that can be easily stowed in a pocket or clipped to a tool belt. You can use a standard cased tape measure for a variety of building and craft purposes, such as installing shelving, hanging pictures, and woodworking.
  • Long or open-reel tapes: Used primarily by engineers, contractors, and builders, these tools have a hand crank for retraction and can be between 25 and 500 feet in length. They are typically made of coated fiberglass, have measurement markings in both feet and meters, and may have a bottom spike for increased stability when measuring ground distances.
  • D-tape: Similar in look and style to a cased tape, a D-tape (diameter tape) contains an ultra-flexible blade of cloth or metal that can easily wrap around pipes and poles. D-tapes provide an accurate measurement using pi to calculate circumference (the length around a circle) and diameter (a straight line passing from one side of a circle to the other). D-tapes come in a variety of lengths, from 12 inches to 50 feet.
  • Laser: Rather than an actual tape measurer, the new kids on the block—laser tape measures—can be handy alternatives to standard tape measures when the user needs to calculate the width, length, or height of a room. To use one, you simply shine the laser on the wall, ceiling, or board and press the measuring button. The best laser measures calculate the distance within about ⅛ inch to ½ inch. These tape measures are popular with real estate agents, appraisers, and adjusters, but they’re subject to user error (moving slightly while measuring), so they’re not the best option for precision carpentry.

Blade and Tang

The tape itself—known as the blade—needs to be strong enough to stay straight and firm when extended in the air. Cheap blades bend easily, denting and dipping in places. Quality blades, made of steel or fiberglass, should literally “stand out” for 6 feet or farther before bending. Metal blades coated with nylon are highly durable and versatile. 

The metal end-hook at the tip of the tape measure, the tang, is key to getting an accurate reading. Make sure the tang on the measurer you choose looks and feels solid without being static—there should be a slight in-and-out movement (called “floating”) when you tug it gently. You’ll notice that when the tang hits a wall or solid object, it pushes in slightly. When you hook the tang around an edge, it pulls out slightly. The tang is designed to float to compensate for its own width, providing consistent and accurate measurement. Magnetic tangs act as an additional tool—assisting a solo measurer when measuring a metal object.

Markings 

Tape measure markings are the information printed on the blade, which should be clear and easy to read. In the U.S. most markings use the imperial system of feet, inches, and fractions. If you think you may need to make conversions (for a rug or piece of furniture from abroad, for example), get a tape measure that also has metric markings.

Graphic markings (diamonds and triangles) noting 16-inch and 19.2-inch intervals are useful for building walls compliant with codes since studs are often placed 16 inches apart. Stud marks also make hanging pictures and installing shelves much easier, allowing you to anchor the nail solidly.

Size and Weight

Most standard tape measures are highly portable. They weigh just a few ounces, and the majority come with a clip on one side for carrying on a belt or a pocket. The exception is the reel tape, which can measure as much as a foot in diameter, depending on length.

  • Size: Standard measuring tape housings are usually no more than about 4 inches high and wide and an inch or so thick. Reel-type models can be up to a foot long and wide or even larger.
  • Weight: Users can expect the average tape measure to weigh less than a pound—although some of the more compact models weigh just a couple of ounces. Reel tapes generally weigh around 3 pounds or more.

Accuracy

While all tape measures should be accurate, finish carpenters, cabinetmakers, and woodworkers depend on a high level of accuracy. Most tape measures come with 1/16-inch increments, although a few come with 1/32-inch increments. When learning how to read a tape measure for precision, if the measure has only 1/16-inch increments, the standard rule is to say the measurement is “strong” when it falls between increments. For example, if a measurement falls between 3/16 inch and 4/16 inch, it would be called a “strong 3/16 inch” which tells the user it’s actually 7/32 inch.

In addition to marking increments, a few more considerations can impact a tape measure’s accuracy:

  • Standout: Most metal-blade tape measures (excluding the very cheapest) feature a blade with a curve. The curve is instrumental in keeping the blade from bending downward when the user extends it a few feet in the air. This is known as the blade’s standout capability. Eventually, all blades will bend, but the best ones can be extended 6 feet or farther before that happens.
  • Scribe tip: Measuring is straightforward, but a pencil is often necessary to mark the material for cutting. When a pencil isn’t available, the slightly serrated bottom edge of the tang can be moved back and forth across the material to make a mark for cutting.
  • Nail grab: The best measuring tapes come with a nail grab, which is helpful for those working alone with no helper to hold the tape. By driving a nail into the material at the right spot, the user can slip the tang over the nail head to hold it in place for measuring.

Additional Features

  • Belt clip or holder: Cased tape measures are often equipped with a belt clip—a steel or nylon pincer that attaches to a tool belt or pocket. Some pros and do-it-yourselfers find the clip annoying because it adds bulkiness and may make the tape measure harder to hold or stow in a pocket. If you find this to be true, you can often unscrew the clip or buy a clipless model.
  • Auto-lock: A tape measure that automatically locks when pulled out is especially helpful when working alone or in tight spaces. For example, if you’re measuring the inside of a cabinet, the blade will lock into position by itself, ensuring an accurate reading. Simply press a button and the blade will retract.
  • Rubberized grip: When shopping for the best measurement tape, grip type is secondary to other features. The best overall pick in our lineup features stainless steel housing, although many of the other tape measures we tested come with rubberized coatings that give them a soft hand feel. The difference is mostly negligible, but a rubberized grip may help keep hand tools from slipping.

FAQs

Tape measures are found in most homes, workshops, tool boxes, and tool belts, and for a good reason—there’s always something that needs measuring. Still, different types of measuring tape are better suited to some tasks than others, so it’s natural that those looking to find the best tape measure for a specific project may have a few remaining questions. the best tape measure for a specific project are likely to have some questions.

Q. What is the black diamond on a measuring tape for?

Small black triangles appear every 16 inches on many measuring tapes to denote standard 16-inch on center (O.C.) measurements between studs. Small black diamonds appear every 19.2 inches, another standard spacing for wall studs or floor joists, although 16-inch O.C. is the most common.

Q. Do I need an automatic locking tape?

It sure is handy, but you don’t need it. You can always engage the manual lock if the tape doesn’t automatically lock when you pull the blade out.

Q. What are the most common sizes of tape measures?

With tape measures, 25 feet is the most common length, although some are as short as 12 feet, and others are 30 feet or longer.

Q. Are laser distance measurers worth the price?

It depends on how they’re used. They’re typically accurate to around ¼ of an inch, suitable for figuring wall space but not accurate enough for woodworking. Real estate agents, appraisers, and engineers often find laser tape measures worth the money.

Q. Which is more accurate, a tape measure or ruler?

They should be equally accurate—the difference is that a tape measure is accurate over a longer distance. 

Q. Are tape measures 100% accurate?

We asked the COO of Bates Electric, Inc., Andrew Bates, this question. According to Andrew,
“Tape measures are almost never 100% accurate, though they’re relatively close to the truth.” He also points out that it’s difficult to get the exact same length from two different tape measures, so it’s very important to choose a tape measure type that’s appropriate for the accuracy your project requires. 

Q. Should measuring tape be tight or loose?

The short answer is that a measuring tape should be held tight while being stretched from point A to point B. If you’re still wondering how to read a measuring tape and would like more tips, check out our guide on how to use a tape measure.  

Q. Why is there a hole in the end of a tape measure?

As mentioned above, the hole at the end of a tape measure is a nail grab. You can drive a nail or small screw into this hole to hold the tape in place when working alone.

The post This Tool Is a Must-Have for Every Homeowner appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-23T14:02:52-05:00
<![CDATA[String Trimmer vs. Lawn Edger: What All DIY Landscapers Should Know]]>The post String Trimmer vs. Lawn Edger: What All DIY Landscapers Should Know appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/diy/string-trimmer-vs-lawn-edger/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=425337Thu, 23 Jan 2025 10:08:34 -0500DIYLawn Care & GardeningToolsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Even though an edger and a string trimmer are both designed to tackle weeds and grass, they have very different functions. A string trimmer trims the grass and weeds against fence lines, foundations, and other places you can’t reach with a lawn mower. An edger establishes clean borders between driveways, sidewalks, and your lawn. 

Not sure which one is right for your yard or whether you need both? Ahead, we’ll break down how these two tools differ in our string trimmer vs. edger showdown, so you can determine whether you need one or both to help you manage your yard. 

What Is a String Trimmer?

A black and silver string trimmer near dandelions.
Photo: Don Nichols via Getty Images

A string trimmer is a handheld tool with a cutterhead that uses flexible plastic line to slice and dice grass and weeds. Also referred to as the brand name weed whacker, this lawn care tool consists of a small gas or electric motor that sits atop a long steel pole. The string trimmer line extends from a spindle at the opposite end of the pole that spins at a high rate of speed, functioning as a horizontal “blade” that cuts through weeds and grass blades

The string trimmer’s handheld design and narrow profile make it adept at fitting into tight spaces. “It’s typically used to cut where the mower can’t reach, e.g. along fences, garden beds, etc.,” says Mark Clement, home and garden tool reviewer and licensed contractor with MyFixitUpLife. “It can also be used as a “scythe” to cut down high grass and weeds prior to mowing.”

String trimmers are powered by either a gas/oil 2-stroke engine or cordless battery-powered motor. While a gas weed eater offers more trimming power, an electric string trimmer is lighter and easier to maintain. 

Our Recommendation: Stihl FSA 80 R Battery-Powered String Trimmer
This well-built cordless battery-powered string trimmer is capable of cutting through weeds up to ¼-inch thick and lasts long enough to handle most lawn maintenance needs. 

What Is a Lawn Edger?

A red lawn edger moving along line between grass and cement walkway.
Photo: travelpixpro via Getty Images

Lawn edgers have one job: Create a crisp clearly defined line between your lawn and bordering driveways, sidewalks, and landscaping beds. This push-behind machine uses a vertically positioned rigid steel blade with a thick kerf that allows it to cut several inches into soil to create that border. Unlike a string trimmer that is handheld, a lawn edger is supported by a set of wheels. Lawn edgers come in 4-stroke engine gas-powered models and cordless battery-powered models

Our Recommendation: ECHO 25.4 cc Gas 2-Stroke Lawn Edger 
With a powerful 25.4 cc gas engine, the ECHO provides ample power for cutting dense grass and weeds on a single pass, yet it’s lightweight and easy to maneuver.

Differences Between Lawn Edgers and String Trimmers

String TrimmerLawn Edger
Flexible nylon lineRigid steel blade
Operator must supportSupported by wheels
Designed to trim weeds and grassDesigned to create borders between grass and pavement or landscaped areas
Typically used after each mowingUsed periodically to redefine edges
Can handle light edging when turned verticallyCannot be turned horizontally to function as a trimmer

While string trimmers and lawn edgers may have some similarities in appearance and function, several characteristics set these two yard tools apart. 

Blade

Both lawn edgers and trimmers are designed to cut through vegetation, but they use different blades to do so. String trimmers use flexible plastic string line to cut down weeds, allowing them to work around hard objects, like buildings, fences, and trees, without damaging the tool. 

Edgers, in comparison, use a rigid steel blade that’s tough enough to cut 4 to 5 inches into hard soil and through tougher weed roots. 

Usage

String trimmers and edgers may look similar, but they serve different purposes. A string trimmer is used to trim weeds and grass in places lawn mowers can’t reach, such as around fence posts, up against the foundation of a home, or around trees and shrubs. You can turn a string trimmer horizontally and use it as a light duty edger to refresh borders along sidewalks, driveways, and flower beds. It just requires more effort. 

“While using a string trimmer as an edger is effective and landscapers do it all day, it’s a lot of work,” Clement says. “And, if an edge has become overgrown, say over a sidewalk, it takes a string trimmer several passes to tune that up.”

Lawn edgers, in comparison, are designed for one purpose, edging your lawn around driveways, sidewalks, and garden beds, and cannot be used as trimmers. 

“String trimmers are a bit more versatile and a bit more of an all-around tool,” says Chris Richert, a product manager for Husqvarna. “Lawn edgers are much better for crisp edges and if someone wants to be very precise.”

Ease of Use

Both string trimmers and edgers require a certain amount of upper body strength to operate. Since a string trimmer is a handheld machine, it requires the operator to support its entire weight during use. Holding the cutting head up while supporting the engine or motor requires a fair amount of physical effort, especially when trimming larger yards. Though edgers are heavier than string trimmers, an edger rolls on a set of wheels that support its weight, making it easier to operate. 

Frequency of use

String trimmers are typically used as companions to lawn mowers, trimming grass that lawn mowers can’t access to a height that’s uniform with the lawn. Since string trimmers are used each time you mow the lawn, they see a lot of use. 

Lawn edgers are only used every once in a while to establish a new border between lawn and pavement or clean up one that’s begun to lose its shape. As such, they aren’t used nearly as much as a string trimmer in the average yard. 

Combo Trimmer/Edger Tools

Along with dedicated trimmers and edgers, you’ll also find tools that double as both. A trimmer edger combo tool is a string trimmer with a handle that allows you to rotate the head vertically to handle edging duties. When converted to an edger tool, these tools have wheels they rest on, allowing you to push them along a driveway or sidewalk. While these jack-of-all-trade trimmer tools may seem like they fulfill the duties of both string trimmer and edger, they do not. 

They function very similarly to a string trimmer, using a nylon line to handle the cutting duties. Since they lack a steel blade, they don’t have the turf cutting power of a true edger. So, while a wheeled string trimmer can handle trimming duties about as well as a standard string trimmer, these hybrid tools are only suitable for maintaining established borders between pavement and lawn. You won’t be able to blaze a new border with a combo trimmer/edger. 

Final Thoughts

A woman uses a weed wacker in the backyard of a cabin-style home.
Photo: CasarsaGuru via Getty Images

String trimmers and edgers serve very different roles in your lawn. Given that a string trimmer gives you the ability to trim grass and weeds in places you can’t reach with your mower, they’re clearly the more essential of the two tools when it comes to managing a lawn. If your property has long borders along sidewalks, driveways, and flower beds, then adding an edger to your arsenal of yard tools makes sense. 

If your budget doesn’t allow for two tools, you can establish those edges around pavement and landscaping by borrowing a neighbor’s edger or by investing in a much more affordable manual lawn edger, then use a string trimmer to maintain those borders. “A string trimmer is more versatile and the more popular pick because it can be used for trimming as well—you can use them for edging by turning the trimmer head,” says Richert. “It’s not quite as good as using an edger, but it will work.”

The post String Trimmer vs. Lawn Edger: What All DIY Landscapers Should Know appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-23T10:08:34-05:00
<![CDATA[This Simple Tool Is a Must-Have for Electrical Projects]]>Cut, strip, crimp, and grab wires with some of the best wire cutters on the market. See our recommendations for electricians and DIYers.

The post This Simple Tool Is a Must-Have for Electrical Projects appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-wire-cutters/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=142701Tue, 21 Jan 2025 14:21:04 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Whether you’re an electrician, mechanic, or DIYer, a quality pair of wire cutters can make an indispensable addition to your toolbox. The name “wire cutter” can be deceiving, though, since most of them incorporate one or more additional features that give them multipurpose functionality. Wire strippers, bolt cutters, and snub or needle-nose plier jaws are just some of the available options to choose from, depending on your specific needs. 

After reviewing dozens of wire cutters and putting some to the test, our favorite is the IRWIN Vise-Grip Wire Stripping Tool / Wire Cutter. Available at a budget-friendly price point, this tool performed well, allowing us to cut, strip, and crimp 10 to 22-gauge wires with ease.

To get the low-down on selecting the right wire-cutting tool for the job, read on to discover the types available, how they differ in quality, and how to choose the best wire cutters for your next project. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: IRWIN VISE-GRIP Wire Stripping Tool / Wire Cutter
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: DOWELL 10-22 AWG Wire Stripper Cutter Wire Stripping
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST FOR PROFESSIONALS: 4-in-1 Lineman Plier Pro Lineman Tools 9” Combination
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST FLUSH: Klein Tools D213-9NE Pliers, 9-Inch Side Cutters
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST DIAGONAL: IGAN Diagonal Cutting Pliers, 7-inch Ultra Tough
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST NEEDLE-NOSE: LAOA Needle-nose Pliers with Stripper
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST SPRING-LOADED: Klein Tools 11055 Wire Cutter and Stripper
    Jump to Review
  8. BEST WITH CRIMPER: Greenlee Stainless Steel Wire Cutter/Stripper/Crimper
    Jump to Review
Best Wire Cutters Options
Photo: amazon.com
Product NameLengthAWG Range
Multifunctional
IRWIN VISE-GRIP Wire Stripping Tool / Wire Cutter8 inches10 to 22 gaugeYes
DOWELL 10-22 AWG Wire Stripper Cutter Wire Stripping7 inches10 to 22 gaugeYes
4-in-1 Lineman Plier Pro Lineman Tools 9” Combination9 inchesNot specifiedYes
Klein Tools D213-9NE Pliers, 9-Inch Side Cutters9.35 inchesUp to 8 gaugeNo
IGAN Diagonal Cutting Pliers, 7-inch Ultra Tough7 inchesUp to 9 gauge copper wire, 11 gauge iron wire, and 14 gauge steel wireNo
LAOA Needle-nose Pliers with Stripper8.47 inchesVaries; up to 12 gauge iron wire, up to 4 gauge cableYes
Klein Tools 11055 Wire Cutter and Stripper7.4 inches10 to 18 gauge solid wire and 12 to 20 gauge stranded wireYes
Greenlee Stainless Steel Wire Cutter/Stripper/Crimper7.5 inchesNot specifiedYes

Our Top Picks

While a basic pair of wire cutters is sufficient for tackling small jobs, not every pair will work for every project. Consider the following top-rated options in several different categories.

Best Overall

IRWIN VISE-GRIP Wire Stripping Tool / Wire Cutter

 Best Wire Cutters Options: IRWIN VISE-GRIP Wire Stripping Tool
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Multifunctional tool cuts, strips, and crimps wire
  • Features a built-in small bolt cutter
  • Has hardened cutting teeth

What We Don’t Like

  • Wire cutter isn’t spring-loaded
  • Handle isn’t comfortable enough for prolonged use

Specs 

  • Length: 8 inches
  • AWG range: 10 to 22 gauge
  • Multifunctional: Yes

Whether you need to cut and strip wires, crimp terminal connectors, or even cut small bolts, Irwin’s wire cutter and strippers can do it all. This tool features an 8-inch handle covered with a comfort-grip material and offers maximum cutting leverage with minimal fatigue. We like that the wire cutters on the end of the jaws are induction-hardened for increased durability, and the needle-nose end makes grabbing onto small-gauge wires a breeze. 

For increased versatility, the Irwin wire cutters also feature wire stripping slots that accommodate 10 to 20 AWG wires and a crimper for splicing wires with terminal connectors. It even offers a small bolt cutter, capable of cutting small bolts with enough precision to leave enough lead thread for nuts to screw onto. 

What our tester says: Tom Scalisi, a Bob Vila writer and product tester, notes in the Best Wire Strippers that he was “impressed by the number of functions on the Irwin wire stripper, especially because it comes at a very attractive price point. In addition to cutting and stripping wires from 10 to 22 gauge in size, this handy tool offers crimping ability.”

Get the Irwin wire cutter at Amazon or Menards.

Best Bang for the Buck

DOWELL 10-22 AWG Wire Stripper Cutter Wire Stripping

 Best Wire Cutters Options: DOWELL 10-22 AWG Wire Stripper Cutter Wire
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Affordable price point
  • Features spring-loaded action
  • Can cut and strip wires
  • Has a safety lock

What We Don’t Like

  • Pivot point is less sturdy than other models

Specs 

  • Length: 7 inches
  • AWG range: 10 to 22 gauge
  • Multifunctional: Yes

Don’t be fooled into thinking the DOWELL wire cutters are a low-quality option just because they’re so affordable. They’re made with durable, corrosion-resistant high carbon steel that maintains the blade’s sharp edge for longer than comparably priced cutters that use lower quality materials. These durable components can cut, crimp, and strip a wide range of wire sizes. 

These small wire cutters feature a 7-inch comfort grip handle for comfortable operation and a spring-loaded mechanism for easy one-handed use. The main disadvantages are that the pivot point isn’t as sturdy as some higher-end models, and it doesn’t offer needle-nose jaws for grabbing and manipulating wires. But taking all the other impressive features into account, DOWELL’s cutters offer an incredible value for the price.

Get the DOWELL wire cutters at Amazon.

Best for Professionals

4-in-1 Lineman Plier Pro Lineman Tools 9” Combination

 Best Wire Cutters Options: 4-in-1 Lineman Plier,Pro Lineman Tools
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Can cut, twist, strip, and crimp wire
  • 9-inch handle provides leverage
  • Features comfortable PVC non-slip grips

What We Don’t Like

  • Only has five stripping slots

Specs 

  • Length: 9 inches
  • AWG range: Not specified
  • Multifunctional: Yes

For professional-grade cutting power and durability, consider these chrome vanadium steel heavy-duty wire cutters that maintain a sharp cutting edge while offering superior corrosion resistance. In addition to the cutter and plier jaws that typical lineman pliers feature, these cutters offer a crimper and an electric wire stripper for optimal versatility and functionality. 

The 9-inch handle offers increased leverage for maximum cutting and twisting power, and it’s wrapped with a comfort-grip material that reduces fatigue. The main disadvantage is that it only offers five unmarked wire stripping slots, which limits the tool’s overall multipurpose functionality. That being said, these cutters offer pro-grade features without breaking the bank.

Get the Lineman Plier Pro wire cutters at Amazon.

Best Flush

Klein Tools D213-9NE Pliers, 9-Inch Side Cutters

 Best Wire Cutters Options: Klein Tools D213-9NE Pliers
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Handle helps absorb “snap” when cutting wire
  • Thoughtful design offers plenty of cutting leverage
  • Features a durable, precision-hardened plier head

What We Don’t Like

  • Wire cutter only; not multifunctional

Specs 

  • Length: 9.35 inches
  • AWG range: Up to 8 gauge
  • Multifunctional: No

Klein Tools’ line of pliers and cutters have been used by professionals and DIYers for decades, and this pair of flush cutters doesn’t disappoint. The long 9-inch handle and a durable pivot point close to the jaws combine to offer a huge amount of cutting leverage. To compliment this leverage, the cutting blades are induction hardened to produce an incredibly hard blade that stays sharper for longer. Finally, the ergonomically designed handle fits snugly and comfortably in your hand. 

The main downside to this cutter is that it’s fairly expensive, and the higher price may be hard to justify for the average homeowner or occasional DIYer.

Get the Klein Tools wire cutters at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Lowes.

Best Diagonal

IGAN Diagonal Cutting Pliers, 7-inch Ultra Tough

 The Best Wire Cutter Option IGAN Diagonal Cutting Pliers, 7-inch Ultra Tough
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Spring-loaded mechanism allows one-handed operation
  • Hardened blades cut through a variety of material
  • Makes easy cuts thanks to its high-leverage design 

What We Don’t Like

  • No multifunctional capabilities

Specs 

  • Length: 7 inches
  • AWG range: Up to 9 gauge copper wire, 11 gauge iron wire, and 14 gauge steel wire
  • Multifunctional: No

If you need a wire cutter strictly designed for consistently making powerful cuts, then IGAN’s diagonal wire cutters may be just what you’re looking for. Its blades are made with induction-hardened, high-carbon steel for maximum durability and longevity, and a sturdy pivot point is in close proximity to the cutting jaws for easy and powerful cuts. The comfort-grip handles are coupled with a spring-loaded mechanism for comfortable one-handed operation, minimizing fatigue from prolonged use. 

Get the IGAN wire cutters at Amazon.

Best Needle-Nose

LAOA Needle-nose Pliers with Stripper

 The Best Wire Cutter Option LAOA Needle-nose Pliers with Stripper
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Cuts, strips, crimps, clamps, and more
  • Features an anti-slip handle
  • Needle-nose design is ideal for small wires

What We Don’t Like

  • Some users report missing or faulty safety lock
  • Crimping requires a lot of force

Specs 

  • Length: 8.47 inches
  • AWG range: Varies; up to 12 gauge iron wire, up to 4 gauge cable
  • Multifunctional: Yes

If you want a flush wire cutter that can access tight spaces and grab small wires, LAOA’s needle-nose pliers and wire cutters have you covered. The durable induction hardened, high carbon steel blades and plier jaws don’t just cut and grab wires; they also feature a crimper and a couple of wire stripping slots. 

The spring-loaded, comfort-grip handle is comfortable with an anti-slip grip. The primary con is that these wire cutters require a lot of force to achieve an effective crimp. Some users have also complained about the locking mechanism.

Get theLAOA wire cutters at Amazon or Walmart.

Best Spring-Loaded

Klein Tools 11055 Wire Cutter and Stripper

 The Best Wire Cutter Option Klein Tools 11055 Wire Cutter and Stripper
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Cuts solid and stranded copper wire
  • Acts as a wire stripper
  • Features doubled-dipped curved handles

What We Don’t Like

  • No crimping action

Specs 

  • Length: 7.4 inches
  • AWG range: 10 to 18 gauge solid wire and 12 to 20 gauge stranded wire
  • Multifunctional: Yes

Those looking for a basic set of wire cutters and strippers made of high-quality materials will appreciate these from Klein Tools. The needle-nose tip makes it easy to grab and bend wires, and the cutter consistently delivers clean cuts. The double-dipped, curved handle was comfortable for extended use when testing, and we appreciated the labeled AWG sizes on the wire stripper tool.

The only fault we found was the lack of a crimper, which is often necessary when working on computers or performing automotive work. The thumb release is also slightly stiff, but overall, these are a reliable, high-quality pair of wire cutters.

What our tester says: Glenda Taylor, a Bob Vila writer and product tester, notes in the Best Wire Strippers that “The sharpened stripper notches accommodate wires from 10 to 20 gauge in size. We were able to cut through wire cleanly, using the marked holes in the base of the shear blades.”

Get the Klein Tools wire cutters at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Ace Hardware (2-piece set).

Best with Crimper

Greenlee Stainless Steel Wire Cutter/Stripper/Crimper

 The Best Wire Cutter Option Greenlee Stainless Steel Wire Cutter
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Can cut, strip, and crimp wires
  • Comfortable vinyl cushioned handle
  • Features spring-loaded action
  • Has a safety lock

What We Don’t Like

  • Thumb lock tends to stick

Specs 

  • Length: 7.5 inches 
  • AWG range: Not specified
  • Multifunctional: Yes

Those performing automotive or computer work may need a crimper, stripper, and wire cutter. This Greenlee tool combines all three functions and even has a needle-nose tip, making it easy to grab and bend small wires.

While this model doesn’t specify the size of the wire it cuts, it can strip 10 to18 gauge solid wire and 12 to 20 gauge stranded conductors. The coil spring makes it easy to operate, and the tool features a safety lock to keep it closed when not in use. Other features of these stainless steel wire cutters include the ability to shear 6-32 and 8-32 bolts and vinyl cushioned handles for a comfortable grip.

Get the Greenlee wire cutters at Amazon or Acme Tools.

How We Chose the Best Wire Cutters

To find the best wire cutters, we spent hours researching the top brands and looking for models with the highest customer satisfaction ratings. We wanted to ensure that our recommendations were the best of the best. We varied our selection by showcasing each type of wire cutter, including flush, diagonal, and needle nose. Other factors we considered included AWG size, blade material, and ergonomics.

Based on our findings, we narrowed down the top wire cutters to eight picks that suit the most common needs. We then organized our list by category.

What to Consider When Choosing the Best Wire Cutters

Wire cutters are a type of electrician tool that can have different qualities, influencing performance and durability. Consider the following features before determining which model is best suited for your job.

Types of Wire Cutters

Three main types of wire cutters are available: flush, diagonal, and needle nose. While each one has a certain set of tasks for which they are specialized, most can be used for a variety of jobs. 

Flush 

Flush cut wire cutters (also called “combination” or “lineman’s pliers”) look like an ordinary pair of pliers but feature a pair of cutting blades flush to the outside edge and directly behind one of the plier’s gripping jaws. The flush cutting blades are capable of making clean and straight cuts without leaving a sharp point that could cut your hands, such as diagonal cutters tend to leave. However, they may require more manual force to cut the wire than diagonal cutters. In addition to the cutting blades, the plier jaws can be used for cutting, gripping, and bending wires and small cables. 

Some flush cutters are also equipped with bolt cutters capable of cutting screws and nails flush to the fastened surface and a few wire stripping slots for stripping back insulation.

Diagonal 

As opposed to flush cut pliers, diagonal cutters are used exclusively for cutting. These hand tools feature a pair of curved cutting blades that extend all the way to the tip. Because the cutting blades are diagonally offset by about 15 degrees, they can be used to cut wires at an angle. 

Instead of cutting with a shearing action like scissors or flush cut pliers, diagonal pliers use a wedging action to separate the wire connections with their v-shaped cutting blades. This special cutting mechanism typically makes cuts easier to make, which is a contributing factor to them being the most commonly used cutting instrument for electrical wire and other light-gauge metal wire. Just like flush cut pliers, they can also be used for flush cutting a variety of screws and nails. 

Needle-nose 

Needle-nose wire cutters are a variety of flush cut pliers that have a set of cutting blades flush to the outside and behind one of the plier’s jaws. However, with needle-nose models, the jaws taper down to a much smaller tip at the nose. This slender tip makes it easier to grab and manipulate small wires and to maneuver in confined spaces where conventional flush cut pliers can’t operate. 

In addition to straight nosed cutters, there are needle nose cutters with 45-degree and 90-degree bends in the nose to make grabbing material in awkward spaces easier. Needle-nose pliers can possess many of the same additional features as conventional flush wire cutters, like wire strippers and bolt cutters.

Handle 

The two most important factors to consider when choosing a handle are its length and grip materials. A longer handle provides more leverage for making easier cuts but at the cost of not being able to easily maneuver in tight and confined spaces. A smaller handle fits into smaller spaces, but requires more manual force to make cuts. The size of the handle also influences how comfortable the cutters are to use. It’s generally recommended to use at least a 4-inch long handle that’s capable of comfortably fitting in the palm of your hand, but some experts suggest a handle length of at least 5½ inches for optimal comfort. 

The handle can also feature grips composed of various polymers (most commonly plastic and rubber) and can be soft or hard. The more affordable models of wire cutters typically come with hard grip handles, but they’re the least comfortable to use over a long period. Soft, or “comfort” grip handles are more comfortable but usually come with a higher price tag. Each type can offer some degree of insulation against electrical shock, depending on the material’s level of nonconductivity.

Design 

A wire cutter’s design can heavily impact its performance and ease of use. Some wire cutters are designed to provide an all-in-one solution for cutting, stripping wire, crimping, and grabbing wires. These multipurpose tools typically have 10 or more individual slots for stripping wire, a needle nose plier head for grabbing, and a crimping tool at the base of the plier jaws. Unfortunately, because they aren’t specifically designed for cutting, they don’t typically offer the same cutting ability as a cutter made exclusively for that purpose. 

Another design factor to consider is the pivot point. The pivot point is the round piece of metal that sits directly behind the jaws and is responsible for allowing the jaws to open and close. A pivot point that’s closer to the jaws provides greater cutting force and leverage, so it’s best to use a wire cutter with a pivot point that’s as close to the jaws as possible for maximum cutting ability. It’s also important that the pivot point is designed to be as durable as possible. A lower-quality pivot point can become loose, resulting in “play” in the handle’s mechanism, making it difficult to close the blades directly on top of one another and cause lower quality cuts. Also, a poorly designed pivot point can develop “stickiness,” making it harder to open and close the handles and jaws. 

Comfort 

It doesn’t matter how well a set of electric wire cutters works if you’re discouraged from using them because they’re uncomfortable to handle. The handle length and grip material play a crucial role in how comfortable a wire cutter is to use. Another key comfort feature is a spring-loaded opening and closing mechanism, which reopens the cutter’s jaws when pressure is relieved. This allows for easy one-handed operation and also reduces the effort required to reopen the jaws after a cut has been made. 

A wire cutter with multifunctional capabilities also contributes to ease of use, as you won’t have to switch between tools in between tasks, such as cutting, stripping, and then crimping wires together. 

Blades 

Wire cutter blades are usually made from a type of “tool steel” with or without the addition of various metal alloys. Tool steel is simply iron with added carbon to achieve a hardness and durability that works particularly well for hand tools. Additional alloys, like higher quantities of carbon, chromium, nickel, and vanadium, can also be used to influence a tool’s hardness and durability. Generally speaking, wire cutters designed with conventional tool steel are affordable and offer a moderate level of hardness and durability, while steels that feature additional alloys are harder and more durable, but more expensive.

The other main difference between blades is whether they are made with a case hardening or induction hardening process. Most blades are case hardened, meaning that the tool is surrounded by carbon and heated until the higher—and harder—carbon material plates the blade’s surface, while leaving the core alloy unaffected. Induction hardening uses a multistage hardening process that heats the metal through electromagnetic conduction to harden the blade all the way through. Case hardened blades are generally the cheapest, but they’re not as durable and are difficult to sharpen. Inducted hardened blades are more expensive, but retain a sharp edge for longer and are easier to sharpen. 

FAQs About Your New Wire Cutters

Before you start using your new pair of wire cutters, you may have some lingering questions about some of its features and how they’re used. To that end, consider the answers to following frequently asked questions.

How should you use wire cutters? 

You can use wire cutters like a pair of scissors: by separating the handles to open the cutting blades, inserting the wire in between the blades, and closing the handles to bring the blades together and sever the wire. You can also insert a wire terminal connector into the crimping slot (if equipped) for crimping or insert a wire into the appropriate wire stripping slot for stripping wire. 

How should you open a wire cutter?

A wire cutter with a spring-loaded handle opens automatically when you’re no longer applying manual force to keep the handle closed. If the wire cutter isn’t spring-loaded, you can either use your nondominant hand to open the handles or use a flicking motion with the hand with which you’re using the pliers. 

Is it safe to cut a cable wire?

Before cutting a cable wire, you should ensure that it’s not supplied with electricity (“live”). You can use a line tester to verify that the wire isn’t electrified. To be extra careful, you can shut off the electricity to the section of your home where you’re working at the main fuse box.

Can wire cutters cut through metal?

Whether or not a wire cutter can cut through metal depends on what the cutter is rated to cut and whether it features an additional bolt cutter specifically designed for cutting metal. Some wire cutters are only capable of cutting through small copper wires, while others can cut through screws, nails, and other metal objects.

What are ESD-safe wire cutters?

ESD stands for “electrostatic discharge.” An ESD-safe wire cutter is rated by a third-party certification agency that determines their level of electrical insulation. Even if a wire cutter isn’t considered “ESD-safe”, it may still feature insulated handles that offer protection from electrical shocks.

The post This Simple Tool Is a Must-Have for Electrical Projects appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-21T14:21:04-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Voltage Testers, According to Our Tests]]>The best voltage testers can keep you safe and prevent shocks. We tested top picks—see which ones came out on top in our review.

The post The Best Voltage Testers, According to Our Tests appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-voltage-tester/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=144507Tue, 21 Jan 2025 11:53:44 -0500ReviewsDIYInteriorLighting & ElectricalToolsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

When working on electrical projects at home, it’s important to have tool box essentials on hand, including a voltage tester. We recently tested several voltage testers to identify eight models that can improve efficiency and help prevent electrical shocks.

Voltage testers allow users to quickly, easily, and safely check for power. With numerous types of voltage testers available, it’s important for consumers to know what to look for in a voltage tester and how to determine which one best suits their needs. Our favorite is the Fluke 1AC II VoltAlert Non-Contact Voltage Tester. It has a user-friendly design featuring a self-testing indicator, quick power alert, secure clip, and adjustable beep settings.

We conducted hands-on testing in situations DIYers are likely to encounter and consulted industry professionals and experts from Frontdoor.com to compile this list of the top voltage testers by category.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Fluke 1AC II VoltAlert Non-Contact Voltage Tester
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Klein Tools NCVT-1 Non-Contact Voltage Tester Pen
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Sperry Instruments Non-Contact Voltage Tester 
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST MULTIMETER: Fluke T6-1000 Pro Electrical Tester
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST MULTIFUNCTION: Klein Tools NCVT-4IR Non-Contact Voltage Tester Pen
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST WITH LIGHT: Greenlee Non-Contact Self-Test Voltage Detector
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST POCKET-SIZE: Ideal Industries 40-1000V AC Volt Aware NCVT
    ↓ Jump to Review
  8. ALSO CONSIDER: Fluke 2AC Non-Contact Pocket-Sized Voltage Tester
    ↓ Jump to Review
A person using the Sperry Instruments STK001 Non-Contact Voltage Tester to test an electrical cord.
Photo: Tom Scalisi for Bob Vila

Product Comparison

DesignTesting RangeActual Size
Fluke 1AC II VoltAlertPen 90 to 1,000V6 inches long by 0.625 inch wide by 0.75 inch deep
Klein Tools NCVT-1Pen 50 to 1,000V5.5 inches long by 0.7 inch wide by 1 inch deep
Sperry Instruments Non-ContactPen/outlet50 to 1,000V3 inches long by 1.5 inches wide by 1 inch deep
Fluke T6-1000 ProMultimeterUp to 1,000V11 inches long by 3 inches wide by 2 inches deep
Klein Tools NCVT-4IRPen 12 to 1,000V 6.25 inches long by 1 inch wide by 1 inch deep
Greenlee Non-Contact Self-Test Pen50 to 1,000V AC6 inches long by 0.75 inch wide by 0.75 inch deep
Ideal Industries 40-1000V ACPen40 to 1,000V AC5.75 inches long by 0.625 inch in diameter
Fluke 2AC Non-ContactPen 90 to 1,000V 5.75 inches long by 0.75 inch in diameter

Our Top Picks

Below, DIYers will find details about some of the best voltage testers on the market—all from trusted brands that produce quality electrical tools, all of which have been put through their paces with our hands-on testing. 

Best Overall

Fluke 1AC II VoltAlert Non-Contact Voltage Tester

 The Fluke 1AC II VoltAlert Non-Contact Voltage Tester on a white background
Photo: Amazon

Our Ratings: Portability 5/5; Durability 5/5; Usability 5/5; Value 5/5 

Product Specs

  • Design: Pen 
  • Testing range: 90 to 1,000V 
  • Actual size: 6 inches long by 0.625 inch wide by 0.75 inch deep

What We Like

  • Easily fits inside a tool bag or pocket
  • Self-test indicator prevents incorrect readings
  • Audible alert indicates active circuit detection
  • Automatic shutoff conserves battery

What We Don’t Like

  • Adjusting beep and silent modes takes practice

The Fluke 1AC II noncontact voltage tester is a quality pen tester from a leader in the electrical testing industry. This tester can detect voltage between 90V and 1,000V while fitting comfortably in a tool pouch or a pocket. When it detects voltage, the tip glows bright red as an alert.

The Fluke 1AC II voltage tester features a continuous self-test indicator that flashes red to alert that it’s working. It also has a loud, audible beep to indicate it detects power, but there is a disable function for quiet environments. This Fluke voltage tester runs on two included AAA batteries and features an automatic shutoff to save battery life.

We found that this voltage tester was extremely easy to use. The self-testing indicator is a handy feature, as it constantly alerts users that the tool is, in fact, working. We noted that it also alerts to power quickly when turned on (some models take a few seconds). It fits well in the tool bag, and the sturdy clip locks on easily. Turning it on with or without the beep (it depends on how long the button is held down) took some getting used to, but it didn’t impact the tester’s functionality. 

Get the Fluke VoltAlert voltage tester at Amazon or Lowe’s.

Runner-up

Klein Tools NCVT-1 Non-Contact Voltage Tester Pen

 The Klein Tools NCVT-1 Non-Contact Voltage Tester Pen on a white background
Photo: Amazon

Our Ratings: Portability 5/5; Durability 4/5; Usability 5/5; Value 5/5 

Product Specs

  • Design: Pen 
  • Testing range: 50 to 1,000V 
  • Actual size: 5.5 inches long by 0.7 inch wide by 1 inch deep

What We Like 

  • Indicator shows charge
  • Auto shutoff saves battery
  • Compact size

What We Don’t Like

  • Battery cap is secure but doesn’t seal off completely 

Klein Tools produces top-notch tools for electrical professionals, and the Klein Tools NCVT-1 noncontact voltage tester lives up to the company’s legacy. It can test for voltage between 50 and 1,000V of alternating current and fits nicely in a pocket or pouch.

The NCVT-1 voltage tester uses an easy-to-understand red-and-green indicator to alert the user to power: green for no power and red for voltage. It also beeps steadily when it detects voltage. It features an automatic shutoff to stretch battery life and a low-battery indicator that alerts when the included AAA batteries are about to run out.

While it might drain batteries faster than some other voltage testers, the constant green this tester emits when it’s on proved to be a nice touch during testing. It indicated that the model was working and slightly illuminated dark spaces, too. We also like that this tester is compact, measuring just 5.5 inches long, making it more than suitable for a toolbox or bag. 

Also, the automatic shutoff turns off without a loud beep, saving energy and avoiding startling the user when working with an electrical device. Our only complaint is that while the tail cap that retains the batteries is secure, gaps around the cap prevent it from sealing completely. 

Get the Klein Tools NCVT-1 voltage tester at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Bang For The Buck

Sperry Instruments Non-Contact Voltage Tester

 The Sperry Instruments Non-Contact Voltage Tester on a white background
Photo: Amazon

Our Ratings: Portability 5/5; Durability 5/5; Usability 4/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs

  • Design: Pen/outlet 
  • Testing range: 50 to 1,000V 
  • Actual size: 3 inches long by 1.5 inches wide by 1 inch deep

What We Like

  • Identifies reversed wiring and circuit issues
  • Tests GFCI outlets with one button touch
  • Affordable plug-in outlet tester/pen tester combination 
  • Audible and visual indicators when outlet is energized 

What We Don’t Like

  • Pen tester is overly sensitive; a bit unreliable

For a reliable, value-minded voltage tester, the STK001 noncontact voltage tester from Sperry Instruments is worth a look. This pen tester comes with a plug-in outlet tester, allowing users to test wires and outlets with one kit.

The pen tester detects voltages between 50 and 1,000V. When it detects voltage, it will beep loudly, and the clear plastic housing of the bulb will flash red. It runs on one AAA battery (included) and has a low-battery indicator to ensure it’s working. The outlet tester will alert the user to voltage, open grounds, neutrals, hots, and reversed polarities. It can also test ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) outlets to ensure they work properly. 

Our assessment of the Sperry kit is that it offers much value for its price point. For a relatively low cost, consumers get two tools to detect voltage. The plug-in tester proved easy to use, and our testing of outlet wiring configurations was a breeze. Also, tripping GFCI outlets was simple, requiring just the press of a button. We found that the pen tester is extremely sensitive and occasionally alerts to a voltage that isn’t present, but at least it errs on the side of caution.

Get the Sperry Instruments voltage tester at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Multimeter

Fluke T6-1000 Pro Electrical Tester

 The Fluke T6-1000 Pro Electrical Tester on a white background
Photo: Amazon

Our Ratings: Portability 5/5; Durability 5/5; Usability 4/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs

  • Design: Multimeter 
  • Testing range: Up to 1,000V 
  • Actual size: 11 inches long by 3 inches wide by 2 inches deep

What We Like

  • Measures DC, AC, amperage, and resistance 
  • Performs touch-free voltage measurements
  • Includes holster and alligator clips for portability

What We Don’t Like

  • Noncontact voltage readings aren’t as accurate 

Electrical professionals often need a fast way to test a wire and take measurements without finding a junction or outlet. The Fluke T6-1000 Pro electrical tester multimeter’s Field Sense setting detects and measures the voltage without disconnecting connections. Simply slide the testing fork over the wire, and the T6-1000 will report on its condition.

The T6-1000 features all the other common settings expected from a multimeter, including DC and AC, amperage, and resistance measurements. This durable voltage tester comes with alligator clips, swappable test leads, and a holster to keep it close at hand. 

As a multimeter, the T6-1000 worked just as we expected, providing readings on voltage, resistance, amperage, and hertz (helpful for electrical motor service and other equipment). The fact that it can indicate the presence of voltage between the forks is a nice benefit, allowing it to serve as a noncontact tester and a standard multimeter. However, in our experience, the actual voltage readings weren’t nearly as accurate as those of the regular leads. For user convenience, it comes with a holster, swappable leads, and alligator clips for easy transport. 

Get the Fluke T6-1000 voltage tester at Amazon.

Best Multifunction

Klein Tools NCVT-4IR Non-Contact Voltage Tester Pen

 The Klein Tools NCVT-4IR Voltage Tester Pen on a white background
Photo: Amazon

Our Ratings: Portability 4/5; Durability 5/5; Usability 4/5; Value 5/5 

Product Specs

  • Design: Pen 
  • Testing range: 12 to 1,000V 
  • Actual size: 6.25 inches long by 1 inch wide by 1 inch deep 

What We Like

  • Infrared thermometer detects between -22 and 482 F 
  • Includes noncontact voltage testing and temperature tests 
  • Low-voltage detection as low as 12V
  • IP54 rating; resists dust and water penetration 

What We Don’t Like

  • Fairly bulky compared to other pen testers

For electrical work around equipment that runs a bit hot, such as boilers, furnaces, and industrial equipment, the NCVT-4IR voltage tester from Klein Tools is a smart choice. In addition to detecting voltages within a range of 12 to 1,000V, this model features a built-in infrared thermometer. The thermometer can detect temperatures between -22 and 482 degrees Fahrenheit, providing safe, hands-free temperature checks. 

The pen tester features a two-color LED system: blue to indicate that it’s working and red when it detects voltage. The infrared thermometer has a built-in laser pointer that makes precise measurements easier. Both functions run on two AAA batteries, which have a built-in shutoff to preserve their life.

While the NCVT-4IR pen tester—an infrared thermometer and noncontact tester in one tool—is designed for HVAC mechanics and technicians, DIYers should also appreciate it. The laser was easy to use in testing, though slightly weaker than we would’ve liked. However, this model had the best range, detecting lower voltages than the others tested. It is fairly bulky compared to other pen-size models, but that bulk might be considered a benefit since this model is resistant to dust and water penetration and proved unaffected by either during our test. 

Get the Klein Tools NCVT-4IR voltage tester at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best With Light

Greenlee Non-Contact Self-Test Voltage Detector

 The Greenlee Non-Contact Self-Test Voltage Detector on a white background
Photo: Amazon

Our Ratings: Portability 5/5; Durability 5/5; Usability 5/5; Value 5/5 

Product Specs

  • Design: Pen
  • Testing range: 50 to 1,000V AC
  • Actual size: 6 inches long by 0.75 inch wide by 0.75 inch deep

What We Like

  • Rubberized grip provides comfortable, nonslip use
  • Built-in flashlight
  • Fits well in a shirt pocket or tool bag

What We Don’t Like

  • Color-changing indicator preferable to rapid-flashing LED and beep

Folks who want to ensure they can see exactly where and what they are testing will want to consider Greenlee’s noncontact voltage detector. This model has a built-in flashlight that the user can turn on when needed to see into dark corners or spaces. 

This model can detect voltage between 50 and 1,000V AC. In normal powered-on mode, it flashes red to indicate it’s working. Upon detecting voltage, the red LED flashes rapidly and the model beeps, indicating power is present. The automatic shutoff turns the pen tester off after 5 minutes of inactivity, and with its rubberized grip, holding onto it is a bit easier to manage.

During testing, we found quite a bit to like about the Greenlee. First, the rubberized texture makes holding this model comfortable and less likely to slip. Also, the flashlight illuminates darker spaces enough to find the wires, outlet, or device that needs testing. We particularly liked the size since it’s one of the most slender models going and fits well in a shirt pocket or tool bag. We would prefer that the LED light change color upon detecting voltage, but the rapid flash and beep work well. 

Get the Greenlee voltage tester at Grainger.

Best Pocket-size

Ideal Industries 40-1000V AC Volt Aware NCVT

 The Ideal Industries 40-1000V AC Volt Aware NCVT on a white background
Photo: Amazon

Our Ratings: Portability 4/5; Durability 4/5; Usability 4/5; Value 5/5 

Product Specs

  • Design: Pen
  • Testing range: 40 to 1,000V AC
  • Actual size: 5.75 inches long by 0.625 inch in diameter

What We Like

  • Fits neatly in shirt/tool-bag pocket
  • Twist-on/twist-off function 
  • Rubberized grip is comfortable

What We Don’t Like

  • Flimsy clip could break

Whether it’s a spare to toss in a tool bag or the main voltage tester a technician keeps in a shirt pocket, the Ideal Industries 40-1000V AV Volt Aware NCVT is a worthy choice. This model isn’t much larger than a typical magic marker, so it fits easily within most clothing pockets and can even slip into a pencil pocket in a tool bag or belt.

This tester can detect voltage between 40 and 1,000V AC. It has a green steady light that indicates when it’s on and a red flashing light and beep that indicates when it detects electricity. The rubberized body prevents slipping out of the hand, and the silence/beep toggle button near the tip is easy to access and use.

We found it super handy to tote this tester in either a shirt pocket or the one on our tool belt because it’s compact and rounded, taking up less space than a square-cornered model. We also liked the twist-on and twist-off function for a more tactile response than pressing a standard on/off switch, and the rubber grip makes grabbing it out of a pocket a breeze. However, the pocket clip is flimsy, so should it break off, the cylindrical tester might easily roll off a table or shelf. 

Get the Ideal Industries voltage tester at Amazon.

Also Consider

Fluke 2AC Non-Contact Pocket-Sized Voltage Tester

 The Fluke 2AC Non-Contact Pocket-Sized Voltage Tester on a white background
Photo: Amazon

Our Ratings: Portability 4/5; Durability 4/5; Usability 4/5; Value 5/5 

Product Specs 

  • Design: Pen 
  • Testing range: 90 to 1,000V 
  • Actual size: 5.75 inches long by 0.75 inch in diameter

What We Like

  • Compact and thin for easy transport
  • Visual indicators alert to the presence of power
  • Always in “on” mode for easy use

What We Don’t Like

  • No functional beep

While most pen testers will clip to a pants pocket or fit inside a shirt pocket, bulky models won’t feel comfortable to carry that way. Enter the 2AC noncontact voltage tester from Fluke. This pen tester measures just 5.75 inches long and 0.75 inch in diameter, so it can slide into a pocket with ease. It also weighs just 10.6 ounces, so it won’t feel heavy when clipped to a shirt.

The Fluke 2AC voltage tester detects voltages between 90 and 1,000V and glows red to indicate that it detects voltage. However, while the product description claims that the tester also beeps upon voltage detection, the model we used did not (some online consumers had the same complaint). The lack of an audible beep was somewhat of a letdown, as all the other models tested have that capability. But this model doesn’t have an on/off switch, so it’s always in “on” mode for easy use. And since there’s a built-in battery indicator and automatic shutoff, it should not drain its two AAA batteries. 

Get the Fluke 2AC voltage tester at Amazon or Walmart.

Jump to Our Top Picks

A person using the Sperry Instruments STK001 Non-Contact Voltage Tester to test an electrical outlet.
Photo: Tom Scalisi for Bob Vila

How We Tested the Best Voltage Testers 

We wanted to ensure we suggested only the best voltage testers, so we did our homework. We performed extensive product research and consulted experts like Chris Lozano, a master electrician with over 10 years of experience at Rev Electric in Sharon, Pennsylvania. He says that a voltage tester needs to be rated for the voltage you will be testing. “A residential household uses a 120/240-volt AC system, so a tester needs to be rated up to 250 volts AC.” 

We initially tested each model on various household outlets and appliance wires, both plugged and unplugged. Each was also tested on a 240-volt (V) dryer outlet, except for the plug-in model, to verify their reliability and effectiveness. We assessed the models for compactness, ensuring they fit in both a tool bag and a shirt pocket, and measured their actual size for precise specifications. Models featuring extra tools like thermometers and flashlights were also examined to confirm their functionality.

To ensure our top picks were the safest and best, we consulted Terry Dussault, CEO of Yellowknife Consulting Services in Huntington Beach, California, and a safety expert with over 25 years of experience. Dussault recommends testers that feature noncontact voltage detection, audible alerts, and a broad voltage range to improve efficiency. He also emphasizes the importance of certification by recognized safety organizations like Underwriters Laboratories or Conformité Européenne.

Models that passed our tests were recognized for their strengths, while those that failed were removed, creating our list of top voltage testers.

Testing Stats
Products tested  8
Time spent testing  8 hours
Tests performed 5
Price range $18 to $280

What to Consider When Choosing a Voltage Tester

Here are the most important factors to consider when choosing a voltage tester, including designs and functions.

Design

There are three basic voltage tester designs: 

  • Pen testers are roughly the size and shape of a thick pen or marker. To operate, simply turn it on and touch the wire in question. Users can also place the tip inside an outlet to test for voltage.
  • Outlet testers are about the size of an electrical plug and work by plugging directly into an outlet. They can test for voltage (and usually polarity, to check that the outlet is wired correctly), though they’re unable to test circuits outside of an outlet.
  • Multimeters with voltage testers are the best of both worlds, though they’re significantly larger than pen or outlet testers. They have grooves or hooks to surround a wire and detect voltage as well as leads (the wires and points connected to the tester) for testing contacts like outlets and terminals. 

Functionality

Generally, voltage testers are only useful for checking alternating currents, such as the electricity in a dwelling or commercial building. They don’t help detect the direct current in a vehicle.

But that doesn’t mean that all voltage testers are one-trick ponies. Some pen testers have built-in features like flashlights, measuring lasers, and infrared thermometers. Many outlet testers can alert the user if the wiring is backward. Multimeters can test for AC and DC voltage, resistance, amperage, and more. 

Each user’s needs will determine the necessary functions for a voltage detector. To test a wire for power, a pen tester can do the trick without confusing buttons or switches. If tackling various electrical projects, a multimeter might be a real asset.

Lozano says that one of the best ways to get the hang of using a voltage tester is the “live-dead-live” test, which can ensure the testing equipment is working. “Take the meter to something you know is working to test if it is live, then turn it off to test if it detects it is dead,” he says. Finally, test it again on the live part. “That will tell you if the testers are working and if the meter is in the right setting.”

Compatibility

Voltage testers aren’t compatible with every electrical device a DIYer might encounter. Certain types of voltage, or voltages outside the range the tester can detect, won’t cause the tester to alert.

Pen and outlet testers are excellent for testing electricity within the home, including switches, outlets, and fixtures, but they’re typically useless for checking for issues with a vehicle’s electrical system. Many pen testers also have voltage working ranges—such as 90 to 1,000V—so some may not be able to detect low voltages.

If taking on electronic device repairs (computers, drones, or televisions, for example) or working on a vehicle, look for a multimeter with a built-in voltage tester. A multimeter can switch between alternating and direct current and test for resistance and amperage. An HVAC multimeter can check an HVAC system’s fuses, switches, and other components.

Longevity

For long-term use and durability, choose a voltage tester from one of the trusted manufacturers in the electrical tools industry. These companies specialize in creating electrical tools for pros, and their products are top-notch—many pros still use meters and testers they purchased decades ago.

Battery life is also a consideration. Many of the best voltage testers have automatic shut-off functions. If they don’t detect voltage within a certain amount of time (usually around 15 minutes), the tester will automatically shut off to prolong battery life.

FAQs

Q. Is a voltage tester the same as a multimeter?

No, voltage testers and multimeters are not the same, though some multimeters feature voltage testers. Voltage testers indicate only the presence of voltage. Multimeters can test the amount of voltage, amperage, or resistance in a fixture or circuit.

Q. Are voltage testers safe?

Yes, voltage testers are safety tools, and they’re safe to use. They have insulation to protect against current transfer, so the tester can’t transfer electricity to the user’s body.

Q. How do I know if the tester is functioning?

Most voltage testers feature battery indicators that automatically alert you to advise that the tester is working. Others might require you to activate the battery test. If unsure, check an outlet you know is working to ensure the tester is functioning.

Meet the Tester

Tom Scalisi is a full-time DIY and construction writer for many of the largest websites in the industry, including BobVila.com, This Old House, Family Handyman, and Forbes. He also owns and operates a pest control blog, RiddaBugs.com

The post The Best Voltage Testers, According to Our Tests appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-21T11:53:44-05:00
<![CDATA[We Tested Over a Dozen Snow Blowers and This Ryobi Is a Heavy-Duty Machine in Compact Form]]>The best cordless snow blowers make quick work of clearing driveways and walkways. We put our top picks to the test on heavy snow in cold temps.

The post We Tested Over a Dozen Snow Blowers and This Ryobi Is a Heavy-Duty Machine in Compact Form appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-cordless-snow-blower/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-cordless-snow-blower/Mon, 20 Jan 2025 12:58:00 -0500ReviewsDIYDriveways & WalkwaysExteriorToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Shoveling snow can be tiring, but a cordless snow blower can minimize the bending, lifting, and tossing necessary to clear driveways and walkways. Another major benefit of these tools is that they don’t emit unpleasant and harmful fumes, which makes them better for the environment than gas-powered snow blowers. To help you sift through all the options, we tested a dozen popular models, evaluating them on power, maneuverability, and overall efficiency.

After our tests and an interview with a snow-removal expert, we chose the Ryobi 40V 22″ Two-Stage Cordless Snow Blower as our favorite for its sturdy build and powerful performance. It impressed us in just about every kind of snow, but it’s not the only option worthy of a look.

Our top picks are among the best in their category, with a range of models and sizes to suit a variety of snow-blowing needs. Keep reading to find out how well these models cleared snowy exteriors and to learn what to look for when shopping for one of the best cordless snow blowers.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Ryobi 40V 22″ Two-Stage Cordless Snow Blower
    Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Toro Power Max 60V e24 24″ Two-Stage Snow Blower
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Snow Joe 48V 18″ Ionmax Cordless Snow Blower Kit
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST TWO-STAGE: Ego Power+ 56V 24″ Self-Propelled Snow Blower
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST SINGLE-STAGE: Greenworks Pro 60V 22″ Cordless Snow Blower
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST COMPACT: Earthwise 40V 18″ Cordless Snow Thrower
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST LIGHTWEIGHT: Ego Power+ 56V 21″ Peak Power Snow Blower
    Jump to Review 
  8. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Toro Power Clear 60V e21 21″ Cordless Snow Blower
    Jump to Review
  9. ALSO CONSIDER: DeWalt 60V 21″ Max Single-Stage Snow Blower Kit
    Jump to Review 
Three of the best cordless snow blowers on a snowy driveway during testing.
Photo: Zach Lazzari for Bob Vila

Cordless Snow Blowers Comparison Chart 

Product NameTypeWeightClearing Width
Ryobi 40V 22″ Two-Stage Cordless Snow Blower2-stage146 pounds22 inches
Toro Power Max 60V e24 24″ Two-Stage Snow Blower2-stage172 pounds24 inches
Snow Joe 48V 18″ Ionmax Cordless Snow Blower Single-stage37.5 pounds18 inches
Ego Power+ 56V 24″ Self-Propelled Snow Blower2-stage143.3 pounds (without batteries)24 inches
Greenworks Pro 60V 22″ Cordless Snow BlowerSingle-stage57 pounds22 inches
Earthwise 40V 18″ Cordless Snow ThrowerSingle-stage34 pounds18 inches
Ego Power+ 56V 21″ Peak Power Snow Blower Single-stage53 pounds21 inches
Toro Power Clear 60V e21 21″ Cordless Snow BlowerSingle-stage55 pounds21 inches
DeWalt 60V 21″ Max Single-Stage Snow Blower Kit Single-stage59 pounds21 inches

Our Top Picks

We tested and ranked these options based on build quality, price, and overall efficiency. Not only did these models remove mounds of the white stuff easily, but they also handled temperatures as low as -7 degrees Fahrenheit during testing with no battery or power output issues. Check out our top picks to find the best cordless snow blower for just about any job.

Best Overall

Ryobi 40V 22" Two-Stage Cordless Snow Blower

 The Ryobi 40V 22" Two-Stage Cordless Snow Blower, two batteries, and charger on a white background.
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Steel auger strong enough for hard-packed snow
  • Multiple speed settings for maximum maneuverability
  • Cutting path is appropriately sized most exteriors
  • Includes 2 powerful 8 amp hour (Ah) batteries

What We Don’t Like

  • Loses charge faster at full auger and drive speed
  • No heated hand grips

Specs 

  • Type: 2-stage
  • Weight: 136 pounds
  • Clearing width: 22 inches

After completing all our tests, one snow blower ranked better than the rest for excellent performance across every category: the Ryobi two-stage brushless snow blower. This machine has all the benefits of a heavy-duty model yet is also very nimble and capable in tighter spaces. While there are both bigger and smaller options available, this one was just right for every job we encountered. 

The Ryobi’s steel auger is powerful, and it even worked on a gravel driveway with great results. With multiple speed settings and a reverse option on the drive system, the lightweight unit was very easy to maneuver. The tires gripped well, and it had no problem pivoting on narrow walkways and cutting through deep snow on big driveways. The controls made changing auger and throw angles simple, and this model shot snow through the chute with impressive power, sending fresh powder a good 40+ feet.

What our tester says: “The combination of functionality, maneuverability, and the flexibility to work through different types of snow and surfaces made this model a joy to use. This thing felt as powerful as any gas or electric model we’ve tested. “—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Ryobi cordless snow blower at The Home Depot.

Runner-up

Toro Power Max e24 60V 24" Two-Stage Snow Blower

 The Best Cordless Snow Blower Option Toro Power Max 60V e24 24 Two-Stage Snow Blower
Photo: Tractor Supply

What We Like

  • Wide 24-inch path for larger driveways
  • Durable steel construction
  • High headlight position for working in poor visibility
  • Optional-use third battery bay to extend runtime

What We Don’t Like

  • Very heavy

Specs 

  • Type: 2-stage
  • Weight: 172 pounds
  • Clearing width: 24 inches

Property owners and managers in need of a serious two-stage electric snow blower will appreciate the Toro e24 cordless model. It’s built on the same platform as Toro’s two-stage gas models and delivers the power and performance the brand is known for. In our tests, one of the first things we noticed was its beefy steel auger, which is surrounded by a steel box and frame. The auger’s joystick-style control offered the best of design of the bunch, making changing throwing angle and direction quick and easy.

Since it has space for the two included batteries and an optional third, the battery box on this Toro is larger than that of other options. Buying a third battery is a simple way to increase runtime between recharging, and with all three, this model can run for over an hour. We used two in our tests, giving us just over 30 minutes to clear our property. In exceptionally heavy and wet snow, runtime might be a bit shorter, but it’s still competitive with that of other models. 

What our tester says: “This machine performs similarly to top-tier gas models. Its drive system was powerful enough to push heavy snow, and its wide path helped us clear our driveway quickly even though conditions were challenging.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Toro Power Max cordless snow blower at Tractor Supply Co. or Acme Tools.

Best Bang for the Buck

Snow Joe 48V 18" Ionmax Cordless Snow Blower Kit

 The Best Cordless Snow Blower Option Snow Joe 48V 18 Ionmax Cordless Snow Blower Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Budget-friendly price point
  • Powerful snow thrower for the size
  • Lightweight for easy maneuvering
  • Small size for easier storage

What We Don’t Like

  • Less stable on uneven surfaces

Specs 

  • Type: Single-stage
  • Weight: 37.5 pounds
  • Clearing width: 18 inches

This Snow Joe single-stage model is an excellent lightweight and highly portable snow blower. Although this machine is smaller than many others we tested, its quadruple-bladed rubber-tipped steel auger can carve a path 18 inches wide by 10 inches deep in a single pass. In deeper snow, we had to blow snow in layers, but this Snow Joe still got the job done. 

In our testing, we found that the Snow Joe was best for flat, even walkways and driveways, as it did get hung up on small obstructions. Beyond that, we were truly impressed with its overall performance, easy-to-use controls, and value price. Its ability to throw snow in the 20-foot range was a definite surprise for a single-stage snow blower. We did use chute lubricant to minimize clogging, and we believe this helped it throw snow without sticking. 

This rechargeable snow blower comes with two 4Ah batteries, which provide about 40 minutes of runtime. It has a pair of LED headlights that make night sessions easier, and it’s also easy to pick up (it even has a handy crossbar to grab for the job). Especially given that it’s a relatively cheap snow blower, this small Snow Joe is a very solid option.

Get the Snow Joe cordless snow blower at Amazon (with cover and scraper), Walmart, Best Buy, or Blain’s Farm & Fleet.

Best Two-Stage

Ego Power+ 56V 24" Self-Propelled Snow Blower

 The Ego Power+ 56V 24" Self-Propelled Snow Blower and two batteries on a white background.
Photo: Lowe’s

What We Like

  • Throws snow 50 feet or more
  • Can change throttle speed quickly
  • Comparable power to gas-powered snow blowers

What We Don’t Like

  • Can’t “bump” the throttle

Specs 

  • Type: 2-stage
  • Weight: 143.3 pounds (without batteries)
  • Clearing width: 24 inches

Whether snow is mounded on your sidewalk, patio, or even a gravel driveway, this two-stage snow blower can push through. It features a powerful auger to scoop and throw snow as well as an impeller fan that helps it manage large piles. Thanks to its ample 24-inch-wide clearing path, this model can move through large areas efficiently. It still feels nimble, however, and we appreciate how easily it pivots under power. The dual-battery power provided by the two 7.5Ah batteries keeps it running for upwards of 1 hour in normal conditions, and the heated grips are a wonderful bonus for cold conditions. 

This Ego Power+ isn’t inexpensive, but it’s worth every penny. Not only did this model work as well as almost any gas-powered snow blower we’ve ever used, but in some instances, it worked better. We liked that we could change the throttle speed on the fly. Also, we found that the reported 50-foot throw distance might be an understatement—this thing has power to spare. The main throttle for the drive wheels is a lever-activated switch, which didn’t allow us to bump the throttle the way we can with a gas-powered mechanical throttle. Instead, there’s a delay, but the ability to throw snow 50-plus feet made up for it. 

What our tester says: “With two 7.5Ah arc lithium batteries, a heavy steel auger, a convenient control dashboard, and 50 feet of throwing distance, I was impressed by this machine’s well-rounded features and thoughtful design. It had more than enough power to work through a big storm.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer

Read our full review: Ego Power+ 56V 24″ Self-Propelled Snow Blower

Get the Ego Power+ self-propelled snow blower at Lowe’s, Walmart, Ace Hardware, or Northern Tool + Equipment

Best Single-Stage

Greenworks Pro 60V 22" Cordless Snow Blower

 The Greenworks Pro 60V 22" Cordless Snow Blower, two batteries, and charger on a white background.
Photo: Walmart

What We Like

  • Lightweight design
  • Ample power for a single-stage snow blower
  • Excellent battery life
  • Auger churns through snow very well

What We Don’t Like

  • Cleaning tool doesn’t attach to the snow blower

Specs 

  • Type: Single-stage
  • Weight: 57 pounds
  • Clearing width: 22 inches

The Greenworks Pro 60V snow blower offers a nice combination of power and functionality in a lightweight, easy-to-use unit. We tested this model in varying conditions, and its auger breezed through powder and held its own in heavy snow. Its 22-inch cutting path is substantial for a single-stage model, and it also has 13 inches of depth. The chute ejection proved clean in testing, and the Greenworks threw snow up to 40 feet, which is an ample distance. 

One thing we really appreciate about Greenworks is the brand’s impressive battery game, and this unit pairs two higher amp-hour batteries (5Ah) with this tool’s competitive single-stage design. With more than an hour of runtime in moderate storms, this is an excellent option for those wanting ample runtime to work across larger areas. We were able to clear a full driveway and walkways and still had battery life left over to help out the neighbors.

Get the Greenworks snow blower at Tractor Supply Co., Walmart, or Greenworks

Best Compact

Earthwise 40V 18" Cordless Snow Thrower

 The Earthwise 40V 18" Cordless Snow Thrower on white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact size stores easily
  • Lightweight and easy to handle for extended use
  • Impressively quick 30-minute charging

What We Don’t Like

  • Assembly is hampered by lesser-quality hardware

Specs 

  • Type: Single-stage
  • Weight: 34 pounds
  • Clearing width: 18 inches

Instead of multiple rounds of intensive shoveling that result in sore, aching muscles, shoppers may be better off investing in an affordable, cordless device that clears away snow at a rate of up to 500 pounds per minute. Earthwise’s battery-powered snow blower comes with one 4Ah battery and a rapid charger that brings the battery back to full power within 30 minutes. At just 34 pounds, this lightweight machine is akin to a handheld snow blower, and its ergonomic, padded handle makes it even easier to maneuver.

This excellent-value blower includes a dual-blade auger with a snow-throwing distance of 30 feet. Its front snow-intake port has a clearing width of just 18 inches, so it may take a few passes to clear a wide driveway. It has a clearing depth of 12 inches, which can cut quickly through long stretches of moderate snow. 

Overall, this light-duty single-stage snowblower performed very well in testing. It has a relatively sturdy build, but we wish it had better assembly hardware. Otherwise, it worked similarly to a cordless snow shovel with a battery, making it perfect for clearing backyard patios and small to moderate driveways. We really enjoyed the bright headlights for low light conditions and how easily the chute rotates, but the throw angle does require a manual adjustment.

Get the Earthwise cordless snow blower at Amazon, Walmart, or Northern Tool + Equipment.

Best Lightweight

Ego Power+ 56V 21" Peak Power Snow Blower

 The Best Cordless Snow Blower Option Ego Power+ 56V 21 Peak Power Snow Blower
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Easy to maneuver and control
  • Quiet operation won’t disturb neighbors
  • Throws snow an impressive distance

What We Don’t Like

  • Single-stage auger can catch on uneven surfaces
  • Chute needs lubrication in extreme cold

Specs 

  • Type: Single-stage
  • Weight: 53 pounds
  • Clearing width: 21 inches

The Ego Power+ Peak Power single-stage snow blower is a battery-powered machine that runs on two 5Ah batteries, offering impressive snow-clearning power on a single charge. Weighing just 53 pounds, we found operating it similar to using a lawn mower. It has a bail switch for easy control and a conveniently placed chute lever for quickly adjusting snow-throwing direction. Its steel auger was quite effective when clearing heavy snow from our driveway, though it did scrape against the cement in places where the pavement is uneven. 

We appreciated that this machine was so easy to set up, only requiring us to install the chute. Its batteries charged in just 40 minutes via our rapid charger, but a standard charger will still get the job done in a relatively short 100 minutes. Though this machine didn’t quite throw lightweight snow the full 40 feet Ego advertises, it got pretty close when we tested it on wet and heavy precipitation, even in below-zero temperatures. The chute did clog when it was that cold outside, but using a bit of nonstick snow blower spray will take care of that problem.

Read our full review: Ego Power+ 56V 21″ Peak Power Snow Blower

Get the Ego Power+ Peak Power snow blower at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Ace Hardware.

Best Heavy-Duty

Toro Power Clear 60V e21 21" Cordless Snow Blower

 The Best Cordless Snow Blower Option Toro Power Clear 60V e21 21 Cordless Snow Blower
Photo: Lowe’s

What We Like

  • Really digs into the snow
  • Durable metal auger is built to last
  • Large battery with 40 to 60 minutes of runtime

What We Don’t Like

  • Awkward weight distribution
  • Takes 3 hours to charge the battery

Specs 

  • Type: Single-stage
  • Weight: 55 pounds
  • Clearing width: 21 inches

Although the Toro two-stage is a popular favorite, the company also makes a single-stage snow blower for those wanting something a little lighter-duty. Like the two-stage, it resembles the build of Toro’s single-stage gas models. By bringing the long-standing quality and design of gas snow blower augers, buckets, chutes, and components to the electric side, Toro gives major confidence and sets real expectations for users experienced with gas-model operations.

The Toro truly shined in our head-to-head comparison testing. Its best attribute was how well it dug into the snow, getting down to the surface below for better clearing. This is one of only a few single-stage options that offer a steel auger. While that adds a few pounds, it’s worth the trade-off when it comes to breaking down wet or icy snow. It also throws that snow very well, hitting around 40 feet from the chute, and the chute itself has a great turning radius of 200 degrees. However, we found its uneven weight distribution awkward—it even tipped over a few times, but not during use. We think this is due to the massive 7.5Ah battery mounted behind the wheels, but that long battery life is worth it to us.

Get the Toro Power Clear cordless snow blower at Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, Walmart, or Toro.

Also Consider

DeWalt 60V 21" Max Single-Stage Snow Blower Kit

 The Best Cordless Snow Blower Option DeWalt 60V 21 Max Single-Stage Snow Blower Kit
Photo: Tractor Supply

What We Like

  • Steel auger blade
  • Eco and Max power modes for optimal battery life
  • Batteries last about an hour
  • Folding handle makes storage easy

What We Don’t Like

  • Plastic wheels have minimal traction
  • Requires manual pushing
  • Power button doubles as the auger engagement

Specs 

  • Type: Single-stage
  • Weight: 59 pounds
  • Clearing width: 21 inches

DeWalt is a leader in electric power tools, and its entry in the electric snow blower market is strong. The company offers two substantial 4Ah batteries and 60 volts of power for a long-lasting, reasonably powerful machine. We enjoyed the steel auger, which performs better than plastic when it comes to icy conditions and difficult snow. It ought to provide real longevity. 

The blade did a great job of breaking down wet snow, and it ejected well from the chute. It didn’t throw more than 40 feet like many models we tested, but it did throw a reasonable distance and cleared the space required for a 2-car driveway. We found that adding a layer of silicone chute lubricant helped to prevent clogging and kept it running smoothly. While users must manually adjust the chute angles, the electric chute rotation tabs were really nice for changing direction. They are quick and easy to access—among the best we have encountered.

Other bonuses are the easy-to-fold handle for transportation and storage. It only requires a few seconds to prep for storage and it reassembles just as quickly. This is a good electric snow blower for small to moderate snow loads on paved surfaces. It’s not as robust as the bigger two-stage options, but it’s still a great pick.

Get the DeWalt snow blower at Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, or The Home Depot.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Cordless Snow Blowers

We had to wait for a significant storm to test these snow-clearing tools, but when it finally arrived, it not only brought snow but subzero wind chills—the perfect weather to put these models through their paces since extreme cold is typically hard on battery-powered tools. Before testing, we assessed each model’s ease of assembly and compared their features and components, identifying which were more heavy duty and which might be more difficult to use. 

Once we had a few inches of snow on the ground, we cleared two 75-foot-long 4-car driveways, a 12-foot-by-8-foot deck, and several small walkways between them. As snow continued to fall in additional storms, we kept using each option to blow the light and heavy precipitation that fell and chip away at icy road buildup left by plows. We checked runtime, throwing distance, and ease of use, rating each model to determine which of the best cordless snow blowers belonged in our lineup.

Testing Stats
Products tested 12
Time spent testing 2 weeks
Tests performed5
Price range$350 to $1,600

What to Consider When Choosing a Cordless Snow Blower 

The best snow blower for a particular user depends on the amount of snow a region typically experiences, the size of the sidewalk and driveway that need clearing, and how much battery power and runtime the project requires. Some cordless snow blowers are equipped to handle wide swaths of deep snow, but others are not. Consider these factors when perusing the many features of cordless snow blowers on today’s market.

Single-Stage vs. Two-Stage

The best cordless snow blowers fall into one of two categories: single-stage or two-stage. There are also three-stage blowers available; however, these are limited to gas-powered tools and commercial applications.

  • Single-stage snow blowers, most commonly used for residential purposes, have a horizontal auger at the front of the machine that rotates rapidly to scoop up snow and throw it through the chute. One disadvantage of a single-stage snow blower, however, is that it isn’t suitable for gravel driveways. Its auger blades are too low to the ground and will pick up the rocks and throw them.
  • Two-stage snow blowers use an auger to scoop and throw snow, much like single-stage snow blowers, but they also have an impeller fan that makes them more effective at managing larger amounts of heavy snow. They can throw snow over 35 feet, and their auger blades sit high enough to clear gravel driveways.

Power and Runtime

The runtime of a battery-powered snow blower is a key factor to consider when deciding on the best electric snow blower for tackling a driveway, walkway, or patio. Although most battery-operated snow blowers have a runtime that ranges from about 30 to 45 minutes, this depends on whether the snow is light and fluffy or heavy and wet.

The heavier the snow, the more power required to remove it, which means a cordless snow thrower that usually runs for 45 minutes may run for only 30 minutes before the battery needs to be recharged. However, there are also snow blowers that use more than one battery at a time to increase the power and runtime of the machine. Shoppers will want to consider a dual-battery blower if there’s a lot of ground to clear.

Size and Weight 

A cordless snow blower’s size and weight are important considerations. Though users needn’t bend to scoop, lift, and throw snow as they do with a standard shovel, they still must push the snow blower. Size also matters when storing the snow blower in a garage, shed, or any other space. 

Small snow blowers are generally single-stage models that weigh between 20 and 60 pounds. Though heavier snow blowers may have a self-propelling system to make them easier to move, maneuvering a larger, heavier machine, especially if the area is large or hilly, can be challenging for many users. 

Clearing Width and Depth 

When calculating clearing width and depth, think about the driveway, sidewalk, and any other areas around the home that must be cleared of snow. Some cordless snow blowers have small intake ports that can clear 6 inches of snow, and other models have deep 12-inch intake ports. Clearing width correlates to the blower’s number of stages.

  • Single-stage cordless snow blowers are usually sufficient for residential snow removal. Use a single-stage blower to remove snow in sections that are 11 to 22 inches wide.
  • Two-stage cordless snow blowers, well suited for small commercial locations or large residential properties, have a clearing width between 20 and 30 inches.

Speed Control

Because snow blowers can be heavy and cumbersome, many users want a self-propelled model. Unlike gas snow blowers, battery-powered models have a digital drive system and can be self-propelled, but they usually have a variable-speed auger to speed up snow removal. 

By increasing the speed at which the snow is scooped and thrown through the chute, the auger makes it easier to move the machine through a light snowfall. However, a variable-speed auger isn’t as effective when clearing heavy, packed snow.

Chute Control

The chute, which is a curved, hollow tube that extends from the back of the intake on a snow blower, provides a route for the snow to be thrown from the machine. On most blowers, a manual crank or lever allows users to change the angle and direction of the snow being displaced. 

Premium snow blowers, however, have auto-rotating chutes that users turn by pushing a button near the handle, which doesn’t require the machine to be stopped. The angle on some chutes also can be changed to allow the snow blower to throw snow even farther.

Wheels, Tracks, and Terrain Type

Cordless snow blowers can traverse snow on either wheels or tracks. Wheeled snow blowers feature two large rear wheels that drive the machine forward, while snow blowers with tracks have tracks similar to those found on a tank. Consider the features of wheeled versus tracked blowers: 

  • Wheeled snow blowers are easier to turn because tracked models don’t pivot. Wheel sizes for single-stage snow blowers range from 6 to 8 inches. Larger wheels perform better in deeper snow, while smaller wheels are easier to maneuver. These blowers are generally faster than tracked models. That said, some higher-end tracked blowers offer faster speed and turn-on-a-dime technology, making them comparable in speed and maneuverability to wheeled models. 
  • Tracked snow blowers provide significantly better traction in the snow, making them better able to climb steep slopes without slipping backward. Most tracked snow blowers are two-stage models, as single-stage models typically don’t produce enough power to drive the tracks. They also operate closer to the surface, leaving a thinner layer of snow and ice on a driveway or sidewalk than wheeled models. 

When choosing between wheeled or tracked snow blowers, shoppers will want to take terrain type into account. Wheeled snow blowers are best suited for paved surfaces, such as driveways and sidewalks, while tracked snow blowers are better on unpaved surfaces. Grade also has a significant impact; steep driveways require a snow blower with good traction and enough power to pull it up a snow-covered slope.

Additional Features

Some of the best cordless snow blowers have special features designed to make snow clearing easier and more comfortable. These extras include heated handles, a drift cutter, headlights, and an automatic snow blower safety shutoff. 

  • Heated handles may seem luxurious, but personal safety is an important part of working outdoors in freezing temperatures. The heat generated by the handles not only helps keep the user’s fingers warm in the cold air, but also makes it easier to hold and control the snow blower.
  • Drift cutters help clear deep drifts of snow. The cutter’s metal housing collects and pushes snow down into the auger for removal.
  • Headlights make it easier and safer to clear snow at night or during low-visibility situations.
  • An automatic safety shutoff shuts off the snow blower when the user releases the handle.

FAQs 

First-time cordless snow blower shoppers may have some additional questions about these devices. Just ahead are answers to some of the most commonly asked snow-blower questions.

Q. What is the difference between a snow blower and a snow thrower?

The terms “snow blower” and “snow thrower” are used interchangeably, but there are a couple of minor technical differences. While both clear away snow, a snow thrower is a single-stage machine, and a snow blower can be a single-stage, two-stage, or three-stage machine. Snow blowers clear a wider swath and are better suited for heavier snow, while snow throwers work well for lighter snow.

Q. Is a cordless snow blower heavy?

Battery-powered cordless snow blowers are relatively lightweight, typically ranging from about 20 pounds to 60 pounds for a single-stage. Two-stage electric models can reach nearly 200 pounds.

Q. How do you use a snow blower?

To get the driveway as clean as possible with a snow blower, power it up just after the snow has stopped falling since snow is easier to move when it’s still light and fluffy. Push the snow blower down and back up the sidewalk or driveway, making the necessary adjustments to the discharge chute so that the snow piles up where you want it.

Q. How do you store a snow blower?

A cordless snow blower should be stored safely in a garage or storage shed when not in use. Those who don’t have sheltered storage will want to secure a waterproof tarp over and around the snow blower. Without proper storage and maintenance, folks could wind up with a snow blower that doesn’t start.

Q. How long do cordless snow blowers last?

If properly stored and maintained, a cordless snow blower can last about 10 years.

Q. How much should I spend on a snow blower?

The affordable snow blowers​ tested in this guide cost between $350 and $1,600. According to Corey Welch, founder and CEO of Mow & Snow, “Higher price tags often mean better durability, power, and features, but it’s all about matching the blower to your needs. Paying for more power than you’ll use or features you don’t need doesn’t make sense.” Over time, even a more expensive snow blower will likely run you less than the cost of snow removal if you live in an area that gets regular snow.

Q. Are cordless snow blowers loud?

Cordless snow blowers are much quieter than gas models. Still, given that these are large machines doing relatively difficult work, some noise is to be expected. 

Q. How much horsepower is good for a snow blower?

The Ryobi 40V 22″ Two-Stage Cordless Snow Blower is a very good snow blower, and it uses a 40-volt battery to deliver more power than a 243cc gas snow blower. As our pick for the best cordless snow blower, it was powerful enough to excel in all of our tests.

Meet the Testers

Zach Lazzari is a freelance writer splitting time between the great outdoors, travel, and DIY projects ranging from camper builds to home renovations and maintenance. His home base in Montana provides the perfect testing grounds for winter products and snow equipment.

Tom Scalisi is a freelance writer specializing in the home design, construction, tools, and automotive industries. He has been involved in the trades for over 15 years as both a contractor and a commercial building mechanic. 

Additional research provided by Timothy Dale. 

The post We Tested Over a Dozen Snow Blowers and This Ryobi Is a Heavy-Duty Machine in Compact Form appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-20T12:58:00-05:00
<![CDATA[I Hated Scrubbing My Patio Furniture Clean—Now I Don’t Need To]]>The post I Hated Scrubbing My Patio Furniture Clean—Now I Don’t Need To appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/dewalt-flexvolt-power-cleaner-review/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=423002Thu, 16 Jan 2025 11:12:59 -0500ReviewsCleaning & OrganizingDIYHand ToolsPower ToolsToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

I recently had a great experience testing the new DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX 1,000 PSI Power Cleaner during an end-of-season yard cleanup. Power cleaners are similar to electric or gas pressure washers that create a high pressure water jet for cleaning hard surfaces, but they are more compact and almost exclusively battery powered. Since pressure washers are a mainstay tool in building construction and maintenance, it’s no wonder that DeWalt has produced them for years. In this DeWalt FlexVolt 60V Power Cleaner review, I will share my experience from testing this unit and why I recommend it. 

DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX 1,000 PSI Power Cleaner: At a Glance
Our rating: 4.5/5

DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX 1,000 PSI Power Cleaner Specs
Power source60V DeWalt FlexVolt battery (not included)
Water sourceHose outlet or bucket
Water pressureUp to 1,000 pounds per square inch (PSI)
Flow rate1 gallon per minute (GPM)
NozzlesTurbo, 15, 25, 40
Hose length20 feet
DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX Cordless Power Cleaner Review action
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Testing the DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX 1,000 PSI Power Cleaner 

I tested the DeWalt power cleaner this fall when I had to put away patio furniture and outdoor pottery for the season. Since my regular pressure washer produces a 3,000 PSI stream, it’s great for the driveway, deck, and house siding, but not so much for small or lightweight items, or delicate finishes that are susceptible to damage. So I normally spend an afternoon with a scrub brush and soapy water cleaning these things before storing them. I took a chance this year using the 1,000 PSI power cleaner, and it did a great job. 

Essentially, using the power cleaner worked the same as cleaning with a big pressure washer. It came with a variety of different spray nozzles and a soap sprayer to accommodate different cleaning needs. But the moderate water pressure and reduced flow rate on the power cleaner afforded better control than I would ever have with my gas powered pressure washer. Also, it has the ability to intake water from either a hose outlet or a bucket of water, which makes it more convenient when a hose bib is not available. Best of all, it saved about 2 hours of scrubbing and allowed more time for everything to dry thoroughly after cleaning and before storing it for the winter. 

What We LikeWhat We Don’t Like
Easier to maneuver than a big pressure washerLimited to about 40 minutes of run time per charge
Faster than hand scrubbingPremium price for a unique tool
Strong enough to clean well
Gentle enough to avoid damage
DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX Cordless Power Cleaner Review battery
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Just Right for Smaller Cleaning Projects

For cleaning small, lightweight items and sensitive surfaces, you need just the right amount of water pressure. Rated 1,000 PSI, this tool produces about 18 times the pressure of a garden hose, but less than half the pressure of most gas powered pressure washers. The kit includes a quick connect wand, turbo nozzle, 15-degree, 25-degree, and 40 degree nozzles, soap cannon, shoulder strap, suction hose with quick connect adapter, and a mesh storage bag. The kit I tested also came with a battery charger and 9 amp hour FlexVolt battery, but the tool is also available for a lower price without the battery. 

A Portable Power Cleaner That Boaters and RVers Will Appreciate

The DeWalt Power Cleaner is one of the most portable pressure-type cleaners I’ve used. It is significantly smaller than gas-powered or plug-in electric pressure washers. When disassembled, it is small enough to stow in a storage tote or large tool box. That makes it easy to transport also, which boaters and RVers will appreciate. The whole kit only weighs about 14.5 pounds.

As for mobility while working, one of my favorite features was the option to either tap into a hose outlet or pull water from any fresh water source. When an outdoor faucet was nearby, I connected to a garden hose as with any other pressure washer. But if I was working far from a faucet, I didn’t need to connect multiple hoses for longer reach. I simply brought a bucket of water to the project and used the included intake hose. It only took a few seconds for the self-priming pump to pull in water so I could start cleaning. The 1-gallon per minute flow rate meant that a 5 gallon bucket of water only provided 5 minutes of cleaning time. But a larger water source like a rain barrel, pool, or lake could provide nearly unlimited time.

DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX Cordless Power Cleaner Review nozzles
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Good Run Time and Modest Pressure for Light Duty Cleaning

For light duty cleaning over a larger area, the self-priming pump and 20-foot intake hose is less convenient. It doesn’t provide enough mobility, so I found myself constantly repositioning the bucket. I really liked the modest pressure for washing my car, but needed to connect to a garden hose that I could just drag around the car as I worked. It’s also important to note that this unit is not designed for tough cleaning jobs; for instance, it was under-powered for cleaning mildew off my driveway.

DeWalt claims that the included FlexVolt battery delivers up to 37 minutes of constant run time per charge, but that didn’t seem accurate to me. I actually got better results. With typical use patterns–intermittent trigger blasts of 5 to 30 seconds at a time–it gave me 90 minutes of cleaning time before depleting the battery. That was enough time to clean a patio table, four chairs, a bench, and about 30 garden pots of different sizes. So it really proved to be an ideal tool for small items. It did not damage my wood bench, chip clay pots, or knock over pottery, and I finished the job in about one-third the time it typically takes me to scrub everything by hand.

DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX Cordless Power Cleaner Review quick connect
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Why I Think the DeWalt FlexVolt Power Cleaner Is Worth The Premium Price

At a regular price of $349.00, the DeWalt 1,000 PSI Power Cleaner kit is one of the more expensive tools in its class, but with good reason. Most of the small cordless power cleaners are significantly less powerful, ranging between 300 and 700 PSI with flow rates averaging about 0.8 gallons per minute. This one delivers about double the cleaning power, and the kit I tested includes a high quality battery and charger. Those who already have DeWalt FlexVolt batteries could purchase the power cleaner as a bare tool for $199.00.

Buy the DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX 1,000 PSI Power Cleaner on:

Product Comparisons

DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX 1,000 PSI Power CleanerGreenworks 24V 600 PSI Power Cleaner
Ryobi One+ 18V EZClean 320 PSI Power CleanerEgo Power+ 56V 3,200 PSI Cordless Pressure WasherRyobi 40V HP Brushless 1,200 PSI Pressure Washer
Power source60V, 9 Ah battery (included)24V, 2 AH battery (2 included)18V battery (not included)56V battery (not included)40V battery (not included)
Water pressure1,000 PSI600 PSI320 PSI3,200 PSI1,200 PSI
Flow rate1 GPM0.8 GPM0.8 GPMUp to 2.0 GPMUp to 1 GPM
Price$349$99.99$49$449$199

So, is the DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX 1,000 PSI Power Cleaner right for you?

If you’re looking for a battery powered pressure washer that will perform similarly to gas, this one is not for you. The DeWalt FlexVolt 60V Max 1,000 PSI Power Cleaner is a light duty tool with cleaning ability on par with plug-in electric models. But it’s better than the corded ones, because you can take it anywhere. In fact, its compact size and portability may be the most compelling reasons to consider buying it. It can draw water for cleaning out of a bucket, barrel, pool, or pond if need be, and runs for more than an hour per charge.

The DeWalt power cleaner comes with all the accessories necessary for deep cleaning. The whole kit weighs less than 15 pounds, and packs down into a surprisingly small drawstring bag. It produces adequate pressure and flow to clear away a season’s buildup of dirt and grime from patio furniture and pottery, and it could keep your boat or RV neat and clean. If you would like to save time and energy that you used to spend on scrubbing. This could be a smart pick.

Meet the Tester

Mark Wolfe is a writer and product tester who spent 20 years in the nursery and landscaping industry. For more than twenty years he mowed, edged, planted, pruned, cultivated, irrigated, and renovated beautiful landscapes. Now he tests and writes reviews about the latest outdoor power equipment, hand tools, lawn care products, and other outdoor living goods.

The post I Hated Scrubbing My Patio Furniture Clean—Now I Don’t Need To appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-16T11:12:59-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Roof Rakes to Keep Your Home Safe from Heavy Snow, Tested]]>The best roof rakes allow you to safely remove snow from your roof to protect your home and anyone passing by. We tested eight top options and review them here.

The post The Best Roof Rakes to Keep Your Home Safe from Heavy Snow, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-roof-rake/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=106627Wed, 15 Jan 2025 14:26:06 -0500ReviewsDIYExteriorRoofingToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Wet snow can weigh as much as 21 pounds per square foot, according to the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA), and a snow roof rake is the most effective means of removing that weight. The heavier the snow, the greater the risk of structural damage to a roof. That’s why the roof rake is an essential piece of winter equipment in some regions.

This tool lets users remove snow from a roof while keeping their feet planted firmly and safely on the ground. Failing to remove heavy snow can damage a roof and home after a big storm. Without a roof rake, one would need to improvise a tool or climb on the roof with a shovel, which are both dangerous and challenging options.

I tested eight different roof rakes after heavy snowfalls in Montana. To do so, I raked a metal roof and a shingle roof with different heights and pitches. I also tested the rakes on a tall shed and a camper. The camper was especially important because snow and ice buildup can lead to roof damage and leaks. My favorite from the bunch is the combo pack from Avalanche! It can handle large amounts of snow and includes built-in wheels to prevent roof damage.

Keep reading to learn about the different features to look for in a roof rake and find out why we chose the following as the best roof rake options available.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Avalanche! Combo Package
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Goplus Roof Snow Removal Rake Tool
  3. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: SnowPeeler Premium Long Handle Roof Rake
  4. BEST FOR FLAT ROOFS: Avalanche! Big Rig Rake
  5. BEST FOR BIG ROOFS: True Temper Telescoping Snow Roof Rake
  6. BEST GRIP: Snow Joe RJ208M Pro Snow Removal Roof Rake
  7. BEST TELESCOPING HANDLE: Garant Snow Roof Rake With Telescopic Handle
  8. BEST FOR GUTTERS: Roof Razor Original Snow Removal Tool
The best roof rake in action breaking a large block of roof snow into smaller segments for removal.
Photo: amazon.com

Before You Buy a Roof Rake

Note that roof rakes are intended for snow removal on single-story homes only. They should only be used when standing on the ground, and never while standing on a ladder. Attempting to balance a long pole while navigating snow-slick ladder rungs is a surefire way to slip and fall. Even if you have great balance, the weight of the snow you’re pulling off the roof could easily knock you off a ladder.

Product Comparison

LengthWeightMaterial
Avalanche! Combo Package 4 to 15.5 feet10.8 poundsFiberglass shaft, plastic head
Goplus Roof Snow Removal Rake Tool Up to 20 feet4.5 poundsAluminum shaft, plastic rake
SnowPeeler Premium Long Handle Roof RakeExtendable to 30 feet13.4 poundsAluminum shaft, aluminum head
Avalanche! Big Rig RakeExtendable from 4 to 16 feet7.25 poundsFiberglass shaft, plastic head
True Temper Telescoping Snow Roof RakeExtendable from 7 to 17 feet4.88 poundsAluminum shaft, polyethylene head
Snow Joe RJ208M Pro Snow Removal Roof Rake 22 feet7 poundsAluminum poles
Garant Snow Roof Rake With Telescopic Handle 16.5 feet4.5 poundsAluminum handle, poly blade
Roof Razor Original Snow Removal Tool 24 feet10 poundsAluminum

Our Top Picks

Selected for quality, functionality, material construction, and design, all of these tested products are excellent options for keeping the roof snow-free during the winter.

Best Overall

Avalanche! Combo Package

 The individual components of the Avalanche! Combo Package on a white background before assembly.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Heavy-duty design; suitable for large amounts of snow
  • Retractable plastic slide attachment enhances efficiency
  • Built-in wheels to glide along the roof, preventing damage

What We Don’t Like

  • Weighs more than most roof rakes on our list
  • Adding and removing sections slows job completion

Product Specs 

  • Length: Extendable from 4 to 15.5 feet
  • Weight: 10.8 pounds
  • Material: Fiberglass shaft, plastic head

Equipped with a retractable plastic slide for enhanced efficiency, this rake pulls dislodged snow down the slide and off the roof, saving users time and effort. It’s also equipped with small wheels to help it glide along the roof without damaging it.

The rake extends from 4 to 15.5 feet when each fiberglass extension bar is attached. This process is simple, but it takes a few minutes to add each extension. With telescoping models being the exception, most other roof rakes use fitted extension segments similarly.

When adding an extension pole, users might need to remove gloves to press the locking button. I really liked the fiberglass poles because they aren’t nearly as cold as metal options. It is important to ensure that the segments are seated well at each joint, with the locking button in place.

Super durable, the plastic head is up to heavy-duty challenges. Raking snow off a roof is usually awkward with any rake, and that was the case with this one. But I didn’t mind a small amount of extra weight while reaching for the high spots because the durable design also gave me the confidence to hit the heavy snow spots and pull hard. I felt like the fiberglass poles were strong as well.

One other reason this won our top spot is the fact that multiple heads are included for different needs. The head that’s equipped with wheels and a slide should be able to tackle most users’ needs. The slide allows snow to fall off the roof easily, creating a pathway over gutters and other obstacles. When users hit stubborn areas and need a head that can bust through ice and grab big chunks of snow over shingles, asphalt, and tricky surfaces, they’ll want to use the rake head with wheels.

What Our Tester Says: “I think this combo package is a great investment for anyone requiring regular use of a snow roof rake. Shoppers can find lighter-duty options for regions with less snow accumulation, but for those folks living in the mountains and regions where the snow piles up, I think a high-quality system is worth the price.”–Zach Lazzari, product tester and writer.

Read our full review: Avalanche! Combo Package

Get the Avalanche! Combo roof rake at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Bang For The Buck

Goplus Roof Snow Removal Rake Tool

 The Goplus Roof Snow Removal Rake Tool and additional handle pieces on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Lightweight and easy-to-handle
  • Multiple shaft segments for different length needs
  • Nice grip, durable head, and well-built handles

What We Don’t Like

  • Not built for heavy-duty use

Product Specs 

  • Length: Up to 20 feet
  • Weight: 4.5 pounds
  • Material: Aluminum shaft, plastic rake

Simple and affordable, this shovel provides up to 20 feet of reach with the help of its lightweight aluminum poles. Similar to other models, this rake features a clever locking system that allows users to add or remove segments. The snow roof rake itself is a simple hard plastic rake with metal supports to increase strength and rigidity.

Users will want to bolt the rake supports and head into place, but that’s the extent of the assembly. The rake head is hard and durable, and the handles are well built. When adding segments, each section must be seated well with the locking button aligned perfectly to hold the segments together. I found it easiest to connect each segment without gloves. It’s worth noting that the metal can get pretty cold to the touch, so work quickly or wear thin gloves.

The rake had no problem pulling snow off the roof. It doesn’t have a slide for easy removal, but it will make quick work of bigger drifts that add serious weight to the structure. The aluminum shafts do flex a little when every piece is connected, but overall, this rake worked well, and it has a great price point.

Get the Goplus roof rake at Amazon.

Best Heavy-duty

SnowPeeler Premium Long Handle Roof Rake

 The SnowPeeler Premium Long Handle Roof Rake on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for heavy snowfall
  • Slide attachment improves efficiency
  • Assembly is simple with a no-frills design

What We Don’t Like

  • Heavier than other rakes

Product Specs 

  • Length: Extendable to 30 feet
  • Weight: 13.4 pounds
  • Material: Aluminum shaft, aluminum head

Users who live in a region that gets heavy snow might want to invest in the tough SnowPeeler roof rake. Weighing in at 13.4 pounds and boasting a sizable 18-inch aluminum rake head with built-in stabilizing braces, the SnowPeeler roof snow rake can pull even packed snow down from the roof with no problem.

This is a heavy-duty product made with an aluminum shaft and rake head for dealing with deep, heavy snow. The roof rake can extend from up to 30 feet in length by adding the included extension poles as needed.

The SnowPeeler comes with a slide attachment that creates a slick path for the snow to slide down and off the roof. This greatly improves efficiency because the user doesn’t need to pull the snow all the way off the edge. However, the weight of the rake can fatigue the user more quickly than a lighter rake might.

I found this rake to be very easy to use, and I only wish the storm had dumped a heavier snow load so that I could really push its limits. Regardless, it peeled off a heavy foot of snow without any issues. It’s ideal for ski towns and mountain locations that get heavy snowfall and big storm events. Thanks to its no-frills design, assembly is simple, and the effectiveness for heavy snow is excellent. Overall, this roof rake is made to work hard.

Get the SnowPeeler roof rake at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best For Flat Roofs

Avalanche! Big Rig Rake

 All the pieces of the Avalanche! Big Rig Rake and its storage bag on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Sharp-angled shaft good for flat roofs
  • Wheels protect the roof and shingles from damage
  • Lightweight with a comfortable nonslip handle

What We Don’t Like

  • Not ideal for sloped roofs with its angled shaft

Product Specs 

  • Length: Extendable from 4 to 16 feet
  • Weight: 7.25 pounds
  • Material: Fiberglass shaft, plastic head

To properly clear a flat roof, it’s necessary to use a roof rake that doesn’t have a completely straight shaft. The shaft needs to be angled so that it can bend over the side and still sit flat on the roof. Designed with that in mind, this rake features a simple angled connector piece that fits onto the fiberglass shaft and extension bars. This gives users the ideal reach for a flat roof, like that of a truck trailer, RV, or shed.

Each extension bar is about 4 feet long, allowing the roof rake to extend to a maximum length of 15.5 feet. Also, keep in mind that each extension bar needs to be manually connected to the shaft. This is less convenient than other models that house the extensions inside the core of the shaft, allowing users to slide them out as desired. This roof rake weighs just over 7 pounds and features built-in wheels to keep the rake head from damaging the shingles.

I primarily tested this roof rake on my camper. It’s a flat roof with few obstacles aside from the two roof vents. The angled shaft made it very easy to clear the entire roof—it only took a few minutes. I think this model would also be great for semi-trailers, cargo trailers, and even flat roofs on garages and houses.

The problem with flat roofs is that they don’t allow snow to slough off naturally. This creates serious problem areas that can damage the roof and test the structural limits of a house or trailer. While straight-shaft models allow users to rake reasonably well, they still have trouble grabbing and pulling the base layers of snow. With this rake, I could easily clear the full snow load. It’s durable, sturdy, and easy to grip as well. I’m a big fan of this model and the quality of this brand’s products in general.

Get the Avalanche! Big Rig roof rake at Amazon.

Best For Big Roofs

True Temper Telescoping Snow Roof Rake

 The True Temper Telescoping Snow Roof Rake on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Aluminum design is easy to lift and maneuver
  • Easy push-button extension can reach up to 17 feet
  • Comfortable nonslip handle

What We Don’t Like

  • Polyethylene head may crack or chip with repeated contact

Product Specs 

  • Length: Extendable from 7 to 17 feet
  • Weight: 4.88 pounds
  • Material: Aluminum shaft, polyethylene head

The push-button telescoping design on this True Temper roof rake can extend the pole up to 17 feet, and it quickly collapses to 7 feet for storage. It weighs just 4.88 pounds, so users can easily lift it over their heads and control the movement of the rake.

If their home maintenance regularly requires removing substantial snow deposits, users will likely appreciate the lightweight aluminum design, which is easy to lift and maneuver thanks to its nonslip handle. Plus, this rake effectively pulls down deep snow accumulations in a single draw thanks to its 24-inch-wide poly blade.

This isn’t the longest roof rake out there, but its lightweight build is a trade-off that makes this model a favorite for large roofs. The telescoping handle lets the user quickly change the shaft’s length to match the required distance and pitch. Adjusting the telescoping handle is especially easy, and I found it very easy to manipulate. If you’ll be raking multiple roofs and will need to change lengths quickly, this is a great roof rake.

Although it’s a few feet shorter than some rakes, I was able to reach every spot needed on my roof. For a unique roof that requires some serious reach, there are much longer rakes out there, but they use segments rather than telescoping designs.

Get the True Temper roof rake at Amazon, Tractor Supply Co., or The Home Depot.

Best Grip

Snow Joe RJ208M Pro Snow Removal Roof Rake

 The Snow Joe RJ208M Pro Snow Removal Roof Rake on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Excellent grip increases control and functionality
  • Slide system and head design minimizes effort
  • Sturdy poles snap together easily

What We Don’t Like

  • Wheels can hang up on ice dams and other obstacles
  • Not designed to pull against heavy snow loads

Product Specs 

  • Length: 22 feet
  • Weight: 7 pounds
  • Material: Aluminum poles

This was a tricky roof rake to categorize because it performed very well across several categories. It did a great job overall, and I wouldn’t hesitate to recommend the rake for large roofs, heavy snow, and possibly other categories, too. It also sits at a nice price point.

One thing that stood out about this rake was its comfortable grip. I was able to hold it with and without gloves without my grip slipping. As minor a feature as it might seem, the grip really increased the functionality of this rake. The aluminum poles are also very sturdy and well built. Segments can be added or removed quickly with the locking button system. During testing, each section seated easily and snapped right into place.

The 22-foot-long model I tested offered plenty of reach, although if shoppers need a longer rake, the company also offers a 28-foot option. The rake head has two wheels and a fabric slide for easy snow removal. As the wheels roll into the snow, the fabric slide moves beneath it, allowing the snow to slide off the roof. The head is designed in such a way that it glides along the snow with very little resistance.

This type of head design is used by a number of other brands and models. It’s a great system that doesn’t cause fatigue as quickly as heavier rake heads made of a single solid strip. If the roof has ice dams and obstacles, though, the wheels might get caught occasionally. I really like the slide system overall because it’s capable of removing snow with minimal effort. It also covers gutters, and the snow slides over those openings.

In short, this rake impressed me. It features a solid design with a great grip. The handle feels durable, and during testing, it pulled snow off the roof with little resistance.

Get the Snow Joe roof rake at Lowe’s, The Home Depot, or Menards.

Best Telescoping Handle

Garant Snow Roof Rake With Telescopic Handle

 The Garant Snow Roof Rake With Telescopic Handle on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Great grip on coated primary pole
  • Smooth all-in-one telescoping handle
  • Sturdy rake head

What We Don’t Like

  • Shorter than other models
  • No wheels or slides for assistance

Product Specs 

  • Length: 16.5 feet
  • Weight: 4.5 pounds
  • Material: Aluminum handle, poly blade

Dealing with stand-alone pole extension segments can be a hassle at times. Not only is it a pain to have to lug them around while raking the roof, but it also takes time and planning to add and remove segments for different areas of the roof. It’s true that segmented designs work well for users who have a specific length need and consistent roof pitches—it’s not a bad system by any means, but all-in-one telescoping handles are much more convenient.

When you need to make adjustments on the fly and don’t want a pile of poles in the garage or truck, a telescoping handle design is an ideal option. This telescoping roof rake from Garant features a well-rounded design with a smooth-telescoping handle that extends to 16.5 feet long. It’s certainly not the longest out there, but it should be sufficient for most single-story homes.

I loved the handle and pole design of this model. It slides out in seconds, so length can be added or subtracted in a jiffy. I found the push-button design very user-friendly. Just make sure to hear a click to lock out the handle at the desired length. The coated primary pole also offers a great gripping platform for the second hand.

This model uses a standard poly blade with angled supports. The same system can be found on many other models. It’s sturdy and makes it easy to grab and pull snow. It requires more effort and strength than roller-and-slide systems, but I still found it easy to get the job done. For anyone with a normal single-story home, this roof rake is a winner. I love that it’s easy to store as a single-piece unit rather than having to deal with various poles and components.

Get the Garant roof rake at Ace Hardware or Walmart.

Best For Gutters

Roof Razor Original Snow Removal Tool

 The Roof Razor Original Snow Removal Tool on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Great for big roofs with gutters
  • Wheels and snow slide work very well
  • 24-inch cutting head removes large snow loads quickly

What We Don’t Like

  • Poles may flex when all segments are attached
  • Pole segments must be seated well to avoid damage

Product Specs 

  • Length: 24 feet
  • Weight: 10 pounds
  • Material: Aluminum

The Roof Razor and the aforementioned SnowPeeler have a few design similarities. It’s a close call between the two, and each has a unique set of advantages. I think the SnowPeeler has slightly stronger poles, but the Roof Razor is certainly up to tackling large roofs and heavy snow loads. During testing, the fabric slide rolled out nicely, and it allowed snow to slide over the gutters and fall to the ground.

I appreciated the long 24-foot handle, largely because it allowed me to reach difficult areas. Thanks to that, I was able to use this rake on the high roof of my neighbor’s metal shop. It was easy to lift and maneuver, even with the super-long extension poles attached. It also rolled easily over the metal roof and allowed a foot or so of snow to slide off. The high side of the shop didn’t have gutters, but the lower lean-to section did, and the slide covered the gutters as snow was removed. I was able to clear most of the 50-foot-long by 30-foot-wide shop within a half hour.

As with many snow rakes, this one requires each pole segment to be connected manually. To do so, users will want to seat the sections and make sure the button locks into place. This rake is slightly heavier than other models, but it also offers more length than most. Overall, it’s easy to handle once users find the balance point. A basic wrench set is required for assembly.

Get the Roof Razor roof rake at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Roof Rakes

Testing was done throughout a weeklong storm event. The first 3 days received heavy snowfall with a mix of dry powder and wet snow. The powder wasn’t problematic, but the wet snow was heavy, and it stuck to the rooftops. It also underwent a slight thaw and a subsequent freeze cycle that solidified the rooftop snow.

I waited for the storm to end and rotated through each roof rake, pulling sections of snow down. I judged each roof rake based on ease of assembly, grip, length, and ability to reach and grab snow without damaging the roof. Durability was also considered. Several of the brands have similar design features with slight variations in the way they are constructed. There was a reasonable overlap when it comes to performance and function with these look-alike models.

What to Consider When Choosing a Roof Rake

Make sure you’re up to date on the most important product factors before deciding on the best option to rake snow from your roof and prevent ice dams from forming. Some factors to consider in finding the right snow rake for roof cleaning include the type and quality of the materials, length, weight, and head design.

Material

A roof rake for snow removal can be made of different materials, including fiberglass, polyethylene, aluminum, and wood.

  • Fiberglass is a durable, lightweight material commonly used to make the shaft of a roof rake. This provides substantial support, allowing the user to push and pull snow without worrying about handling a heavy or fragile shaft.
  • Polyethylene is a type of plastic used to make the rake head. It’s tough, weather-resistant, and affordable, though aluminum is a more durable option.
  • Aluminum is great for use as both a shaft and rake head, though the hard metal can scratch or tear shingles. To avoid this issue, invest in a roof rake with wheels to help keep the edge of the rake just off the top of the roof.
  • Wood is never used for a roof rake head because it will begin to break down and decay with excessive exposure to water or snow. However, wood can be used to make the roof rake shaft, and it functions similarly to fiberglass.

Length and Weight

Most roof rakes come with adjustable poles that can be lengthened from 14 to 22 feet for snow removal and shortened to less than 8 feet for storage. The longer the pole, the higher users will be able to reach on the roof, but longer poles can also be unwieldy and may require more physical strength to lift and maneuver.

Roof rakes range in weight between 4 and 14 pounds, with most of the weight in the rake head. The heavier the rake head, the more likely it is to sink deeply into the snow on the roof, allowing users to remove a good amount with each pull. Conversely, heavy roof rakes require more physical strength to lift and position.

Head Design

Roof rake heads range in depth from a narrow 3 inches to a generous 10 inches, and widths run between 12 and 24 inches. The larger the rake head, the more snow the rake can remove in a single pull. If the snow is wet and heavy, it can require additional physical strength to pull it, which can lead to back and shoulder fatigue.

Curved heads and interchangeable attachments, such as a scoop, blade, or plastic slide, can greatly decrease fatigue if used properly. It’s also a good idea to consider looking for a roof rake with built-in wheels or bumpers to help protect the roof and shingles from damage. This is especially important when working with an aluminum rake head or if the rake has a blade attachment.

Tips for Using a Roof Rake

When starting to rake the snow off of a roof, it’s important to begin the process by removing the snow from the roof’s edge first. If users attempt to extend the roof rake as much as possible and simply pull down any snow caught within this range, there is a good chance that they will be unable to move the snow. Also, keep in mind that even if the snow does move, it isn’t a good idea to bring down that much snow at once because the weight of the snow could cause injury.

While the goal of snow removal on a driveway is to clear any snow or ice that could cause the car to slip, it’s not actually necessary to rake every inch of snow off the roof. Leaving one or two inches of snow isn’t going to cause ice dams to form, and this gap can help prevent the roof shingles from being damaged during raking.

Additionally, under no circumstances should users attempt to climb a ladder or walk on a sloped roof in winter conditions to remove snow. The entire purpose of a roof rake is for the user to remain on the ground, so don’t risk trying to rake the roof while perched on a ladder.

  • Start at the roof’s edge and work towards the center.
  • Not all the snow needs to be removed from a roof.
  • Do not climb up a ladder or sloped roof while handling a roof rake.

FAQs

For more information on the best roof rake for snow removal at your home, take a look at some of the most commonly asked questions and the detailed answers below.

Q. What is a snow rake for? 

Unlike general-purpose rakes, snow rakes (also known as roof rakes) are specially designed for one purpose: to remove snow from single-story roofs without having to climb. This makes it much easier and safer to keep the roof clear of snow and prevent ice dams from forming in the gutter system.

Q. Do roof rakes damage shingles? 

The blade on a roof rake head can damage the shingles on a roof. This is especially true with aluminum rake heads, but this problem can be avoided if you invest in a roof rake with built-in wheels. These wheels elevate the rake slightly, suspending the rake head above the surface of the shingles instead of grating against them.

Q. Do roof rakes prevent ice dams? 

If you rake the roof the same day it snows, you can prevent ice build-up in the gutter system.

Q. Do I need a roof rake for a metal roof? 

Whether or not you need a roof rake depends on how much snow naturally builds up on your roof. Some houses have steep roofs that don’t collect a lot of snow, while others may have a gentle slope. Metal roofs can be raked with a roof rake to keep them clear of snow, but in most cases, the snow will tend to slide off a metal roof without a problem. In fact, many homes with metal roofs need snow guards or snow fences to prevent piles of snow from sliding off and potentially hurting anyone standing nearby.

Q. When should I rake my roof? 

It’s a good idea to rake the roof on the same day it snows, just as it isn’t wise to wait long to shovel your driveway. Keep in mind that freshly fallen snow is much easier to move than snow that has been allowed to melt and refreeze under the sun.

Meet the Tester

Zach Lazzari is a freelance writer splitting time between the great outdoors, travel, and DIY projects ranging from camper builds to home renovations and maintenance. His home base in Montana is the perfect testing grounds for winter products and snow equipment. With over a decade of professional writing experience, he also covers a variety of other projects and maintenance topics for Bobvila.com.

Additional research provided by Glenda Taylor and Timothy Dale.

The post The Best Roof Rakes to Keep Your Home Safe from Heavy Snow, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-15T14:26:06-05:00
<![CDATA[I Love This Dewalt Construction Jack So Much, I Bought Two]]>The post I Love This Dewalt Construction Jack So Much, I Bought Two appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/dewalts-toughseries-jack-review/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=423386Wed, 15 Jan 2025 12:44:29 -0500ReviewsDIYHand ToolsToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Working solo has its perks—I can take my time, do things the way I like, and play ACDC as loud as I want. But it also has its challenges, like when I need to lift something heavy and there’s no one around to help. That’s where DeWalt’s ToughSeries Construction Jack comes in. It lifts items up to 340 pounds using hand squeezes or foot pumps.

The DeWalt jack earned a spot in Bob Vila’s 2024 Tool of the Year competition as one of the best new hand tools—a well-deserved recognition. 

Initially, I figured I’d use the jack primarily to lift and snug a bottom row of drywall panels against an upper row, and it’s great for that, but the more I used it, the more I realized it could be indispensable for many projects. And its usefulness extends from the jobsite to the home, where it can be used to lift appliances for leveling or raise a corner of a riding mower for changing a tire. 

I tested the DeWalt jack for lifting heavy objects, including a large file cabinet, a garage tool chest, heavy furniture, and more. I used it to lift a heavy wood door and hold it at just the right height to slip it on its hinges. The nice thing about lifting the door was that I could use my foot to raise it to the correct height—each foot pump seemed to lift the door another ¼ inch—and my hands were free to maneuver the door. That’s so much handier than bracing the door on tuna cans (yes, I’ve done that). 

  • DeWalt’s ToughSeries Jack Review
  • DeWalt’s ToughSeries Jack Review Using foot pedal pump
  • DeWalt’s ToughSeries Jack Review Use as a pressure spreader to force hardwood strips tighter
  • DeWalt’s ToughSeries Jack Review Squeezing the jack
  • DeWalt’s ToughSeries Jack Review Lifting mower to change wheel
  • DeWalt’s ToughSeries Jack Review Lifting furniture to put sliders under legs
  • DeWalt’s ToughSeries Jack Review Lifting and using a level
  • DeWalt’s ToughSeries Jack Review Holding stud up for screwing

The DeWalt jack has a max lift height of 8 ¾ inches, and the lifting plate is tapered, so it slips easily under most items. However, if there’s no room between the object and the floor—as with my file cabinet—you may have to tip the object back slightly to slide the lifting plate underneath. It will only lift one edge of large-format items, which is often sufficient to reach underneath to clean or retrieve a dropped item.

There are two ways to release the lift pressure on the jack. The safest way is to use the thumb lever located above the foot pump and press it repeatedly to lower the jack in small increments. Once there’s no more weight on the lift plate, press the release button on the top of the jack, and you can slide the jack freely up and down the shaft. 

After testing the DeWalt ToughSeries jack, I had to make a tough decision: Where to keep it? Should it go in the garage for lawn and garden projects, in my truck tool box for quick lifts on the jobsite, or in the utility room for lifting heavy furniture to clean beneath? I won’t keep you guessing—it’s in the utility room, but I found it useful enough that I plan to buy a second one for my tool box, because the DeWalt jack is still my top pick for lifting drywall panels. 

Where to Buy the DeWalt ToughSeries Construction Jack

The post I Love This Dewalt Construction Jack So Much, I Bought Two appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-15T12:44:29-05:00
<![CDATA[For Clean, Precise Cutting, Our Favorite Biscuit Joiner Ticks All of the Boxes]]>Choose one of these recommendations for the best biscuit joiner for a quicker, easier way to create strong tabletops and hidden joinery in your woodworking.

The post For Clean, Precise Cutting, Our Favorite Biscuit Joiner Ticks All of the Boxes appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-biscuit-joiner/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=131792Tue, 14 Jan 2025 10:03:42 -0500ReviewsDIYPower ToolsToolsTools & MaterialsWorkshopWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

As a woodworker or DIYer, there are certain essential tools that, once the DIYer discovers them, help unlock their real potential, and among those tools is the trusty biscuit joiner. This power tool helps to create strong, seamless joints devoid of unsightly nail holes.

Whether you plan on gluing up a new worktop for a shop bench or building a bookshelf from scratch, the right biscuit joiner can help. These handy tools use small circular saw blades to cut slices in two pieces of wood, allowing woodworkers to insert a biscuit (a small, football-shaped chunk of compressed wood) in the two slots to create a solid joint. The glue-covered biscuit then expands, locking the two boards together and creating an incredibly strong joint that glue alone can’t match. 

Drawing from our experience with a variety of tools, we selected seven top biscuit joiners, each designed and priced for DIY woodworkers, and we tested four of them. We found the Makita XJP03Z to be the best of the bunch, due largely to its convenient cordless design and ability to effortlessly slice into wood. Read on to learn the factors and features to consider when shopping for the best biscuit joiner and to find out why we consider the following models to be the best on the market.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Makita XJP03Z 18V Lithium-Ion Cordless Plate Joiner
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Porter-Cable 557 7-Amp Deluxe Plate Joiner Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Wen JN8504 8.5-Amp Plate and Biscuit Joiner
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST CORDLESS: DeWalt DCW682B 20V Max XR Cordless Biscuit Joiner
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST ALTERNATIVE JOINER: Festool 574432 Domino Joiner DF 500 Q-Set
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. ALSO CONSIDER: Makita PJ7000 Plate Joiner
    ↓ Jump to Review
Best Biscuit Joiner Options in a workshop
Photo: Tony Carrick for Bob Vila

Power SourceBiscuit SizeHandle type
Makita XJP03Z18V battery#0, #10, and #20Barrel
Porter-Cable 557Corded#0, #10, and #20Barrel
Wen JN8504 8.5-Amp Plate and Biscuit JoinerCorded#0, #10, and #20Barrel
DeWalt DCW682B 20V Max XR Cordless Biscuit Joiner20V battery#0, #10, and #20Barrel
Festool 574432 Domino Joiner DF 500 Q-SetCordedUses Dominoes with 5, 6, 8, and 10 millimeter diametersBarrel
Makita PJ7000 Plate JoinerCorded#0, #10, and #20Barrel

Our Top Picks

The following list includes some of the best biscuit joiners available for woodworking projects. Whether you’re a beginner, a pro woodworker, or someone with a skill set that lands in between, you’re likely to find a quality tool for your workshop here.


Best Overall

Makita XJP03Z 18V Lithium-Ion Cordless Plate Joiner

 The Best Biscuit Joiner Option: Makita XJP03Z 18V Lithium-Ion Cordless Plate Joiner
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Makes clean, precise cuts
  • Easy to make adjustments to the fence
  • Great build quality

What We Don’t Like

  • Lacks safety shut-off features

Specs

  • Power source 18V battery
  • Biscuit size #0, #10, and #20
  • Handle type Barrel

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Accuracy 4.5/5; Value 4.5/5

Makita’s XJP03Z offers impressive performance and build quality in a convenient cordless design. This biscuit joiner uses Makita’s 18V LXT lithium-ion battery system, which allows it to produce up to 320 cuts (or 160 joints) on a single charge. Its motor generates an impressive 12,000 RPM, which slices into boards with minimal effort. And since the tool produces very little vibration, we were able to produce precise and accurate cuts. There’s also a blade break that stops the blade quickly, which is a nice safety feature.   

The XJP03Z has six depth settings with positive stops for #0, #10, and #20 woodworking biscuits. A rack-and-pinion vertical fence system makes dialing in precise settings for various board widths easy. The fence has a miter range between 0 and 90 degrees, with a positive stop at 45 degrees. 

The Makita has a sturdy, durable feel with a molded rubber grip that’s easy to control while making cuts, and a housing and fence that’s built to take beating.

Blade changes were also a breeze with the XJP03Z thanks to the design of its shoe. Unlike other biscuit joiners that required us to remove multiple screws to take off the shoe, the XJP03Z biscuit joiner tool uses a single knob you can loosen with your fingers. 

The XJP03Z is available for purchase as a set with a battery or as a stand-alone tool for those who already own a battery for other Makita tools.  

What our tester says: “The XJP03Z sliced effortlessly into softwoods and hardwoods alike with very little vibration or hesitation, which made it easy for me to make accurate cuts.”—Tony Carrick, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Makita biscuit joiner (tool only) at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Runner-Up

Porter-Cable 557 7-Amp Deluxe Plate Joiner Kit

 The Best Biscuit Joiner Option: Porter-Cable 557 7-Amp Deluxe Plate Joiner Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Broad fence range of 0 to 135 degrees
  • Makes precise, clean cuts
  • Durable build quality

What We Don’t Like

  • Heavy overall weight
  • Pricey for a corded tool

Specs

  • Power source Corded
  • Biscuit size #0, #10, and #20
  • Handle type Barrel

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.3/5; Accuracy 4/5; Value 3.7/5

Cabinetmaking requires a lot of joinery, and dense hardwood plywood can be tough on a biscuit woodworking joiner. For those situations, consider the Porter-Cable plate joiner kit. It features a wide fence angle range, multi-position depth stop, and a 7-amp motor that runs at 10,000 RPM to bore through dense plywood over and over again.

Power Cable’s biscuit joiner sets itself apart with its versatility. Unlike other biscuit joiners that have fences that are limited to a range of 90 degrees, the Porter-Cable’s fence tilts from 0 to 135 degrees, allowing users to create catty-corner cabinets and face frames without setting up complicated jigs or strange angles. It also has seven depth stops, handling #0, #10, and #20 biscuit sizes. 

The Porter-Cable performed well in testing, making clean cuts through our test boards. That said, it did produce more vibration than the DeWalt and Makita biscuit joiners we tested. There were also some notable differences in quality. The Porter-Cable biscuit joiner uses a screw adjuster for the fence as opposed to a more precise rack-and-pinion adjuster, and it lacks the ergonomic handle and rubberized grip found on the DeWalt and Makita biscuit joiners we tested. Weighing over 10 pounds, the Porter-Cable biscuit joiner is also one of the heftier biscuit joiners we tested, which made it somewhat cumbersome when setting up cuts. 

The Porter-Cable biscuit joiner is very similar in price to the Makita and DeWalt, even though it’s a corded tool. 

Get the Porter-Cable biscuit joiner at Amazon or Rockler.

Best Bang For The Buck

Wen JN8504 8.5-Amp Plate and Biscuit Joiner

 The Best Biscuit Joiner Option: Wen JN8504 8.5-Amp Plate and Biscuit Joiner
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Far more affordable than most biscuit joiners
  • Comes with a handy carrying case
  • Wide range of fence adjustments

What We Don’t Like

  • Less cutting power and precision
  • Cheaper build quality

Specs

  • Power source Corded
  • Biscuit size #0, #10, and #20
  • Handle type Barrel

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 3.8/5; Accuracy 3.5/5; Value 4/5

DIYers looking to spend as little as possible on a new biscuit joiner might want to consider the Wen JN8504. It costs a fraction of other biscuit joiners cost, yet it still boasts a powerful 8.5-amp motor with a cutting speed of up to 10,000 RPM. It comes with several biscuits, a wrench for blade changes, and a plastic carrying case.

This model features an adjustable fence as well as an angle gauge that adjusts between 0 and 90 degrees (though there aren’t any positive stops). It has an inline handle and dust extraction as well as adjustable depths that accommodate #0, #10, and #20 biscuits. 

Wen’s biscuit joiner won’t rival the top models on this list. With its slower blade speed, it doesn’t produce the same clean and precise cuts as the models we tested that cost four times its price. It’s also the heaviest biscuit joiner we tested, weighing over 11 pounds. And although its fence system is easy to adjust, it lacks the ability to dial in more precise measurements. That said, it was good enough to execute edge-to-edge, T-joint, face-frame, and mitered-edge joinery in various thicknesses of wood. 

The Wen does come with a carrying case that’s handy for storing it when not in use. While this biscuit joiner won’t make the grade for more serious woodworkers, it’s a great option for those who may only need one every now and then. 

Get the Wen biscuit joiner at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Best Cordless

DeWalt DCW682B 20V Max XR Cordless Biscuit Joiner

 The Best Biscuit Joiners Option: DeWalt DCW682B 20V Max XR Cordless Biscuit Joiner
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Lightweight cordless design
  • Excellent build quality
  • Powerful with little vibration when running

What We Don’t Like

  • Difficult to change the blade

Specs

  • Power source 20V battery
  • Biscuit size #0, #10, and #20
  • Handle type Barrel


Our Ratings:
Ease of Use 4.5/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 4.7/5

DeWalt’s MAX XR business joiner lives up to the quality and performance we expect from the yellow and black brand. This member of DeWalt’s pro-focused XR line boasts a brushless motor that’s powered by a 20-volt lithium-ion battery. 

The DCW682 is well designed. A pressure trigger that runs the entire length of the handle is easy to access while also adding an extra layer of safety. A single knob loosens the miter fence, and the fence slides easily and comes equipped with an easy-to-see arrow for setting precise angles, all of which makes setting up the proper angle for mitered joints a quick and easy process. Adding to this precision is a rack-and-pinion fence that made it easy to dial in precise settings for various board thicknesses. 

The DeWalt biscuit joiner is powerful, cutting easily into wood boards with minimal vibration. It’s also one of the lightest biscuit joiners we tested, making it one of the most comfortable to use among the tools we tested. The DCW682 also comes equipped with a larger-than-average dust bag, which was effective at capturing the majority of sawdust produced by each cut we made. 

Our only gripe is with blade changes. In order to change the blade, you need to remove the four Torx head screws that secure the shoe over the blade, which is a more time-consuming process than other units we tested that offer tool-free access to the blade. 

What our tester says: “I love how easy it is to make adjustments to the fence and cutting depth with the DCW682. It’s one of the easiest biscuit joiners I’ve used.”—Tony Carrick, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the DeWalt biscuit joiner at Amazon or Lowe’s.

More Great Options

Along with the four biscuit joiners we tested, we also recommend the following models, which include a higher-end model for serious woodworkers and another more affordable corded option.

Best Alternative Joiner

Festool 574432 Domino Joiner DF 500 Q-Set

 The Best Biscuit Joiner Option: Festool 574432 Domino Joiner DF 500 Q-Set
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Domino mortises provide more bonding surface area than biscuits
  • Several depth adjustments
  • Has multiple angle stops

What We Don’t Like

  • Festool Dominoes aren’t available everywhere

Specs

  • Power source Corded
  • Biscuit size Uses Dominoes with 5, 6, 8, and 10 millimeter diameters
  • Handle type Barrel

The Festool 574432 Domino joiner might not exactly be a biscuit joiner, but it’s one of the best tools for similar joinery in furniture and woodworking. The Domino uses Festool-specific hardwood tenons, which are candy-bar-shaped inserts that take the place of traditional biscuits. Instead of a circular blade, it has a drill bit-like spiral cutter to bore the mortises. This allows users to adjust the depth to prevent it from poking through a workpiece while still offering plenty of surface area for glue. 

Despite the unconventional joinery method, the Domino does have the flexibility of other biscuit joiners, with a few extras. Users can adjust the fence angle between 0 and 90 degrees, with stops at 22.5, 45, 67.5, and 90 degrees—two more stops than many of its competitors. It has multiple height adjustments and depth settings for fast, easy, and accurate adjustments. Festool is also known for employing effective dust extraction. 

This kit comes with a carrying case and several guides and fences. Shoppers should know, however, that the floating tenons (Festool calls them Dominoes) may not be as readily available as biscuits. 

Get the Festool biscuit joiner at Amazon.

Also Consider

Makita PJ7000 Plate Joiner

 The Best Biscuit Joiner Option: Makita PJ7000 Plate Joiner
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Powerful enough to generate 11,000 RPM
  • Weighs just 5.5 pounds
  • Barrel-shaped handle allows for plenty of accuracy
  • 6 depth adjustments

What We Don’t Like

  • 5.6-amp motor is on the less powerful side

Specs

  • Power source Corded
  • Biscuit size #0, #10, and #20
  • Handle type Barrel

If you’re looking for an all-around biscuit-joiner tool that really holds its own, check out the Makita plate joiner. This barrel-handled biscuit joiner has a 5.6-amp motor, and while that is on the lower end compared to some competitors, it produces speeds up to 11,000 RPM for dense hardwoods. It weighs just 5.5 pounds, has a maximum cutting depth of ¾ inch, and includes a carrying case as well as a 4-inch carbide-tipped blade.

The PJ7000 offers lots of adjustability. The fence has a rack-and-pinion vertical adjustment that allows users to dial the joiner into the perfect height. The fence also adjusts between 0 and 90 degrees, with positive stops at 0, 45, and 90. The PJ7000 has six different depth adjustments, with one-touch stops for standard biscuit sizes of #0, #10, and #20.

Get the Makita PJ7000 biscuit joiner at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Jump to Our Top Picks

a person working with one of the Best Biscuit Joiner Options
Photo: Kathy Harms for Bob Vila

How We Chose and Tested the Best Biscuit Joiners

The best biscuit joiners tend to have a high power output, adjustable settings, and added attachments and accessories. They should also be easy to use. We considered all this while making our selections.

Our top picks come with powerful motors of 5.6 to 8.5 amps for speeds between 10,000 and 12,000 revolutions per minute (RPM). This power output is aided by adjustable angles and depths for quick and clean cutting. Many of these picks have 0- to 90-degree angles, with a select few topping out at 135 degrees. Plus, some of these top picks come with multiple preset depths. 

We put four of the biscuit joiners through a series of tests, using them to cut biscuit holes into hardwoods and softwoods of two different thicknesses. As part of our testing, we made a series of cuts at different angles to test each model’s miter fence and depth adjusters. We noted how easy it was to set up cuts and make adjustments to the biscuit joiner, and how precisely each one executed cuts. For the products we didn’t test, we based our selections on specifications and user reviews. 

Testing Stats
Products tested 4
Time spent testing 6 hours
Tests performed4
Price range$60 to $300

What to Consider When Choosing a Biscuit Joiner 

Once a DIYer gets their hands on a good biscuit joiner, they might wonder how they ever finished woodworking projects without one. They’ll no doubt come to rely on it a lot, so choosing a quality model is key. Here’s what to keep in mind when shopping for the best biscuit joiner.

Size and Weight

Usually, the larger and heavier the wood biscuit cutter, the better the quality of its parts, and a bruiser of a biscuit joiner will likely have a heavy-duty motor and high-quality slides (which guide the blade while it cuts to provide consistent results). However, a heavy biscuit joiner or a super high-end tool isn’t necessary or even ideal for everyone. There are plenty of mid-range options weighing around 5 or 6 pounds—about half the weight of a high-end model—that will do the trick for many users. 

Determining whether a burly biscuit joiner is necessary will come down to the types of projects you plan on doing and how often you’ll use the joiner. For the overwhelming majority of DIYers, a mid-range biscuit joiner will handle materials like oak and maple without issue. Those working in a cabinet shop and putting a joiner through its paces daily should consider the heavier-duty options.

Corded vs. Cordless

As with all power tools, the corded-versus-cordless debate exists in the biscuit-joinery world. Deciding on a style often just comes down to personal preference.

Almost all biscuit joiners are corded. Since most woodworking projects take place in a workshop, there’s usually power readily available. Also, it’s not typical to be climbing a ladder or working under a cabinet with a biscuit joiner, so portability isn’t really a consideration.

Biscuit joinery is quite taxing on a battery, so most manufacturers haven’t dived into cordless joinery. However, there are a few cordless biscuit joiners available. These can be quite handy during projects like kitchen remodels, where the user might need to join two sections of wooden countertops and would prefer not to set up an extension cord.  

Power and Speed

Biscuit joiners need to be stout power tools with tough parts and plenty of power and speed. While it might not take much power to bore a hole in pine or cedar, plunge-cutting a section of hickory or walnut can be a challenge.

The most important power-related factor to consider when shopping is a biscuit joiner’s amperage rating. Amperage refers to the current load a motor can handle before its parts start to fail. This has much to do with the quality of individual components inside the tool and how well it can cool itself while running. Ideally, look for a model with 5 to 7 amps.

When it comes to actually getting the work done, speed matters as well. The faster the motor, the faster it can spin the blade and cut a biscuit slot. Look for models with RPM ratings between 8,000 and 10,000 for general use.

Biscuit Size

Biscuit joiners use biscuits to join workpieces together. When the user inserts a glue-covered biscuit into a slot, it locks in to join two workpieces as one. Biscuits come in small, medium, and large sizes (#0, #10, and #20, respectively). To accommodate different-size biscuits, most joiners have settings that adjust for deeper or shallower cuts, some cutting as deep as ¾ inch; other models may require a blade change.

While biscuit size might not be a factor when shopping for a biscuit joiner, it can be important while working. For example, bookshelves and countertops might require a lot of gluing surface—and a bigger biscuit—while only a smaller biscuit might fit in a cabinet face frame. 

Blades

Although biscuit joiners use circular-shaped saw blades, they’re quite a bit different than the blades found in a miter, table, or circular saw. They’re thicker, have fewer teeth, and are much smaller in diameter.

Burrowing a spinning blade into dense hardwoods over and over again builds up quite a bit of heat and pressure, so blade material and longevity matter. Most biscuit joiner manufacturers use carbide-tipped blades, as they stay sharper longer than a lower-end steel blade, particularly for denser materials like walnut and hickory. They also hold up better to the speeds of high-end biscuit joiners. 

Cutting Angle and Depth

One feature most woodworkers appreciate about biscuit joiners is the tools’ versatility. The adjustable cutting angles provide the ability to cut slots in a wide range of situations. While edge joining two boards is the most obvious use for biscuit joiners, they can also bore biscuit slots for mitered corners and angled joinery or slots in the field of a workpiece for shelves or other uses. This is thanks to their adjustable fences, which users can set for a particular angle to bore an accurate slot. 

Adjustable cutting depth is also an important feature. Swapping between preset depths allows users to use different biscuit sizes quickly without worrying if the joint will be tight or hold enough glue.

Handle Type

When choosing the best biscuit joiner for a workshop, consider handle preference. There are two main styles: barrel handles and D-shaped handles.

Barrel-style handles can facilitate precise boring, so they’re better for control. With these models, the hand is in line with the slot being cut, making it easier to stay steady and bore an accurate slot. There are also many models with top-mounted handles to steady the tool even more. 

D-shaped handles are less accurate but more comfortable. The hand’s upright orientation tends to feel more natural, so it’s easier to push. However, the hand will be higher than the blade, so it’s possible to wobble and make a sloppy cut.

Additional Features

Biscuit joiners may include some additional features that can make storage simpler and cleanup easier. 

A sturdy box will keep a biscuit joiner secure when it’s not in use. Many manufacturers package their tools in hard plastic containers that can store a joiner, a few biscuits, and other small items. These cases also make it a cinch to stack tools on a shelf or under a workbench.

As the user bores slots with a biscuit joiner, they can make a mess with sawdust and wood chips. The best biscuit joiners come with bags that attach to the exhaust port, catching most of these particles before they hit the ground or air. 

Safety Tips for Using a Biscuit Joiner 

a person working with one of theThe Best Biscuits Joiners Options
Photo: Kathy Harms for Bob Vila

In general, biscuit joiners are safe power tools—but that could inspire some false confidence. As users become more comfortable using theirs, they might feel they can hold the workpiece with one hand while operating the tool with the other. It’s best to avoid this temptation, as the front lip of the board could lift, potentially causing the blade to strike a hand. Instead, clamp the workpieces to a workbench for a stable base.

Before cutting slots for biscuits, ensure that there are no nails, knots, or other obstructions where the joiner will be cutting. In most cases, the blade will simply cut through these obstructions, dulling the blade a bit. However, there is potential for the biscuit joiner to send a chunk of the obstruction flying with enough speed to cause injury.

Biscuit joiners can produce a lot of dust. While a dust-collection system helps reduce the amount of sawdust, it can’t get it all. Be sure to wear a mask to avoid breathing in airborne dust and safety glasses to keep your eyes protected. This safety gear is especially important when working with plywood and medium-density fiberboard (MDF). The glues and chemicals used in their manufacturing can be particularly irritating to the lungs and eyes.

  • Clamp the workpiece to a bench to avoid potentially striking a hand with the biscuit joiner.
  • Ensure the workpiece is free of obstructions like nails and knots before cutting biscuit slots.
  • Wear safety glasses and a mask for protection from sawdust.

FAQs 

While you may be excited about getting started with a new biscuit joiner, if you still want more info, refer to the answers to these frequently asked questions regarding biscuit joiners and how they work. If you don’t see the required answer here, reach out to the manufacturer’s customer service department and speak with a representative. 

Q. How many biscuits should I use to join wood?

A good rule of thumb is to use a biscuit every 6 to 12 inches. For weight-bearing projects like shelves and countertops, 6 inches is best to provide support.

Q. What materials can a biscuit joiner work with?

You can use biscuits with a range of wood-based products: Hardwoods, softwoods, plywood, MDF, and even laminated particleboard can work with a biscuit joiner.

Q. Are biscuit joiners worth it?

For many woodworkers, yes. Biscuit joiners allow the user to join pieces of wood without the use of nails or screws that create unsightly holes, which is crucial when building furniture and other finish pieces of carpentry. And since it isn’t difficult to learn how to use a biscuit joiner, these tools are useful for even novice woodworkers.

Q. What are the disadvantages of biscuit joiners?

Biscuit joiners require some level of precision for effective use. While biscuit joints are strong, they aren’t as strong as other types of woodworking joinery, such as half-lap and mortar and tenon joints. 

Q. How far from the edge should biscuit joints be?

A biscuit joint should be at least 2 inches from the edge or corner of a workpiece. You’ll also want to space each biscuit about 2 to 3 inches apart.

Q. How do you maintain a biscuit joiner?

To maintain your biscuit joiner, regularly clear out any sawdust that has collected in and around the blade. Also, regularly check the blade for damage or build-up from pitch, especially if using the joiner with hardwoods, which can be harder on the blade. 

Meet the Tester

Tony Carrick is a freelance writer specializing in home improvement, landscaping, technology, home security, and design. His articles have been featured on such sites as Popular Mechanics, Futurism, SFGate, Pro Tools Review, and more. Tony has conducted rigorous product testing on everything from power tools to home security systems to backyard grills. With each review, his goal is to help readers determine whether a product meets their needs and if it is or isn’t worth its price tag.

Additional research provided by Tom Scalisi.

The post For Clean, Precise Cutting, Our Favorite Biscuit Joiner Ticks All of the Boxes appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-14T10:03:42-05:00
<![CDATA[We Cleared More Than 4 Feet Of Snow Testing the Best Electric Snow Shovels and Found 9 Top Options]]>The best electric snow shovel can help you quickly clear snow with less effort. Check out our favorites from our latest round of testing.

The post We Cleared More Than 4 Feet Of Snow Testing the Best Electric Snow Shovels and Found 9 Top Options appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-electric-snow-shovel/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=121573Mon, 13 Jan 2025 13:16:27 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Electric snow shovels look similar to manual snow shovels yet have one key difference: They are designed with electric augers that can throw snow 20 feet or more, which means they help remove winter weather from walkways, decks, and driveways faster and with less effort. For light dustings, the traditional snow shovel design is great, but when more than a few inches have fallen, lifting and tossing heavy snow can be hard on the back and body.

To help ease the effort you need to complete cold-weather chores this season, we tested nine electric snow shovels and reached out to a snow-removal expert for their insights. Based on their advice and our test results, we chose the Greenworks 80V 12″ Cordless Battery Snow Shovel as the best option for most buyers. This tool is robust enough to throw snow up to 20 feet and offers an impressive 45-minute runtime for extended snow-removal sessions. Read on to learn about the key features of the best electric snow shovels and what makes the seven models that made our list stand out from the crowd.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Greenworks 80V 12″ Cordless Battery Snow Shovel
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Snow Joe 24V-SS13 Ionmax Cordless Snow Shovel Bundle
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST LIGHTWEIGHT: Earthwise Power Tools 12″ 20V 4Ah Snow Thrower
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST CORDED: Earthwise Power Tools 16″ 12-Amp Corded Snow Thrower
    Jump to Review
  5. QUIETEST OPERATION: Snow Joe 24V-SS11 Ionmax Cordless Snow Shovel Kit
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST WITH WHEELS: Earthwise Power Tools 16″ 40V 4Ah Lithium Snow Thrower
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Ego Power+ Multi-Head Snow Shovel Kit With 4Ah Battery
    Jump to Review 
The Best Electric Snow Shovel Option
Photo: Zach Lazzari for Bob Vila

Before You Buy an Electric Snow Shovel

Think of an electric snow shovel as a cross between a manual snow shovel and a larger, more powerful snow blower. The handle of an electric snow shovel resembles the handle of a traditional snow shovel, but that’s where the similarities end. Instead of a scoop blade, an electric snow shovel features a large turning blade that scoops up snow and tosses it off the path as it is pushed.

An electric snow shovel takes less physical effort to operate than a traditional shovel, but it still requires some pushing. Unlike snow blowers, electric snow shovels are typically not self-propelled. The auger does assist while it churns snow, but users will still need to push it along. And unlike blowers, electric snow shovels don’t have chutes to eject snow at different angles and trajectories; they simply eject the snow forward.

Electric snow shovels are much more affordable than snow blowers. They’re typically offered at between $60 and $190, while a heavy-duty snow blower could set buyers back $1,500 or more. Electric snow shovels can help many people clear moderate snow loads from small spaces without breaking the bank.

Electric Snow Shovels Comparison Chart

Product NameMaximum DepthClearing WidthPower
Greenworks 80V 12″ Cordless Battery Snow Shovel6 inches12 inches80V (volt) battery
Snow Joe 24V-SS13 Ionmax Cordless Snow Shovel Bundle6 inches13 inches24V battery
Earthwise Power Tools 12″ 20V 4Ah Snow Thrower3.5 inches12 inches20V motor, 5Ah (amp hour) battery
Earthwise Power Tools 16″ 12-Amp Corded Snow Thrower8 inches16 inchesCorded with 12-amp motor
Snow Joe 24V-SS11 Ionmax Cordless Snow Shovel Kit 7 inches11 inches24V battery
Earthwise Power Tools 16″ 40V 4Ah Lithium Snow Thrower8 inches16 inches4Ah battery
Ego Power+ Multi-Head Snow Shovel Kit With 4Ah Battery 6 inches12 inches56V battery

Our Top Picks

The following electric snow shovels are ranked by category to help shoppers find the best option for their purposes. Consider the best use of each model when choosing one for your needs.

Our Top Picks

The following electric snow shovels are ranked by category to help shoppers find the best option for their purposes. Consider the best use of each model when choosing one for your needs.

Best Overall

Greenworks 80V 12" Cordless Battery Snow Shovel

 Best Electric Snow Shovel Option: Greenworks PRO 80V 12-Inch Cordless Snow Shovel
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Powerful battery and quick recharge time
  • 45-minute runtime for heavy snowfalls or large areas
  • Throws snow 20 feet from the clearing path

What We Don’t Like

  • Heavier than many other models

Specs 

  • Maximum depth: 6 inches
  • Clearing width: 12 inches
  • Power: 80V battery

When it comes to cordless yard tools, battery life and power are key. This snow shovel from Greenworks excels at both thanks to a powerful 80-volt (V) battery that gives it 45 minutes of runtime. The battery recharges in just 30 minutes thanks to its nifty rapid charger.

The cordless snow shovel can discharge snow 20 feet away, making it suitable for walks, decks, and smaller driveways. During testing, this model performed quite well, but the battery and power were the real difference makers. The Greenworks 80V just kept on going, and the auger speed felt more powerful than competing models. 

At 19.2 pounds with the battery installed, this shovel does feel slightly heavier than some models. Still, it also feels incredibly sturdy and might be a bit more durable in the long run. After we found the right balance point with the blade grounded and the shaft tilted to roughly 45 degrees, it churned through icy snow very well and with little effort. The quick-charge battery is also a major bonus when users need to add more power without a long wait time.

What our tester says: “Overall, this is a fantastic, well-built electric snow shovel. There are a couple of cheaper models that perform nearly as well, but anyone who wants top-notch power and battery life might want to pay just a little more for the Greenworks 80V.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the Greenworks cordless electric snow shovel at Amazon, Walmart, or Best Buy.

Best Bang for the Buck

Snow Joe 24V-SS13 Ionmax Cordless Snow Shovel Bundle

 The Best Electric Snow Shovels Option Snow Joe 24V-SS13 Ionmax Cordless Snow Shovel Bundle
Photo: Walmart

What We Like

  • Lightweight and easy to handle
  • Tosses snow up to 20 feet away
  • Dual handle reduces physical strain and fatigue

What We Don’t Like

  • Takes about 5 hours to recharge
  • Not ideal for ice and compact snow

Specs 

  • Maximum depth: 6 inches
  • Clearing width: 13 inches
  • Power: 24V battery

Shoppers don’t have to spend a lot of money to own a reliable electric shovel. The Snow Joe SS13 cordless shovel has a 24V battery, can clear a 13-inch-wide path in up to 6 inches of snow, and throws snow up to 20 feet away. The kit includes a battery, charger, snow scraper blade, and snow shovel cover.

Considering the comparatively low price tag, this unit is hard to beat—in fact, we think it’s likely the best value out there. It feels light and balances well in the hand, and its dual-handle design reduces strain during use. Its 13-inch clearing path is wider than most, and the shovel’s overall performance and extended battery life of up to 70 minutes are impressive. 

The only thing we didn’t love about this electric snow shovel was its initial setup, as it’s a little awkward connecting the shafts and inserting the bolts. We don’t consider this a deal breaker, but be aware that it will likely take a few minutes to get everything snug.

Get the Snow Joe 24V-SS13 electric snow shovel at Walmart, Target, Northern Tool + Equipment, or Best Buy.

Best Lightweight

Earthwise Power Tools 12" 20V 4Ah Snow Thrower

 The Best Electric Snow Shovel Option Earthwise Power Tools 12 20V 4Ah Snow Thrower
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Lightweight and easy to maneuver
  • Ergonomic handle is comfortable to use 
  • Runs long enough to clear paths and decks

What We Don’t Like

  • Low clearing depth not suitable for deep snow
  • Not ideal for compact or icy snow

Specs 

  • Maximum depth: 3.5 inches 
  • Clearing width: 12 inches
  • Power: 20V motor, 4 amp hour (Ah) battery

Though shoveling snow, even with an electric snow shovel, isn’t exactly easy, choosing a lightweight tool can help. At just 11.5 pounds, this cordless snow shovel from Earthwise Power Tools is the lightest model on our list. Though small, it’s still powerful enough to throw 300 pounds of snow per minute.

We have to admit we were surprised at how well this lighter model held up against the competition. It did great with powdery snow, throwing it about 15 feet. While that’s not the 25 feel the company claims, we were still impressed—so long as the snow was lightweight. When we tried testing it with compact and icy snow, it struggled. 

The other claim we don’t quite agree with the manufacturer on is runtime. Earthwise estimates about 60 minutes of battery life, but in our tests, 20 to 30 minutes of consistent use was more accurate. Still, the battery performed well and generally delivered ample power. If you’re looking for something easy to lift, handle, and maneuver for light-duty tasks and smaller spaces, we think this model will be just what you need.

Get the Earthwise Power Tools 12-inch electric snow shovel at Amazon, Walmart, Overstock, or American Lawn Mower Company.

Best Corded

Earthwise Power Tools 16" 12-Amp Corded Snow Thrower

 The Best Electric Snow Shovel Option: Earthwise Power Tools 16-Inch Corded Snow Thrower
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Adjustable handle and rear wheels increase maneuverability
  • Clears a sizeable 16-inch-wide by 8-inch-deep path 
  • Ejects snow in the 20- to 30-foot range

What We Don’t Like

  • Wet snow can trip the thermal shutoff

Specs 

  • Maximum depth: 8 inches 
  • Clearing width: 16 inches
  • Power: Corded with 12-amp motor

Corded electric snow shovels can be nice since they mean you don’t have to deal with batteries, making them lighter and infinitely operable so long as they’re plugged into power. This corded Earthwise Power Tools shovel features the same design as the company’s comparable electric model, but it also has wheels, making it great for folks who don’t want to lift their shovel. 

This electric snow shovel can clear driveways, walkways, and decks of up to 8 inches of snow. It’s a nice crossover option for regions where snow is infrequent and justifying having a larger snow blower is difficult. 

Though we think this is an excellent corded snow shovel, we would like to see the hardware quality for the wheel plate attachment improved. It would also be nice if this plate came preattached to save on assembly time. Otherwise, it performs great and can fit the needs of many homeowners and renters who want the power of a snow shovel with wheels without the weight and cost of a full snow blower.

Get the Earthwise Power Tools 16-inch corded electric snow shovel at Amazon, Walmart, or American Lawn Mower Company

Quietest Operation

Snow Joe 24V-SS11 Ionmax Cordless Snow Shovel Kit

 The Best Electric Snow Shovels Option Snow Joe 24V-SS11 Ionmax Cordless Snow Shovel Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Relatively quiet operation compared to others
  • Narrower clearing width is ideal for small spaces
  • Lightweight and easy to use

What We Don’t Like

  • Takes longer to clear large areas than wider models
  • Battery life is somewhat short

Specs 

  • Maximum depth: 7 inches
  • Clearing width: 11 inches
  • Power: 24V battery

To be fair, most electric snow shovels are reasonably quiet, but this cordless snow shovel from Snow Joe makes snow removal especially easy on the ears. That may be in part because it’s smaller in design than most others, but its size also makes it a good fit for clearing walkways and patio areas. If you tend to get heavy snow or precipitation that turns to ice, the auger on this machine might not be powerful enough to crush and churn through it. But for those who keep up with snow removal and only have a few inches of powder to clear, it works very well. If you do need to work through a larger pile, you’ll simply need to move through it 7 inches at a time, making several passes until you clear all the way to the ground.

In our tests, this shovel performed on par with similar-sized models, though its battery only lasted around 20 minutes before requiring a recharge. For larger spaces, it might be smart to buy a second battery to extend the runtime. Regardless, you can use this model without the neighbors hearing you, making it great for early mornings or late nights. 

Get the Snow Joe 24V-SS11 electric snow shovel at Amazon or Walmart

Best with Wheels

Earthwise Power Tools 16" 40V 4Ah Lithium Snow Thrower

 The Best Electric Snow Shovel Option: Earthwise Power Tools 16-Inch Lithium Snow Thrower
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Easy-to-use cordless snow shovel with battery power 
  • Wheels reduce effort to operate this large model
  • Excellent auger clears up to 8-inch depths

What We Don’t Like

  • Assembly is more involved than most brands
  • Hardware connecting wheels could be sturdier

Specs 

  • Maximum depth: 8 inches
  • Clearing width: 16 inches
  • Power: 4Ah battery

Even though electric snow shovels make shoveling snow much easier, pushing and lifting them still requires effort. The Earthwise 40V cordless model reduces the effort necessary by adding wheels to a generously sized 16-inch-wide head. Without needing to lift it, users can simply push the shovel forward as the auger spins, propelling it forward. If it had a chute, this would be a light-duty snow blower, but instead, this one throws the snow directly forward. Though the company claims this shovel throws snow up to 32 feet forward, we found it was closer to 20 feet, well within the range of other comparable models. 

At 19.4 pounds, it’s slightly heavier than most models, but the wheels help offset the weight. The only caveat to having wheels is that they’re required to touch the ground to function. When snow is deeper than 8 inches, users will need to lift the shovel and work through the snow in layers. The wheels can still offer support if the snow is somewhat compact, but the process becomes more labor-intensive.

Overall, the design works really well and the auger is plenty powerful. Our only real issues with this model were the involved assembly process and the low-quality hardware that connects the wheel bracket to the auger head. Everything held up fine during testing, but we worry about the long-term durability of the screws.

What our tester says: “We appreciate how much the wheels helped push through several accumulated inches of heavy snow. They made it very easy to get the job done with minimal lifting.” —Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the Earthwise Power Tools lithium electric snow shovel at Amazon, Walmart, Northern Tool + Equipment, or American Lawn Mower Company.

Best Heavy-Duty

Ego Power+ Multi-Head Snow Shovel Kit With 4Ah Battery

 The Best Electric Snow Shovel Option: Ego Power+ Multi-Head Snow Shovel Kit
Photo: Lowe’s

What We Like

  • Throws snow an impressive 25 feet away
  • Can clear 6 inches of snow on a 4-car driveway
  • Works with multiple attachments to tackle a variety of jobs 
  • Adjustable front handle makes it easy to push 

What We Don’t Like

  • Heavier than most others so harder to lift and push

Specs 

  • Maximum depth: 6 inches
  • Clearing width: 12 inches 
  • Power: 56V battery 

The Ego Power+ battery-powered shovel easily takes the heavy-duty prize, and we’d say it’s also the most versatile. In terms of versatility, you can swap out the lower shaft with the auger for any compatible Ego Power+ tool. This means that rather than buying multiple tools, you can use the same battery with an array of interchangeable heads, including a weed trimmer, brush cutter, edger, pole saw, and more. 

As for the electric snow shovel head, it’s powered by a 4Ah ARC lithium battery. Though the Ego Power+ batteries seem to take a little longer to charge, they are also more heavy-duty and powerful than other batteries in the same category. During testing, this battery ran for over 30 minutes without issue. The head and auger are especially powerful, and we had no problems pushing through 6 inches of snow depth. If shoveling in icy conditions, the two speeds and heavy-duty auger make this a great choice. It also throws snow farther than other models, making it perfect for bigger pathways and driveways.

At 17.3 pounds (without the battery), this model is a little heavier than others, but it also feels durable and well constructed. It’s also easier to assemble than the others, as it doesn’t require bolting shaft segments through a wire. Instead, this unit attaches to a spindle in mere seconds.

What our tester says: “This electric snow shovel had the most advanced design of all the models we tested. It’s the perfect choice for property owners who need more than just a simple shovel. Grab a few of the other head attachments, and you’ll be able to manage lawns, brush, trees, and snow throughout the year with a single battery and handle.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the Ego Power+ electric snow shovel at Lowe’s or Ace Hardware

Jump to Our Top Picks

The Best Electric Snow Shovel Options
Photo: Zach Lazzari for Bob Vila

How We Tested the Best Electric Snow Shovels

While researching electric snow shovels, we scrutinized features and pricing to determine which models stood out. We then tested nine options throughout several Montana snow storms and loaned them to a property management company for additional feedback. We used them on various surfaces ranging from paved sidewalks and driveways to compact gravel. We found that electric snow shovels aren’t suitable for unpaved areas, such as gravel driveways, but on paved surfaces, they work well. 

We used each electric shovel in various conditions: a light dusting, a storm that dropped roughly 6 to 8 inches of snow, and an even larger storm with 1 foot of snow. We analyzed the weight, handling, build quality, throwing distance, rechargeable battery life, and overall power. Based on our tests, we rated them, noted their pros and cons, and assigned the models we like awards that match their best features and use cases. 

What to Consider When Choosing an Electric Snow Shovel

Since electric snow shovels are capable of clearing snow far more easily than a conventional plastic snow shovel or metal snow shovel, they can almost be considered a clever hack for shoveling snow. When choosing the model that’s right for you, remember to consider the following key factors.

Corded vs. Cordless

Electric snow shovels come in corded and cordless designs. Each type has its own benefits and drawbacks:

  • Corded snow shovels offer immediate snow-clearing power: Just plug the cord into an outlet and let it rip. A corded electric model might make more sense for those who don’t want to wait for a battery to charge (which can take a few hours) before they can shovel snow. Of course, since they always need to be plugged into a power source, corded snow shovels limit the coverage area to the length of the extension cord (usually 50 to 100 feet). 
  • Cordless snow shovels operate on rechargeable lithium-ion batteries for their power supply. They tend to run for approximately 20 to 50 minutes on a single charge. Like cordless snow blowers, a battery-operated snow shovel will have a clear advantage over a corded model if clearing snow in locations far from an outlet. Plus, users don’t have to drag a cord behind them. Still, if there’s a lot of snow to clear, users might need to stop and recharge the battery before they finish the job.

Joe Palumbo, president of Ice Dam Guys, LLC, prefers cordless electric snow shovels for his team. “We’ve found cordless, battery-powered snow shovels to be more effective than corded electric ones. While most outdoor receptacles have GFCIs, we prefer avoiding plugged-in tools near steam and water for added safety.” He also points out that “They’re a great choice if you already use a battery system for your other power tools, like Milwaukee M18, DeWalt, or Skil,” as they allow you to swap in compatible batteries you already own to increase runtime. 

Clearing Area

How much snow an electric shovel can clear depends on the height and width of the intake chute. The height of the intake chute determines the maximum depth of snow the device can remove (about 4 to 8 inches). We recommend selecting an electric snow shovel with an intake chute at least as deep as the typical snowfall in your area. 

Some manufacturers claim their electric snow shovels can go over deep snow with more than one pass. But if the snow is soft, these devices might sink into the snow since they’re designed to sit on a paved surface. This will just push snow over the top of the tool rather than clearing it out of the path, requiring you to use a standard shovel or ice melt.

The chute’s width determines how wide a path an electric shovel can clear in a single pass, with most chutes ranging from about 10 to 16 inches wide. A wider chute means the shovel will require fewer passes to clear an area. Some chutes have LED lights mounted on them to illuminate the work area and make snow shoveling easier at night. 

Battery Life

Battery life depends on various factors, including chute size. The more snow the tool handles, the more power it requires, and the quicker the battery will drain. A battery also loses power with age, meaning it won’t hold as much charge after a few years as it did when it was new.

Generally speaking, a lithium-ion battery will run between 20 and 50 minutes on a single charge. Snow shovels with 40V batteries run about twice as long as those with 24V batteries. Investing in a second rechargeable supply can double the runtime, as users can quickly switch out the first battery if it runs out before the job is done. 

Ease of Use

Whether they’re corded or cordless, the best electric snow shovels are easy to operate: Just turn them on and push them along a paved surface to remove fresh snow. The following features also affect the shovel’s usability: 

  • Blades: Electric snow shovels work similarly to more powerful snow blowers. Their horizontal augers feature one or two blades. The auger rotates at a high speed, and the blades scoop up the snow and blow it out of an exhaust chute. Both single- and double-blade shovels will get the job done, but the double-bladed ones might clear the snow more quickly. 
  • Scrapers: Some models have a built-in scraper that slides under the snow, which helps the blades lift snow before discharging it out of the chute.
  • Handles: Some of these tools have adjustable handles to fit the user’s height. More heavy-duty models often contain a second handle to help operators push the shovel through the snow. 
  • Weight: Electric snow shovels are relatively light and typically weigh between 10 and 16 pounds. This matters because an electric snow shovel is not an automatic snow shovel, meaning you must push it along the ground rather than expecting it to propel itself. The right snow shovel will be light enough to push relatively easily but heavy enough to push into the snow rather than skim the top.
  • Cord length: The attached cord on a corded electric snow shovel usually isn’t longer than 6 feet. But they don’t plug right into a wall outlet anyway. Most need a 12- or 14-gauge exterior extension cord, which can be purchased separately. 

The Advantages of Owning an Electric Snow Shovel

An electric snow shovel is easier to use than a manual push snow shovel and less expensive than a full-size snow blower. These shovels expedite snow removal, lessening the time spent in coats, snow boots, and winter work gloves while clearing the driveway, leaving more time for sledding, snowball fights, or staying warm indoors. 

  • Reduces back, arm, and shoulder pain and fatigue associated with shoveling snow
  • Quickly removes fresh snow to an average depth of 6 to 8 inches
  • Lightweight and easy to handle (most weigh under 15 pounds)

FAQs

There’s no need to save up to cover the cost of snow removal—an electric snow shovel might make the job economical and easy enough to handle yourself. If you still have questions about buying an electric snow shovel, see the answers to common queries below. have questions about buying an electric snow shovel, see the answers to common queries below.

Q. How does an electric snow shovel work?

A horizontal auger with one or two blades spins at ground level to pick up the snow and toss it through an exhaust chute.

Q. When should I use my electric snow shovel?

An electric snow shovel works best on newly fallen snow that is light and fluffy before it has had a chance to melt and become heavy. An electric snow shovel or snow shovel with blower can move powdery snow more easily and launch it farther than it can wet snow.

Q. How do you fix an electric snow shovel?

Most electric snow shovels come with a 2- or 3-year warranty, so if something goes wrong during that time, contact the manufacturer. Consult the owner’s manual for instructions on basic maintenance.

Q. Are electric snow shovels worth it?

Electric snow shovels are relatively inexpensive, compact, and easy to use, making them well worth it for those areas or users where a manual snow shovel isn’t quite enough and a snow blower is too much.

Q. Do electric shovels work with wet snow?

Electric shovels can work with wet snow if it’s only an inch or two deep or if the shovel itself is a heavy-duty option like the Ego Power+ Multi-Head Snow Shovel Kit With 4Ah Battery. Many other electric snow shovels are too small or lightweight to clear heavy snow without multiple passes.

Q. How much snow can an electric snow shovel handle?

See the product specs above regarding maximum depth and clearing width to see how much snow an electric snow shovel can handle. Generally speaking, maximum depth will be between 3.5 and 6 inches, and maximum width will be between 11 and 16 inches.

Meet the Tester

Zach Lazzari is a freelance writer splitting time between the great outdoors, travel, and DIY projects ranging from camper builds to home renovations and maintenance. His home base in Montana is the perfect testing grounds for winter products and snow equipment. With over a decade of professional writing experience, he also covers a variety of other projects and maintenance topics for Bobvila.com.

Additional research provided by Glenda Taylor, Tony Carrick, and Jasmine Harding. 

The post We Cleared More Than 4 Feet Of Snow Testing the Best Electric Snow Shovels and Found 9 Top Options appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-13T13:16:27-05:00
<![CDATA[After Testing 9 Rolling Tool Boxes, The Craftsman Offered Storage for Almost Every Tool]]>Store and relocate your tool collection easily using the best rolling tool box. This guide offers top recommendations for DIYers and pros.

The post After Testing 9 Rolling Tool Boxes, The Craftsman Offered Storage for Almost Every Tool appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-rolling-tool-box/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=130237Fri, 10 Jan 2025 20:19:58 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWorkshopWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

No matter which kind of tools a job calls for, a rolling tool box can make storing and transporting them much more comfortable and efficient. Rolling tool boxes come with drawers and bins that allow you to stow tools in an organized manner and keep them within easy reach. After testing nine rolling tool boxes for garage and outdoor use, our favorite was the Craftsman 5-drawer tool chest. It solved one of our most pressing needs by providing a home for hundreds of sockets, bits, screwdrivers, and other small hand tools, with easy mobility around the shop. We also found excellent mobile tool storage options for backyard building projects and jobs that require more remote work. 

The right tool box will depend on the kinds of tools and whether the job will be in the workshop or loaded in the back of a truck. We sought out different solutions for a variety of tool-storage needs. Read on for more details on how these tool boxes performed in testing and why we consider them to be some of the best rolling tool boxes available. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: Craftsman 26-Inch 5-Drawer Tool Chest Combo
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Keter Masterloader Rolling Tool Box
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST WITH SEAT: OEM Tools Workshop Creeper Seat With Built-In Tool Box
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST WITH WORK BENCH: Husky 52-Inch by 25-Inch 9-Drawer Mobile Workbench
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST ALL-TERRAIN: Milwaukee Packout 22-Inch Rolling Tool Box Set 
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST TOOL BOX CART: Performance Tool 2-Shelf Utility Cart With Drawer
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST MODULAR: DeWalt DWST60436 ToughSystem 2.0 Rolling Tower 
    ↓ Jump to Review
  8. BEST FOR POWER TOOLS: Stanley 23-Inch 50-Gallon Mobile Tool Box
    ↓ Jump to Review
  9. BEST FOR MECHANIC TOOLS: Husky 10-Drawer Tool Chest And Cabinet Combo
    ↓ Jump to Review
Craftsman tool chest with tools
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Testing Stats
Products tested 9
Time spent testing 20 hours
Tests performed6
Price range$80 to $700

Our Top Picks

Our product reviews team has tested dozens of full-size and portable tool boxes, and this round up features the best of the wheeled variety. To make the cut, these rolling tool boxes had to handle transport and incidental impacts while loaded with hundreds of pounds of tools. If you’re looking for a mobile tool storage solution, one of these models could be a great option.

Best Overall

Craftsman 26-Inch 5-Drawer Tool Chest Combo

 The Best Rolling Tool Boxes Option: Craftsman 26-Inch 5-Drawer Tool Chest Combo
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Storage for large and small tools
  • Upper tool chest can be locked
  • Convenient size for home garage or workshop
  • 300-pound storage rating

What We Don’t Like

  • Painted steel is subject to impact and scratch damage

Specs

  • Type Multi-drawer stacking tool chest
  • Dimensions 26.5 inches long by 14 inches wide by 44 inches high
  • Compartments 7

Our Ratings: Assembly 4/5; Build Quality 4.5/5; Organization 5/5; Portability 5/5; Value 5/5

A good tool box with drawers should be durable and offer adequate space for essential tools in an organized and accessible fashion. This Craftsman tool chest features five drawers, a lockable top compartment, and a lower cabinet for larger equipment. It’s made of lightweight but strong 20-gauge steel, holds up to 300 pounds of tools and equipment, and rolls on sturdy 3-inch casters.

The upper tool chest includes the hinged-lid upper compartment, two shallow drawers (2 inches deep by 19.5 inches wide), and one deep drawer (4 inches deep by 19.5 inches wide). It gave us plenty of space to store drill bits, sockets, and pliers, along with assorted smaller tools.

The lower portion of the rolling tool box features two deep drawers (4 inches deep by 23 inches wide), and a cabinet (14 inches deep by 23 inches wide). We used the top drawer for longer wrenches, pry bars, snips, flashlights, and multimeters, and put oil change supplies in the cabinet.

At first glance, the Craftsman rolling tool chest seemed small, but we were surprised by how much it ultimately held. We loaded it with a 160-piece socket set, 32 wrenches, 19 pairs of pliers, and 21 screwdrivers, along with a variety of specialty tools and bits. The kit included a roll of non-skid drawer liner that we cut to size for each drawer. It helped to keep the tools in place, but for best results we recommend adding other tool drawer organizers once you’ve determined your tool box layout. This could be an ideal garage tool storage solution. 

What our tester says: “There are larger tool chests out there, but I like that this one holds everything I need without taking up too much space. The lower cabinet gives me more space for bulky stuff, which is something that other options do not provide.” —Mark Wolfe, product tester and writer

Get the Craftsman rolling tool box at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Ace Hardware.

Best Bang for the Buck

Keter Masterloader Rolling Tool Box

 The Best Rolling Tool Boxes Option: Keter Masterloader Rolling Tool Box
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Easy single-handed opening
  • Separate hand tool and parts storage
  • Slide-open compartment with wide access
  • Budget friendly price

What We Don’t Like

  • Light duty telescoping handle

Specs

  • Type Portable tool box
  • Exterior dimensions 24.3 inches long by 14.9 inches wide by 16.3 inches high
  • Compartments 3

Our Ratings: Assembly 5/5; Build Quality 4/5; Organization 4.7/5; Portability 5/5; Value 5/5

When traveling between projects, a well-organized tool box ensures that tools and equipment will arrive the way you packed them. The heavy-duty polyresin Keter Masterloader rolling tool box features three main compartments that hold up to 66 pounds of hand tools, power tools, and other gear. It features a weather resistant body, two 7-inch all terrain wheels, and an extendable handle for easy transport. And it’s priced lower than any of the other rolling tool boxes we tested.

This is a small rolling tool box with a little more than 17 gallons total storage capacity. We really liked the organization and accessibility built into it. The two top storage boxes come with removable tool organizers to keep track of smaller items. One of the top compartments has a clear lid that allows you to see the contents. The top compartments slide out of the way to uncover bulk storage for large tools below. 

We were easily able to operate the latch, lids, and sliding compartments with one hand. This box offers plenty of storage and easy access for our normal portable toolbox needs, and we really like the way the smaller compartments are organized to keep small items readily available. The only thing we didn’t like was the sticky movement of the sliding handle, which could use some improvement.

Get the Keter tool box at Amazon or Menards

Best With Seat

OEMTools Workshop Creeper Seat With Built-In Tool Box

 The Best Rolling Tool Boxes Option: OEM Tools Workshop Creeper Seat With Built-In Tool Box
Photo: Walmart

What We Like

  • Padded work seat with tool storage beneath
  • Includes drawers, shelf, and can/cup holder
  • Sturdy powder-coated steel
  • 280-pound weight capacity

What We Don’t Like

  • Seat height was a little too low

Specs

  • Type Shop stool with tool storage
  • Exterior dimensions 14.9 inches long by 14.9 inches wide by 16.9 inches high
  • Compartments 3

Our Ratings: Assembly 4/5; Build Quality 5/5; Organization 5/5; Portability 4.7/5; Value 4.7/5

The OEMTools Workshop Creeper Seat can make tough chores more comfortable, whether that’s changing a tire, assembling a cabinet on the floor, or undertaking any other activity that might lead to one heck of a backache, like kneeling on concrete or constantly bending over. This well-designed rolling work seat features pull-out, under-seat trays to hold tools during the work process. 

The tool drawers are rated to hold up to 30 pounds each. They were just the right size to hold a couple of screwdrivers, a handful of sockets, a utility knife, pliers, and electrical tape while we were tuning up a lawn mower. The cup/can holder bracket came in handy for keeping spray lubricant at the ready, and we used the lower shelf to hold replacement parts while we worked.

The seat height was a little lower than ideal, but the 2-inch padding stayed comfortable for an hour or two at a time. The swivel casters rolled easily over smooth concrete but came to an immediate stop if they encountered a stray nut or small gravel on the floor. And when we were finished working, this shop stool fit perfectly under our work bench for storage.

Get the OEMTools rolling seat with tool box at Walmart, Summit Racing, Jegs, or AutoZone.

Best With Work Bench

Husky 52-Inch by 25-Inch 9-Drawer Mobile Workbench

 The Best Rolling Tool Box Option: Husky 52-Inch by 25-Inch 9-Drawer Mobile Workbench
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Sturdy wood workbench top
  • Built-in power strip
  • Minimal setup required
  • Large casters and handle for mobility

What We Don’t Like

  • Very heavy for setup

Specs

  • Type Workbench with tool storage
  • Dimensions 52 inches long by 24.5 inches wide by 37.75 inches high
  • Compartments 9

Our Ratings: Assembly 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Organization 5/5; Portability 4/5; Value 4.7/5 

The 52-inch, nine-drawer Husky mobile workbench is made of 21-gauge steel with a solid wood top and weighs 267 pounds before adding tools. It’s a beast, but worth the minimal setup effort for those who need a movable workstation. Not only does it provide a large, sturdy work surface suitable for layout, cutting, assembly, and other sorts of project work, but it also comes equipped with a built-in power strip with six outlets and two USB-A ports. 

Assembly was fast and easy—all we had to do was attach the wheels, handle, and cord keeper. Loading our tools took a bit longer. There was plenty of drawer space for all of our hand tools and assorted accessories, as well as power tools, batteries, and chargers. Although the drawers did not come equipped with dividers or other types of organizers, they did include removable non-skid liners that prevented things from sliding around when the drawers were opened and closed. Once the unit was fully loaded, it probably weighed 1,000 pounds or more. The large casters and heavy-duty handle made it easy enough to roll across the concrete floor, but don’t expect to load it on a truck for remote projects.

Get the Husky 52-inch by 25-inch rolling tool box at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best All-Terrain

Milwaukee Packout 22-Inch Rolling Tool Box Set

 The Best Rolling Tool Boxes Option: Milwaukee Packout 22-Inch Rolling Tool Box Set
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Heavy-duty build quality
  • Holds up to 250 pounds
  • Modular system for different tool combinations
  • Hand truck design

What We Don’t Like

  • More expensive than other options

Specs

  • Type Modular tool box
  • Dimensions 22 inches long by 16.5 inches wide by 32.5 inches high (assembled)
  • Compartments 3

Our Ratings: Assembly 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Organization 5/5; Portability 5/5; Value 4.7/5

When it comes to stackable tool boxes for easy transport, it’s hard to beat the Milwaukee Packout system. The kit we tested features a 22-inch-wide main box with large 9-inch all-terrain wheels and a telescoping handle for easy transport, plus medium and small boxes that latch securely in place atop the main box.

Each box features tough latches for the hinged lid, with a metal eyelet for securing tools with a lock. They’re dust- and water-resistant to keep valuable tools from getting damaged by the elements. The boxes are also very durable, featuring metal-reinforced corners and an industrial-grade extension handle. The large and middle size boxes include removable organizer trays, while the smaller box features a pair of removable compartments. The kit also includes a mooring location for the Milwaukee brand’s Bluetooth tracking device.

We loaded the Milwaukee Packout boxes with our cordless power tools, extra batteries and chargers, and a host of hand tools and fasteners. The three box stack held all the tools we needed to construct a tool shed from scratch, and had plenty of anchor points to secure in the truck on the way to the project. We preferred the structure of these boxes, which was much more convenient, secure, and organized than soft-sided tool bags, and the wheels were a back saver.

What our tester says: “The Milwaukee Packout system made efficient use of space in the truck bed, and the metal corner posts made it easy to strap in. The wheels rolled effortlessly across a gravel patch and shallow roots up to the build site. It has to be one of the easiest ways to tote tools from the truck to the build site.”—Mark Wolfe, product tester and writer

Get the Milwaukee Packout rolling tool box set at The Home Depot.

Best Tool Box Cart

Performance Tool 2-Shelf Utility Cart With Drawer

Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Lockable tool drawer
  • Open storage for large parts and tools
  • Large heavy-duty swivel casters
  • Sturdy steel construction

What We Don’t Like

  • No drawer liner
  • Less storage space than other options

Specs

  • Type Tool box cart
  • 31.6 inches long by 16.25 inches wide by 35.25 inches high 31.6 inches long by 16.25 inches wide by 35.25 inches high
  • Compartments 1

Our Ratings: Assembly 4/5; Build Quality 5/5; Organization 4/5; Portability 5/5; Value 4.3/5

If you already have a well-organized hand-carry toolbox that works, but need a little more mobility around the garage, this Performance Tool toolbox cart may be the answer. The double-decker cart has a lockable tool drawer and holds up to 350 pounds of parts and tools. For easy mobility, it comes equipped with heavy-duty 4-inch casters, including two locking swivel casters. 

This cart requires assembly, which took us about 30 minutes. The 4-inch deep bare drawer would benefit from the addition of a non-skid drawer liner and tool organizers to keep things in order, but neither were included. We placed our own 3-drawer lockable toolbox inside for access to sockets, bits, and screwdrivers, and used the big built-in tool cart drawer for larger pliers, wrenches, and snips.

This service cart was easier to move around the shop than conventional rolling tool chests. It was nice to have the large open shelf on the bottom for bulky, heavy, or messy items, such as our oil drain pan and used filters. Another benefit to the tray-style top and bottom shelves was that they prevented sockets and other small tools and hardware from rolling off.

Get the Performance Tool rolling tool box at Amazon or Advance Auto Parts.

Best Modular

DeWalt DWST60436 ToughSystem 2.0 Rolling Tower

 The Best Rolling Tool Boxes Option: DeWalt DWST60436 ToughSystem 2.0 Rolling Tower
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • IP65 rated for weather and dust resistance
  • Large 8-inch all-terrain wheels
  • Snap-in-place connection system
  • Extendable transport handle

What We Don’t Like

  • Wheels are not solid rubber; may not be ideal for extreme use

Specs

  • Type Modular tool box
  • Dimensions 20 inches long by 13.5 inches wide by 34.5 inches high (assembled)
  • Compartments 3
  • Load capacity 250 pounds

Our Ratings: Assembly 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Organization 5/5; Portability 5/5; Value 4.7/5

This DeWalt Tough System 2.0 modular rolling tool box tower includes large, medium, and small interlocking boxes made of rugged molded plastic. The bottom tool box features an extendable transport handle and 8-inch wheels. It is the largest of the three boxes—we put in two circular saws and a reciprocating saw, and we still had room to spare. All three boxes are 20 inches wide and measure 13.5 inches from front to back. The large base box is 15.5 inches high, while the middle-size box is 12 inches high, and the smallest box is 7 inches high.

Several features make this system one of the best modular options we’ve tested. The interlocking boxes use side latches with an intuitive spring-loaded design. We only needed to stack the boxes to latch them automatically. This made them as secure as a single unit in transport. Then we squeezed the lever while lifting to separate them again. They also carry an IP65 water- and dust-proof rating for harsh jobsite conditions.

We also appreciated the included organizer trays in each of the boxes. The large and medium sizes had lift-out dual compartment trays for midsize tools. The smaller box included a pair of clear-lidded containers to organize hardware, bits, or other small items. This system is rated for 250 pounds of storage capacity.

Get the DeWalt ToughSystem portable tool box at The Home Depot or ToolNut.

Best For Power Tools

Stanley 23-Inch 50-Gallon Mobile Tool Box

 The Best Rolling Tool Boxes Option: Stanley 23-Inch 50-Gallon Mobile Tool Box
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Sturdy molded construction
  • Large storage capacity
  • Weather and impact-resistant
  • Also works as a seat or sawhorse

What We Don’t Like

  • Hinges and latches are less sturdy than others we’ve tested

Specs

  • Type Portable tool box
  • Dimensions 37 inches long by 23 inches wide by by 23 inches high
  • Compartments 1

Our Ratings: Assembly 5/5; Build Quality 4/5; Organization 4/5; Portability 5/5; Value 4.7/5

For those who need more secure storage space than a simple latch, consider the Stanley mobile tool box with its 50-gallon internal storage capacity secured by a built-in lock. The Stanley name is highly respected in the tool industry, and the robust design of this rolling tool chest is right in line with the company’s other quality products. The lock allows users to secure items with a key rather than keeping track of an easily lost padlock (though it does have hasps for padlocks on each latch as well). 

This Stanley rolling tool box is made from heavy-duty molded polypropylene, and it comes with metal latches and an in-box lock for added security. An extendable handle makes pulling easy, and the handle slides out of the way when not in use. However, this is a tip-up rolling chest, so it’s important to consider the weight of the items within; super-heavy items may make it difficult to tilt and roll.

We used the Stanley mobile tool box as a work site locker. There was plenty of room inside for us to stow our portable router table along with a circular saw, drill/driver, battery charger, and all of our hand tools. The box itself had thicker walls and was tougher than we had anticipated. The molded 2×4 slots in the lid offered a suitable alternative for a sawhorse, and we used the box as a seat for our coffee breaks. But the lock and hinges were not as heavy duty as some of the other boxes we tested. As far as security, this one will keep honest people honest, but probably won’t stop a criminal. 

Get the Stanley rolling tool box at The Home Depot, Walmart,or Global Industrial.

Best for Mechanic Tools

Husky 10-Drawer Tool Chest And Cabinet Combo

 The Best Rolling Tool Boxes Option: Husky 10-Drawer Tool Chest And Cabinet Combo
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Large casters and handle for portability
  • Large storage volume
  • Soft-close drawers with padded liners
  • Sturdy steel construction

What We Don’t Like

  • Casters did not lock securely

Specs

  • Type Multi-drawer stacking tool chest
  • Dimensions 27 inches long by 18.1 inches wide by 58.3 inches high
  • Compartments 11

Our Ratings: Assembly 5/5; Build Quality 4.6/5; Organization 4/5; Portability 4.5/5; Value 5/5

For those with limited garage space but many tools to store, this Husky rolling tool box with drawers may be ideal. Similar in design to our top pick, this one is larger and heavier. It has 10 drawers varying in size to suit different tools, each rated to hold up to 100 pounds, and a total weight capacity of 1,500 pounds. In our tests, we appreciated the soft closing mechanism of the drawers, as well as the included padded liners that were pre-cut and slid in nicely during setup. The entire two-piece tool chest came almost completely assembled, too, which was a plus. We just needed to install the four large caster wheels on the bottom, plus the handle on the side.

For testing, we overloaded the drawers above their rated 100 pounds. Even with very heavy items inside, the drawers seemed to hold up nicely, and we noticed little change to the smooth opening and closing. The bright red coating also makes quite the statement, although shoppers can opt for more subtle blue or glossy gray options, which are almost identical save for one additional drawer.

Our one gripe with the Husky was its hard plastic caster wheels. Even with both brakes applied, they didn’t seem able to fully stop the tool chest from moving when we pulled on it. This tool box on wheels just started sliding across the floor. We would have liked to have seen a hard rubberized wheel with a little more grip.

Get the Husky 10-drawer tool chest at The Home Depot.

Jump to Our Top Picks

Milwaukee Packout Tool Box action
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

How We Chose and Tested the Best Rolling Tool Boxes

We vetted more than 40 rolling tool storage systems for this guide. We gleaned our favorite wheeled tool storage solutions from previously tested guides before scouring the internet for additional options. We tested each rolling tool box according to its weight rating and intended use. For garage tool chests, we considered compact models best suited to home garages. We also sought out portable options for transporting and temporarily storing construction tools. To test them, we loaded them to capacity and rolled them over the most likely terrain—a concrete floor for garage models, or gravel and grass for all-terrain types. After testing, we recorded our observations and scored each model on a rubric before awarding “best” titles.

What to Consider When Choosing a Rolling Tool Box

To determine which mobile tool box is the best choice, consider the number, weight, and type of tools in need of storage. Also take into account whether tools will require built-in electrical outlets and whether a rolling tool storage cabinet that locks is necessary.

Types of Rolling Tool Boxes

Rolling tool boxes come in various designs based on the types of tools stored inside them and the kinds of projects for which they are used. The following types of rolling tool boxes all store tools and can be moved with ease, but each offers different features that will suit some projects better than others. For some, a small rolling tool box is all that’s needed, while others will benefit from larger storage capacities.

Rolling Tool Cart/Trolley

Much like a rolling kitchen cart, a rolling tool cart or “trolley” has a tabletop work surface that can hold small items, such as nuts, bolts, and spark plugs, and also additional storage below the work surface. 

The storage space below a tool cart may be configured with multiple pull-out drawers or a combination of drawers and bins. It may also include shelving. A trolley-type cart can move to a designated spot for tool storage or hold all the tools necessary for a specific project—say, detailing a car—and then the user can pull it out to the driveway to keep everything within reach.

Rolling Tool Chest 

A rolling tool chest is essentially a large tool box on wheels with multiple drawers that resembles a dresser frequently found in a bedroom. This type of portable tool storage often appears in mechanics’ garages and typically features shallow drawers just deep enough to hold sockets and wrenches, as well as 4- or 5-inch wheels designed to roll across a smooth garage floor.

In an automotive garage, this type of standing tool box might be used to line the walls, with each unit chock-full of the small precision tools a mechanic needs to work on various vehicles. A rolling tool chest with drawers can also come in handy in a woodworker’s workshop. The shallow drawers are ideal for storing fasteners, bits, and other small supplies that can be difficult to find if they’re dumped in a box or tool bag.

Rolling, Stackable Tool Box

A stackable rolling tool box is a flexible tool storage option. These boxes have built-in wheels and handles that make them easy to roll, and they generally have large tool chests or bins instead of drawers. These chests serve as the foundation for adding additional storage boxes, which users can clip to the tool chest to keep them secure. 

These options are modular, so users can keep adding boxes as long as they can handle the weight and mobility. They can be a huge benefit to folks with multiple power tools during DIY projects who prefer to keep them in separate boxes along with their accessories, as well as those who use a lot of hardware and would like their nuts and bolts organized securely. 

Rolling Tool Box Stool

A rolling tool box with a stool can offer great relief when working on projects that require the user to bend down regularly, such as performing detail work on the exterior of a car or bathing the family dog outdoors. 

The stool’s storage can be as simple as a single shelf above the wheelbase, where it can hold a couple of hand tools, or a series of drawers and bins for storing more items. Having a stool for both sitting and stashing tools underneath can be just as convenient as wearing a tool belt—and even more comfortable for the user’s back.

Rolling Tool Box With Workbench

Similar to a rolling tool box trolley or cart, a tool cabinet with a workbench provides the user with an additional work surface that can hold cans of paint, brushes, or other tools and accessories. The tops on these storage cabinets are usually made of a durable material such as wood that will withstand scratches and gouges.

Material and Construction Quality

To protect expensive tools from dust, water, and the elements, many rolling tool boxes are made from heavy-gauge steel with a powder-coated finish designed to prevent rusting and corrosion. However, while steel tool boxes are moisture-resistant, they’re not waterproof, so they should be stored inside a garage or workshop when not in use. Some may even feature stainless steel components, but rarely are these boxes completely sealed from the elements.

Another popular material for rolling tool boxes is heavy molded resin, which can withstand the occasional shower. Remember, if the tool box does not say it’s waterproof, rain or water from a lawn sprinkler could seep into drawers or cabinet doors, causing rust on the tools inside.

Quality of construction may look different for the different materials, but certain indicators cut across the spectrum. Whatever the material, the lid should not flex or warp when raised. Hinges and latch hardware should not come out of alignment by simply raising and lowering the lid. Drawers should move smoothly through their full range of motion. High quality models incorporate soft-close drawers and may include padded drawer liners. Rolling boxes meant to be transported across open ground should have thick walls, large, grippy wheels, and a sturdy handle.

Size and Shape

A square or oblong box shape is the most common design for rolling tool boxes. There are a few round ones, but these are typically tool boxes with built-in stools. A unit with straight sides offers the most efficient use of tool storage and organization because it can be pushed against a garage wall. Rolling tool boxes are usually between 2 and 8 feet wide, and they can be just as narrow or tall. Most models are relatively shallow in depth so as not to take up too much room along the garage wall.

Storage Capacity

Consider the number and type of tools that require storage when choosing a rolling tool box. To stow hefty power tools—such as cordless drills, routers, and jigsaws—a tool box that has either large bins or shelves sturdy enough to hold them is best. For those who will be working on cars, the best garage tool organization and storage might be a box with small upper drawers for sockets and a couple of deeper drawers at the bottom for larger tools.

Tool Security 

Tools are expensive, and keeping them safe from thieves (not to mention away from curious children) may require locking the tool box. Some models feature individual locking doors, while others come with a bar-type lock that extends across all the doors. When security is an issue, it’s also a good idea to use a cable to secure the box to a permanent object, such as a lag bolt inserted into the concrete floor of a garage or workshop. But remember, locking tool boxes are not safes; they are designed to reduce the risk of theft, not to be impenetrable.

Maneuverability 

Metal mechanic tool boxes often come with small casters that enable the user to push the tool box over paved concrete. To move the box over different terrains, such as across the yard to a patio, look for larger wheels that will roll over turf or gravel without bogging down. Some jobsite rolling tool boxes have two large wheels along with a handle, enabling the user to tip the whole unit, like a hand truck, and pull it across uneven ground.

Portability

Portable rolling tool boxes tend to incorporate two or three tool boxes that fit together, one on top of another, and roll across the ground. They’re called “portable” because the boxes can be separated, carried, and loaded onto a truck. These boxes typically weigh less than 25 pounds when empty and often come with collapsible handles. Though some portable rolling tool boxes are made of metal, they’re more often crafted of lightweight molded resin. Keep in mind that a tool box’s true portability level will depend on the weight of the tools inside.

Additional Features 

Most rolling tool boxes are pretty straightforward, but a few have some particularly useful bells and whistles.

  • Electrical outlets: Look for these on workbench- or trolley-type rolling tool boxes. They allow the user to plug in electrical tools right at the cabinet. They require plugging a heavy-duty 12- or 14-gauge extension cord into the back of the cabinet and running it to an electrical outlet.
  • USB charging port: This feature usually comes as an added option on tool boxes with electrical outlets, allowing the user to charge a cell phone while working.
  • Indrawer compartments: These are handy for keeping small items, such as different sizes of fasteners, separate and organized.

The Advantages of Owning a Rolling Tool Box

Milwaukee Packout Tool Box
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Keeping needed tools within reach makes any project go quicker. Rather than having to maneuver repeatedly between a tool chest and a project, a rolling tool box lets you bring the tools right to where you’re working. 

  • With a rolling tool box, you can organize the types of tools you’ll need, such as sockets and wrenches for automotive work, and keep them within arm’s reach.
  • When you want to rearrange your work space, you can move a rolling tool box anywhere you want in the garage.
  • Some rolling tool boxes are also portable, which means you can stuff them full of tools and then transport everything to a different job site.

FAQs 

First-time shoppers may still have some questions about rolling tool boxes. Here are a few of the most common questions we’re asked, along with succinct answers.

Q. What can I store in a rolling tool box?

There are many ways to organize a tool box. While some rolling tool boxes can hold large power tools, many have shallow drawers that work better for organizing small tools and supplies, such as sockets and fasteners. 

Q. Does a rolling tool box have a lock?

Some do, but not all. When security is an issue, look for a tool box that allows you to lock it with a padlock.

Q. How do I clean a tool box?

Usually a spray-on, all-purpose cleaner will work, plus a rag to wipe off grease and gunk. For best results, clean your tools and keep them maintained to prevent the inside of the tool box from getting dirty. 

Q. What is the best material for a toolbox?

A metal tool box made of powder coated steel is generally best for a garage space. Rolling toolboxes for outdoor use are made of heavy-duty weather- and impact-resistant plastics. A cheap rolling tool box may incorporate less durable material.

Q. What is the difference between a tool box and a tool chest?

These terms may be used interchangeably, but “tool box” often specifically refers to a box with a hinged lid and one or two insert trays, and “tool chest” means a drawer system. 

Q. What size rolling tool box should I get?

If you are replacing one or more tool boxes with a larger one, one way to choose the correct size is by adding together the total space currently available and buying one slightly larger. A large rolling tool box with increased volume will allow you to incorporate tool organizers, or add a few more tools later on.

Q. How to store a rolling tool box?

If the tool box will be used on a regular basis, store it in a convenient location where it will not be blocked by other items. That could be beneath a work bench or on a shelf. If it’s for storage, a stacking system is often the most convenient and makes the best use of available space.

Meet the Testers

Paul Rankin is a writer and product tester who has been writing for BobVila.com since 2021. He focuses on buyer’s guides for the full range of tools, furniture, DIY supplies, and home and garden products.

Tom Scalisi is a freelance writer specializing in the home design, construction, tools, and automotive industries. As a lover of all things tools, construction, and DIY, he’s always looking for new tools and techniques while also sharing his knowledge with the DIY world. 

Glenda Taylor is a product tester and writer specializing in the construction, remodeling, and real estate industries. She and her husband own a general contracting company, and Taylor is experienced in both residential and commercial building applications.

Mark Wolfe is a product tester and writer with an extensive background in the nursery and landscaping industry. He kept his tool box well stocked in order to build or repair fences, walls, irrigation systems, and equipment on any given day. Now he tests and writes reviews about the latest hand tools, lawn-care products, outdoor power equipment, and other outdoor-living goods.

The post After Testing 9 Rolling Tool Boxes, The Craftsman Offered Storage for Almost Every Tool appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-10T20:19:58-05:00
<![CDATA[Realize Your DIY Potential by Learning How to Use These Essential Tools in 2025]]>The post Realize Your DIY Potential by Learning How to Use These Essential Tools in 2025 appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/diy/essential-tools/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=423509Thu, 09 Jan 2025 15:21:26 -0500DIYSkills & TechniquesToolsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

When it comes to home improvement, repair, and maintenance, DIYers can learn a wide assortment of skills to help take on an array of jobs so they don’t need a professional. Oftentimes, even the simplest projects call for using essential tools every homeowner should have one hand. Hammers, screwdrivers, and tape measures, for instance, are relatively easy to use, but even these tools are only as effective as their user.

Whether you’re planning a large renovation or simply want to expand your DIY skills in the coming year, learning how to handle some of the most commonly used tools is a worthy endeavor for any homeowner. Bob Vila has you covered with setup instructions, parts diagrams, how-tos, product reviews, and more, for eight go-to tools for DIYers.

How to Use a Drill

A DIYer loading a a drill bit into a drill/driver for home improvement projects and repairs.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob VIla

One of the most frequently used tools around the home is a drill, and for good reason. Learning how to use a drill allows you to penetrate through drywall, wood, metal, and other hard materials, making it easier to run wire, mount heavy objects, or simply drive screws without hand-cranking a manual screwdriver. You can find both corded and cordless drills, as well as a wide variety of drill bits to handle a range of different scenarios. Just make sure to use proper eye protection to avoid flying bits of dust and debris. 

How to Use a Stud Finder

A DIYer using a stud finder to find wall studs.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

The purpose of a stud finder is right there in the name: To find wall studs. These essential tools help to locate studs behind wall claddings or to identify the location of ceiling joists without needing to cut a bunch of holes. (It’s ideal to hang pictures, put up shelving, install wall-mounted TVs, and more through a stud.) 

DIYers who learn how to use a stud finder can streamline a variety of simple jobs around the home, cutting down on wasted effort and unnecessary damage, especially when using more advanced stud finders that can even detect the differences in density along the walls.

How to Use a Circular Saw

A person using a circular saw to cut a sheet of plywood outdoors.
Photo: Philippe Gerber/Moment via Getty Images

A circular saw is a type of handheld power saw that is frequently used by DIYers for making straight or diagonal cuts through pieces of wood. When equipped with the right blade, a circular saw can also be used to cut metal, plastic, and other materials. 

Learning how to use a circular saw requires correct hand positioning. DIYers should make sure that they grip the saw with two hands, positioning one hand on the front grip and their dominant hand on the rear grip where the trigger is located. Also, ensure that the target material is properly supported and that you don’t force the saw through the material, as this can cause the saw blade to dangerously stick or kick back. 

How to Use a Caulk Gun

A DIYer loading a caulking gun and cutting the tip of the caulk tube.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Caulk guns are designed to hold and apply caulking to fill in gaps and prevent leaks. Common uses of a caulking gun include applying beads of caulk around the tub, filling gaps around windows or door frames, and finishing molding or trim work. It’s relatively easy to learn how to use a caulk gun, but if you cut too much off the tip of the caulk tube or try to work too quickly, the caulk can come pouring out, leaving you with a difficult mess to clean up. 

It’s recommended to make a small cut in the tip of the caulk tube, then squeeze the caulk gun handle slowly until the caulk begins to come out so you can get a sense for how much pressure is required when applying the caulk. 

How to Use an Air Compressor

A person using an air compressor to use pneumatic tools in a home workshop.
Photo: Lowe’s

An air compressor on its own can still be useful, but these tools truly shine when paired with a wide range of pneumatic tools to make home DIY projects much easier. Air compressors essentially allow pneumatic tools to use air pressure for tasks like power nailing, paint spraying, or even automotive work. 

The steps for learning how to use an air compressor vary depending on the type of pneumatic tool you are using, but the initial set-up remains basically the same. However, it’s important to read and follow the specific directions provided by the manufacturer, as there can be some key difference between products, depending on the type of air compressor. 

How to Use a Belt Sander

A DIYer using a belt sander to remove wood from the end of a board.
Photo: ProfessionalStudioImages/E+ via Getty Images

When you are working with wood, a belt sander is an essential tool for removing thick layers of material and smoothing out the surface of the wood. A sanding belt moves rapidly through the tool, allowing the user to focus on controlling the position and pressure of the tool. 

Belt sanders are great for deck installation jobs, fence repair, paint stripping, and furniture building or refinishing, though it’s important to learn how to use a belt sander to avoid oversanding your project. Since a belt sander tends to be more powerful than a finish sander, DIYers need to work slowly until they get the hang of it.

How to Use a Glue Gun

A DIYer loading a glue stick into a glue gun for home improvement projects and repairs.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Glue guns aren’t just for crafts and art projects, they can also be put to use for a number of household repairs and helpful hacks, including adhering small woodworking joints, fastening baseboards, or holding shoe molding or molding returns in place while you nail. Like caulk guns, it’s simple to learn how to use a glue gun, but if you rush, then you can create a sticky mess. 

Work slowly and carefully to ensure you apply the right amount of glue to the target material. It’s also recommended to have a scrap piece of cardboard to set the glue gun on when you aren’t using it and a rag to wipe away any excess glue. 

How to Use a Miter Saw

A DIYer using a miter saw to cut miter joints for window and door trim.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

When you need to make accurate, repeatable cuts through several pieces of wood, metal, or other material, a miter saw is one of the best options available. Miter saws have a base that sits on a workbench or table, and an arm that holds the saw blade, which extends over the top of the base. You position the target material on the base, then bring the saw blade down to complete a cut through the material. 

Once you learn how to use a miter saw, you can make adjustments to the position and angle of the cut to create highly accurate and repeatable cuts that are effective for a wide range of projects, like fence building, deck repair, furniture making, and more.

The post Realize Your DIY Potential by Learning How to Use These Essential Tools in 2025 appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-09T15:21:26-05:00
<![CDATA[We Researched More Than 20 Dead Blow Hammers to Find The Best One]]>The post We Researched More Than 20 Dead Blow Hammers to Find The Best One appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/best-dead-blow-hammers/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=422936Thu, 09 Jan 2025 10:53:41 -0500ReviewsDIYHand ToolsToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

The dead blow hammer is one of those unusual items in the tools category that plenty of people have heard of but few actually own. A dead blow hammer is surprisingly versatile and can be used in engineering, metalworking, woodworking, masonry, and demolition, so it’s worth considering owning one.

The big advantage that the dead blow has over other types of hammers is that it doesn’t rebound. This allows for greater control because there’s no bounce, and because there’s less vibration, it can also reduce fatigue. A dead blow hammer can apply considerable force but can also tap something into place gently with little risk of damaging the surface. The well-rounded nature of the dead blow hammer is what really stood out in our top pick, the Neiko 02847A 2-Pound Dead Blow Hammer, which is one of the most versatile options out there. 

For those new to these tools, choosing the right one can be a challenge. We’ve addressed that in this article by selecting the best dead blow hammers for a variety of different tasks.

Best Overall

Neiko 02847A 2-Pound Dead Blow Hammer

 The Best Dead Blow Hammer Option Neiko 02847A 2-Pound Dead Blow Hammer
Photo: Amazon

Pros

  • Versatile and affordable all-rounder
  • High-vis, non-sparking poly body
  • Diamond textured, non-slip handle

Cons

  • Not for heavy-duty use

Specs

  • Weight: 2 pounds
  • Dimensions: Head: 2⅛ inches by 3⅞ inches; Overall length: 13⅜ inches
  • Features: Checkered grip, spark-resistant coating

It isn’t easy picking a single best dead blow hammer, but this one from Neiko is the kind of general-purpose tool that’s suitable for working with both metal and wood. With a weight of 2 pounds and a length of 13⅜ inches, it can deliver high force when required but remains maneuverable for more delicate work. The shot-filled head maximizes the impact without rebound, and the poly coating prevents marring the material and sparking when it comes in contact with metal. With its diamond texture, the octagonal handle provides a trusty grip.

There are a few reports of the head splitting, which could be a concern. To put that concern in context, however, it’s important to understand the purpose of a dead blow hammer: to impact a surface straight on while absorbing the impact and without damaging the surface. When hitting a flat surface to smooth a wood finish, remove a dent, or bring pieces of wood flush, the hammer will simply absorb the impact. When used to drive in nails or sharper objects, the coating that helps protect the surface it hits from being damaged may split when the sharp object pierces or impacts the coating. An ordinary steel hammer should generally be used for that type of work. If using a dead blow hammer to protect the surface when driving nails going into soft woods, some splitting or damage to the head is to be expected. 

Get the Neiko dead blow hammer at Amazon or Lowe’s.

More Dead Blow Hammers Worth Your Money

To properly answer the question, “What is a dead blow hammer?” it helps to have a selection of the different types and sizes as reference. The following top picks range from affordable sets that maximize the tool’s versatility to a heavyweight dead blow sledge hammer.

  • Yiyitools Dead Blow Hammer Set, available at Amazon.
  • Performance Tool M7234 Dead Blow Hammer Set, available at Amazon.
  • Milwaukee 32-Ounce Dead Blow Ball Peen Hammer, available at The Home Depot, or Northern Tool + Equipment.
  • ABN 4-Pound Dead Blow Hammer, available at Amazon.
  • Capri Tools C102 12-Pound Dead Blow Hammer, available at Amazon.

How We Chose the Best Dead Blow Hammers 

Dead blow hammers are popular with professionals but less common with DIYers, so in putting together this article, we wanted to provide examples of the various sizes, types, and materials. We looked at durability, coatings, grip, and, of course, prices. While tools from some leading brands command a premium, even large dead blow hammers can be very affordable.

We also sought expert advice from masonry contractor Andriy Boyko of A.O. Handy Inc., commercial and residential masonry specialists in Wisconsin. Boyko called a dead blow hammer “simple but incredibly useful, especially when you want to get a clean, controlled strike without leaving any marks.” Balance and weight are key features, he explained. “A 16-ounce hammer is a good all-rounder, but if you’re working on something bigger, you might want a 32-ounce one. Ideally, the head should be tough but gentle on surfaces. If you’re going to be using it for longer periods, look for a handle that has a good grip to reduce strain.” Before purchasing a dead blow hammer, consider the projects planned in the future and choose the appropriate weight and head material.

FAQs

Using a combination of the product descriptions and the key features should provide answers to many of the questions that people have when deciding which model to buy. We did find a few queries that we felt warranted further information, so we have addressed those here.

Q. What should a dead blow hammer be used for?

The question “What are dead blow hammers used for?” is a common one. Small models are good for assembly, or taking dents out of metal panels. Some landscapers use a dead blow hammer for pavers. Large models can be used for demolition. Any time you want maximum control with no rebound, a dead blow hammer is the tool to reach for.

Q. Is a dead blow hammer the same as a rubber mallet?

No. In our article on best rubber mallets, the tool is described as being like “a padded hammer”, and that’s a great page to visit for further information. Dead blow hammers deliver a hard, flat blow with no bounce that risks damaging the surface or the user. 

Q. What size dead blow hammer should I use for woodworking?

Although different sizes of hammers can be used depending on the task, most woodworkers prefer a dead blow hammer between 12 and 16 ounces.

Q. What is the effect of a dead blow hammer?

The head of a dead blow hammer is usually filled with sand or steel shot. When you strike something, that loose material moves forward, effectively “deadening” the blow and ending the hammer’s motion in place. As such, rebound is virtually non-existent, so the hammer stays where you hit.

Q. When should you use a dead blow hammer?

People use dead blow hammers when they need maximum control. Lightweight models are used for mechanical assembly. A heavy-duty hammer can apply a lot of force but will cause less surface damage than an ordinary hammer. However, because most are encased in plastic, they are not the best hammer for knocking in nails, for example.

Q. Can you use a dead blow hammer on metal?

You can. Dead blow ball peen hammers are specially designed for dent removal, shaping, and riveting.

The post We Researched More Than 20 Dead Blow Hammers to Find The Best One appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-09T10:53:41-05:00
<![CDATA[After 12 Hours of Testing, We Keep Reaching For These Whittling Knives]]>Learn about key shopping considerations to help you choose the best whittling knife for your projects among our top recommendations.

The post After 12 Hours of Testing, We Keep Reaching For These Whittling Knives appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-whittling-knife/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=120151Thu, 09 Jan 2025 10:14:21 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Whittling differs from wood carving in that whittlers perform their craft solely with wood and a good whittling knife, while wood carvers employ chisels, gouges, and occasionally power tools to shape the wood. The simplicity of whittling allows just about anyone to pick up a relatively inexpensive whittling knife and a piece of wood and get started.

A new whittling knife is always an exciting addition for new and experienced craftsmen alike. You get to try out the cut of a new blade and the grip of the handle. Ideally, the right whittling knife will sit comfortably in your hand and have a curve to the blade to enhance your whittling ability. We’ve scoured customer reviews and spent 12 hours testing a few highly regarded models in order to find the best whittling knife. Our favorite was the BeaverCraft S15X Wood Carving Set. Because project conditions vary, we really liked that the kit included 3 rugged knives for different cutting needs, and they felt as good in our hands after 3 hours of whittling as they did at first.

But your needs and preferences may vary, so be sure to check out our reviews of the other knives we tested. Whether you need a folding knife to carry in your pocket, a larger knife for working with greenwood, or even a gift idea, this guide has you covered. Our product evaluations and shopping considerations are here to help you find the best whittling knife for your next project.

  1. BEST OVERALL: BeaverCraft S15X – Premium Wood-Carving Set
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: BeaverCraft C4S Whittling Knife with Leather Sheath
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST PORTABLE: Flexcut JKN88 Whittlin’ Jack Carving Knife
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST POCKET KNIFE: Böker TS 2.0 Medium Stockman Pocket Knife
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR GREENWOOD: Morakniv 120 Wood-Carving Knife
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST FOR DETAILING: BeaverCraft C15 – Detail Wood-Carving Knife
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST SET: Elemental Tools 9-Piece Wood-Carving Tools Set
    ↓ Jump to Review
  8. BEST POCKET-SIZE:Opinel No. 8 Carbon Steel Folding Knife
    ↓ Jump to Review
[youtube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YRoCPZd6ULU?feature=oembed&w=1778&h=1000]
BeaverCraft Wood Carving SetBeaverCraft Wood Carving Knife
Flexcut Whittlin’ JackBöker Medium StockmanMorakniv Wood Carving KnifeBeaverCraft Detail Carving KnifeElemental Tools Wood Carving Tools SetOpinel No. 8 Folding Knife
Knife type(s)Wood carving, detail carving, chip carvingSloydWood CarvingGeneral purposeWood CarvingDetail carvingWood carving, sloyd, hookGeneral purpose
Blade length2 inches, 1⅖  inches, 1 inch2⅞  inches2 inches, 1½  inches2 inches, 1¾  inches, 1½ inches2⅓  inches1½  inchesNot provided3¼ inches
Edge grind typeScandiScandiScandiFlatScandiScandiScandiFlat
Handle materialBlack walnutOakAluminumSteel and boneBirchAshWalnutBeech

Our Top Picks

We’ve tested hundreds of hand tools for work, but it’s not often we get to evaluate tools for the pure enjoyment of creating art. With quality, value, and comfortable control as our guide points in testing, we suggest these as some of the best whittling knives for new and experienced wood carvers alike.Finding the best whittling knife for your experience level depends on quality, price, and personal preference. These recommendations can help you find the best whittling knife for your projects.

Best Overall

BeaverCraft S15X – Premium Wood-Carving Set

 Best Whittling Knife Options: BeaverCraft Deluxe S15X Wood Carving Whittling Knives
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Accommodates different whittling styles
  • Excellent quality for the price
  • Comfortable, easy to control
  • Arrived sharp; blades held their edge well
  • Kit includes bandages, just in case

What We Don’t Like

  • Some users may prefer a single general-purpose knife

Specs

  • Knife type(s) Wood carving, detail carving, chip carving
  • Blade length 2 inches, 1⅖ inches, 1 inch
  • Handle material Black walnut

Our Ratings: Comfort 5/5; Sharpness 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Value 5/5

If you’re serious about whittling or wood carving, chances are you’ll want a few different blades for roughing in general shapes, fleshing out details, and adding decorative touches. Whether you’re a complete novice or an expert in need of another set of whittling tools, the BeaverCraft Deluxe S15X wood carving kit comes with everything you need: a large wood carving knife, detail carving knife, chip carving knife, polishing compound, leather strop, and genuine leather storage pouch. 

Compared to some of the other blades we tested, these were much less flexible. We liked the rigidity, although some users prefer more flexibility. The straight blade edge and downward-curving spine of the 2-inch carving knife gave it a good combination of power and precision that worked well for roughing and general carving. The shorter, narrower detail knife blade was very articulate when it came to narrowly curved cuts and smaller cuts overall.

The BeaverCraft knives came out of the box sharp and ready to work. As we carved, the edge durability proved to be excellent, as well. Working with basswood blanks, we stopped once an hour to hone the blades with good results. The walnut handles felt good in hand and provided excellent blade control. The well-tuned blades and comfortable handles allowed us to intuitively make controlled push cuts and pairing cuts and gradually improve our chip-carving techniques. 

What our tester says: “The BeaverCraft whittling knife set looks great in its leather pouch, and cuts just as well. I’ve only whittled with a pocket knife and was amazed by the comfort and control I had with these knives. And the blades stayed very sharp all the way through the test.”—Mark Wolfe, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the BeaverCraft S15X whittling knives at Amazon, Walmart, or BeaverCraft.

Best Bang for The Buck

BeaverCraft C4S – Whittling Knife With Leather Sheath

 Best Whittling Knife Options: BeaverCraft Sloyd Knife C4s 3.14 Wood Carving Sloyd Knife
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Affordable price for a quality knife
  • Good design for rough whittling and bigger projects
  • Sharp, durable edge
  • Includes a leather sheath

What We Don’t Like

  • Blade was shorter than advertised

Specs

  • Knife type(s) Sloyd
  • Blade length 2⅞ inches
  • Handle material Oak

Our Ratings: Comfort 5/5; Sharpness 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Value 5/5 

The BeaverCraft C4S is a single-blade knife with a sturdy 2⅞-inch blade. Its shallow belly is ideal for controlling long planing cuts, and the thin tip cleanly negotiates short curved cuts. The knife has a handle just under 5 inches long that’s made of solid oak and treated with natural linseed oil to protect the wood from moisture, rot, and decay. The handle is smooth and comfortable in the hand, and it boasts an ergonomic design intended for long periods of use. Perhaps best of all is its budget-friendly price, which may be a surprise for this level of quality.

The high-carbon steel blade is somewhat susceptible to rust, so you’ll need to keep it clean, and properly stored after every use. It retains an edge for a long time while working with just about any type of hardwood or softwood. The blade comes presharpened so you don’t have to worry about grabbing your sharpening stone or leather strop before you can start whittling. Once you are done, store it safely in the included leather sheath until you want it again.

We used the BeaverCraft sloyd knife to shape carving blanks out of dried poplar that we split from a pile of firewood. The wood was dry and hard, but this knife was the tool for the job. It sliced smoothly and produced long, curled shavings. After an hour, we honed the blade and worked at it for another hour. The handle felt good, the blade kept its edge, and our hands felt great after whittling for two hours.

Get the BeaverCraft C4S whittling knife at Amazon or BeaverCraft.

Best Portable

Flexcut JKN88 Whittlin’ Jack Carving Knife

 Best Whittling Knife Options: FLEXCUT Whittlin' Jack, with inch Detail Knife
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Sturdy yet lightweight
  • Ergonomic handle and blade design
  • Sharp, durable edges
  • Includes blades for roughing and details

What We Don’t Like

  • Thin handle profile is more tiring with extended use

Specs

  • Knife type(s) Folding roughing knife and detail knife
  • Blade length 2 inches, 1½ inches
  • Handle material Aluminum inlaid with wood veneer

Our Ratings: Comfort 4/5; Sharpness 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Value 4.7/5

The Flexcut Whittlin’ Jack is ideal for whittlers who want a trusty whittling knife that can fit in their pocket. It features a 1½-inch detail knife blade and a 2-inch roughing knife blade, both of which fold into a durable aluminum handle inlaid with wood veneer. The blades are made of high-carbon steel for easy sharpening and extended edge retention. The knife comes presharpened so that you can get to work as soon as it arrives.

The Whittling Jack is only 4 inches long when folded, so it can easily fit in a pocket or bag. The handle has a curved ergonomic shape for effortless control during use. We were able to use it as effectively as traditional wood-handled carving knives—with the exception of certain push cuts. Since the blades on this knife do not lock, we had to be more careful when pushing on the spine of the blade to avoid accidentally closing the knife. It was a minor concern, but one that stayed in the back of our minds throughout the test.

Our project results with this knife were excellent. Both blades maintained keen edges for an hour of whittling at a time. The blade angle and handle shape made control easy and mostly comfortable, but after two hours of cutting, we noted more hand fatigue than we experienced with the traditional handle designs.

What our tester says: “Using the Flexcut Whittlin’ Jack felt very much like other high-quality whittling knives. The angle between the blade and the handle felt comfortably familiar. I was able to control the cuts just as well as with a fixed blade. I can’t imagine a better design.”—Mark Wolfe, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the FlexCut whittling knife at Amazon, Woodcraft, Lee Valley, or Flexcut.

Best Pocket Knife

Böker TS 2.0 Medium Stockman Pocket Knife

 Böker TS 2.0 Medium Stockman Pocket Knife
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Beautiful traditional pocket knife
  • D2 steel blades for excellent edge retention
  • Assortment of blades for different cutting needs
  • General-purpose knife for everyday carry

What We Don’t Like

  • Blades are not purpose-designed for whittling
  • Smaller handle offers less comfort and control

Specs

  • Knife type(s) Folding multipurpose knife (clip, sheepsfoot, and spey blades)
  • Blade length 2⅛ inches, 1¾ inches, 1½ inches
  • Handle material Nickel silver bolsters, brass linings, bone scales

Our Ratings: Comfort 4/5; Sharpness 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Value 4.7/5

If you don’t necessarily plan to dive deeply into this hobby, it can make a lot of sense to whittle with a pocket knife. The Böker Stockman is a tried-and-true design with a good assortment of blades. It measures 3 inches long closed, and the blades are made of D2 tool steel for optimum edge retention. This knife is both durable and stylish, with nickel silver bolsters, black jigged bone scales, and brass linings. In keeping with the traditional stockman pattern, it comes with a 2-inch clip blade, a 1¾-inch sheepsfoot blade, and a 1½-inch spey blade.

The Böker pocket knife came with nicely sharpened blades, but we honed them with a few strokes on the 3,000-grit stone and strop to bring the blades to the same level of sharpness as the other knives in the test. Surprisingly, this was the only knife we tested that did not require honing after the first hour of whittling. Once sharp, it stayed quite sharp for a long time.

Whittling with a pocket knife is more nostalgic than efficient, but it is effective and very accessible. Roughing and basic detail carving were doable, but the smallish handle and comparatively blunt-tipped blades made it more challenging to refine the work. Still, this was the easiest knife to carry in a pocket and whittle on a whim, which is perfect for carving details on a hiking stick while resting beside a scenic vista, or making basic three-dimensional figures while sitting around the campfire. For those with larger hands, the Böker Large Stockman might be a better fit.

Get the Böker whittling knife at Amazon, Swiss Knife Shop, Knife Country USA, or Böker USA.

More Great Options

Choosing the right whittling knife is as much about personal comfort and whittling style as it is about blade designs or handle shapes. If the knives we tested are not quite right for you, consider the following options, all of which have received rave reviews from dedicated whittlers and wood carvers.

Best For Greenwood

Morakniv 120 Wood-Carving 120 Knife

 Best Whittling Knife Options: Morakniv Wood Carving 120 Knife with Laminated Steel Blade
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Multipurpose blade for carving greenwood
  • Slightly curved blade
  • Full tang, laminated steel blade
  • Premium oiled birch handle

What We Don’t Like

  • Less effective for figure carving and fine details

Specs

  • Knife type(s) Wood carving knife
  • Blade length 2⅓ inches
  • Handle material Birch

First-time whittlers or woodworkers on a budget might hesitate to invest much money in a new whittling knife, but the Morakniv 120 is an affordable option, providing you with a single laminated steel whittling knife with a 2.35-inch blade. The laminated steel has a high-carbon steel core to help the blade hold its edge, but softer alloy steel surrounds the core to reduce the weight of the knife and to increase rust and corrosion resistance. 

The sloyd-style tapered blade with slightly up-curved tip gives this knife the balance of power and precision required for rough carving greenwood from the forest. It’s slightly less effective for working with kiln-dried wood from the lumber yard or hobby store.

The handle on the Morakniv is just over 4 inches long and made of oiled birchwood that sits comfortably in the hand. The soft wood is gentle to the touch, but provides a durable grip for precise whittling. This knife comes with a black plastic holder to protect the blade when not in use. The laminated steel blade doesn’t require the same level of maintenance as a carbon steel blade, but the manufacturer recommends washing and drying the blade by hand after every use to ensure the longevity of the knife.

Get the Morakniv whittling knife at Amazon, Ragweed Forge, or Morakniv.

Best For Detailing

BeaverCraft C15 –Detail Wood-Carving Knife

 Best Whittling Knife Options: BeaverCraft Wood Carving Detail Knife
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Short and thin tapered blade
  • Ergonomic ashwood handle
  • Sharp right out of the box
  • Great for working with store-bought wood blanks

What We Don’t Like

  • Less effective for rough carving large pieces

Specs

  • Knife type(s) Detail carving
  • Blade length 1⅖ inches
  • Handle material Ash

For smaller whittling projects, a good detail carving knife may be the only knife you need. Designed to make small, precise cuts, the BeaverCraft C15 is a fixed-blade knife that removes material slowly compared to carving knives with bigger blades. The handle comes in high-quality, ergonomically shaped ashwood and measures 4½  inches long, providing a smooth, comfortable grip to reduce hand fatigue.

The high-carbon steel blade is short, at just 1⅖ inches, giving new whittlers the control they need to help make narrow and curved cuts with a high level of control. It features a Scandi grind straight cutting edge, which is durable and easy to maintain. The blade is also thin, allowing you to whittle precision details into the wood. This knife comes presharpened so that you can begin whittling as soon as you find a suitable piece of wood.

Get the BeaverCraft whittling knife at Amazon, Walmart, or BeaverCraft.

Best Set

Elemental Tools 9-Piece Wood-Carving Tools Set

 Best Whittling Knife Options: Elemental Tools 9pc Wood Carving Tools Set
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Assorted blades for different project types
  • Includes a wood spoon blank and essential accessories
  • Affordable price

What We Don’t Like

  • Few size and material details from the manufacturer

Specs

  • Knife type(s) Sloyd, detail carving, hook
  • Blade length Not provided
  • Handle material Walnut

This 9-piece carving kit from Elemental Tools offers a combination of tools for whittlers at various levels. The set includes three whittling knives, cut-resistant gloves, polishing compound, leather sharpening strop, and a beechwood spoon blank that you can use as soon as you open the set. The beechwood blank is a medium hardness wood, great for beginners who might cut overzealously into softer woods.

The set comes in a bamboo storage box, which helps to protect the high-carbon steel blades of the hook knife, sloyd knife, and detail knife from rust and corrosion. The knives all come with black walnut handles that are smooth to the touch, while containing a robust and durable material. Black walnut is naturally resistant to moisture and decay, so there won’t be concerns about your handles swelling or cracking. 

Get the Elemental Tools whittling knives at Amazon, Wood Art Supply, or Elemental Tools.

Best Pocket-Size

Opinel No. 8 Carbon Steel Folding Knife

 Best Whittling Knife Options: Opinel Carbon Steel Folding Pocket Knife with Beechwood Handle
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Folding knife with locking blade
  • Large blade for fast material removal
  • Carbon steel blade retains a sharp edge
  • Lightweight and comfortable beech handle

What We Don’t Like

  • Limited to rough whittling

Specs

  • Knife type(s) General purpose
  • Blade length 3¼ inches
  • Handle material Beech

Those who prefer casual whittling with a pocket knife might look to the Opinel Carbon Steel Folding Pocket Knife. It is an ideal size for carrying in a pocket, at just 4.3 inches long with the blade closed. The hard carbon steel blade can cut through either hardwoods or softwoods, though this knife isn’t recommended for fine whittling. The blade is flat, with a gentle curve toward the end, so you can easily work with either the edge or the belly of the blade.

This folding knife comes with a stainless steel blade locking mechanism that can keep the blade in place when the knife is open or closed, so that you don’t have to worry about the blade slipping free. The handle of the knife is made from durable beechwood that feels smooth in the hand and has a curved tang at its end to give you a more secure grip.

Get the Opinel whittling knife at Amazon, Peaceful Valley, or Opinel USA.

Jump to Our Top Picks

Beaver Craft sloyd knife
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

How We Chose and Tested the Best Whittling Knives

Based on our own research and verified customer reviews, we sought a combination of the best quality and most affordable whittling knives for testing. With plenty of options to choose from, we included only the most broadly useful blade types: sloyd, rough carving, detail carving, and chip carving, along with a traditional pocket knife. After analyzing the overall construction of each one, we tested them by whittling for 2 hours each. We noted the initial sharpness, durability of the edge, and how each knife felt in hand with regard to comfort and control. Finally, we scored each one on a rubric before determining the award titles.

Testing Stats
Products tested 4
Time spent testing 12 hours
Tests performed4
Price range$20 to $60

What to Consider When Choosing a Whittling Knife

Boker medium stockman knife
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Before choosing a whittling knife, take a few minutes to think about the most important shopping considerations to keep in mind. Determining which type of wood you want to work with, what knife features you’re interested in, and which safety precautions you should focus on will depend on your skill level.

Wood Type

The type of wood you plan to use can influence the whittling knife you select. Beginners might want to start on a stick or piece of wood they find outdoors instead of spending money on precut wood. In this case, a basic whittling knife with no specialty purpose is best to get started.

Once you get the hang of working with a simple stick, you can move on to different types of wood and more advanced whittling knives, such as a hook knife. Intermediate and experienced whittlers will get more value from investing in precut pieces of wood. You can choose from a range of softwoods or hardwoods, though basswood and aspen wood are often used for whittling because of their minimal grain and relatively soft structure. 

Beaver Craft carving knife set
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Handle

The blade of a knife is generally considered the most important feature, but the handle greatly affects the balance, weight, and durability of the knife. It is also the part of the knife most responsible for comfort and can contribute to hand fatigue. Whittling knife handles often are made of wood, plastic, or stainless steel.

  • Wood is the most commonly used material. It looks classically attractive and provides a smooth, comfortable grip. On the other hand, wood is a porous material that can absorb excess moisture, causing swelling and splitting if the whittler does not care for and store the knife properly. Hardwood handles are less likely to split, but still require maintenance, such as the applying of appropriate oils. 
  • Plastic is inexpensive, easy to clean, and durable. Though it doesn’t look as nice as wood, you won’t have to worry about splitting or swelling. However, plastic-handled whittling knives can be harder to find.
  • Stainless steel is the most durable and easiest to clean of the three choices. Both plastic and wood are more comfortable to hold and manipulate for long periods of time, making stainless steel a poor option for beginner whittlers with inexperienced hand muscles that will likely fatigue quickly with this unyielding handle material.

Blade Material

Whittling knife blades are mostly stainless steel and carbon steel, though some blades are made out of laminated steel.

  • Stainless steel blades are a rust-resistant alternative to carbon steel. While stainless steel does not keep an edge as long as carbon steel or laminated steel, it costs less and doesn’t require as much maintenance. 
  • Carbon steel blades are the most common type of whittling knife blade. They keep a sharp edge with minimal sharpening, which is ideal for working with hardwoods. However, the blades require consistent maintenance and proper storage to ensure that they do not become rusted, frail, and essentially useless.
  • Laminated steel blades are made by layering different types of steel during the forging process. This gives them a sharper, longer-lasting edge than stainless steel blades and more rust and corrosion resistance than carbon steel blades.

Blade Shape

The shape of the blade is an important factor to consider. Some blades, like hook blades, are designed for a specific function, but for most projects, blade shape is more a matter of personal preference. 

If you are a beginner, you likely want to start with a long, thin blade that doesn’t have much of a belly. (The belly is the rounded portion toward the end of the blade.) Although many beginners prefer a shorter blade for better control and safety, this also can restrict your ability to make certain cuts. If you aren’t sure, it is best to have both a knife with a shorter blade and a knife with a longer blade so that you don’t limit your whittling. 

Whittlers should generally avoid any knife blades more than 15 millimeters thick. A blade this thick is obstructive to your cuts and can prevent you from achieving the results you want out of your whittling project.

Blade Locking

Some whittling knives have one or more blades that can fold into the handle when not in use. This protects the blade from damage and makes the entire knife more compact and portable. However, there is a chance that a foldable knife without a blade-locking feature can open up, causing injury if it is in your pocket, or exposing the blade to damage if it opens in your tool box.

If you’re going to get a whittling knife with a foldable blade, it’s a good idea to get one with blade locking. Not all foldable whittling knives will have this option, but safety is a worthy investment.

Single vs. Multi-Blade

Whittling knives can come in a single-blade or multi-blade format, and the latter has to be a foldable knife.

  • Single-blade whittling knives are easier to use and often come with a durable handle and sturdy construction that lets you get the most out of the blade. Keep in mind that if you want a fixed-blade whittling knife, you’ll need a single-blade knife, because only these blades offer the choice between a fixed blade or a foldable blade. However, you will have to get a second knife if you want a different blade shape or length.
  • Multi-blade whittling knives tend to be less durable and comfortable than single-blade knives because the handle must be large enough to house two or more blades without damaging the cutting edges. The more blades or tools a knife has, the less effective the individual blade tends to be, because it is more likely to attach further from the center of the handle, where it would normally have the most control and cutting power. The obvious benefit of a multi-blade knife is that you get multiple blade types in a single tool. This can be highly effective without much drawback if the knife has only two or three blades. 

FAQs

To tackle your next whittling project with as much information as possible, scout these answers to common whittling knife questions.

Q. How do you whittle wood?

All you really need to do to whittle wood is pick up a whittling knife and a piece of wood. The wood can be a high-quality block from your local hardware store, or it can be as basic as a piece of a tree branch. Take the knife and begin whittling away pieces of wood until you can form something that somewhat resembles the idea you had in mind. 

Whittling is an inexpensive hobby to get started in, and you don’t need any experience. However, you should wear gloves, go slow, and protect your hands at all times to prevent cutting up your fingers—especially the pad of your thumb, which often takes the brunt of slips and nicks during whittling.

Q. How do you sharpen your whittling knife blade?

There are many ways to sharpen a whittling knife, but the most common method employs a sharpening stone. Lay the blade of the knife flat on the stone, then angle it just slightly while pushing the knife away from you, as though you were trying to cut a piece off of the sharpening stone. Alternately, you can lay the blade flat on the stone with a slight angle, then sharpen the knife by applying pressure to the blade and moving the knife in a small circular motion against the stone.

Q. Can you use a pocket knife for whittling?

You can absolutely use a pocket knife for whittling. Some pocket knives even have multiple blades that you can use to create a variety of cuts on your whittling project.

Q. What is the difference between wood carving and whittling?

Wood carving is much more involved than whittling. It typically involves the use of chisels and gouges, and one might even use mallets or power tools to carve the wood. Whittling, on the other hand, is performed entirely with a whittling knife.

Q. What is the best blade grind for whittling?

The Scandinavian grind (also known as the “Scandi grind”), is popular because it offers a keen edge like a flat grind blade but with a stronger spine for added durability.

Q. How big should a whittling knife be?

Most whittling knife blades are short, typically measuring less than 2 inches in length. But the handles are chunky and curved for an easy grip and blade control.

Q. Does whittling dull your knife?

Whittling wears on the blade, but the sharpening process is minimal. For best results, most whittlers strop the blade once every hour or so. Use a leather strop with polishing or stropping compound.

Q. What angle should a whittling knife be?

Depending on the knife and what feels right to you, a good carving knife for wood will have a 15- to 20-degree edge bevel.

Meet the Tester

Mark Wolfe is a writer and product tester with a background in the green industry. He’s also an avid DIYer who lives in an older home. When he isn’t writing, he spends his time upgrading, repairing, and replacing anything and everything in his home, yard, and garden. He tests and writes reviews about tools, lawn care and home repair products, and outdoor living goods.

Additional research provided by Timothy Dale.

The post After 12 Hours of Testing, We Keep Reaching For These Whittling Knives appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-09T10:14:21-05:00
<![CDATA[Our Favorite Cordless Hammer Drill Has a Added Feature We Never Knew We Needed]]>With more power, the best cordless hammer drill provides quick work of projects. See how top-rated tools performed in our hands-on tests here.

The post Our Favorite Cordless Hammer Drill Has a Added Feature We Never Knew We Needed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-cordless-hammer-drill/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=121416Thu, 09 Jan 2025 02:31:15 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Drilling through concrete, bricks, and stone requires more force than even the most powerful corded drill drivers can provide—and cordless hammer drills have enough oomph (plus the convenience of battery power) to complete such tasks. Since this type of power tool is less common than a standard battery-operated drill, we tested a half-dozen top options to help you select a model worth your money. After using each battery hammer drill to bore holes in concrete, ceramic tile, and cinder brick, we documented each tool’s ability, performance, and ease of use before assigning all worthy options awards. 

Based on our tests and insights from a building industry expert, we chose the DeWalt 20V MAX XR Brushless 1-Inch Rotary Hammer as our favorite hammer drill for its ergonomic design and excellent performance. This model and the rest of our recommended cordless drills scored the highest in our hands-on testing and represent the best cordless hammer drills on the market.

  1. BEST OVERALL: DeWalt 20V MAX XR Brushless 1-Inch Rotary Hammer
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Craftsman V20 Cordless ½-Inch Hammer Drill Kit 
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: DeWalt 20V MAX XR ½-Inch Hammer Drill/Driver Kit
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST MEDIUM-DUTY: Makita 40V MAX XGT ½-Inch Hammer Driver-Drill Kit
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST LIGHT-DUTY: Skil PWRCORE 20V ½-Inch Hammer Drill Kit
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST COMPACT: Milwaukee M12 Fuel ⅝-Inch SDS Plus Rotary Hammer Kit
    Jump to Review
  • The Best Cordless Hammer Drill Options
  • DeWalt Cordless Hammer Drill Review
  • DeWalt Cordless Hammer Drill Review
  • DeWalt Cordless Hammer Drill Review
  • DeWalt Cordless Hammer Drill Review

Before You Buy a Cordless Hammer Drill

A cordless rotary hammer drill works by spinning a drill bit while simultaneously generating a rapid hammering action—making it ideal for boring into concrete, bricks, stone, or other masonry. Equipped with heavy-duty components and a high amount of torque, this type of tool is typically more powerful than necessary for tasks generally associated with using a cordless electric drill. Before buying one, consider whether you need to mix large amounts of concrete and paint or drill through bricks and other masonry. If not, you probably don’t need a hammer drill and can save a bit of money using a standard drill driver.

Cordless Hammer Drill Comparison Chart

Product NameMaximum SpeedBattery VoltageWeight
DeWalt 20V MAX XR Brushless 1-Inch Rotary Hammer1,100 RPM/4,600 BPM20-volt (V)6.8 pounds
Craftsman V20 Cordless ½-Inch Hammer Drill Kit 1,500 RPM/25,500 BPM20V6.1 pounds
DeWalt 20V MAX XR ½-Inch Hammer Drill/Driver Kit2,250 RPM/38,250 BPM 20V4.4 pounds 
Makita 40V MAX XGT ½-Inch Hammer Driver-Drill Kit2,600 RPM/39,000 BPM40V6 pounds 
Skil PWRCORE 20V ½-Inch Hammer Drill Kit1,450 RPM/ 21,750 BPM20V4.32 pounds  
Milwaukee M12 Fuel ⅝-Inch SDS Plus Rotary Hammer Kit900 RPM/ 6,200 BPM12V3.9 pounds

Our Top Picks

The following hammer drills excelled in our hands-on tests. Find out what we liked about each one before choosing the best cordless hammer drill for your needs.

Best Overall

DeWalt 20V MAX Brushless 1-Inch Rotary Hammer

 The Best Cordless Hammer Drill Option: DeWalt 20V MAX 1-Inch XR SDS Plus Rotary Hammer
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Ergonomic design and comfortable grip
  • 3 modes: drill only, hammer only (chipping), or combo
  • Adjustable depth-stop rod 

What We Don’t Like

  • Slightly heavy for delicate ceramic tile

Specs

  • Maximum speed: 1,100 RPM/4,600 BPM
  • Battery voltage: 20-volt (V)
  • Weight: 6.8 pounds

Traditionally, rotary hammers are large and unwieldy, but that isn’t the case with the DeWalt cordless rotary hammer. This heavy-duty tool has a standard pistol-style grip, which makes it easy to grasp and control. It has a brushless motor that generates up to 4,600 beats per minute (BPM) and a top speed of 1,100 rotations per minute (RPM). While this is lower than some of the other models we tested, that’s simply because this DeWalt drill is built for long-term power rather than speed. 

This model is a tool-only purchase, so we paired it with a DeWalt 5.0-amp-hour (Ah) rechargeable battery for testing. If you need to buy a battery, we wouldn’t suggest anything less than a 3.0Ah option, as this tool simply has too much power and torque for anything without at least that much capacity. Once you insert a battery, you can use the drill on one of three modes: drill only, chipping, or drill and hammer combined. This unit also has an adjustable depth rod, a side accessory handle, a belt hook, and a slotted drive shaft/system (SDS) chuck. 

In testing, this rotary hammer drill powered through all our masonry tasks without a glitch, and its ergonomic design allowed us to get a firm grip to maintain steady pressure. This specific model is a little beefy for drilling through ceramic tile, but we found we were able to drill smooth holes through tiles without cracking or chipping the surface glaze by switching to a smaller bit. 

What our tester says: “We especially like this DeWalt’s chipping feature, which worked well for getting old grout off used bricks. Even though we don’t need this mode on a daily basis, it’s so much quicker and easier than chipping away mortar by hand using a hammer and chisel that we’re really glad it’s an option.”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Read the full review: DeWalt 20V MAX XR Brushless 1-Inch Rotary Hammer

Get the DeWalt 1-inch cordless hammer drill at Amazon, Lowe’s, Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, or Walmart.

Best Bang for the Buck

Craftsman V20 Cordless ½-Inch Hammer Drill Kit

 The Best Cordless Hammer Drill Option: Craftsman V20 Cordless ½-Inch Hammer Drill Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • 2 speed options plus drill and hammer modes
  • Suitable for light- to medium-duty projects
  • Onboard LED is helpful in low-light situations

What We Don’t Like

  • Included batteries are relatively low capacity

Specs

  • Maximum speed: 1,500 RPM/25,500 BPM
  • Battery voltage: 20V
  • Weight: 6.1 pounds

Though it’s not a heavy-duty model like our top pick, the Craftsman V20 hammer drill is efficient, affordable, and powerful enough for many DIY uses. It comes with two 1.3Ah batteries and produces up to 1,500 RPM at high speed, sufficient for most light- or medium-duty projects. When it comes to boring holes in brick or concrete, the Craftsman produces up to 25,500 BPM—more than respectable from a value-priced model. We wouldn’t suggest it for someone who needs to drill mainly in dense concrete, but it’s a good pick for drilling through ceramic tile, cinder bricks, or the occasional concrete floor.

In our tests, we were able to make clean holes in tile without causing chipping or cracking on both the high and low speeds. When drilling holes in concrete and cinder brick, the Craftsman tended to bog down slightly if we used too much pressure. That could be related to both its brushed motor—brushed motors aren’t quite as powerful as brushless motors—or it could be associated with its low-capacity batteries. Craftsman tool users with higher-capacity batteries may want to use them in this drill.

Get the Craftsman cordless hammer drill at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Ace Hardware.

Best Heavy-Duty

DeWalt 20V MAX XR ½-Inch Hammer Drill/Driver Kit

 The Best Hammer Drills Option: DeWalt 20V MAX 1-Inch XR SDS Plus Rotary Hammer
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • LED light is dimmable and features a spotlight mode
  • Two 5.0Ah batteries and charger are included
  • Comes with a hard case for storage

What We Don’t Like

  • Batteries are a bit hard to remove from the tool

Specs

  • Maximum speed: 2,250 RPM/38,250 BPM 
  • Battery voltage: 20V
  • Weight: 4.4 pounds 

The DeWalt 20V MAX XR cordless drill set is a dependable and powerful hammer drill well suited to DIY and professional use, making it an excellent choice for an all-around hammer drill. As the second DeWalt in our lineup of the best cordless hammer drills, this top-notch pick is a conventional model rather than a rotary one. It features a brushless motor for enhanced power and three modes: drill, hammer drill, and driver.

In testing, the DeWalt hammer drill was impressive. We drilled quickly and without issue through concrete and cinder brick. We did get some surface chipping when drilling through ceramic tile, but that’s not unusual when working with powerful hammer drills. Still, this model’s variable-speed trigger made it much easier to start hammer drilling slowly so we didn’t shatter our glazed tile’s surface. It also has a dimmable LED light that users can set on low to conserve battery power or crank up to high for spotlight-bright illumination. We relied on that handy addition more than once in our tests, and we hope we see that feature added to more power tools. 

What our tester says: “We were impressed when we discovered that this hammer drill comes with two 5.0Ah batteries. Rechargeable lithium-ion batteries can be pricey—sometimes costing as much as the power tool itself—so it was a treat to get two high-capacity batteries alongside this excellent tool.”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the DeWalt ½-inch cordless hammer drill at Amazon, Lowe’s, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Northern Tool + Equipment.

Best Medium-Duty

Makita 40V MAX XGT ½-Inch Hammer Driver-Drill Kit

 The Best Cordless Hammer Drill Option: Makita 40V Max XGT Brushless ½-Inch Driver-Drill Kit
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Low vibration reduces hand and arm fatigue
  • Works in 3 modes: hammer, standard, and driver
  • Ample torque for drilling through concrete 

What We Don’t Like

  • Having to press and unlock digital clutch slows use

Specs

  • Maximum speed: 2,600 RPM/39,000 BPM
  • Battery voltage: 40V
  • Weight: 6 pounds 

Makita has a reputation for producing top-notch tools, so while we were excited to test its new hammer drill, we were somewhat skeptical since it features a digital clutch. Considering that all the hammer drills we’ve used previously have clutch rings for manually adjusting the torque needed to insert screws without stripping out the heads, we wondered how a digital clutch would fare. 

To find out, we switched to driver mode to turn on the digital clutch and tested its torque and slip by inserting screws into pine lumber. Overall, it was as accurate as any manual clutch we’ve worked with, but you have to press and temporarily hold an additional digital lock each time you want to select the clutch range. For quick-moving professionals, repeatedly needing to unlock the digital clutch may become annoying, though it may not bother occasional-use DIYers at all. 

Still, our main testing concern was how well the Makita could bore holes in concrete and other masonry materials, and in that area, it performed very well. Its brushless motor delivered ample torque and power, and the percussion hammering was reasonably smooth and didn’t reverberate through our hands and arms as some hammer drills do. The Makita offers two speeds and three modes: hammer drill, standard drill, and driver (for screws). It also has a bright LED light, a removable bar handle for two-hand stability, two 2.5Ah batteries, and a charger.

Get the Makita cordless hammer drill at The Home Depot or Acme Tools.

Best Light-Duty

Skil PWRCORE 20V ½-Inch Hammer Drill Kit

 The Best Cordless Hammer Drill Option: Skil PWRCORE 20 20V ½-Inch Hammer Drill Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Also drills in wood and metal 
  • 2 speed settings and 3 modes 
  • Has an LED light and belt clip

What We Don’t Like

  • Not as powerful as the others we tested

Specs

  • Maximum speed: 1,450 RPM/ 21,750 BPM
  • Battery voltage: 20V
  • Weight: 4.32 pounds  

When it comes to minor home repairs or DIY projects, the Skil 20V ½-inch hammer drill is a reliable option. This three-in-one tool functions as a hammer drill, drill, and screwdriver and has two speed settings. It comes with a 2.0Ah battery, which is on the low-capacity side yet still powerful enough for drilling the occasional hole in a concrete patio or basement floor. Since it doesn’t have a brushless motor, it’s best for light-duty tasks. 

In our tests, the Skil successfully drilled through cinder brick and ceramic tile, creating very smooth holes without causing chipping. In hammer mode, it vibrated more than other models we tested, but it wasn’t too much to handle. We think this Skil is a useful and cost-effective option for around-the-house drilling and light masonry tasks so long as you don’t need to drill more than a dozen holes in succession. We also recommend you don’t use too much pressure, as its motor bogs down a bit under increased force but drills just fine once you ease up.

Get the Skil cordless hammer drill at Amazon or Lowe’s.

Best Compact

Milwaukee M12 Fuel ⅝-Inch SDS Plus Rotary Hammer Kit

 The Best Cordless Hammer Drill Option Milwaukee M12 Fuel ⅝-Inch SDS Plus Rotary Hammer Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact and lightweight
  • LED light is nice and bright 
  • Plenty of power and torque for a small cordless electric drill 

What We Don’t Like

  • No accessory bar for 2-handed use

Specs

  • Maximum speed: 900 RPM/ 6,200 BPM
  • Battery voltage: 12V
  • Weight: 3.9 pounds 

Hammer drills are typically more powerful than standard drills, so we were initially puzzled to see Milwaukee making a 12-volt version when most are 20 or even 40 volts. Surprisingly, this compact model proved pretty powerful in our tests, quickly drilling holes in concrete, cinder brick, and tile. We found it perfect for use in tight spots and appreciated that its smooth and comfortable hammering action felt more like a gentle vibration than percussion. 

Still, this 12-volt tool isn’t going to replace a full-size rotary hammer drill anytime soon. Its low-voltage motor is better suited to light-duty tasks rather than commercial or heavy DIY use, and it only has two modes: drill and hammer drill. Since it does provide excellent performance for its size, it would be a quality pick for a pro, such as an electrician or plumber, who has to drill occasional holes in a masonry wall to run wiring or conduit. It’s lightweight enough to use as a one-handed hammer drill, though it would be nice if it came with an accessory bar for added stability.

Get the Milwaukee cordless hammer drill at Amazon or The Home Depot. 

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Cordless Hammer Drills 

To select models for our hands-on tests, we looked at the power output, speed, motor type, battery type, weight, and unique features of dozens of popular options. We then fit a select few with masonry bits and used them to drill through concrete, ceramic tile, and cinder bricks. As we tested, we awarded points based on performance, material quality, ergonomics, and efficacy of special features. We then used the scores to determine which award each tool deserved. 

The Best Cordless Hammer Drill Options
Photo: Glenda Taylor

What to Consider When Choosing a Cordless Hammer Drill

Certain features make some hammer drills better than others. Consider the following before buying one of the top cordless drills recommended above.

Drilling Materials

A standard drill and drill bit will barely scratch the surface of porcelain tile, a concrete walkway, or a stone countertop, yet a hammer drill fitted with a masonry bit will easily bore through these dense materials. Masonry bits have wings on the tips that help them remove dust as they drill, and their points are more chisel-like than those on standard bits. Even the best drill bits will dull or break almost immediately if they aren’t meant to penetrate the surface of masonry material, so using proper masonry bits is essential for dense surfaces.

Motors

Power tools like cordless drills have either brushed or brushless motors. Brushed motors use older technology to send power to a coil attached to a shaft. As the shaft begins to spin, the drill delivers power and torque.

Brushless motors are far more efficient. They use sensors and control boards to send an electrical current to coils that spin a magnet attached to a shaft. This method produces significantly more torque and uses far less battery power than a brushed motor. If you need to drill numerous holes, purchasing a brushless hammer drill might be worth the extra expense for the time it saves.

RPM, Torque, and BPM

When it comes to speed, consider a drill with a maximum RPM speed of 1,000 or more. Though that much speed is probably not necessary to drill through masonry materials, it allows the tool to be used as a drill driver when it’s not boring holes through concrete and brick. 

Torque (twisting force) is also essential. To indicate torque, manufacturers may use “unit watts out” or UWO, which is a complex measurement of drill power at the chuck. A drill with at least 700 UWO should serve most purposes. Not all manufacturers list UWO, however. 

Additionally, beats per minute, or BPM, should be a consideration. This measurement unit describes how often the hammer gear strikes the chuck per minute. A hammer drill with a BPM rating of 20,000 to 30,000 is suitable for most scenarios, though heavier-duty models might offer lower BPM in exchange for increased torque. For example, drilling large-diameter holes may be easier with a hammer drill with high torque power, even if it has a lower BPM rating. 

Clutch

Because hammer drills create so much torque, users need a way to regulate how much of that torque is available when using the drive feature on the tool to insert screws (if applicable). Too much torque can break a driver bit or strip out the head of the screw. 

Manufacturers may incorporate adjustable clutches in their hammer drills to control torque output, but not all models have this option. Adjusting the clutch usually requires users to twist a collar at the base of the chuck to the correct position, though that position is always different from tool to tool and is dependent on the type of drilled material. For example, porcelain tile, which is very hard, might require a high clutch setting (as long as the fastener can handle it), while porous cinder brick will require less.

Chuck

There are two types of chucks to become familiar with: 3-jaw chucks and SDS chucks.  

Most medium-duty hammer drills use 3-jaw chucks. They clamp down on a round or hexagonal surface when the user twists the chuck. Three-jaw chucks allow users to use a wide range of drill bits and driver bits, which is why they’re nearly universal on drill drivers. They come in ½-inch and ⅜-inch sizes, with the larger size being more heavy duty. 

Rotary hammers use SDS chucks that accept SDS bits. These bits have grooved shanks that lock into place. SDS is a German innovation, and the letters originally stood for the German words “steck, dreh, sitz,” which mean “insert, twist, stay.” Today, SDS is more commonly used to represent the English phrase “slotted drive system” or “slotted drive shaft.” These bits are different because rotary hammers provide massive force, which requires a more secure method of holding onto a bit.

Battery Type and Life

The main types of batteries that come with any cordless power drill are nickel-cadmium (NiCd for short) and lithium-ion. Lithium-ion batteries are replacing NiCd because they’re more efficient and last longer during use and in overall lifespan. They’re also considerably lighter. All the models that we tested came with lithium-ion batteries.

Battery life during use is typically measured in Ah. For light-duty drill drivers, 2.0Ah batteries may be sufficient. When slamming a bit into masonry, however, users might want a battery to last longer. They will want to look for batteries with amp-hour ratings of 3.0Ah or more or choose a corded drill instead. For those who need higher amp-hour ratings, batteries up to 12Ah can typically be purchased separately.

Size and Weight

When shopping for the best cordless hammer drill for your particular needs, remember to consider project requirements. For example, drilling through porcelain wall tiles doesn’t require much torque, speed, or BPM. A light-duty, compact hammer drill weighing around 2 pounds (without the battery) can do the trick. On the other hand, drilling large holes for structural anchors in concrete will require a much larger, heavier hammer drill, possibly even a rotary hammer, which can weigh as much as 8 pounds without the battery. 

A medium-duty hammer drill is an excellent choice for many DIY applications since it can tackle most projects. However, it will be significantly heavier than a standard drill driver (often as much as twice the weight), so it might not be ideal as the only drill driver in a workshop.

FAQs 

If you’ve never used a hammer drill before, you might still have questions about the tools and how they work. Below are answers to some of the most frequently asked questions to help point you in the right direction.

Q. Can a hammer drill be used as a chisel?

If it has a chipping feature, you can use a rotary hammer drill as a chisel, such as our best overall pick in this lineup.

Q. Can I turn the hammer drill part off and use it as a regular drill?

Yes, many hammer drills function as drill drivers, though their high power might be overkill for most projects around the house.

Q. Why is my hammer drill not hammering?

Here are a few reasons your drill may not be hammering:
 
You’re not putting enough pressure on the bit. The drill must feel some resistance from the bit to hammer it into the material.
Your drill isn’t in hammer mode. There might be a dial on the side of the drill or a collar at the top of the machine that allows you to switch the drill into and out of hammer mode. 
Your hammer gear might have broken. Most likely, this is due to age or misuse, but it’s best to check into a new one if this is the case.

Q. When should you not use a cordless hammer drill?

To answer this question, we interviewed Eduard Mirzoian, CEO of the emergency restoration company Restorerz. Eduard says that “some materials do not take as well to drilling using cordless hammer drills. Take, for example, extremely difficult materials like stone or massive metal.” You may need a corded hammer drill that offers more power and torque or diamond-tip bits to breach incredibly dense materials such as these. 

Q. Is a cordless hammer drill worth it?

According to building expert Eduard Mirzoian, “It is worth having a cordless hammer drill if portability and versatility are crucial.” He points out that cordless hammer drills allow you to work away from outlets but that you also need to be sure you consider the battery life necessary for your project so you don’t run out of power in the middle of your task.

Meet the Tester

Glenda Taylor is a product tester and writer specializing in construction, remodeling, and real estate. She and her husband own a general contracting company, and she is experienced in both residential and commercial building applications. Taylor tests a wide range of power tools as well as other home improvement, household, and lawn-and-garden products.

Additional research provided by Tom Scalisi.

The post Our Favorite Cordless Hammer Drill Has a Added Feature We Never Knew We Needed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-09T02:31:15-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Stainable Wood Fillers of 2025 for Repairing Furniture, Decks, and More]]>Start your own shopping trip for the best stainable wood filler with our recommendations. See shopping tips and top-rated options here.

The post The Best Stainable Wood Fillers of 2025 for Repairing Furniture, Decks, and More appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-stainable-wood-filler/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=138935Thu, 09 Jan 2025 02:16:15 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWorkshopWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Wood fillers help hide the appearance of cuts, cracks, and nail holes in painted or finished wood trim and furniture, but they are also frequently used to fill in gaps that remain after putting up drywall or installing a new door frame. The best way to ensure that guests never notice the patches is to invest in a stainable product that has a texture similar to that of the adjacent wood. We put five of the top stainable wood fillers to the test to determine which ones perform the best. 

Finding a wood filler that blends well with the wood type, is easy to apply, and doesn’t cost a fortune is key to getting good results. After testing each wood filler on a variety of wood surfaces, we found Minwax, with its easy-to-use design, superior finish, and affordable price to be the best of the bunch. Read on to discover more of the best stainable wood fillers on the market and to learn more about our test results. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: Minwax 42853000 Stainable Wood Filler
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BUDGET: J-B Weld 8257 Kirkwood Wood Repair Epoxy Putty Stick
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST EPOXY: Abatron WoodEpox Epoxy Wood Replacement Compound
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST FOR OAK: Goodfilla Water-Based Wood & Grain Filler
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST CELLULOSE BASED: Elmer’s E887Q Stainable Wood Filler, 3.25-Ounce
    Jump to Review
The Best Stainable Wood Filler Options
Photo: Tony Carrick for Bob Vila
Minwax 42853000 Stainable Wood FillerJ-B Weld 8257 Kirkwood Wood Repair Epoxy Putty Stick
Abatron WoodEpox Epoxy Wood Replacement CompoundGoodfilla Water-Based Wood & Grain FillerElmer’s E887Q Stainable Wood Filler
TypeLatex-basedEpoxyEpoxyCellulose-basedCellulose-based
Indoor/OutdoorBothBothBothBothBoth
Drying Time15 minutes15-25 minutes1-3 minutes15 minutesUp to 24 hours

Our Top Picks

The products below are our top picks for some of the best stainable wood fillers based on quality, price, and the shopping considerations mentioned above. Regardless of the specific attributes of a wood project, there’s a stainable filler below that fits the bill.

Best Overall

Minwax 42853000 Stainable Wood Filler

 The Best Stainable Wood Option: FillerMinwax 42853000 Stainable Wood Filler, 16-Ounce
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Consistency makes it easy to apply
  • No shrinkage while drying 
  • Matches natural wood color

What We Don’t Like

  • Not quite as strong as some wood fillers

Specs 

  • Type: Latex based
  • Quantity: 16 ounces 
  • Indoor/Outdoor: Both
  • Drying Time: 15 minutes

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Appearance 4.5/5; Durability 4/5; Value 5/5 

Minwax wood filler yields excellent results, is easy to use, and doesn’t cost much, which is why it tops our list of wood fillers. With its latex-based formula, Minwax has a smooth mud-like consistency that is very easy to spread over larger and smaller gaps and cracks. There were no lumps to work around, and it was thin enough that we didn’t need to use our fingers to apply it. We were able to fill a ¾-inch diameter hole that was ¼-inch deep with ease. 

Whereas other wood fillers took hours to dry, Minwax is a fast-drying liquid wood filler, ready for sanding in smaller cracks in under an hour and for larger jobs in about four hours, speeding along the job so we could move onto the staining phase. It also doesn’t shrink as it dries, so there was no need to apply a second layer to fill in gaps. Once dry, the filler’s smooth consistency meant that it was easy to sand the surface down to a stainable finish. Though not quite as strong as some of the cellulose-based wood fillers we’ve tried, Minwax still held up well to bumps and knocks once dry and fully cured. Minwax also took the stain well, and its natural wood color was a close match to our pine board. 

What our tester says: “Minwax has that just right consistency for filling in tiny nail holes or larger cracks. I was able to make even larger repairs with a single application, which isn’t the norm with most wood fillers.” —Tony Carrick, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Minwax wood filler on Amazon or at Lowe’s.

Best Budget

J-B Weld 8257 KwikWood Wood Repair Epoxy Putty Stick

 The Best Stainable Wood Option: FillerJ-B Weld 8257 KwikWood Wood Repair Epoxy Putty Stick
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Simple-to-use roll design 
  • Easy to apply to cracks and chips
  • Creates a strong bond

What We Don’t Like

  • Doesn’t hold stain as well as others
  • Lumpier consistency

Specs 

  • Type: Epoxy based
  • Quantity: 1 ounce 
  • Indoor/Outdoor: Both
  • Drying Time: 15 to 25 minutes 

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Appearance 4/5; Durability 4/5; Value 5/5 

Scratches, dents, and nicks occur frequently around the home, and they’re usually not large enough to warrant a full bucket of wood filler. However, once enough of those little imperfections have accumulated, you’ll want to fix them. This J-B Weld epoxy-based stainable wood filler is affordable and can be applied quickly with just your fingers.

The 3.5-inch-long tube of filler has two separate parts of an epoxy formula that you knead together to prep. If you don’t mind getting your fingers a little dirty, JB Weld is very easy to use. We could pinch off a very precise amount of the filler, press it together to mix, and its Play-Doh-like consistency made it easy to push into small gaps and cracks with our fingers.

Kwikwood does have noticeably larger particles of wood in it than other fillers. While this helped to create a strong, hard repair, it also made it more challenging to achieve a smooth finish that was level with the surrounding wood. We spent more time during the sanding phase to blend it evenly with the surrounding wood surface than we did with some of the other wood fillers we tested. 

True to its name, Kwikwood dries quickly, taking between 20 minutes to set for a shallow repair and about an hour for our larger ¾-inch in diameter, ¼-inch deep divot. While this made for a quick turnaround time, we found that Kwikwood didn’t hold wood stain particularly well. The instructions advise mixing the stain into the filler before applying. This process was messy and the stain didn’t mix evenly into the filler. These characteristics make it a good choice for fast repairs on surfaces you intend to paint over or cover but not ideal for filling chips, cracks, or nail holes on stained furniture. 

Get the J-B Weld wood filler on Amazon or at Lowe’s.

Best Epoxy

Abatron WoodEpox Epoxy Wood Replacement Compound

 The Best Stainable Wood Filler Option Abatron WoodEpox Epoxy Wood Replacement Compound
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Resists rot, mildew, and water
  • Consistency makes it easy to apply once mixed
  • Sands easily to a smooth, even finish

What We Don’t Like

  • Need to mix it ahead of time
  • Doesn’t match natural wood color

Specs 

  • Type: Epoxy based
  • Quantity: 12 ounces 
  • Indoor/Outdoor: Both
  • Drying Time: 1 to 3 hours 

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.3/5; Appearance 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4/5 

While most wood fillers are rated for indoor and outdoor use, they lack the durability of Abatron WoodEpox epoxy-based wood filler, which has a formula specifically designed to resist mold, mildew, rot, and water. Once the stainable and paintable wood filler is dry, it will remain permanently bonded to the wood around it and will not shrink over time or with changing weather conditions. This ability to ward off Mother Nature makes the waterproof, solvent-free wood filler a good solution for repairing decks, outdoor wood furniture, and other outdoor woodwork. 

WoodEpox comes in two separate containers that are mixed in equal parts to produce 12 ounces of filler. Divvying out equal parts and mixing them in a separate container made the application process a little more complicated than most wood fillers. Similar to other epoxy wood fillers, we found that the best way to mix the two-part compound was by kneading it with our fingers. Once mixed, the putty-like consistency allowed us to push WoodEpox into cracks and divots with relative ease. 

WoodEpox dried in about an hour for our shallow repair and in a few hours for our larger divot repair. Since WoodEpox has a smooth consistency, it was relatively easy to sand. And while it holds stain well, it dries to a lighter white consistency that doesn’t match natural wood color, thus limiting its use to painted surfaces and darker opaque stains. 

Get the Abatron wood filler at Amazon or Walmart.

Best for Furniture

Goodfilla Water-Based Wood & Grain Filler

Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Smooth consistency makes it easy to work with
  • Matches wood color well 
  • Sands to a smooth finish

What We Don’t Like

  • Too pricey for filling nail holes

Specs 

  • Type: Cellulose based 
  • Quantity: 8 ounces 
  • Indoor/Outdoor: Both
  • Drying Time: 15 minutes 

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.7/5; Appearance 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.5/5 

With its great color-matching quality and smooth consistency, Goodfilla is a favorite for making repairs to wood furniture. The cellulose-based, stainable wood filler has a finish that resembles the grain and color of natural red oak. If the initial color doesn’t quite match the existing flooring or furniture, the filler can be mixed with stains, tints, pigments, or dyes to achieve the perfect shade.

You get what you pay for with Goodfilla. While it was certainly the priciest of the wood fillers we tested, it also performed better than any of them. Its consistency is smooth and butterlike, which made filling everything from small nail holes to larger ¾-inch divots easy. Goodfilla dries quickly, is easy to sand, and has no shrinkage, so there was no need for a second coat on any of our test pieces. It dries to a rock-hard shell that held up to our efforts to chip and dent it. Goodfilla also did the best job of matching the surrounding wood color, and we found it to be one of the best wood fillers when it came to receiving stain. 

While Goodfella’s high price tag may not make it a good choice for basic jobs, such as filling nail holes in baseboards, it’s certainly worth the cost if you’re repairing chips and cracks in wood furniture and other finish carpentry. 

What our tester says: “I love how easy this product is to apply. It goes on smooth, fills even larger holes well, and sands down to an even finish that matches bare wood seamlessly.” —Tony Carrick, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Goodfilla grain filler on Amazon and Walmart.

Best Cellulose Based

Elmer's E887Q Stainable Wood Filler, 3.25-Ounce

 The Best Stainable Wood Option: FillerElmer's E887Q Stainable Wood Filler, 3.25-Ounce
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Easy to use for smaller repairs
  • Matches wood color well 
  • Sands easily 

What We Don’t Like

  • Hard to get a lot of product out of the bottl

Specs 

  • Type: Cellulose based 
  • Quantity: 3.25 ounces 
  • Indoor/Outdoor: Both
  • Drying Time: Up to 24 hours 

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Appearance 5/5; Durability 4/5; Value 4/5 

Cellulose-based, stainable wood fillers like this one from Elmer’s use fibers that imitate the feel and appearance of real wood. In its squeeze bottle form, Elmer’s is designed to be an easy and cheap fix for small repairs, including cracks, chips and nail holes. 

Elmer’s was the only wood filler we tested that uses a squeeze bottle design, and we had mixed feelings about it. The small applicator point, coupled with the thick consistency that’s characteristic of a cellulose-based wood filler, made it a challenge to squeeze filler out. We found that massaging the bottle with our fingers prior to removing the cap and cutting a large opening on the tip helped to make squeezing filler out of the bottle an easier process. But while we were able to coax enough wood filler out to handle smaller repairs, this is clearly not a wood filler designed to handle larger ones, such as our 3/4-inch diameter divot.

That said, the convenient squeeze bottle design made it a quick and easy option for filling nail holes and smaller chips. We were able to squeeze out a dab onto the repair and scrape away excess with a putty knife. Elmers also dried to a hard consistency quickly and was relatively easy to sand. Once dry, it was a close match to natural wood color and held stain and paint well. 

Get the Elmer’s stainable wood filler at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Stainable Wood Fillers

After researching the top stainable wood fillers for repairing furniture, flooring, and more, we discovered that the best options are determined by their type, quantity, drying time, compatibility with multiple surfaces, and other special features included by select brands. Keeping that in mind, we chose five good stainable wood fillers and put them to the test. 

We conducted three tests with each filler, using them to fill small nails holes, small cracks, and a large ¾-inch wide divot. We evaluated each filler based on several factors, including how easy it was to apply, the amount of time it took to dry, how easily we were able to sand it to a smooth, level finish, and its ability to match natural wood and receive stain. Finally, we factored in price to determine the overall value of each stainable wood filler. 

Testing Stats
Products tested 5
Time spent testing 6 hours
Tests performed3
Price range$6-$12]

What to Consider When Choosing a Stainable Wood Filler

Before choosing a stainable wood filler to renew the look of old furniture or to fix baseboards, consider important factors like drying time and the quantity of filler required. Once you have a better idea of your requirements, you’ll be able to find the best stainable wood filler for your project.

Types of Stainable Wood Fillers

The four basic types of stainable wood fillers are categorized by their formulas: gypsum-based, epoxy-based, vinyl-based, and cellulose-based.

Gypsum-based

Gypsum-based stainable wood fillers are typically used for indoor repairs to fill gaps in baseboards and drywall. This type of filler is made out of gypsum dust that must be mixed with water to create the paste. Once the filler has dried, it is no longer pliable. Instead, it takes on a similar consistency to hardwood or even rock, in some cases. 

Gypsum-based wood fillers are the most affordable type of filler. Because these fillers are susceptible to water damage, even after the filler has dried, they shouldn’t be used in locations where they may be exposed to moisture.

Epoxy-based

Epoxy wood fillers are the most durable and resistant, but they also require the most preparation before use. For the epoxy to have the desired consistency and adhesion, the two parts must be mixed according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Once the epoxy is mixed, it can be applied to the affected area.

Ideal for use in outdoor conditions, epoxy-based wood fillers can expand and contract with changing temperatures. Because of their natural water resistance, they’re also the best suited fillers to seal the wall or foundation of a home against wind and rain.

Latex-based

Latex-based stainable wood fillers are commonly used for outdoor locations because they require less initial preparation than epoxies. They also set very quickly after they have been applied and are usually water-resistant within an hour. Latex fillers are also easy to work with, so they’re useful for fixing holes, repairing gouges, rebuilding portions of rotted wood, and restoring outdoor furniture.

When latex-based fillers have fully dried, they have a rigid consistency like hardwood. This consistency allows you to use sandpaper on the filler to create a smooth finish. You can also drive nails or fasten screws through latex filler without damaging the repair, adding to their durability.

Cellulose-based

Cellulose-based fillers are another official category of stainable wood filler, though they’re rarely labeled as such on product packaging. Instead, cellulose-based fillers’ packaging will indicate that they contain real wood fibers. Compared to latex-based fillers and epoxies, these wood fillers are relatively inexpensive. Because cellulose fillers are water soluble, they can be mixed with stain to create a richly colored material before application.

Some cellulose-based fillers can be used outdoors, but others are strictly for indoor use. Be sure to consult the product’s directions to verify how and where the filler can be used.

Project

The type of project will determine which stainable wood filler best suits your needs. Factors like preparation time, the amount of filler required, and any constraints around drying time (like impending rain) should all inform the product choice. 

  • Indoor projects can range from filling a gap between baseboards to touching up a piece of fine wooden furniture or repairing hardwood floors. Though any suitable wood filler can be used for indoor projects like these, epoxy fillers would be the last resort, as they take much longer to prepare and dry than other formulations.
  • Outdoor projects that require a stainable exterior wood filler might include fixing gouges in a fence, repairing cracks in a deck, restoring and staining outdoor furniture, and sealing up holes in a home’s exterior wall to protect from the elements. The best choice for projects like these is an epoxy-based stainable wood filler. For smaller repairs, it’s fine to use a latex-based outdoor wood filler or even a cellulose-based filler that is rated for exterior use.

Versatility

Most wood fillers are sold in small containers, each with a specialized purpose for one kind of minor repair or another. If you’re in renovation mode and need a lot of stainable wood filler to complete a long list of projects, it’s best to invest in a bulk wood filler product that has a wide range of applications. 

Before purchasing a large quantity of stainable wood filler, confirm whether it’s suitable for both indoor and outdoor use. Also consider how malleable the filler is before it dries—if you’re going to buy in bulk, it may be worth purchasing a small container to check how easy it is to work with before buying the large container. Examine the manufacturer’s recommended uses for the product, and the consistency of the filler when it has fully cured. For instance, it’s a good idea to use an epoxy-based stainable wood filler to fix a hole in an exterior wall because epoxy adapts best to temperature fluctuations.

Quantity

The quantity of wood filler required will depend on the scope of the project. The good news is that wood filler manufacturers sell their products in a variety of quantities, from miniscule to a bucketful, so you won’t have to pay for a ton of filler just to repair a few scratches.

For minor repairs, there are stainable wood fillers that come in a form similar to a crayon, allowing you to fill shallow cracks by simply swiping the filler material over them. Stainable wood filler packages between 8 to 16 ounces are appropriate for mid-size projects, like touching up the gaps after replacing the baseboards in a home. Any fillers that exceed this quantity are best for larger projects, like renovating an entire room or repairing an old deck or fence.

Drying Time

Be sure to note the approximate drying time of the stainable wood filler to determine exactly how long you have to complete a repair and smooth out the area before the filler hardens. Some products dry very quickly, which is convenient for outdoor applications, as it’s important for the filler to dry before it’s exposed to rain or snow.

When using stainable wood filler to repair a larger section of wood, it’s best to use a product that takes a while to dry; this will allow time to make the repair and form the filler into the desired shape. Drying time varies from product to product, so be sure to refer to the manufacturer’s directions for details.

FAQs 

If you’re still wondering how to select the right stainable wood filler for your project, review the answers to these frequently asked questions.

Q: How do you apply wood filler?

The easiest way to apply wood filler is to use a putty knife. Begin pressing the filler into the top of the affected area and slowly manipulate it into the repair, overfilling if necessary. After the crack, gouge, or scratch is filled, but before the filler dries, use the putty knife to remove any excess so it’s flush with the surface.

Q: How do you prepare a wood filler?

Some wood fillers, including epoxy-based and powder fillers, have to be mixed before they can be used. To prepare the stainable wood filler, carefully follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer. This usually involves mixing two parts of an epoxy together or mixing water with a powdered filler.

Q: How do you stain wood filler?

After sanding your wood and preparing the repaired area, apply the stain directly to the filler using a small paintbrush, or stain the entire piece of wood and the filler together for a more uniform look. 
If you have concerns about how the stain will look on the filler when it dries, test it out first on a scrap piece of wood. When the filler on the scrap wood is dry, test the stain so that you know how it will look before you commit to staining your furniture, floor, or any other wooden surface. 

Q: What is the difference between wood putty and wood filler?

The main difference between wood putty and wood filler is that putty typically remains somewhat pliable, which allows it to shrink and expand with the cold. This makes wood putty suitable for filling large gaps in a wall. Wood filler hardens to a consistency that’s similar to wood because it contains sawdust and wood fibers. Wood putty is made primarily of plastics, though there are also some plastic wood fillers.

Q: What is the best material to fill large gaps in wood?

The best material to fill large gaps in wood depends on the size of the gap. Furniture and wood floor fillers are the best option if the gap is no more than ¾-inch inch in diameter. For larger holes, you’ll need to use a plug of wood or sawdust along with wood filler to make the repair. 

Q: How thick can wood filler be applied?

You can generally apply wood filler to a thickness of up to ⅜ inch. Any thicker and the repair is less likely to hold up over time. 

Q: Can you drill into a wood filler patch?

Wood fillers dry hard enough that you can drill or screw into them. That said, if you do plan to do either, we suggest using an epoxy wood filler, which dries harder than other types of wood fillers. 

Q: How long does stainable wood filler take to dry?

How long wood filler takes to dry varies depending on the size of the repair. Most wood fillers dry in less than 30 minutes for small repairs, such as filling nail holes. Larger repairs, such as filling a large crack, can take 4 to 6 hours to dry and as much as a full day to cure. 

Meet the Tester

Tony Carrick is a freelance writer specializing in home improvement, landscaping, technology, home security, and design. His articles have been featured on such sites as Popular Mechanics, Futurism, SFGate, Pro Tools Review, and more. Tony has conducted rigorous product testing on everything from power tools to home security systems to backyard grills. With each review, his goal is to help readers determine whether a product meets their needs and if it is or isn’t worth its price tag.

Additional research provided by Timothy Dale.

The post The Best Stainable Wood Fillers of 2025 for Repairing Furniture, Decks, and More appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-09T02:16:15-05:00
<![CDATA[My Lawn Mower Won’t Stay Running. What’s Wrong With It?]]>If your lawn mower will start but won’t stay running, there are a few parts of the machine that may need cleaning or replacement. We'll show you where to look.

The post My Lawn Mower Won’t Stay Running. What’s Wrong With It? appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/lawn-mower-wont-stay-running/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=160628Wed, 08 Jan 2025 16:53:07 -0500DIYLandscapingLawn & GardenToolsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Q: I can’t seem to figure out why my lawn mower won’t stay running. There’s plenty of gas and oil in it. Can it be repaired, or is it a lost cause?

A: Lawn mowers seem like simple machines, yet they require some TLC to operate smoothly—especially if they’ve been sitting in the shed for a while. A full gas tank and oil reservoir are the essential first steps when checking why the lawn mower won’t stay running, but the problem could also be a dirty filter, clogged carburetor, improper fuel mixture, or a dirty spark plug. If you’re ready to get your hands dirty, check out these troubleshooting tips to get your lawn mower running again. However, you may need a lawn mower specialist to get you back to trimming your grass. Alternatively, a landscaping professional can take care of it for you.

Lawn mower letting you down?
Find the best lawn mower repair specialists and compare multiple quotes today.
+

The fuel might be old and dirty and needs to be replaced.

Person wearing gloves switches the gas supply line on a lawn mower on and off.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Fuel that has sat in the motor for a while can evaporate and leave a sticky residue. The inlet and outlet ports leading to the carburetor could be clogged, as well as the fuel filter. In cold, wet winter seasons, condensation can collect inside the tank, which doesn’t mix with the fuel. Replace old, dirty, or diluted fuel; adding fresh fuel to it won’t solve the problem. Drain the old fuel out of the tank and collect it to be disposed of safely per local requirements. Clean off the carburetor ports before refilling the tank.

The air filter might be dirty, which prevents it from getting enough air.

Motors have air filters to collect and trap dust and debris that could clog the machine’s inner workings. Over time, they become clogged and need to be replaced. If an air filter isn’t working correctly, the motor can’t get enough air to prevent overheating. Inspect the air filter for carbon deposits or oil, and replace it if it’s contaminated. Paper filters always need immediate replacement if they’re contaminated, but a dusty foam filter could benefit from being washed and dried at least once before replacement. It’s recommended to replace the air filter after every 25 hours of use.

The carburetor might be clogged and dirty.

Person wearing black work gloves removes gas cap from a lawn mower.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

One inconvenient reason a lawn mower won’t stay running is a problem with the carburetor, which mixes the air and fuel for internal combustion. The carburetor bowl may be clogged, or the inlet and outlet ports are slimy from fuel residue. Remove them and spray them with an aerosolized carburetor cleaner (not water). You can try disconnecting the fuel lines and spraying them out with cleaner to remove any sitting sludge as well. Replacing the fuel filter is also recommended if the carburetor is showing signs of contamination. If the lawn mower has a gas cap vent, open it to clear any visible clogs. If none of these steps solve the problem, it’s worth having the carburetor replaced by a pro.

Lawn mower letting you down?
Find the best lawn mower repair specialists and compare multiple quotes today.
+

You forgot to reset the choke, so the fuel mixture is too rich.

Most lawn mowers have a choke to modify the fuel-to-air mixture, which keeps the engine running until it’s warmed up. Unless you’ve had cool weather for a while, the choke should be off to prevent overloading the motor with the wrong mixture of fuel. If the choke is left on for too long, excess fuel flows into the combustion chamber, causing it to seize up and stall. If this happens, the lawn mower will need to sit idle for several hours to allow the fuel to drain out of the chamber. Turn off the choke and try again later. If the problem still isn’t solved, a faulty choke switch could be the problem. Clean it with carburetor spray or replace it entirely.

A dirty spark plug is misfiring and needs to be replaced.

Person wearing work gloves exposes spark plug on lawn mower.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

A faulty or dirty spark plug could be the reason your lawn mower won’t stay running. It might produce the initial spark, but the spark won’t be enough to keep the engine running if the plug is clogged with dirt and oil. Spark plugs are usually located on the front of a push lawn mower and connected to a black cable. Remove it with a socket wrench and clean with a wire brush and some brake cleaner. A dark, sticky carbon residue indicates a need to replace the spark plug. Especially if you have repeated times when the lawn mower won’t stay running, scheduling regular tune-ups can help keep spark plugs in great shape all year.

The post My Lawn Mower Won’t Stay Running. What’s Wrong With It? appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-08T16:53:07-05:00
<![CDATA[Dremel’s New Products Can Replace Your Portable Circular Saw Setup]]>The post Dremel’s New Products Can Replace Your Portable Circular Saw Setup appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/dremel-saw-station-blueprint-review/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=423289Tue, 07 Jan 2025 14:48:44 -0500ReviewsDIYHand ToolsPower ToolsToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

As a long-time Dremel fan, I’ve used their high-quality rotary tools for filing, sanding, cutting, engraving, and even grooming my dog’s nails. But, the new Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station and Dremel Multi-Drill take multi-use tools to a new level. Naturally, I couldn’t wait to put them to the test in my home and workshop. 


The portable saw station features a compact circular saw stowed in a hard case that folds out to form a cutting table with clamps, gauges, and more. The Dremel Multi-Drill handles standard drill/driver tasks but also features a built-in stud finder, bubble level, and laser level for added precision. Keep reading to learn more about each of these innovative 12V cordless Dremel tools and how they fared in my hands-on tests.

Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station: At a Glance

Our rating: 4.9/5

Our rating: 4.9/5

Dremel portable saw station on white background

Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station

Portable Saw Station Specs
PowerCordless/battery
Voltage Rating12V
Max cut depth1 inch
Bevel capacity0 to 45 degrees
AccessoriesConvertible case, clamps, miter risers, stud holder, table extender
Model CS12V-S1C

Buy on Amazon for $149.99

Testing the Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station

The portable saw station is inclusive–everything comes neatly packed in a well-designed hard case that weighs about 16 pounds. After removing the tool and accessories, I unfolded the inner sides of the case–transforming it into a mini table saw base. 

Dremel’s compact circular saw features a 3-⅜-inch blade with a max cutting depth of 1 inch, and the saw station has a built-in miter gauge for making angled cuts. The features don’t stop there; however, Dremel designed this to be a multi-use saw, and I could also make beveled cuts (up to 45 degrees) by attaching two (included) bevel risers to the table.

I tested the saw station by cutting pine boards, hardwood oak flooring planks, laminated wood, and contoured cove trim boards. Dremel designed its portable saw station for beginners, but I also found it ideal for making precise finish carpentry cuts. The saw itself cuts at 5,000 RPM, and I was impressed with the smooth cut edges.

  • Tools and accessories stowed in the case of the Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station
  • Making a straight cut on the Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station
  • Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station Tool and Accessories
  • Bright LED laser guide on the Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station
  • Extended long board holder on the Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station
  • Making a miter cut on the Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station

While cutting on the saw station, I was limited to relatively low-profile boards (about ¾-inch thick), but that didn’t stop me from cutting 2X4 studs. This isn’t a framing saw, but Dremel includes a clamp-on 2X4 cutting guide that allowed me to freehand cut one side of the stud, flip it over, and cut the other side–and the cut edge was perfect! 

Dremel thought of everything a homeowner or DIYer would need when designing the portable saw station. I’ll stick with my DeWalt miter saw for heavy-duty construction projects, but the Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station is perfect for installing trim, cutting vinyl or hardwood flooring, creating custom picture frames, and crafting home decor projects. 

I thoroughly enjoyed testing this innovative compact saw  and recommend it to anyone who wants to make various precision cuts for small-scale projects. 

What We LikeWhat We Don’t Like
Makes straight, miter, and bevel cutsNot designed for heavy-duty construction
Great for finish carpentry
Ideal for trim, flooring, and frames
Produces clean, smooth cut edges

Buy the Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station on:

Dremel Blueprint Multi-Drill: At a Glance

Our rating: 4.8/5

Dremel Blueprint Multi-Drill on white background

Dremel Blueprint Multi-Drill

Multi-Drill Specs
PowerCordless/Battery
Voltage Rating12V
Maximum speedUp to 800 RPM
Included accessoriesBattery, Charger, laser, bubble level, stud finder
ModelDD12V-S1

Buy on Amazon for $99.99

Testing the Dremel Blueprint Multi-Drill

If you’ve ever had to hunt down a cordless drill, a stud finder, and a level—each seemingly hiding in a different corner of your workspace just to hang a new picture—you’re not alone. Simple home improvement projects shouldn’t have to involve a scavenger hunt and Dremel just came up with the perfect solution. 

The Dremel Blueprint Multi-Drill is a drill, a driver, a stud finder, a laser line, and a bubble level—all in one. I had a blast testing this multi-use tool; it’s lightweight (1.14 pounds), compact, and has everything needed to hang shelves and pictures or assemble furniture. 

I tested the Dremel multi-drill by drilling several holes in scrap boards, installing and removing dozens of fasteners, and then I put it to the ultimate test by hanging a new picture in my home. 

  • Dremel Blueprint Multi-Drill and Bit set
  • Drilling with the Dremel Blueprint multi-drill
  • Adjustable clutch on Dremel Blueprint drill
  • Bright LED guide light on the Dremel Blueprint multi-drill
  • Bubble and laser level
  • Dremel Bluepring removable laser level

The 12-volt battery (included) and the laser level charge separately. While I automatically charged the battery as soon as I unboxed it, I spaced out charging the laser, so I had to postpone my picture-hanging for about 30 minutes while I charged it (via USB port). 

The multi-drill generates a max of 1,000 RPM, which is excellent for small-to-moderate DIY tasks. It doesn’t have the torque to build a deck, but that’s not its purpose. I found it more than adequate for around-the-home tasks. 

I used all the features of the multi-drill when hanging my picture. First, I used the studfinder to locate a stud behind the drywall, then I used the drill/driver to drill the hole and insert the screw, and finally, I used the bubble/laser level to ensure the picture frame was level. It worked like a charm. I won’t be storing the Dremel Blueprint multi-drill in my truck tool box–it has a designated spot in my hall closet where I can grab it quickly for home improvement and decor projects. 

What We LikeWhat We Don’t Like
All-in-one designLimited torque–not for heavy-duty projects
Lightweight and portable (1.14 pound)
Compact and easy to store

Buy the Dremel Multi-Drill on:

So, is the Dremel Blueprint saw station or multi-drill right for you?

Both new Dremel tools excelled in my hands-on tests. The Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station is an excellent choice for homeowners who want to tackle small-scale projects, such as cutting trim or installing vinyl flooring or hardwood planks. It makes precise straight, miter, and bevel cuts on low-profile boards (up to about ¾ inches thick). Using its clamp-on stud guide, it can also make clean freehand cuts on 2-by lumber.

It’s a great little saw setup, but it won’t replace a standard table saw or circular saw for heavy-duty construction projects. Still, it’s inclusive, and it’s hard to beat if you’re creating decor or building custom picture frames. I’ve used many power tools, and the portable saw station is hands down my favorite for small projects. It has everything I need in one transformable case. 

The Dremel multi-drill is great for anyone looking for a lightweight tool to handle everyday home tasks, such as hanging pictures, installing shelves, or assembling furniture. It doesn’t have the torque needed to build a fence or deck, but its all-in-one design supplies all the tools you’ll need to find studs, drill, drive,  and level. You can’t ask for more than that in a handy household tool.

Meet the Tester

Glenda Taylor is a contractor, product tester, and writer focusing primarily on construction, DIY tools, and home appliances.

The post Dremel’s New Products Can Replace Your Portable Circular Saw Setup appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-07T14:48:44-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Chainsaw Mills for Cutting Lumber]]>The best chainsaw mills convert rough logs into useful boards and beams right where the tree was felled. See our list of top picks.

The post The Best Chainsaw Mills for Cutting Lumber appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-chainsaw-mills/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-chainsaw-mills/Mon, 06 Jan 2025 10:50:51 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Processing logs using a chainsaw mill is a cost-effective alternative to buying lumber, as store-bought wood is often expensive and inconsistent in quality. A chainsaw mill attachment provides complete control over beam and board sizes as well as close monitoring of quality. Though a portable chainsaw sawmill will typically be made for smaller-diameter trees, it will also come at a much more affordable price than a larger sawmill. 

As useful as they are, chainsaw mills aren’t particularly common tools, so many people don’t understand which features are important. To help you choose the right mill for your needs, we researched the best options on the market and spoke with a woodworker who uses one on a regular basis. Based on our efforts and his insights, we chose the Granberg G778-36 36″ Alaskan MKIV Chainsaw Mill as our top pick for its quality construction, light weight, and ease of use. However, several other versions of these tools are also worth considering. Read on for a list of the seven best chainsaw mills as well as details on which features matter most when selecting one. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: Granberg G778-36 36″ Alaskan MKIV Chainsaw Mill
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Zozen Portable Chainsaw Mill
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST COMPACT: Carmyra 24″ Portable Chainsaw Mill
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST FOR BEGINNERS: Timber Tuff Adjustable Lumber Cutting Guide
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Carmyra 48″ Portable Chainsaw Mill
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. HONORABLE MENTION: Granberg G777 Alaskan Small Log Mill
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. ALSO CONSIDER: XRKJ 36″ Chainsaw Mill
    ↓ Jump to Review
The Best Chainsaw Mills
Photo: Amazon

Product NameBar SizeCutting CapacityWeight
Granberg G778-36 36″ Alaskan MKIV Chainsaw Mill20 to 36 inches½ to 13 inches thick; 32 inches wide20 pounds
Zozen Portable Chainsaw Mill14 to 36 inches½ to 12 inches thick19 pounds
Carmyra 24″ Portable Chainsaw Mill14 to 24 inches½ to 13 inches thick; 18½ inches wide13 pounds
Timber Tuff Adjustable Lumber Cutting GuideAnySee product description below3½ pounds
Carmyra 48″ Portable Chainsaw Mill14 to 48 inches½ to 13 inches thick; 43½ inches wide16½ pounds
Granberg G777 Alaskan Small Log Mill16 to 20 inches½ to 13 inches thick; 18 inches wide10 pounds
XRKJ 36″ Chainsaw Mill 12 to 36 inches½ to 13 inches thick; 32 inches wide16 pounds

Our Top Picks

The following products are some of the best chainsaw mills available. We recommend you read through each model’s specs to find the right size mill then compare what we like and don’t about each to help make your final choice. For more detailed information on how to choose a chainsaw log mill, be sure to check out the shopping considerations near the end of this guide.

Best Overall

Granberg G778-36 36" Alaskan MKIV Chainsaw Mill

 The Best Chainsaw Mills Option: Granberg G778 36-Inch Alaskan MKIV Chainsaw Mill
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • High-quality steel and aluminum construction
  • Widely recognized for accuracy and durability
  • Works for both left- and right-handed users

What We Don’t Like

  • Higher price than similar-size competitors
  • Assembly takes around 30 minutes

Specs

  • Bar size 20 inches to 36 inches
  • Cutting capacity ½ inch to 13 inches thick; 32 inches wide
  • Weight 20 pounds

The Granberg Alaskan MKIV chainsaw mill takes top honors for its build quality, ease of use, and versatile functionality. The sturdy construction combines heavy-duty zinc-plated steel and aircraft-grade aluminum. It takes around 30 minutes to assemble, but once assembled, its clearly marked depth scales make clamping and adjustment fast and easy. At only 20 pounds, it’s portable, too.

The Granberg Alaskan MKIV chainsaw mill is designed to take a maximum 36-inch chainsaw, and the manufacturer recommends using a good chainsaw with a motor capacity of 70 cubic centimeters (cc) or better. It can take smaller chainsaws, but if you’re working with a smaller chainsaw, consider a lower-cost mill, as the Granberg isn’t cheap. Remember also that the bar clamp takes 3 to 4 inches from the cutting capacity, so using a 20-inch bar, for example, restricts the cut to around 16 inches.

Get the Granberg G778 chainsaw mill at Amazon, Walmart, Northern Tool + Equipment, or Acme Tools.

Best Bang for the Buck

Zozen Portable Chainsaw Mill

 The Best Chainsaw Mills Option: Zozen Portable Chainsaw Mill
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Competitive price for an entry-level tool
  • Easy to set up
  • Convenient adjustable handle

What We Don’t Like

  • Confusing instructions
  • An additional cross brace would increase stability

Specs

  • Bar Size 14 inches to 36 inches
  • Cutting capacity ½ inch to 12 inches thick
  • Weight 19 pounds

We chose the Zozen chainsaw mill as our best bang for the buck pick based on its competitive price point, solid construction, ease of use, and portability. It’s made of quality alloy and steel, and the bar is adjustable from 14 to 36 inches. 

Included with the chainsaw mill are four felling wedges that serve to ensure a more precise cut when milling. The adjustable handle is convenient for allowing even pressure while moving through the log. It’s very lightweight at only 19 pounds, and the portable design allows for backyard milling or easy transportation to more remote locations when required. 

Get the Zozen chainsaw mill at Amazon or Sawyer Supply

Best Compact

Carmyra 24" Portable Chainsaw Mill

 The Best Chainsaw Mills Option: Carmyra 24-Inch Portable Chainsaw Mill
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact dimensions ideal for smaller chainsaws
  • Can produce useful 18½-inch-wide boards
  • Great for low-volume users

What We Don’t Like

  • Instructions are poor but videos are available

Specs

  • Bar Size 14 inches to 24 inches
  • Cutting capacity ½ inch to 13 inches thick; 18½ inches wide
  • Weight 13 pounds

The Carmyra portable chainsaw mill uses the same popular and effective design as many competitors. It’s made from a combination of galvanized steel and aluminum, resulting in a good balance between strength and portability. For those who process lumber infrequently or need relatively low lumber volumes, this sawmill is a good tool with a competitive price.

This 24-inch Carmyra model is particularly suitable for those who only need to mill small to medium-size logs. As is common, the clamp reduces the overall cutting width, in this case, by approximately 4½ inches. This results in a maximum cut of little more than 18 inches. While it’s smaller than many competitors, the Carmyra still produces planks that are useful for a wide range of projects. 

Get the Carmyra 24-inch chainsaw mill at Amazon.

Best for Beginners

Timber Tuff Adjustable Lumber Cutting Guide

 The Best Chainsaw Mills Option: Timber Tuff TMW-56 Lumber Cutting Guide
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Heavy-duty steel and powder-coated construction
  • Costs considerably less than competitors
  • Can accept any size chainsaw

What We Don’t Like

  • No preset depth guide
  • Cut takes time to set up; slow operation

Specs

  • Bar Size Any
  • Cutting capacity See description below
  • Weight 3½ pounds

The Timber Tuff is called an adjustable cutting guide rather than a chainsaw mill because it operates slightly differently. The heavy-duty steel guide is designed to run along a piece of store-bought lumber, such as a 2×2, 2×4, or 2×6. The user simply nails or screws the store-bought board to a log, bolts the chainsaw bar to the Timber Tuff, and runs the guide along the board. Though the process is different, the results are similar to those produced by a milling attachment for a chainsaw. 

While setting up each cut takes a little more time and care than other types of chainsaw mills, it is light, simple, effective, and comes at a very low cost. Additionally, its cutting capacity is limited only by the size of the chainsaw used, and its cutting widths are defined by where users position the board for each cut.

Get the Timber Tuff chainsaw mill at Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Target, or Grainger.

Best Heavy-Duty

Carmyra 48" Portable Chainsaw Mill

 The Best Chainsaw Mills Option: Carmyra 48-Inch Chainsaw Mill
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Steel and aluminum construction
  • Designed for heavy-duty milling
  • Competitively priced and capable of high productivity

What We Don’t Like

  • Instructions are poor
  • Won’t fit some small chainsaws

Specs

  • Bar Size 14 inches to 48 inches
  • Cutting capacity ½ inch to 13 inches thick; 43½ inches wide
  • Weight 16½ pounds

Those needing to saw large logs will want to take a closer look at this 48-inch Carmyra chainsaw mill. Even with some width loss due to the clamping mechanism, it can still saw boards up to an impressive 43½ inches wide. Like its smaller counterparts, it also has the versatility to mill thicknesses from just ½ inch up to 13 inches.

The design is popular and well proven. It uses a combination of steel for toughness and durability with aluminum to keep the weight manageable. Despite the heavy-duty nature of this chainsaw mill, it weighs only 16½ pounds. Although rated for chainsaws as small as 14 inches, some bars are too narrow to accommodate the clamp. However, in reality, those with small chainsaws have no need for a portable lumber mill this large.

Get the Carmyra 48-inch chainsaw mill at Amazon.

Honorable Mention

Granberg G777 Alaskan Small Log Mill

 The Best Chainsaw Mills Option: Granberg G777 Alaskan Small Log Mill
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact mill from a quality brand
  • Light weight for milling in the field
  • Improved end brackets are strong and reliable

What We Don’t Like

  • Single-sided design lacks stability
  • First cut impacts subsequent boards

Specs

  • Bar Size 16 inches to 20 inches
  • Cutting capacity ½ inch to 13 inches thick; 18 inches wide
  • Weight 10 pounds

Granberg classifies its G777 as a small-log chainsaw mill. While capacities aren’t equal to the Alaskan MKIV, the G777 is a quality tool that offers versatility in cutting depth. It’s also more compact and lighter than the Alaskan MKIV, making it ideal for field use when more modest log sizes are available.

The G777 tracks across the board’s surface like other horizontal mills, but it’s only supported on one side. As a result, users should take care when setting up the first cut. Subsequent cuts also require focus to maintain accuracy, though most users should acclimate to the tool quickly.quent cuts also require focus to maintain accuracy, though most users should acclimate to the tool quickly.

Get the Granberg G777 chainsaw mill at Amazon, Northern Tool + Equipment, or Acme Tools.

Also Consider

XRKJ 36-Inch Chainsaw Mill

 The Best Chainsaw Mills Option: XRKJ 36-Inch Chainsaw Mill
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact mill from a quality brand
  • Light weight for milling in the field
  • Improved end brackets are strong and reliable

What We Don’t Like

  • Single-sided design lacks stability
  • First cut impacts subsequent boards

Specs

  • Bar Size 16 inches to 20 inches
  • Cutting capacity ½ inch to 13 inches thick; 18 inches wide
  • Weight 10 pounds

Featuring a design similar to the Granberg Alaskan MKIV, the XRKJ is a low-cost horizontal chainsaw mill constructed from quality materials. For the occasional user, it also offers good value for the money. 

Its steel and aluminum construction mean it’s not only strong but also lightweight. Although the minimum bar size is listed as 12 inches, the resulting maximum cut is only around 8 inches. Additionally, chainsaws of that size are unlikely to provide sufficient power, so a 20-inch chainsaw is the smallest practical size. 

Get the XRKJ chainsaw mill at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Chainsaw Mills

As the owner of a large property, I have considerable experience choosing a good chainsaw for milling and other maintenance and improvement tasks. Since I’m also an engineer by profession, choosing the best portable sawmill for a chainsaw plus a lineup of several more top options gave me a chance to use my training. When selecting our list of recommended products, I used the following criteria:

  • Build quality: Chainsaw mills aren’t likely to be treated with a great deal of care, so the materials they’re made from matter. Each model chosen has the strength and durability to withstand a tough working environment.
  • Brand: Many of our choices come from brands that have extended experience in the field and a recognized reputation. However, several well-made tools from lesser-known manufacturers are also on our list.
  • Value: Most chainsaw mills are very affordable, particularly when weighing the potential savings over store-bought lumber. Nevertheless, we were careful to pick models within a range of prices to offer something for every budget.

What to Consider When Choosing a Chainsaw Mill

A chainsaw mill (also called a “chainsaw sawmill” or “Alaskan sawmill”) isn’t a particularly complicated device. However, each chainsaw mill will possess certain key features that differentiate it from others. 

Chainsaw Compatibility

You can consider chainsaw mill compatibility in terms of both power requirements and whether it will fit your chainsaw. As with choosing the best wood chipper to cut branches and twigs into mulch, cutting planks with a chainsaw mill requires a saw with considerable power. While a few cordless chainsaws offer comparable performance for tree felling or log cutting, milling takes a lot of energy and can drain electric batteries quickly. Even if you have one of the best corded electric chainsaws, the amount of power necessary for milling could cause the saw to overheat. That leaves gas-powered chainsaws as the only sensible choice. 

When describing compatibility, many chainsaw mill manufacturers describe their tools as fitting “most types of chainsaws.” However, there will still be restrictions regarding bar length, so a minimum engine displacement (defined in cubic centimeters) will be suggested. 

Bar Capacity and Cutting Depth

Chainsaws are usually described by their bar length: 16 inches, 24 inches, etc. When considering chainsaw mills, bar size has a major impact on the maximum diameter of the logs they can mill and, thus, the width of planks they can produce. (For more on chainsaw bar length, see our guide on how to measure a chainsaw bar.) 

Be aware, however, that the stated dimensions can sometimes be misleading. If the mill clamps the bar end, as many do, it reduces the length available for cutting. While bar size is important for fitting the chainsaw to the mill, users will also want to check the mill’s cut size to determine its actual capacity.

Cutting depth is another key feature, and it depends on the type of chainsaw mill chosen. Some cut with the chainsaw held vertically (often called “edging mills”). These offer unlimited versatility, but repeatable accuracy is more challenging. Other mills cut with the chainsaw mounted horizontally, which can be set to a consistent thickness. Most run from ½ inch to 12 inches, though cuts as thin as ⅕ inch are possible. Some large-capacity models can exceed 15 inches.

Ease of Use

Small chainsaw mills frequently arrive ready to go right out of the box, but larger models generally require some assembly. Chainsaw mills are typically not complicated devices, but the quality of their instructions varies. While most chainsaw mills clamp the chainsaw bar, some require drilling, which entails extra work. It’s probably best to avoid those models, as many options exist that don’t require drilling.

Chainsaw mills fall into two categories: edging mills and horizontal mills. Edging mills must be run on a board mounted to the log, and they’re generally used for squaring up logs for building purposes rather than for cutting multiple planks. Horizontal mills rest on top of the log and cut consistent plank thicknesses. Adjustment is usually straightforward via a couple of bolts.

Portability and Durability

One of the biggest advantages of a chainsaw mill is portability, and these small tools often weigh under 20 pounds. Because they’re so lightweight, users can easily take the mill to the felled tree and work on-site. Jarrod Rodgers, sawyer, woodworker, and owner of Second Life Design, a custom woodworking business based in Rantoul, Illinois, prefers to bring felled trees home and process them there. He says, “The DIY aspect of a chainsaw mill is a big appeal, and I use my chainsaw mill in my driveway in the middle of town.”

Chainsaw mills are usually constructed from a mix of steel and aluminum. Steel offers great strength, so it’s used for the main structural components that hold things together. These pieces are generally also electroplated (usually with zinc, nickel, or chrome) to protect against rust. Since aluminum is much lighter, it’s generally used for guide rails. 

How to Use a Chainsaw Mill

Chainsaw mills are a reasonably simple tool to use, but always follow basic safety precautions. Also, take a couple of important steps when setting up the mill to ensure consistent, quality results.

  • Ensure the log to be cut is stable. Use chocks underneath to prevent any chance of it rolling.
  • Follow general safety rules regarding how to use a chainsaw. Wear substantial footwear, gloves, a face shield, and ear protection. Chainsaw chaps are also a good idea.
  • Check that the chainsaw chain is sharp and use a chainsaw sharpener if necessary. A blunt chain is not simply inefficient—it’s also more likely to bind or jump off the bar.
  • The first cut is key, as it provides the surface for each consecutive cut. When used by itself, the mill rests on uneven bark and trimmed branches, which means making a clean, even cut is almost impossible. To remove that rough surface, some kind of guide is necessary.
  • Edge mills usually run along a length of shop-bought or precut board that’s screwed to the log. Horizontal mills often require you to affix a jig to the log. Some people rig up an ordinary aluminum ladder, but getting it level can be challenging. Purpose-built jigs are available that are much easier to adjust.
  • Once the outer layer is removed, horizontal mills can rest on the now-flat surface. It’s not a complicated process, but you will want to take care when making the initial cut, even if you have a sharp chainsaw milling chain on one of the best chainsaws

FAQs

The sections above offer an in-depth look at the technical aspects of chainsaw mills. However, since many DIYers have never used a chainsaw mill, it’s expected that there may still be some remaining questions that need answers. 

Q. Should I purchase a chainsaw mill or a bandsaw mill?

If you’re looking for an affordable, easily portable tool for sawing a modest number of logs per year, the chainsaw mill is probably the better choice, especially if you already own a suitable chainsaw. A bandsaw mill offers higher productivity and less waste, but most are a lot more expensive. They are more likely to appeal to those who are milling logs commercially.

Q. What’s the best size chainsaw to use with a chainsaw mill?

Each chainsaw mill has a maximum size chainsaw that will fit it. As this is one of those occasions when you can never have too much power, experts recommend using the biggest chainsaw possible within the specifications of the chosen mill.

Q. If I have a smaller bar, can I still use a larger mill?

Often you can, but it depends on the mill. Most chainsaw mills offer a degree of versatility; however, it’s important to check the minimum size. Usually, this is around 14 inches. That said, a chainsaw with a bar that short might not have the necessary power to cut effectively. Also, remember that a smaller bar length restricts the size of logs you can cut.

Q. How big of a chainsaw do I need for an Alaskan mill?

There are numerous models of Alaskan mills, ranging from the smallest, which can take a 12-inch chainsaw, to the largest, which can use a 60-inch chainsaw. It is important not to underestimate your needs. Choose a chainsaw that will comfortably cut the diameter of logs you use regularly. Remember that clamping the chainsaw bar will usually reduce the usable length by 3 or 4 inches.

Q. How long does it take to cut planks with a chainsaw mill?

Chainsaw milling is not a fast process, and how long it takes depends a lot on the log size and material density. Pine, for example, is easier to saw than oak. Knots or twisted grain will have an impact, as will the chain’s sharpness and power. With so many variables, it’s difficult to be precise, though most experts suggest between 10 and 20 minutes per cut as an average.

Q. How much power is necessary for a saw?

When it comes to chainsaw mill work, the more power, the better. This is both for cutting speed and minimizing the stress on the chainsaw motor. Experts suggest a 50cc gas chainsaw as an absolute minimum, though 70cc and above is typically recommended. Additionally, using one of the best chainsaw bar oils will keep the exterior moving parts of the saw operating smoothly. 

Q. What is a ripping chain?

A standard chainsaw chain is designed to cut across the tree trunk for felling or cutting logs for firewood. Effectively, this means you’re cutting across the grain. A ripping chain is designed to cut with the grain along the length of the trunk, so it’s better when using a chainsaw mill.

Q. What are a chainsaw mill’s limitations?

Each chainsaw mill has a maximum depth of cut and maximum width. How the mill clamps the chainsaw blade has an impact, so check the chainsaw mill’s specifications carefully.

The post The Best Chainsaw Mills for Cutting Lumber appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-06T10:50:51-05:00
<![CDATA[This Was the Only Caulking Gun I Could Use One-Handed Comfortably]]>The best caulking gun can make easy work of any caulking project. We recently put our top picks to the test to see how they hold up during use. Check out the reviews here.

The post This Was the Only Caulking Gun I Could Use One-Handed Comfortably appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-caulking-gun/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=102416Mon, 06 Jan 2025 10:09:06 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Caulking guns deliver a continuous bead of caulk to seal joints between two surfaces, such as gaps between window frames and jambs. Most caulking guns today are manual, meaning you squeeze a hand trigger to dispense the sealant. However, powered caulking guns are growing in popularity because all you need to do is guide the tip to create a smooth, continuous bead of caulk.

Choosing the ideal caulking gun will depend on the type of caulk you’re using, as well as the project’s overall scope and budget. To help you decide, we tested eight popular options in real-world applications and contacted an expert to get their insights. Based on our hands-on tests and our expert’s experience, we chose the Newborn 250 Smooth Rod Revolving Frame Caulking Gun as the best overall option. It’s comfortable to grip, easy to use, and offers the smoothest rotation of all tested models. 

We’ve included​​ the rest of our recommendations on the best caulking guns below, as well as useful tips for how to choose the tool that’s right for you. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: Newborn 250 Smooth Rod Revolving Frame Caulking Gun
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Newborn 188 Ratchet Rod Cradle Caulking Gun
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Bates Choice 10:1 Thrust Ratio Caulking Gun
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST GRIP: Newborn Octogun 930-GTD Hex Rod Cradle Caulking GunGun
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR THICK SEALANTS: PC Products Steel Dispensing Caulking Gun
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Chicago Pneumatic CP9885 Series Caulking Gun
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST BATTERY: DeWalt DCE560B 20V Max Adhesive Gun
    ↓ Jump to Review
  8. ALSO CONSIDER: Red Devil 9-Inch Extreme Duty Caulking Gun
    ↓ Jump to Review
The Best Caulking Guns Options
Photo: Tom Scalisi for Bob Vila

Caulking Guns Comparison Chart

Our Top Picks

There’s a lot to consider when choosing the best caulking gun, and the sheer volume of information can feel overwhelming. To help you fill in the gaps, we detail the results of our hands-on tests and each item’s pros and cons below.

Best Overall

Newborn 250 Smooth Rod Revolving Frame Caulking Gun

 The Best Caulking Gun Option: Newborn 250 Smooth Rod Revolving Frame Caulking Gun
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Smooth rotation makes applying caulk and sealant easy
  • Comfortable grip reduces hand fatigue
  • Built-in cutter cuts spouts cleanly and efficiently

What We Don’t Like

  • Rubber coating on just 1 grip instead of 2

Specs

  • Rod type Smooth
  • Thrust ratio 18:1
  • Revolving Yes

During testing, we found applying caulk and sealant using the Newborn 250 easy and smooth. The frame rotates smoothly (certainly the smoothest of all the models), and the hand grips are very comfortable. It also has a revolving frame, making it much easier to caulk around corners. Instead of having to stop and restart, simply rotate the barrel, and the angled tip of the tube rotates to the correct position to continue running a bead. 

The Newborn 250 is built to last with a handle made of zinc alloy to reduce corrosion. The tool features a hefty 18:1 thrust ratio to easily dispense medium-viscosity caulk, including butyl and acrylic. It also has a thumb release for dripless operation, and we really liked the built-in cutter (which most high-thrust caulking guns don’t have). This model does drip a bit, but the release is easy to access and press with one hand. Our only complaint is that just one handle has a rubber coating—coating both handles would be a benefit.

What our tester says: “The frame on this model rotated more smoothly than all the other units we tested, making it incredibly easy to apply caulk and sealant evenly.”—Tom Scalisi, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Newborn 250 caulking gun at Amazon, Ace Hardware, Lowe’s, or Newborn.

Runner-Up

Newborn 188 Ratchet Rod Cradle Caulking Gun

 The Best Caulking Gun Option: Newborn 188 Ratchet Rod Cradle Caulking Gun
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Built-in cutter and puncture tool
  • Sturdy welded construction will stand the test of time
  • Ratchet pressure rod mitigates dripping

What We Don’t Like

  • Tougher to squeeze than other models

Specs

  • Rod type Ratcheting
  • Thrust ratio 6:1
  • Revolving No

For occasional small projects, such as caulking between a shower or bathtub and the wall, check out this nicely priced and super-dependable option from Newborn. The 188 ratchet rod cradle caulking gun has a traditional ratchet rod design and a 6:1 thrust ratio that’s best for dispensing low-viscosity sealant, such as painter’s latex caulk. It comes with a built-in pin for puncturing the seal on the caulk tube and a built-in cutter to nip off the tube’s tip.

During testing, we found quite a few things to like about the Newborn 188. For one, we appreciated the sturdy welded construction, which felt quality despite this option’s reasonable price tag. We also liked the built-in cutter and puncture tool, which made getting to work faster and easier. The one downside we found was that this caulking gun was more difficult to squeeze than others, making it best for small projects.

Get the Newborn 188 caulking gun at Amazon or Lowe’s.

Best Bang for the Buck

Bates Choice 10:1 Thrust Ratio Caulking Gun

 The Best Caulking Gun Option: Bates Choice Caulking Gun
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Affordable price without lacking features
  • True no-drip functionality
  • Offers consistent and reliable performance

What We Don’t Like

  • Grip handles are uncomfortable

Specs

  • Rod type Smooth
  • Thrust ratio 10:1
  • Revolving No

Finding a caulking gun that really offers a no-drip design can be difficult—even more so at a reasonable price point. But this Bates Choice model checks both boxes. This simple caulking gun features a smooth rod that provides even and consistent pressure without dripping. It also has a 10:1 ratio, which is more than most other models at this price. It has a lightweight fixed frame, as well as a built-in cutter and puncture wire. 

Our first impression of the Bates was that it felt rather cheap. It did, however, accomplish something no other caulking gun in the comparison did: It didn’t drip at all. When we considered that alongside its affordable price, the Bates really stood out. We also liked that it had a built-in cutter and a puncture tool under the frame to make getting started easier.

Get the Bates Choice caulking gun at Amazon, Walmart, or Bates Choice.

Best Grip

Newborn Octogun 930-GTD Hex Rod Cradle Caulking Gun

 The Best Caulking Gun Option: Newborn 930-GTD Drip-Free Smooth Hex Rod Caulking Gun
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Comfortable thermoplastic grip prevents hand fatigue
  • Smooth rod is easy to release and adjust
  • Makes an excellent silicone caulking gun

What We Don’t Like

  • No dripless as claimed

Specs

  • Rod type Smooth
  • Thrust ratio 10:1
  • No

Anyone trying to avoid tired hands while caulking and sealing may find this unit from Newborn ideal. It has two rubber overmolded grips, a smooth-pull hand trigger, and a rod that automatically retracts after releasing the trigger to prevent excess caulk from oozing out. It also features a 10:1 thrust ratio and easily dispenses light to light-medium viscosity caulk, making it well suited for latex and silicone. 

This gun has a built-in seal puncturing tool, a cutting tool, and a handy hook for hanging on a ladder rung. We like that we can cut the tips of our caulking tubes and puncture the seal without having to reach for other tools, and this caulking gun’s smooth rod is easy to adjust and release. The one thing we don’t love about this caulking gun is that its so-called “dripless caulk gun technology” is not as no-drip as advertised. It definitely dripped a little for us. 

What our tester says: “This tool’s grip really stood out during testing. It’s extremely comfortable and easy to squeeze, despite this gun not having a tremendous thrust ratio.”—Tom Scalisi, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Newborn 930-GTD caulking gun at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Walmart.

Best for Thick Sealants

PC Products Steel Dispensing Caulking Gun

 The Best Caulking Gun Option: PC Products Steel Dispensing Caulking Gun
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Revolving frame is easy to maneuver in hard-to-reach areas
  • Great for thicker sealant materials and adhesives
  • Puncture wire tucks away in the trigger

What We Don’t Like

  • No tip cutter

Specs

  • Rod type Smooth
  • Thrust ratio 26:1
  • Revolving Yes

With a high thrust ratio of 26:1, the PC Products steel caulking gun is a workhorse that smoothly dispenses thick sealants. Thanks to its high ratio, it also works for caulks, sealants, and adhesives at low temperatures. It features a smooth rod and a thumb release to prevent oozing and waste. It has a revolving frame that makes positioning the tube easy, especially when laying caulk around corners. 

Testing the PC Products steel caulking gun was enjoyable. Despite below-freezing temperatures, it had plenty of thrust for squeezing out sealant, and we liked that the frame revolves. While it does have smart puncture wire storage (it’s spring-loaded behind the trigger), it doesn’t feature a cutter, which could be a downside for some. 

Get the PC Products caulking gun at Amazon,The Home Depot, or Walmart.

Best Heavy-Duty

Chicago Pneumatic CP9885 Series Caulking Gun

 The Best Caulking Gun Option: Chicago Pneumatic CP9885 Mastic Gun
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Drips very little for a professional finish
  • Easy on the hands since everything is done using pressure
  • Creates an even bead; great for awkward areas

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires an air hose

Specs

  • Rod type None
  • Thrust ratio N/A
  • Revolving No

If you have a large caulking project on the horizon, such as caulking windows throughout your house or constructing a full set of cabinets in a workshop, the Chicago Pneumatic caulking gun might be exactly what you need. Instead of offering labor-intensive manual operation, it attaches to an air compressor for efficiency and ease of use.

This caulking gun also doesn’t have a plunger. Instead, it pressurizes the space behind the caulk to push it through the tube, allowing for consistent pressure. It comes with a regulator to adjust the pressure for optimal flow as well.

Admittedly, it took us a little while to dial in this caulking gun’s pressure regulator, which did cause a bit of a mess at first. But, once dialed in, it was wonderful to test. Releasing the trigger immediately drops the pressure behind the tube, and as a result, there’s very little dripping. Also, once we adjusted the regulator, it offered consistent and smooth pressure. In addition to an air compressor, it requires an air compressor hose for operation.

Get the Chicago Pneumatic caulking gun at Amazon or Walmart.

Best Battery

DeWalt DCE560B 20V Max Adhesive Gun

 The Best Caulking Gun Option: DeWalt DCE560B 20V Max* Adhesive Gun
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Uses batteries DeWalt users already have
  • Adjustable speeds allow custom settings
  • Onboard work light illuminates dark work areas
  • Swiveling frame increases accuracy in tight spots

What We Don’t Like

  • A bit expensive and doesn’t come with a battery

Specs

  • Rod type Smooth
  • Thrust ratio N/A
  • Revolving Yes

When it comes to large caulking or adhesive projects, this DeWalt cordless caulking gun might be the tool for the job. This model uses power from DeWalt’s 20-volt battery lineup (not included but commonly owned by many DIYers) to squeeze caulking tubes with consistent, repeatable results. Since you only need to hold down the trigger, it’s comfortable to use for extended periods without hand fatigue.

During testing, the DeWalt caulking gun produced even and consistent results without wearing out our hands. We enjoyed its onboard work light while applying silicone caulk in dark corners, as well as its swiveling frame. It also has six adjustable speeds, allowing you to dial in the correct rate for whatever job you’re working on. While all these features come at a relatively high price, we think anyone applying construction adhesive to floor joists will find this caulking gun pays for itself in a day or two.

Get the DeWalt caulking gun (tool only) at AmazonAce Hardware, Lowe’s, or Walmart.

Also Consider

Red Devil 9-Inch Extreme Duty Caulking Gun

 The Best Caulking Gun Option: Red Devil 3989 Extreme Duty 9-Inch Caulking Gun
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Handle is comfortable yet grippy enough to feel solid
  • Plenty of power to accommodate thicker sealants
  • Quick-release lever, seal puncture tool, and ladder hook

What We Don’t Like

  • Dripped during our tests
  • Frame doesn’t swivel smoothly

Specs

  • Rod type Smooth
  • Thrust ratio 26:1
  • Revolving Yes

With a 26:1 thrust ratio for squeezing thick sealants and caulks out of their tube, Red Devil’s Extreme Duty caulk gun is worth considering for working at low temperatures or with thick adhesives. It features a smooth rod for quick release as well as a swiveling frame for caulking around corners. It also has a comfortable rubber-coated trigger and a built-in seal puncture wire in the handle.

In some areas, the Red Devil was excellent during testing. The rubber grip was comfortable yet grippy, and there was plenty of power for squeezing out caulk or sealant in cold temperatures. Unfortunately, this model is marketed as a dripless caulking gun, but it dripped during testing. Its frame also doesn’t swivel smoothly, but we got used to that and felt the sealant gun deserved a spot on our list for its sturdy build quality and power. 

Get the Red Devil caulking gun at Amazon or Walmart.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Caulking Guns

Testing caulking guns was pretty straightforward: load them up, test their power, see if they drip, and compare the results. But since temperatures were just under freezing when we tested the caulking guns, our efforts really put them through the wringer.

We tested each refillable caulking gun using an acrylic caulk to see how smooth, consistent, and easy they were to work with. We caulked a seam between two boards and then allowed the guns to rest to see how much they’d drip. We took note of features like rods, built-in cutters, puncture wires, and rubber grips. 

We then loaded the caulking guns with cold construction adhesive as well as roofing tar and ran a bead of each down the board. This showed us which guns had the best power and which were difficult to use in those conditions. We also checked for drips, which were considerably fewer than the acrylic due to the adhesive’s viscosity.

What to Consider When Choosing a Caulking Gun

Choosing a caulking gun might seem like a straightforward proposition, but there is actually quite a bit to know about these tools. From the type of rod, power vs. no power, thrust ratio, and more, it’s worth doing a bit of research. The following are some of the most important factors to consider when searching for the best caulking gun. 

Caulking Gun Type 

Repeatedly squeezing a trigger can lead to hand and wrist fatigue, which is why powered caulking guns are becoming more popular. When they first hit the market a few years ago, powered caulking guns were reserved for commercial and industrial projects. Today, DIYers are discovering the benefit of caulking with a gun that automatically dispenses sealant so they can focus on creating a smooth bead. Since an automatic caulking gun doesn’t have a hand trigger, thrust ratio does not apply. Instead, dispensing pressure is regulated via a light squeeze on the finger trigger.

  • Electric caulking guns come with a cord and require access to an electrical outlet. Light pressure on a finger trigger allows users to dispense just the right amount of sealant.
  • Battery-powered caulking guns use rechargeable batteries, which allows users to run a bead of caulk in locations where electricity isn’t available, such as in an under-construction bathroom or shower. Since they generally only store enough power for 2 to 3 hours of use per charge, investing in an extra battery to accommodate large jobs is probably worth it.
  • Pneumatic or air-powered caulking guns are among the most popular powered options for home workshops because they don’t require a battery and are interchangeable with other air-power tools. However, you will need a home air compressor to run one. In addition to the gun’s finger trigger, dispensing pressure can be regulated by adjusting the pressure on an air compressor.
  • Though it sounds like a breakfast tool, a sausage caulking gun is actually designed to hold collapsible foil cylinders of sealant called “sausages.” These caulking guns, which operate in the same manner as others (manual or powered), let users squeeze every last bit of sealant from the sausage, so there’s very little waste.

Rod Type 

Squeezing the hand trigger on a manual caulking gun forces a rod into the back of the tube of interior or exterior caulk, which in turn pushes the caulk out of the tube’s tip. There are two main types of gun rods, and they vary slightly in performance.

  • Ratchet rod: Caulking guns with ratchet rods have serrated rods that “catch” with each hand squeeze. They are usually inexpensive and suitable for light projects. The biggest problem with ratchet rods is that the sealant can keep oozing caulk out until the end of the rod is twisted and pulled back to release the pressure. This oozing can make a mess and lead to wasted sealant.
  • Smooth rod: When applying caulk with a smooth rod caulking gun—often advertised as “dripless”—the user only needs to depress a thumb lever to release pressure on the sealant to stop it from leaving the tube.

Thrust Ratio

Thrust ratio relates to the amount of force generated each time the hand trigger is squeezed. The higher the ratio, the more force is exerted with each squeeze. This is important because different types of sealant are more or less viscid (thick). With thicker sealants, more thrust ratio is required to dispense the sealant. 

Thrust ratios range from 3:1 to 28:1. Guns with lower ratios are suitable for dispensing thin caulk, such as water-based latex caulk, while higher thrust ratios are needed for dispensing more viscous caulk, such as epoxy sealants.

Revolving Frame

Stopping and starting when running a bead of caulk can lead to unsightly lumps and bulges. It’s especially challenging to run a continuous bead around a corner because your hand position and the angle of the gun must change. With a revolving frame, however, you simply rotate the frame (instead of the whole gun) when rounding a corner to caulk without interruption.

FAQs

If your head is spinning with information or unresolved questions, the following answers may clear things up. We also offer more information on whether you can caulk over caulk and top caulking mistakes in separate guides. 

Q. What is the easiest caulking gun to use?

We found the Newborn 250​​ caulking gun the easiest to use during testing. It has plenty of power, a comfortable grip, and a swivel frame. It also drips less than most other models on our list.

Q. Can I use caulk without a caulking gun?

Some manufacturers sell squeeze tubes of caulk, which don’t require a gun and can be great when working above cabinets or in tight spaces. However, without a caulking gun, applying an even and consistent bead can be difficult, so we don’t recommend using squeeze tubs for precision applications.

Q. Are there different sizes of caulking guns?

Caulking guns come in different sizes. A small caulking gun comes in a standard size of 10 ounces. All the caulking guns on this list are 10-ounce models. If you need a large caulk gun for heavy-duty applications, look for a 29-ounce version.

Q. Should you push or pull a caulking gun?

We asked Eduard Mirzoian, CEO of Restorerz, for advice on how to work a caulk gun, and he said, “Always push the trigger. Pulling the trigger doesn’t allow for proper application of pressure, which can lead to inconsistent flow and sloppy work. By pushing the trigger, you maintain control over the caulking process.”

Q. Are expensive caulk guns worth it?

We also asked Mr. Mirzoian this question, and he told us that caulking guns don’t have to be expensive. He said it’s more important to prioritize the viscosity of the caulk you’ll be using and user-friendly features like drip-free performance and adjustable flow control.

Q. How do I keep my caulking gun from dripping?

In addition to choosing a dripless caulking gun, a couple of simple caulking tips and tricks can help keep your gun from dripping. Start by storing caulking tubes upright for several hours or overnight before use. This will give trapped air time to rise, allowing it to escape as soon as you open the tube. Then, after cutting the tip, bang the bottom of the tube several times on a hard surface before placing it in your gun to further release excess air.

Q. How much should I pay for a caulk gun?

The tested and reviewed caulk guns on our list cost between $10 and $200, with most models falling under $50. How much you pay for one will be determined by how often you use it as well as the type of gun you want.

The post This Was the Only Caulking Gun I Could Use One-Handed Comfortably appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-06T10:09:06-05:00
<![CDATA[How to Stick Weld Like a Pro]]>The post How to Stick Weld Like a Pro appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/diy/how-to-stick-weld/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=422847Mon, 30 Dec 2024 09:45:00 -0500DIYSkills & TechniquesToolsWorkshopWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Stick welding, formally known as shielded metal arc welding, is the process of joining two pieces of metal by melting them using an electrical arc at the joint. Unlike other welding methods, stick welding can be performed horizontally, vertically, overhead and in windy weather, making it one of the more versatile welding methods. And since stick welding equipment is relatively compact and lightweight, it’s ideal for the jobsite or for a DIYer’s workshop where space is at a premium. 

Stick welding also uses a simple setup that makes it a relatively easy method for beginner welders, and supplies and equipment are also more affordable with stick welding than with other welding methods. That said, safety is paramount with any type of welding, and stick welding is no exception. We tapped David Crosby, a general contractor and mechanic with more than 30 years of welding experience, for advice on how to stick weld. We’ll also review the equipment it requires, and offer stick welding tips. 

Important Stick Welding Components

A stick welder with various parts labeled.
Photo: Amazon

One of the reasons stick welding is so popular with DIYers is that the equipment it requires is relatively affordable and doesn’t take up much space. Here’s what you’ll need to get started: 

  • Electrode rod: The electrode rod, which is a wire that’s coated with a metal that is usually the same material that you’re welding together, has two purposes. It conducts the electrical current that creates the welding arc responsible for liquifying the metals and fusing them together. It also supplies the metal needed to create the weld.
  • Welding machine: A welding machine for stick welding maintains a constant voltage regardless of the load that the welding machine is drawing, thereby allowing the user to maintain a consistent arc length while working. Most DIY stick welding machines are inverters, which are relatively compact, easy to pick up, and not tough to carry.
  • Electrode rod holder: This device, which resembles a clamp with a handle, holds stick welding rods. Electrode rods are coated with flux, which releases a gas that protects the environment around the weld, preventing it from becoming contaminated by the surrounding air while it hardens.
  • Ground clamp: This electrical cable consists of a clamp that attaches to the work piece and an end that connects to the welding machine, completing the circuit necessary to create a welding arc.
  • Chipping hammer and wire brush: These tools are essential for removing the slag leftover from a weld.   

Three Electrode Rod Types to Know

Unlike TIG and MIG welding, stick welding uses electrode rods to create the heat required for welding. These rods come in a variety of types and sizes to suit different applications and materials. Electrode rods are labeled with four-digit numbers. The first two numbers refer to the tensile strength, which is the amount of weight it can withstand after welding. 

The third number refers to the position in which you can use the rod: horizontal, flat, vertical, or overhead. 

  • Rating of 1 is the most common. It means the rod is rated for any position. 
  • Rating of 2 is for flat and horizontal use.
  • Rating of 3 is for flat use only.  

The fourth number refers to the composition of the flux coating around the rod. A lower number sets more quickly, creating more identifiable weld marks, while a higher number is softer material that creates a flatter and smoother weld. 

Below are three of the most commonly used electrode rod types: 

1. E6010

An E6010 welding rod is notable for creating a deep cutting arc. This makes it ideal for thicker metals or for penetrating metal that’s coated in rust or dirt. An E6010 rod is also one of the harder electrode rods to work with, requiring more experience from the operator to prevent them from digging too deep into the metal. 

2. E6013

A good general purpose electrode, E6013 works in a variety of welding applications. They leave a clean, professional looking weld and are easy to work with. “The E6013 is normally the go-to electrode for beginners and all-around use,” says Crosby. “It works on any polarity in any position, the slag is easy to remove, the penetration is mild, so it’s easier to not blow through thin sections, and it’s easier to learn how to control heat and travel speed.”

3. E7018 

E7018 electrodes are typically the choice of professional welders. They produce a clean arc that limits spattering, allowing the operator to create a strong, smooth bead that requires little post welding clean-up. 

A welder holding up electrode rods for stick welding in the garage.
Photo: Westend61/Westend61 via Getty Images

Important Stick Welding Safety Tips

Given that stick welding can reach temperatures approaching 7,000 degrees Fahrenheit while creating dangerous UV radiation, taking safety precautions and employing good practices when stick welding is crucial. “You’re dealing with very high temperatures, and in most cases, powerful electric currents,” says Crosby. With this in mind, he recommends the following safety precautions: 

  • PPE. Wearing the proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) is crucial. This includes a welding helmet (we suggest an auto darkening hood, like this highly rated option available at Amazon, that’s easier to work with for beginners), a fire-resistant welding apron or jacket, leather boots, a respirator, and welding gloves.
  • Fire extinguisher. Don’t weld near any flammable or combustible materials and keep a fire extinguisher nearby. 
  • Dry surfaces. With stick welding, you’re working with electricity, so be sure to work on dry surfaces and be mindful of the welding leads. “Do not, do not, have your body in between the welding leads,” Crosby says. Doing so puts your body in the pathway for electricity, which can result in electrocution.    

Initial Setup and Calibration

Start by choosing an electrode that suits the types of job and material (see above). Plug in the welding machine and set the amperage based on the electrode type and thickness. Calibration settings are typically on the electrode label. You can also find a stick welding amperage chart online. 

Next, set up the polarity of the welding machine to match the electrode rod. The rod’s polarity will be listed on its box. 

For an AC/DC+ electrode, connect the welding machine’s ground clamp to the negative port on the welding machine and attach the clamp end to the workpiece, then attach the electrode holder to the positive side. FOR AC/DC-, connect the ground clamp to the positive side and the clamp to the negative mount. 

A person learning how to weld in their home workshop using a stick welder.
Photo: DekiArt/E+ via Getty Images

How to Stick Weld 

Stick welding methods all follow the same general guidelines, with some variances depending on the type of joint you’re welding. 

STEP 1: Prep the surface.

One benefit of stick welding is that it eliminates the need to clean rust and dirt off metal before beginning the weld because of the flux coating on the electrodes that it uses. That being said, having a clean starting area is key to establishing an arc, especially for beginners. Crosby recommends using an angle grinder with a flap wheel. You can also use a wire brush to remove any grime or rust from your starting area. The key here is to have both the clamp and rod contacting bare metal. 

STEP 2: Strike an arc.

Attach the electrode holder to the end of the rod. Make sure the clamp only contacts bare metal and not the flux to ensure a clean connection. 

Check the end of the rod and make sure the tip is not coated over with flux. Touch the end of the electrode to the workpiece in a quick motion that’s similar to striking a match, then pull it slightly away from the surface. This will create a spark that ionizes the air, allowing you to establish a welding arc. “It should sound just like eggs frying in bacon grease when you have it right,” Crosby says.

If you don’t pull the tip off the metal fast enough, the electrode may stick to the metal, in which case you’ll need to make a quick twisting motion to release it. If you pull the tip too far from the surface of the workpiece, you’ll lose the arc and need to start over again. 

Striking an arc is perhaps the most challenging part of stick welding for beginners. Crosby says the best way to become proficient is through practice. “It doesn’t matter if you didn’t finish high school or just completed your post-doc work, it might take some time and practice to acquire that skill,” he says. “Get some scrap steel, clean it, and burn some rod.”

STEP 3: Start the weld.

Hold the rod so that it’s at a 10- to 15-degree angle from the workpiece and drag the rod along the weld line, moving in a straight line. Don’t push the rod along the weld, as doing so could strap slag in the weld pool, contaminating the weld. 

STEP 4: Maintain even distance and speed.

To get a good weld, you’ll also want to maintain a consistent arc, which requires you to maintain  a distance from the material that’s no greater than the diameter of the rod. This can be a challenge given that the rod will shorten as it melts. Use your off-hand to help prop up and steady the dominant hand that’s holding the rod in order to maintain proper control and distance.  

Speed is also key. Go too slow and you’ll leave a wide weld or even overheat the material and melt completely through it. Move too fast and you won’t penetrate deeply enough into the material to create a strong connection. Your goal is to produce a weld that’s about twice the width of the diameter of the rod. 

Practice making welding lines over a piece of scrap material to get a feel for what travel speed produces the proper weld width before moving forward with your weld. 

STEP 5: Clean the weld. 

Once the weld is complete, there’s likely to be some slag left behind. Clean up the weld by removing the excess bits of slag with the chipping hammer and wire brush. 

A person using a stick welder to weld metal parts together in a home workshop.
Photo: Navinpeep/Moment via Getty Images

Stick Weld Joint Types

While experts recommend holding the welding rod at a 10- to 15-degree angle that points forward, the angle at which you hold the rod in relation to the workpiece will vary depending on the type of weld

Butt Joint

A butt joint is when two pieces of material are butted up against each other. When making a butt weld, the electrode should be positioned so that it’s at a 90-degree angle in relation to the workpieces.  

T-Joint

A T-joint weld is when you’re joining two materials to form a T-shaped joint. When executing a T-weld, point the electrode so that it’s at a 45-degree angle in relation to both pieces. 

Lap Weld

A lap weld is when you join two pieces of metal that are overlapping each other. As with a T-joint weld, you’ll want to hold the electrode so that it’s at a 45-degree angle to the work pieces when executing the weld. 

Final Thoughts

Stick welding is a simple and affordable method for welding, which is why it’s such a popular option for beginners. However, there’s an art to learning how to weld well. Your first efforts at stick welding are likely to result in choppy weld lines that vary from thick to thin. Don’t get frustrated. As with most things, practice makes perfect. “Read everything you can find on the subject, practice, practice, practice, and be safe,” Crosby says.

The post How to Stick Weld Like a Pro appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2024-12-30T09:45:00-05:00
<![CDATA[After Researching 20+ Rolling Tool Bags, We Tested Our Favorites and Our Top Picks is a Game Changer]]>The best rolling tool bags can help you easily transport your tools and save your back. Find out more in this buyer's guide and see the top picks.

The post After Researching 20+ Rolling Tool Bags, We Tested Our Favorites and Our Top Picks is a Game Changer appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-rolling-tool-bag/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=155042Tue, 24 Dec 2024 09:48:39 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Carrying around a heavy toolbox might have been a badge of honor in generations past, but it can be taxing on the back and affect workflow. While rolling tool boxes are also great, they can be heavy and cumbersome, especially when filled with heavy-duty tools. That’s where a rolling tool bag comes in. Rolling tool bags feature ample capacities, organized pockets, handles, and wheels for an optimal blend of portability and organization.

We’re big fans of making work (and projects) easier, so we researched the top rolling tool bags on the market and identified five bestsellers to test. We loaded them with tools and then pulled them over grass, concrete, and gravel. And we found a favorite! The ToughBilt Rolling Tool Bag came in at the top of the list thanks to its large wheels, telescoping handle, and a neat little addition that keeps the bag open when using the tools. Keep reading to learn how you can benefit from one of these functional bags and how the following models earned a spot on our lineup of the best rolling tool bags.

  1. BEST OVERALL: ToughBuilt 18-inch Rolling Zippered Tool Bag
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Kobalt 16-Inch Rolling Tool Bag
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST SET: Husky 18-Inch Rolling Tool Bag With Two Bags
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST ORGANIZATION: DeWalt Zippered Rolling Tool Bag
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: CAT 600-D Polyester Rolling Tote Bag
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST DUFFEL: Makita 831269-3 Large LXT Tool Bag
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST CAPACITY: Klein Tools 55452RTB Tool Bag
    ↓ Jump to Review
ToughBilt Tool Bag close-up
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

Our Top Picks

Choosing a great rolling tool bag isn’t complicated. We’ve done all the testing on how they hold up and perform. In addition to the five we personally tested, we’ve included a couple more that we think are good enough to feature on this list.  seem so complicated. This streamlined list consists of some of the best rolling tool bags on the market, including a great option that I had the chance to test myself.

Best Overall

ToughBuilt 18-inch Rolling Zippered Tool Bag

 The Best Rolling Tool Bags Option: ToughBuilt 18-inch Rolling Zippered Tool Bag
Photo: Lowes

What We Like

  • Ample storage space
  • Straps hold compartment open
  • Good build quality
  • Large wheels for rolling

What We Don’t Like

  • Some compartments are pretty small
  • Velcro-type straps may wear over time

Specs

  • Size 18 by 14.5 by 19.5 inches
  • Weight 19.91 pounds
  • Number of compartments 22

Our Ratings: Organization 5/5; Ease of Use 4.75/5; Durability 4.75/5; Value 4.75/5

The ToughBilt rolling tool bag has so much going for it, and its build quality is so high, that it easily took the top spot in our lineup. It offers 22 storage compartments that are well-distributed around the inside and outside of the bag, and it features a big center compartment for storing larger items like a couple of circular saws or reciprocating saws. 

Our favorite feature on this bag was the large opening and velcro-type straps on the backside that kept it open while we were working. In many cases, the top of a tool bag can sag and block access to the content inside. But with the straps, this bag stayed fully open, and we could take tools out and put them back in as we worked.

The telescoping handle is easy to use and extends smoothly by pressing the button on the top. We pulled the ToughBilt tool bag over concrete, grass, and gravel, and it rolled smoothly on all three, thanks to its large wheels. This is a great tool bag for DIYers and pros. 

What our tester says: “The straps that hold the top of the ToughBuilt bag open are game changers. I love how they keep the bag wide open so I can reach in and grab a tool without dealing with a collapsed opening.”  —Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the ToughBilt rolling tool bag at Lowes

Best Bang For The Buck

Kobalt 16-Inch Rolling Tool Bag

 The Best Rolling Tool Bags Option: Kobalt 16-Inch Rolling Tool Bag
Photo: Lowes

What We Like

  • 16 storage pockets plus 7 loops
  • Stabilizer bar prevents inadvertent tipping or rolling
  • Smooth telescoping handle
  • Durable construction

What We Don’t Like

  • Smaller wheels limit rolling performance

Specs

  • Size 10.83 by 14.17 by 16 inches
  • Weight Not listed
  • Number of compartments 16

Our Ratings: Organization 4.5/5; Ease of Use 4.5/5; Durability 4.5/5; Value 4.75/5

A high-quality rolling tool bag doesn’t have to break the bank. The Kobalt 16-inch rolling tool bag performed well in our hands-on tests and, best of all, it’s available at an affordable price point. The Kobalt bag offers 16 individual storage spaces: ten on the outside and six inside the large compartment. In addition, it has seven elastic loops at the top for holding smaller items, such as screwdrivers. 

The bag comes with two wheels that roll very smoothly on concrete but don’t fare quite as well on gravel. We felt Kobalt could improve the rolling feature by including larger wheels. But we really liked the stabilizer stand on the bottom of the bag, which kept it from inadvertently moving once we set it where we wanted it. 

The telescoping handle was great. All we had to do was push the button on the top of the handle to raise it or lower it, and it was very sturdy. The seams on the pockets are double-stitched and well-sewn. We think this would be a good choice for an electrical tool bag or for an HVAC technician who wants to carry several small tools on the outside and perhaps larger diagnostic tools in the main bag. 

Get the Kobalt rolling tool bag at Lowe’s

Best Set

Husky 18-Inch Rolling Tool Bag With Two Bags

 The Best Rolling Tool Bags Option: Husky 18-Inch Rolling Tool Bag With Two Bags
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Three bags in the set
  • Wide-mouth opening on rolling bag
  • Durable fabric and construction
  • Plenty of storage spaces

What We Don’t Like

  • Smaller wheels limit rolling performance

Specs

  • Size 18 x 17 x 9 inches
  • Weight 11.85 pounds
  • Number of compartments 18 main bag, 14 middle bag, 4 small bag

Our Ratings: Organization 4/5; Ease of Use 4.25/5; Durability 4.5/5; Value 4.75/5

Husky, The Home Depot’s house brand, provides lots of versatile storage with its 3-piece rolling tool bag set. The bags are made from rugged polyester fabric. The large, wheeled bag has 18 compartments, the medium-sized bag has 14, and the small bag has four. 

The large bag’s wide mouth offered easy access to the interior when it was completely unzipped and folded open. However, it relies on simple reinforced fabric to stay open, so we wouldn’t be surprised to see some sagging over time. 

The set offers three portable tool bags for storing all types of tools. We packed the main bag with large power tools and pulled it around. It rolled well on flat concrete but not quite as well on grass or gravel, which we felt was due to its smaller wheels. The telescoping handles moved smoothly and easily, and the smaller bags rested securely against the handle. This set would be a good choice for someone who wants to keep their tools separate by type. 

Get the Husky 3-piece rolling tool bag set at The Home Depot.

Best Organisation

DeWalt Zippered Rolling Tool Bag

Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Quality materials, double-stitched seams
  • Molded plastic base for water protection
  • Wide-mouth opening

What We Don’t Like

  • No protective flap on outside pockets

Specs

  • Size 18.25 x 19.25 x 12.125 inches
  • Weight 8.84 pounds
  • Number of compartments 28

Our Ratings: Organization 5/5; Ease of Use 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 5/5

The DeWalt rolling tool bag is made from durable materials and has 28 storage spaces. The plastic-molded bottom plate prevents moisture from seeping into the bag if it is set on wet grass. 

When zippered shut, the main bag provides some rain protection, but most of the outside pockets don’t have covers, so the tools in those pockets are not protected from the elements. We did like the two zippered pockets on the exterior, which we felt would be good for holding our phones, but we can’t really call this a waterproof tool bag because so many of the pockets are open.

That said, it’s a very well-made rolling bag—worthy of the name DeWalt. The wheels are large enough that we were able to pull the bag, fully loaded, over grass and gravel as well as concrete. The telescoping handle on this one is beefier than the others we tested, which we felt made it especially suitable for someone who will be storing heavy tools. 

Get the DeWalt rolling tool bag at Amazon,Lowe’s,or Ace Hardware.

Best Heavy-Duty

CAT 600-D Polyester Rolling Tote Bag

 The Best Rolling Tool Bags Option: CAT 600-D Polyester Rolling Tote Bag
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Quality fabric, reinforced stitching
  • Wide-mouth designs stay open
  • Comfortable ergonomic handle
  • 16 storage spaces

What We Don’t Like

  • Doesn’t roll smoothly on gravel
  • May be too small for large tool sets

Specs

  • Size 17 by 18 by 10 inches
  • Weight 2.78 pounds
  • Number of compartments 16

Our Ratings: Organization 4/5; Ease of Use 4.5/5; Durability 4.75/5; Value 4.25/5

The CAT (short for Caterpillar) rolling tool bag wasn’t the largest model we tested, but it’s well-made and has 10 storage pockets inside the main compartment and six on the outside. The fabric is thick, and the reinforced stitching is strong. 

It comes with two wheels that may feel a bit small when pulling the bag over gravel and grass, but it rolled nicely over our sidewalks and driveway. We really like the wide-open mouth that keeps the sides straight for easy access to tools. 

The CAT tool bag’s ergonomic handle was very comfortable. We found it easy to pull the bag around without developing any hand fatigue, which is a big plus for anyone who needs to transport their tools over some distance. We liked the quality of the construction and think it will last for years. 

Get the CAT rolling tool bag at The Home Depot

More Great Options

While we didn’t test the next two tool bags, they were on our short list of picks, and they’re both highly rated by buyers. If you haven’t yet found a rolling tool bag that suits your needs, consider one of these.

Best Duffel

Makita 831269-3 Large LXT Tool Bag

 The Best Rolling Tool Bag Option: Makita 831269-3 Large LXT Tool Bag
Photo: Amazon

What We Don’t Like

  • Large enough to transport several power tools
  • Sturdy fabric and build quality
  • Comes with carry strap

What We Don’t Like

  • Doesn’t offer a wide-mouth opening

Specs

  • Size 27 x 15 x 5 inches
  • Weight 7.19 pounds
  • Number of compartments One

If there’s one thing we’ve figured out over the years, it’s that carrying an armful of power tool cases back and forth to a project is a hassle. Makita’s Large LXT Tool Bag tackles the job head-on, carrying up to six hard cases of the company’s 18V tool lineup. With the built-in wheels and telescoping handle, it takes just one hand to wheel the bag back and forth.

While the massive interior holds a bunch of power tools, there are several exterior pockets with zippers and hook-and-loop closures for hand tools, batteries, or other items. The Makita also comes with an adjustable shoulder strap for carrying up stairs or over rougher terrain. We like the ability to roll the Makita bag when convenient and then use it as a shoulder tool bag if we need to climb with it. 

Get the Makita Large LXT Tool Bag at Amazon.

Best Capacity

Klein Tools 55452RTB Tool Bag

 The Best Rolling Tool Bag Option: Klein Tools 55452RTB Tool Bag
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Capable of holding up to 200 pounds
  • Large organized tool bag
  • 24 interior and exterior storage compartments
  • Orange interior makes tools easy to see
  • Large wheels for rolling over rough terrain

What We Don’t Like

  • No shoulder strap

Specs

  • Size 19 by 14 by 12.5 inches
  • Weight 19 pounds
  • Number of compartments 24

Any tradesperson looking for an oversized rolling tool transport option should consider this tool bag from Klein Tools. We’re fans of its substantial 200-pound weight capacity, which easily accommodates heavy hand tools, parts, hardware, and power tools. The wide-mouthed, metal-reinforced opening allows for easy access to its interior—which features a contrasting orange color, making it that much easier to identify the right tool. 

Measuring 19 inches across, 14 inches tall, and 12.5 inches deep, this bag includes 24 pockets for plenty of storage, with a fully zippered front flap that offers access to several smaller slots. The 55452RTB also features heavy-duty 6-inch wheels for rolling across rough terrain and a telescoping handle that offers plenty of leverage and control when hauling up to 200 pounds of gear. We think this model is just right for the pro or DIYer with lots of power tools. 

Get the Klein Tools Tool Bag at Amazon.

Jump To Our Top Picks

Kobalt rolling tool bag close-up set on a table in a workshop
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

How We Chose and Tested the Best Rolling Tool Bags

With plenty of rolling tool bags to choose from, we first considered brand reputation, longevity, and average customer satisfaction rates. Then, we looked at the types of rolling tool bags and their intended use. To find the best of each type of tool bag, we evaluated the quality of the materials, storage compartments, size and weight, capacity, and portability. Then we narrowed our selection down to the top five for hands-on testing.

Our testing process was straightforward—we loaded up the rolling tool bags with tools and accessories and then we pulled them around on different types of terrain to see how well they rolled. We extended their telescoping handles and zipped and unzipped their zippers dozens of times. If the tool bag was advertised as being water-resistant, we poured water on its exterior to see if it would soak through. 

We awarded points based on a rubric—the better a tool bag performed on a test or assessment, the higher the points. After testing, we averaged the points to determine our top pick and to categorize the others. 

Testing Stats
Products tested 5
Time spent testing 2 weeks
Tests performed4
Price range$70 to $200 

What to Consider When Choosing a Rolling Tool Bag

Husky stackable rolling tool bags close-up
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

When shopping for the best rolling tool bag, there are a few things that should be kept in mind to make the most informed decision. The following is a list of some of those considerations, from the type of tool bag to the size and weight. 

Intended Use

The way you intend to use a rolling tool bag can help determine which model is right for you. If you need to transport your tools over some distance, such as from a work vehicle to the job site, larger wheels that can manage rough surfaces will be best. If you’re simply carrying a bunch of smaller hand tools, a compact tote should do the trick.

Your intended use and the organization of the bag are also worth considering. If you’re looking to carry some power drills and smaller saws, you’ll want a bag with a large center pocket, unobstructed by extra pockets or pouches. If you carry a lot of hardware and parts, you might prefer something that can accommodate a few plastic organizers. Be sure to pick a bag that will work for your specific needs. 

Type

There are a few types of rolling tool bags, and they each differ a bit in their design. The following points will help you decide which bag will work best for you.

  • Rolling tool bags: Rolling tool bags are typically just like regular tool bags but with an extendable handle and wheels. They have zippered closures, several pockets, and plenty of organization.
  • Rolling tool totes: Featuring a more open design, rolling tool totes allow users to reach in and grab a tool quickly. Many have rigid handles in the center. Some have zippered closures, but they’re mainly wide-open. 
  • Rolling tool duffels: When it comes to maximizing storage, rolling tool duffels are the way to go. These bags are long and offer plenty of interior storage. The difference between these bags and a traditional travel duffel is that most tool duffels can stand on their own, allowing the user to take advantage of vertical storage.

Material 

Unlike heavy tool boxes made from steel or rigid rolling totes made from heavy-duty plastic polymers, the best rolling tool bags tend to utilize durable canvas or nylon. This material makes these bags lightweight and flexible and even collapsible for storage. Collapsibility can be a big plus in a work truck or smaller garage shop.

Many rolling tool bags also feature heavy-duty hook-and-loop closures and tough zippers. Choosing a product from a well-established brand should ensure that whatever additional materials used are durable and high-quality. Some of the best brands use Velcro brand hook-and-loop as well as YKK zippers.

Size and Weight

Rolling tool bags aren’t run-of-the-mill rolling luggage. Because they have to hold lots of heavy, pointy tools rather than a weekend’s worth of clothing, they tend to incorporate thick and durable materials to do the job without weighing too much. Many of these bags can get the job done while weighing under 10 pounds, with heavier-duty models sometimes tipping the scales at closer to 20 pounds. In addition, you might want to use a small, roll up tool bag for tiny items to keep them from dropping to the bottom of the compartment of a larger bag. 

Also, you’ll want to look for a bag that’s large enough to handle the things you need to transport without being cumbersome. Large bags can be as wide and deep as 20 inches, with duffels being as long as 30 to 36 inches. If you need a more compact bag, look for one around 16 inches wide and 12 inches deep.

Weight Capacity

Plainly put, tools are heavy and you need a heavy duty tool bag to tote them. The more you load into a bag, the more stress you’ll be putting on the closures, seams, and wheels. Finding a durable bag with a decent weight capacity is important. 

Some large rolling tool bags can handle up to 250 pounds, allowing users to carry power tools and heavier hand tools like wrenches, ratchets, and sockets, as well as hardware and parts. Such heavy loads can put a lot of pressure on the wheels, but these bags are designed to handle the stress. 

With that said, not every bag has to carry 200 pounds. Most bags are designed to easily handle the weight of their loaded pockets. It’s when users place additional weight on top of the bag that they might encounter some structural or performance issues.

Storage Compartments

CAT rolling tool bag close-up set on a table n a workshop
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

One of the greatest benefits of rolling tool bags is their organization. Adding compartments and trays to a metal tool chest would make it very heavy. With a nylon bag, pockets and compartments can be created using the fabric itself. Manufacturers load these bags with pockets, dividers, zippered closures, and other features to increase their storage capacity.

Many of the best rolling tool bags feature zippered compartments with large flaps that offer access to neatly stored screwdrivers, testing instruments, and writing tools. Other compartments might include a large open center pocket, hook-and-loop flaps on the side for batteries, and more. Be sure to keep your specific tool set and gear in mind when comparing storage compartments between bags.

Portability 

The best rolling tool bags excel when it comes to portability. They can roll across parking lots, large commercial buildings, or just from the workbench to the front fender of a project car. 

By and large, the two most important factors when considering portability are the handles and wheels. Large, solid wheels and a sturdy telescoping handle will make it easy to transport a heavy load of tools from one place to another. Additionally, if you have to lift and lower the bag to and from a workbench or truck bed, it should include a sturdy set of dedicated handles to grab on to.

Additional Features 

When it comes to additional features, rolling tool bags are tough to beat. These bags come with bonuses like LED lights, roll-up flaps, large pockets, and even attachments for securing belt-hook-equipped tools for easy transport. Some also come with shoulder straps to make climbing stairs easier.

One of the most useful features that many rolling tool bags offer is an open top tool bag design. This allows users to place large tools inside without having to awkwardly maneuver them through a tight, half-opened zipper. These openings also give the user a better view of what’s inside, making it easier to quickly identify and retrieve a needed tool and thereby increasing job efficiency.

FAQs  

We covered many of the most important points about rolling tool bags above, but you still may be wondering how they work or which type of bag might best serve your needs. Here, we answer some of the most commonly asked questions about rolling tool bags to help you make a final decision.nce. Spot cleaning now and then with water and a bit of laundry detergent is a good idea. Also, a quick spray of lubricant on the wheels and telescoping handles will ensure they don’t rust and become difficult to use.

Q. Can a rolling tool bag hold a laptop?

While they can certainly hold a laptop, rolling tool bags are unlikely to have padded pockets or a compartment designed to house delicate electronics. Tool bag backpacks may better serve this need.

Q. How do I organize my tool bag? 

In general, you can organize a tool bag just as you would organize a tool box.
– Place power tools and larger hand tools, like hammers and wrenches, in the center compartment.
– Place smaller hand tools in the slots lining the interior of the bag. It’s best to put the most used tools here as these slots are the most accessible.
– For small, infrequently used hand tools, the zippered or hook-and-loop pockets on the outside of the bag are ideal.
Customizable plastic trays are excellent for organizing hardware and small parts.

Q. How do I maintain my rolling tool bag?

While not as sturdy as portable tool boxes, rolling tool bags are robust and require very little maintenance. Spot cleaning now and then with water and a bit of laundry detergent is a good idea. Also, a quick spray of lubricant on the wheels and telescoping handles will ensure they don’t rust or become difficult to use.

Q. How often should I replace my tool bag?

That will depend on the wear and tear. Some tool bags are subjected to more daily abuse than others. Consider replacing the bag if it develops significant rips, the closures fail, or it sags and loses its structural integrity.

Q. Can you wash a tool bag?

Yes, but not in a clothes washer. For spot cleaning, use a damp cloth and mild soap. For deeper cleaning, soak the bag in warm, soapy water, hand scrub spots with a brush, and hang it to dry. However, don’t submerge tool bags with metal bases, or the metal may rust.

Q. What should I carry in my tool bag?

That depends on the type of work you do. In general, popular items to carry include measuring and cutting tools, wrenches, bits, pliers, screwdrivers, and other hand tools in addition to the specialty tools needed for a particular job.

Meet the Tester

Glenda Taylor is a contractor, product tester, and writer focusing primarily on construction, DIY tools, and tool organization solutions.

Additional research provided by Tom Scalisi.

The post After Researching 20+ Rolling Tool Bags, We Tested Our Favorites and Our Top Picks is a Game Changer appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2024-12-24T09:48:39-05:00